GD350-19 Series VFD Manual

Goodrive350-19 series VFD Change history
No. Change description Version Release date
1. First release V1.0 March 2020

Goodrive350-19 series VFD Preface
Preface
Thank you for choosing Goodrive350-19 series variable-frequency drives (VFDs) for hoisting.
Goodrive350-19 series VFDs are the new generation of VFDs that INVT develops for hoisting
machinery by using advanced control technologies based on more than ten-year accumulative
hoisting-industry experience. The VFDs achieve excellent torque performance by integrating various
special functions, including brake control, zero servo, quick stop, master/slave control, switchover
between three sets of motor parameters, pre-magnetizing, light-load speed acceleration, rope
detection, and travel limit, to ensure the safety, reliability, and high efficiency of the machinery. The
VFDs can be widely used to drive the mechanisms such as about lifting, tilting, luffing, running,
slewing, and grabbing in hoisting machinery.
In order to meet diversified customer demands, Goodrive350-19 series VFDs are compatible with
abundant extension cards including hoisting process cards, PG cards, communication cards, and I/O
extension cards to achieve various functions as needed. Each VFD can be configured with up to three
extension cards.
PG cards support common encoders such as incremental encoders, resolver-type encoders, and
sine-cosine encoders, but also support pulse reference and frequency-division output. PG cards
improve EMC performance for the use of digital filter technology and thus realize stable receiving of
encoder signal over long distance. PG cards also have the encoder disconnection detection function,
which relieves the impact of system faults.
Goodrive350-19 series VFDs support mainstream bus and control automation communication modes,
including Modbus, CANopen, Profibus-DP, Profinet, and EtherCAT, and thus can be seamlessly
interconnected with various hoist control systems. The VFDs can be connected to the internet with
wireless communication cards, allowing you to monitor VFD status on mobile APP anytime anywhere.
Goodrive350-19 series VFDs use high power density design. The VFDs in some power ranges carry
built-in DC reactors and braking units, saving installation space. The VFDs can satisfy the low noise
and low electromagnetic interference requirements for the overall EMC design. In addition, the VFDs
can withstand challenging grid, temperature, humidity, and dust conditions, greatly enhancing product
reliability.
This operation manual instructs you how to install, wire, set parameters for, diagnose and remove
faults for, and maintain Goodrive350-19 series VFDs, and also lists related precautions. Before
installing a Goodrive350-19 VFD, read through this manual carefully to ensure the proper installation
and running with the excellent performance and powerful functions into full play.
If the product is ultimately used for military affairs or manufacture of weapons, it will be listed on the
export control formulated by the Foreign Trade Law of the People's Republic of China. Rigorous
review and necessary export formalities are needed when the product is exported.
INVT reserves the right to update the manual information without prior notice.
i
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Contents
Contents
Preface ............................................................................................................................................ i
Contents ......................................................................................................................................... ii
1 Safety precautions .................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 What this chapter contains .................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Safety definition .................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Warning symbols................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 Safety guidelines ................................................................................................................. 2
2 Quick startup........................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Unpacking inspection .......................................................................................................... 5
2.3 Checking before use ........................................................................................................... 5
2.4 Environment checking ......................................................................................................... 5
2.5 Checking after installation ................................................................................................... 6
2.6 Basic commissioning........................................................................................................... 6
3 Product overview .................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Basic principle ..................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Product specifications ......................................................................................................... 9
3.4 Product nameplate ............................................................................................................ 15
3.5 Model designation code .................................................................................................... 15
3.6 Product ratings .................................................................................................................. 16
3.7 Structural diagram ............................................................................................................. 18
4 Installing ................................................................................................................................ 19
4.1 What this chapter contains ................................................................................................ 19
4.2 Mechanical installation ...................................................................................................... 19
4.3 Main circuit standard wiring ............................................................................................... 25
4.4 Standard wiring of control circuit ........................................................................................ 32
4.5 Wiring protection ............................................................................................................... 37
5 Commissioning ..................................................................................................................... 39
5.1 Commissioning lifting in open-loop vector control .............................................................. 39
5.2 Commissioning lifting in closed-loop vector control ............................................................ 43
5.3 Commissioning horizontal moving ..................................................................................... 47
5.4 Commissioning tower crane rotating .................................................................................. 49
5.5 Commissioning the conical motor function ......................................................................... 51
5.6 Commissioning lifting in space voltage vector control......................................................... 53
5.7 Commissioning winching in closed-loop vector control (applicable to lifting in mineral wells
and winches) .......................................................................................................................... 56
5.8 Commissioning winching in open-loop vector control (applicable to lifting in mineral wells and
ii
winches) ................................................................................................................................. 61
5.9 Commissioning the brake function ..................................................................................... 65
5.10 Commissioning the master/slave function ........................................................................ 76
5.11 Motor and macro switchover ............................................................................................ 84
5.12 Measuring heights ........................................................................................................... 93
6 Operating ............................................................................................................................ 104
6.1 What this chapter contains .............................................................................................. 104
6.2 Keypad ........................................................................................................................... 104
6.3 Keypad display................................................................................................................ 106
6.4 Operations on keypad ..................................................................................................... 107
6.5 Basic operation instruction .............................................................................................. 109
7 Function parameter list....................................................................................................... 201
7.2 Function parameter list .................................................................................................... 201
8 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................. 388
8.2 Indications of alarms and faults ....................................................................................... 388
8.3 Fault reset....................................................................................................................... 388
8.4 Fault history .................................................................................................................... 388
8.5 VFD faults and solutions ................................................................................................. 388
8.6 Analysis on common faults .............................................................................................. 402
8.7 Countermeasures on common interference ..................................................................... 409
9 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 414
9.2 Periodical inspection ....................................................................................................... 414
9.3 Cooling fan...................................................................................................................... 417
9.4 Capacitor ........................................................................................................................ 418
9.5 Power cable .................................................................................................................... 419
10 Communication protocols .................................................................................................. 420
10.1 What this chapter contains ............................................................................................ 420
10.2 MODBUS protocol introduction...................................................................................... 420
10.3 Application of Modbus ................................................................................................... 420
10.4 RTU command code and communication data ............................................................... 427
10.5 Common communication faults...................................................................................... 445
Appendix A Extension cards ..................................................................................................... 446
A.1 Model description ........................................................................................................... 446
A.2 Dimensions and installation ............................................................................................ 452
A.3 Wiring ............................................................................................................................. 454
A.4 Function description of I/O extension card 1 (EC-IO501-00) ............................................ 455
A.5 Function description of communication cards .................................................................. 457
iii
A.6 Function description of PG extension cards .................................................................... 467

Appendix B Technical data ........................................................................................................ 486
B.1 What this chapter contains .............................................................................................. 486
B.2 Derated application ......................................................................................................... 486
B.3 Grid specifications .......................................................................................................... 487
B.4 Motor connection data .................................................................................................... 487
B.5 Application standards ...................................................................................................... 488
B.6 EMC regulations ............................................................................................................. 489
Appendix C Dimensional drawings ........................................................................................... 491
C.1 What this chapter contains .............................................................................................. 491
C.2 LED keypad.................................................................................................................... 491
C.3 LCD keypad ................................................................................................................... 492
C.4 VFD structure ................................................................................................................. 493
C.5 AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%) VFD dimensions ....................................................... 494
C.6 AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%) VFD dimensions ....................................................... 501
Appendix D Optional peripheral accessories ........................................................................... 505
D.1 What this chapter contains.............................................................................................. 505
D.2 Wiring of peripheral accessories ..................................................................................... 505
D.3 LCD keypad ................................................................................................................... 507
D.4 Power supply.................................................................................................................. 507
D.5 Cables ............................................................................................................................ 507
D.6 Breakers and electromagnetic contactors ....................................................................... 513
D.7 Reactors......................................................................................................................... 515
D.8 Filters ............................................................................................................................. 518
D.9 Braking system ............................................................................................................... 521
D.10 Regenerative feedback unit .......................................................................................... 527
Appendix E STO function description ...................................................................................... 529
E.1 STO function logic table .................................................................................................. 529
E.2 STO channel delay description ....................................................................................... 529
E.3 STO function installation checklist ................................................................................... 530
Appendix F Further information ................................................................................................ 532
F.1 Product and service queries ............................................................................................ 532
F.2 Feedback on INVT VFD manuals .................................................................................... 532
F.3 Documents on the Internet .............................................................................................. 532
iv
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Safety precautions
1 Safety precautions
1.1 What this chapter contains
Read the manual carefully before moving, installing, running and servicing the VFD, and follow all
safety precautions contained. Otherwise, device damage or personal injury or even death can result.
We are not liable or responsible for any device damage or personal injury or death caused by you or
your customers due to your ignorance of the safety precautions.
1.2 Safety definition
Danger: Severe personal injury or even death can result if related requirements are not followed.
Warning: Personal injury or device damage can result if related requirements are not followed.
Note: Actions taken to ensure proper running.
Qualified electricians: People working on the VFD must have received professional electrical and
safety training and obtained the certificates, and must be familiar with all steps and requirements of
VFD installing, commissioning, running and maintaining and capable to prevent any emergencies.
1.3 Warning symbols
Warnings caution you about conditions that can result in severe injury or death and/or device damage
and advice on how to prevent dangers. The following table lists the warning symbols in this manual.
Symbol Name Description Abbreviation

Severe personal injury or even death
Danger Danger can result if related requirements are
not followed.
Personal injury or device damage can
Warning Warning result if related requirements are not
followed.
Electrostatic PCBA board damage can result if
Do not sensitive related requirements are not followed.
The VFD base may be hot. Do not
Hot sides Hot sides
touch.
High voltage may be present in bus
capacitors after power off. To prevent
Electric electric shock, wait at least 5 or 15 or
shock 25 minutes (depending on the VFD
warning symbol) before operating the
VFD that is just powered off.
Read manual Read the manual before operating.
Note Note Actions to ensure proper running. Note
-1-
1.4 Safety guidelines

 Only trained and qualified electricians can operate the VFD.
 Do not perform any wiring, inspection, or component changing when power is
applied. Ensure all input power supplies are disconnected before wiring or
checking, and always wait at least the time designated on the VFD or until the
DC bus voltage is less than 36V. The following table lists the waiting time.
VFD model Minimum waiting time

380V 1.5kW–110kW 5 minutes
380V 132kW–315kW 15 minutes
380V ≥355kW 25 minutes
 Do not refit the VFD unless authorized; otherwise, fire, electric shock or other
injuries may result.
 The heat sink base may become hot during running. Do not touch it; otherwise,
burns may result.
 The electronic components inside the VFD are electrostatic sensitive. Take
measurements to avoid electrostatic discharge during related operation.
1.4.1 Delivery and installation
 Install the VFD on fire-retardant material and keep the VFD away from
combustible materials.
 Connect the optional braking parts (braking resistors, braking units or feedback
units) according to the wiring diagram.
 Do not run a damaged or incomplete VFD.
 Do not touch the VFD with wet items or body parts; otherwise, electric shock
may result.
Note:
 Select appropriate tools for delivery and installation to ensure proper VFD running and prevent
accidents. To ensure physical safety, take mechanical protective measures such as wearing
safety shoes and working uniforms.
 Prevent the VFD from physical shock or vibration during delivery and installation.
 Do not carry the VFD only by its front cover as the cover may fall off.
 Install the VFD far away from children and other public places.
 Use the VFD in proper environments. (For details, see the installation environment.)
 Prevent screws, cables and other conductive parts from falling into the VFD.
-2-
 As the leakage current during VFD running may exceed 3.5mA, apply reliable grounding and
ensure the ground resistance is less than 10Ω. The PE ground conductor and phase conductor
have equal conductivity capability. For the models of 30kW and higher, the cross sectional area of
the PE ground conductor can be slightly less than the recommended area.
 R, S, and T are the power input terminals, while U, V, and W are output terminals for motors.
Connect the input power cables and motor cables properly; otherwise, VFD damage may result.
1.4.2 Commissioning and running
 Disconnect all power sources applied to the VFD before terminal wiring, and wait
at least the time designated on the VFD after disconnecting the power sources.
 High voltage presents inside the VFD during running. Do not carry out any
operation on the VFD during running except for keypad setup. For 3PH AC 660V
VFD models, the control terminals form extra-low voltage circuits. Therefore, you
need to prevent the control terminals from connecting to accessible terminals of
other devices.
 The VFD may start up by itself when P01.21 is set to 1 (restart after power cut).
Do not get close to the VFD and motor.
 The VFD cannot be used as "Emergency-stop device".
 The VFD cannot act as an emergency brake for the motor; it is a must to install
mechanical brake device.
 During driving a permanent-magnet synchronous motor, besides
above-mentioned items, the following work must be done before installation and
maintenance.
a) Disconnect all the input power sources including main power and control
power.
b) Ensure the permanent-magnet synchronous motor has been stopped, and
the voltage on output end of the VFD is lower than 36V.
c) After the permanent-magnet synchronous motor is stopped, wait at least the
time designated on the VFD, and ensure the voltage between "+" and "-" is
lower than 36V.
d) During operation, it is a must to ensure the permanent-magnet synchronous
motor cannot run again by the action of external load; it is recommended to
install effective external brake devices or disconnect the direct electrical
connection between permanent-magnet synchronous motor and the VFD.
Note:
 Do not switch on or switch off input power sources of the VFD frequently.
 If the VFD has been stored without use for a long time, perform capacitor reforming (described in
Maintenance), inspection and pilot run for the VFD before using the VFD.
 Close the front cover before VFD running; otherwise, electric shock may occur.
-3-
1.4.3 Maintenance and component replacement
 Only well-trained and qualified professionals are allowed to perform
maintenance, inspection, and component replacement on the VFD.
 Disconnect all the power sources applied to the VFD before terminal wiring, and
wait at least the time designated on the VFD after disconnecting the power
sources.
 Take measures to prevent screws, cables and other conductive matters from
falling into the VFD during maintenance and component replacement.
Note:
 Use proper torque to tighten the screws. (For details, see "Recommended cable sizes".)
 Keep the VFD and its parts and components away from combustible materials during
maintenance and component replacement.
 Do not carry out insulation voltage-endurance test on the VFD, or measure the control circuits of
the VFD with megameter.
 Take proper anti-static measures on the VFD and its internal parts during maintenance and
component replacement.
1.4.4 Disposal of a scrap VFD
 The VFD contains heavy metal. Dispose of a scrap VFD as industrial waste.
 When the life cycle ends, the VFD should enter the recycling system. Dispose of
it separately at an appropriate collection point instead of placing it in the normal
waste stream.
-4-
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Quick startup
2 Quick startup
This chapter introduces the basic installation and commissioning rules that you need to follow to
realize quick installation and commissioning.
2.2 Unpacking inspection
Check the following after receiving the product.
 Whether the packing box is damaged or dampened.

 Whether the model identifier on the exterior surface of the packing box is consistent with
the purchased model.
 Whether the interior surface of the packing box is abnormal, for example, in wet condition,
or whether the enclosure of the VFD is damaged or cracked.
 Whether the VFD nameplate is consistent with the model identifier on the exterior surface
of the packing box.
 Whether the accessories (including the manual, control keypad, and extension card) inside
the packing box are complete.
If any problems are found, contact the local dealer or INVT office.
2.3 Checking before use
Check the following before using the VFD.
 Mechanical type of the load to be driven by the VFD. Check whether the VFD will be
overloaded in actual running and whether the VFD power class needs to be increased.
 The actual running current of the loaded motor is less than the rated current of the VFD.
 The control accuracy required by actual load is the same as that provided by the VFD.
 The grid voltage is consistent with the rated voltage of the VFD.
 Whether required functions can only be implemented with extension card configuration.
2.4 Environment checking

Check the following before installing the VFD. Note that the ambient temperature of a cabinet-built
VFD is the air temperature inside the cabinet.
 Whether the ambient temperature in the application is higher than 40°C. If yes, derate the
current by 2% for every 1°C temperature increase. Do not use the VFD in environments
where the temperature is higher than 50°C.
 Whether the ambient temperature is lower than -10°C. If yes, configure a heating device.
 Whether the VFD installation altitude is higher than 1000 meters. If yes, derate the current
by 1% for every increased 100 meters.
 Whether the ambient humidity is higher than 90% or condensation occurs. If yes, take more
protective measures.
-5-
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Quick startup
 Whether there is direct sunlight or biological invasion in the environment where the VFD is
to be used. If yes, take more protective measures.
 Whether there is dust or inflammable and explosive gas in the environment where the VFD
is to be used. If yes, take more protective measures.
2.5 Checking after installation
Check the following after the VFD installation is complete.
 Whether the input power cables and motor cables meet the current-carrying capacity
requirements of the actual load.
 Whether the peripheral accessories are correctly selected and properly installed, and
whether the installation cables meet the current-carrying capacity requirements of these
accessories, including the input reactor, input filter, output reactor, output filter, DC reactor,
braking unit, and braking resistor.
 Whether the VFD is installed on flame-retardant materials, and whether its accessories
(such as the reactors and braking resistor) that generate heat are kept away from
flammable materials.
 Whether all the control cables and power cables are separately wired and whether EMC
specification requirements are taken into full account during the wiring.
 Whether all the grounding systems are properly grounded.
 Whether all VFD installation clearances of the meet the requirements stated in the manual.
 The installation mode of the VFD complies with the requirements in the manual. Vertical
installation is recommended whenever possible.
 Whether the external wiring terminals are tightened, and whether the torque meets the
requirements.
 Take protective measures to ensure that no screws, cables, or other conductive objects
drop into the VFD.
2.6 Basic commissioning
Do as follows to complete basic commissioning before the use:
1. Select the motor type, set motor parameters and select VFD control modes according to
actual motor parameters.
2. Check whether autotuning is needed. If possible, disconnect the motor load to perform
dynamic parameter autotuning. If the load cannot be disconnected, perform static
autotuning.
3. Adjust the acceleration and deceleration time based on actual load working conditions.
4. Perform jogging to carry out device commissioning. Check whether the motor rotational
direction is consistent with the required direction. If no, you are advised to change the
motor rotational direction by exchanging the motor wiring of any two phases.
5. Set all the control parameters, and carry out actual running.
-6-
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Product overview
3 Product overview
This chapter introduces the VFD running principles, features, layout, nameplate, and model
instructions.
3.2 Basic principle
Goodrive350-19 series VFDs are used to control asynchronous AC induction motors and
permanent-magnet synchronous motors. The following lists the main circuit diagrams of the VFDs.
The rectifier converts 3PH AC voltage into DC voltage, and the capacitor bank of intermediate circuit
stabilizes the DC voltage. The inverter converts DC voltage into the AC voltage used by an AC motor.
When the circuit voltage exceeds the upper limit, the external braking resistor is connected to the
intermediate DC circuit to consume the feedback energy.
PB
（+）
R U
S V
T W
PE PE
（-）
Figure 3.1 Main circuit diagram for 380V 15kW or lower VFD models
PB
（+）
R U
S V
T W
PE PE
（-）
Figure 3.2 Main circuit diagram for 380V 18.5kW–110kW VFD models
-7-
DC reactor （+）
P1
R U
S V
T W
PE PE
（-）
Figure 3.3 Main circuit diagram for 380V 132kW or higher VFD models
DC reactor （+）
P1
R U
S V
T W
PE PE
（-）
Figure 3.4 Main circuit diagram for 660V VFD models
Note:
 The 132kW or higher VFD models support connection to external DC reactors, but before the
connection, you must remove the short-connection copper bar between P1 and (+). The 132kW
or higher VFD models also support connection to external braking units. Both DC reactor and
braking unit are optional parts.
 DC reactors have been built in the 18.5kW–110kW VFD models.
 Braking units have been built in the 110kW and lower VFD models. The VFD models with built-in
-8-
braking units support connection to external braking resistors. Braking resistors are optional
parts.
 All the 660V VFD models support connection to external DC reactors, but before the connection,
you must remove the short-connection copper bar between P1 and (+). The 660V VFD models
also support connection to external braking units. Both DC reactor and braking unit are optional
parts.
3.3 Product specifications
Table 3.1 Product specifications
Function Specification
AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%) Rated voltage: 380V
Input voltage (V)
AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%) Rated voltage: 660V
Input current (A) See "Product ratings".
Power input
Input frequency
50Hz or 60Hz, allowable range: 47–63Hz
(Hz)
Input power factor 30–110kW≥0.9
Output voltage (V) 0–Input voltage
Output current (A) See "Product ratings".
Power Output power
See "Product ratings".
output (kW)
Output frequency
0–150Hz
(Hz)
Control mode SVPWM control, SVC, and VC
Asynchronous motor (AM) and permanent magnetic
Motor type
synchronous motor (SM)
1: 200 (SVC)
Speed ratio
1: 1000 (VC)
Speed control ±0.2% (SVC)
accuracy ±0.02% (VC)
Technical ± 0.3% (SVC)
Speed fluctuation
control ± 0.02% (VC)
performance <20ms (SVC)
Torque response
<10ms (VC)
Torque control 10% (SVC)
accuracy 5% (VC)
For AMs: 0.25Hz/150% (SVC)
Starting torque For SMs: 2.5 Hz/150% (SVC)
0Hz/200% (VC)
Overload capacity 150% for 1 minute, 180% for 10 seconds, and 200% for 1
-9-
second.
Braking capacity 100% for long time, 120% for 1 minute, and 170% for 10 seconds
Settings can be implemented through digital, analog, pulse

frequency, multi-step speed running, graded multi-step speed
Frequency setting reference, simple PLC, PID, MODBUS communication,
method PROFIBUS communication and so on.
Running Settings can be combined and the setting channels can be
control switched.
performance
Automatic voltage The output voltage can be kept constant although the grid
regulation voltage changes.
More than 30 protection functions, such as protection against
Fault protection overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, overtemperature, phase
loss, and overload.
The 30–110 kW VFD models provide the function of protecting
Braking protection against braking resistor short connection, braking unit short
connection, and PB-PE short connection.
Embedded with hoisting-oriented brake logic, and integrated with
the torque verifying, brake feedback, zero position detection,
Brake control
restart after braking functions, which meet the industrial
standards on the VFDs for hoisting.
Special V/F curves are used to adjust voltage.
Conical motor During startup, the magnetic flow is increased to release the
control brake. During stop, the magnetic flow is decreased to close the
brake.
Special In closed-loop mode, the speed can be boosted and limited at
purpose constant power status, and the speed is limited in stepped way.
functions Light load speed In open-loop mode, if the simplified speed boost way is used, the
boost speed boosts to the set frequency in light load status; if the
speed is boosted or limited in constant power status, the speed is
limited in stepped way.
In closed-loop mode, if the VFD detects load downward slip, the
VFD automatically enters the zero servo state and outputs a
Zero servo brake failure alarm. When a level-2 fault occurs, if load
downward slip occurs, the VFD automatically resets the fault,
enters the zero servo state, and outputs a brake failure alarm.
Loose rope Upward loose rope protection: If the speed limiting in loose rope
protection (only in state is detected, the speed limiting is cancelled when timeout
closed-loop occurs or load is held.
- 10 -
mode) Downward loose rope protection: If the loose rope state is
detected, the VFD reports a fault or alarm.
Upward or The function is used to limit the hoist to run within the specified
downward range. The VFD enables emergency stop and reports an alarm
position limit once the range is exceeded.
When the deceleration signal is valid, the running speed of the
Upward or hoist is limited once the hoist runs within the slow speed area.
downward DEC The function also features uni-directional speed limit. For
position example, only the upward running speed is limited when the hoist
runs within the upward slow speed area.
In closed-loop mode, the encoder is used to obtain load position
Load position
information.
Master/slave Including power balance and speed synchronization between the
control master and slave.
Hoisting Including lifting, horizontal moving, construction hoist, and tower
application macro crane rotating, and user-defined application macros.
Lifting and
Three groups of motor parameters, control modes, and
horizontal moving
application macros can be switched.
switchover
Frequency
When the bus voltage is continuously low, the reference
derating with
frequency is decreased to keep the normal output torque of VFD.
voltage
When the bus voltage decrease transiently or the VFD quickly
stops due to power outage, the function is used to ensure the
Low voltage
hook does not slip. The low voltage protection function is
protection
automatically disabled once the bus voltage restores to the
normal state.
The VFD reports the low-speed running protection fault when the
Low-speed low-speed running time exceeds the allowed time. The prevents
running protection the axial cooling motor from being damaged due to overheating
caused by long-time running.
Overload In closed-loop mode, when overload occurs, upward lifting is
protection restricted.
Turbulence
HDO outputs PWM waves to directly control turbulence.
control
When the brake control signal is inconsistent with the brake
Brake feedback feedback signal, the VFD handles the inconsistency according to
the brake status to ensure safety.
- 11 -
Zero position The zero position signal and running signal are mutually
detection exclusive.
The VFD verifies the current or torque before brake release. The
Torque verification VFD performs brake release when the verification succeeds, and
the VFD reports the verification fault when the verification fails.
The closed-loop control mode can be switched to the open-loop
One key
control mode through terminals. When the encoder is faulty, the
open/closed loop
open-loop control mode can be used. The switchover can get
switchover
response only in stopped state but not in running state.
After receiving a jogging command, the VFD can automatically
start, run, and stop at the preset running frequency and time
according to the settings. During the process, the brake can be
Jogging
normally opened or closed under the control of VFD, ensuring
the stability without hook slip or exception when the crane starts
or stops.
In high-speed lifting mode, the high speed is limited at the
Smooth lifting moment of steel rope straightening, reducing the impact caused
by the sudden load to the hoist at the lifting start.
Set frequency If the set frequency is lower than the threshold after the brake is
exception opened, the VFD reports the set frequency exception, which
protection prevents slip caused by insufficient force at low speed.
Motor overheat The I/O extension card can receive motor temperature sensor
protection input (PT100, PT1000 and PTC).
Terminal analog
No greater than 20mV
input resolution
Terminal digital
No greater than 2ms
input resolution
Analog input Two inputs, 0–10V/0–20mA for AI1, -10–10V for AI2
Analog output One output: AO1; range: 0–10V/0–20mA
Peripheral Four regular inputs; max. frequency: 1kHz; internal impedance:

interface 3.3kΩ
Digital input
Two high-speed inputs; max. frequency: 50kHz; supporting
quadrature encoder input; with speed measurement function
One high-speed pulse output; max. frequency: 50kHz

Digital output
One Y terminal open collector output
Two programmable relay outputs
Relay output
RO1A NO, RO1B NC, RO1C common terminal
- 12 -
RO2A NO, RO2B NC, RO2C common terminal
Contact capacity: 3A/250VAC, 1A/30VDC
Three extension interfaces: SLOT1, SLOT2, SLOT3
Extensible PG card, programmable extension card,
communication card, I/O card, and so on
Extension Note:
interface  You can install extension cards (optional) for 1.5–5.5kW VFD
models and you are recommended to install them at slot 2.
 I/O extension card 2 has been installed at slot 3 for 7.5kW and
higher VFD models as standard configuration.
Two programmable relay outputs
RO3A NO, RO3C common terminal

Relay output
RO4A NO, RO4C common terminal
Contact capacity: 3A/250VAC, 1A/30VDC
Four regular inputs, supporting PTC input during DC power

supply, and the PTC acting at 2.5kΩ, but not supporting PTC
input during AC power supply;
Internal impedance: 6.6kΩ;

I/O
Max. input frequency: 1kHz;
extension Digital input
card 2 Supporting the internal power 24V;
Supporting the voltage input of external power

(-20%)24–48VDC(+10%) and (-10%)24–48VAC(+10%);
Bidirectional input terminals, simultaneously supporting NPN and
PNP connection methods
Independent PT100 and PT1000 input:

PT100 input
Resolution: 1°C
Range: -20°C–150°C
PT1000 input Detection precision: ±3°C
Supporting offline protection
Installation
Wall mounting, floor mounting, or flange mounting
method
Temperature of
-10–50°C
Other running
Derating is required if the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C.
environment
IP rating IP20
Pollution degree Degree 2
- 13 -
Cooling method Forced air cooling
DC reactors have been built in 380V 18.5–110kW VFD models
as standard configuration.
DC reactor
DC reactors are optional parts for 380V 132kW and higher
models and for 660V models and can be externally connected.
Braking units have been built in 380V 110kW and lower VFD
Braking unit models as standard configuration. Braking units are optional
parts for 660V models and can be externally connected.
C3 filters are optional parts and can be built in VFDs.
If C3 filters are required, connect the jumper J10. After C3 filters
are configured, the VFDs can meet IEC61800-3 C3
EMC filter
requirements.
External filters can be configured to meet IEC61800-3 C2
requirements.
Table 3.2 Dedicated functions
Function Control method

Mode V/F SVC VC
Brake control √ √ √
Restart after braking √ √ √
Brake feedback √ √ √
Zero position detection √ √ √
Current verification √
Brake control Torque verification √ √
Brake slip verification √
Speed deviation detection √ √ √
Dedicated Jogging √ √ √
function Set frequency exception
√ √ √
protection
Torque control √ √
Torque control
Pre torque √ √
Conical motor Conical motor control √
Simplified speed boost mode √ √
Constant power speed boost √
Light load speed boost
Constant power speed limit √
Stepped speed limit √
Safety function STO √ √ √
- 14 -
Function Control method

Zero servo √
Loose rope protection √
Stable lifting protection √
Upward and downward limit √ √ √
Upward and downward DEC
√ √ √
limit
Overload protection √
Speed synchronization √ √ √
Master/slave control Power balance √ √ √
Position synchronization √
Load position √
Motor parameter switchover √ √ √
Other Turbulence control √ √ √
Motor temperature protection √ √ √
CVCF function √
3.4 Product nameplate
Model: GD350-19-037G-4-B IP20

Power(Output): 37kW
Input: AC 3PH 380V(-15%)-440V(+10%) 80A 47Hz-63Hz
Output: AC 3PH 0V-Uinput 10A 0Hz-400Hz
S/N: Made in China

Shenzhen INVT Electric Co.,Ltd.
Figure 3.5 Product nameplate

Note: This is a nameplate example for standard Goodrive350-19 VFD models. The markings such as
"CE" and "IP20" on the nameplate vary depending on actual certification status.
3.5 Model designation code
A model designation code contains product information. You can find the model designation code on
the VFD nameplate and simplified nameplate.
GD350-19-037G-4-B
① ② ③ ④
Figure 3.6 Model description
- 15 -
No. Description Example

① Abbreviation of product series GD350-19: Goodrive350-19 series VFD for hoisting
037: 37kW
② Power range + load type
G: Constant torque load
4: AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%)
③ Voltage class
6: AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%)
B: Built-in braking unit
④ Built-in braking unit
Empty: No built-in braking unit
3.6 Product ratings
Table 3.3 AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%)
VFD model Output power (kW) Input current (A) Output current (A)
GD350-19-1R5G-4-B 1.5 5.0 3.7
GD350-19-2R2G-4-B 2.2 5.8 5
GD350-19-004G-4-B 4 13.5 9.5
GD350-19-5R5G-4-B 5.5 19.5 14
GD350-19-7R5G-4-B 7.5 25 18.5
GD350-19-011G-4-B 11 32 25
GD350-19-015G-4-B 15 40 32
GD350-19-018G-4-B 18.5 41 38
GD350-19-022G-4-B 22 48 45
GD350-19-030G-4-B 30 58 60
GD350-19-037G-4-B 37 72 75
GD350-19-045G-4-B 45 88 92
GD350-19-055G-4-B 55 106 115
GD350-19-075G-4-B 75 139 150
GD350-19-090G-4-B 90 168 180
GD350-19-110G-4-B 110 201 215
GD350-19-132G-4 132 265 260
GD350-19-160G-4 160 310 305
GD350-19-185G-4 185 345 340
GD350-19-200G-4 200 385 380
GD350-19-220G-4 220 430 425
GD350-19-250G-4 250 485 480
GD350-19-280G-4 280 545 530
GD350-19-315G-4 315 610 600
GD350-19-355G-4 355 625 650
GD350-19-400G-4 400 715 720
GD350-19-450G-4 450 840 820
GD350-19-500G-4 500 890 860
- 16 -
Note:
 The input current of 1.5–500kW VFD models is measured in cases where the input voltage is
380V without an additional reactor.
 The rated output current is the output current corresponding to 380V output voltage.
 Within the allowable input voltage range, the output current and power cannot exceed the rated
output current and power.
Table 3.4 AC 3PH 520V (-15%) – 690V (+10%)
VFD model Output power (kW) Input current (A) Output current (A)
GD350-19-022G-6 22 35 27
GD350-19-030G-6 30 40 35
GD350-19-037G-6 37 47 45
GD350-19-045G-6 45 52 52
GD350-19-055G-6 55 65 62
GD350-19-075G-6 75 85 86
GD350-19-090G-6 90 95 98
GD350-19-110G-6 110 118 120
GD350-19-132G-6 132 145 150
GD350-19-160G-6 160 165 175
GD350-19-185G-6 185 190 200
GD350-19-200G-6 200 210 220
GD350-19-220G-6 220 230 240
GD350-19-250G-6 250 255 270
GD350-19-280G-6 280 286 300
GD350-19-315G-6 315 334 350
GD350-19-355G-6 355 360 380
GD350-19-400G-6 400 411 430
GD350-19-450G-6 450 445 465
GD350-19-500G-6 500 518 540
GD350-19-560G-6 560 578 600
GD350-19-630G-6 630 655 680
Note:
 The input current of 22–350kW VFD models is measured in cases where the input voltage is
660V without DC reactors or input or output reactors.
 The input current of 400–630kW VFD models is measured in cases where the input voltage is
660V with input reactors.
 The rated output current is the output current corresponding to 660V output voltage.
- 17 -
 Within the allowable input voltage range, the output current and power cannot exceed the rated
output current and power.
3.7 Structural diagram
The VFD structure is shown in the following figure (using the 380V 30kW VFD as an example):
1 5
6
2 7
4 9
10
11
13 12
Figure 3.7 Structural diagram
No. Part Description

1 Upper cover Used to protect internal components.
2 Keypad For details, see "Keypad".
3 Lower cover Used to protect internal components.
4 Extension card Optional. For details, see "Extension cards".
Used to protect the control board and install extension
5 Control board baffle
cards.
6 Cooling fan For details, see "Maintenance".
7 Keypad interface Used to connect the keypad.
8 Nameplate For details, see "Product nameplate".
9 Control terminals For details, see "Installing".
Optional. Using the ventilation hole cover can enhance
10 Ventilation hole cover the protection rating but also increase the internal
temperature, which requires derating.
11 Main circuit terminals For details, see "Installing".
12 POWER indicator Indicator of the power supply.
GD350-19 product series
13 For details, see "Model designation code".
label
- 18 -
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Installing
4 Installing
This chapter introduces the mechanical and electrical installations of the VFD.
 Only trained and qualified professionals are allowed to carry out the operations
mentioned in this chapter. Perform operations following the instructions
presented in Safety precautions. Ignoring the safety precautions may result in
device damage or injury or even death.
 Ensure the VFD power is disconnected before installation. If the VFD has been
powered on, disconnect the VFD from the power, wait at least the time
specified on the VFD, and ensure the POWER indicator is off. It is
recommended that a multimeter should be used to check and ensure the VFD
DC bus voltage is lower than 36V.
 VFD installation must be designed and performed according to applicable local
laws and regulations. INVT is not liable or responsible for any installation that
breaches local laws and regulations. If recommendations given by INVT are not
followed, the VFD may experience problems that the warranty does not cover.
4.2 Mechanical installation
4.2.1 Installation environment
The VFD installation environment is essential for the VFD to run with best performance in long terms.
Install the VFD in an environment compliant with the following requirements.
Environment Condition
Installation site Indoor
 -10–+50°C
 When the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C, derate by 1% for every
temperature increase of 1°C.
 It is not recommended that the VFD be used when the ambient
temperature exceeds 50°C.
 In order to ensure reliability, do not use the VFD in cases where the
Ambient temperature changes rapidly.
temperature  When the VFD is used in closed space such as a control cabinet, use the
cooling fan or air conditioner to prevent the internal temperature from
exceeding the allowed temperature.
 When the temperature is too low, install an external heating device
before running the VFD that has been powered off for a long time, which
eliminates the freeze inside the VFD. Otherwise, the VFD may be
damaged.
 The relative humidity (RH) of the air is less than 90%.
Humidity
 Condensation is not allowed.
- 19 -
Environment Condition
 The max. RH cannot exceed 60% in the environment with corrosive
gases.
Storage
-30–+60°C
temperature
The installation site must be:
 Away from electromagnetic radiation sources.
 Away from oil mist, corrosive gases and combustible gases.
 Protective from foreign materials such as metal powder, dust, oil, and
Running water so that the foreign materials will not fall into the VFD. (Do not
environment install the VFD on inflammables such as wood.)
 Away from radioactive substances and combustible objects.
 Away from harmful gases and liquids.
 With a low salt content density.
 No direct sunlight.
 Lower than 1000m.
 When the altitude exceeds 1000m, derate by 1% for every increase of

Altitude 100m.
 When the altitude exceeds 3000m, consult the local INVT dealer or local
INVT office for details.
Vibration The max. vibration amplitude cannot exceed 5.8m/s2 (0.6g).
Installation
Install the VFD vertically to ensure good heat dissipation effect.
direction
Note:
 GD350-19 series VFDs need to be installed in a clean and well-ventilated environment based on
the enclosure IP rating.
 The cooling air must be clean enough and free from corrosive gases and conductive dust.
4.2.2 Installation direction
The VFD can be installed on the wall or in a cabinet.
The VFD must be installed vertically. Check the installation position according to following
requirements. For details about outline dimensions, see "Dimensional drawings".
- 20 -
OK NG NG
a. Vertical installation b. Horizontal installation c. Lateral installation
Figure 4.1 VFD installation direction

4.2.3 Installation methods
There are three installation methods by VFD outline dimensions:
 Wall mounting: applicable to the 380V 315kW and lower VFD models and the 660V 355kW and
lower models.
 Flange mounting: applicable to the 380V 200kW and lower VFD models and the 660V 220kW
and lower VFD models.
 Floor mounting: applicable to the 380V 220–500kW VFD models and the 660V 250–630kW VFD
models.
Wall mounting Flange mounting
Figure 4.2 Installation methods
Step 1 Mark the positions of the installation holes. For details about the positions, see the VFD outline
dimension drawings in Appendix C.
Step 2 Mount the screws or bolts onto the marked positions.
Step 3 Place the VFD against the wall.
Step 4 Fasten the screws on the wall.
- 21 -
Note:
 When the flange mounting method is used, the (optional part) flange mounting plate is required
for the 380V 1.5–75kW VFD models but not required for the 380V 90–200kW and 660V
22–220kW VFD models.
 The 380V 220–315kW and 660V 250–355kW VFD models support the (optional part) installation
base, which can house an input AC reactor (or DC reactor) and an output AC reactor.
4.2.4 Installing one VFD
A Hot air C
B B
A Cold airC
Figure 4.3 Installing one VFD
Note: For clearances B and C, each must be 100mm at least.

4.2.5 Installing multiple VFDs
A Hot air C
B D B Cold air C
A
Figure 4.4 Installing multiple VFDs side by side
Note:
 If the VFDs are in different sizes, align the top of the VFDs for installation, which facilitates
maintenance.
 For clearances B, D, and C, each must be 100mm at least.
- 22 -
4.2.6 Vertical installation
Cold Windshield
air
Hot
air
Cold
air Windshield
Hot
air
Figure 4.5 Vertical installation
Note: Windshields must be used for vertical installation. Otherwise, the VFDs experience mutual
interference, degrading the heat dissipation performance.
- 23 -
4.2.7 Tilted installation
Hot
air
Cold
air
Hot
air
Cold
air
Hot
air
Cold
air
Figure 4.6 Tilted installation
Note: To prevent mutual interference in tilted installation, separate the air inlet ducts of the VFDs from
the air outlet ducts of the VFDs.
- 24 -
4.3 Main circuit standard wiring

4.3.1 Main circuit wiring diagram
Braking resistor
（+） PB （-）
U Output
reactor
Input R
V
3PH power reactor VFD models of 110kW Output
M
S
380V±15%
50/60Hz Input and lower W filter
filter T
Fuse PE
Braking unit
DC reactor DC+
Braking resistor
DC-
P1 （+）（-）
U Output
reactor
Input R V M
3PH power
reactor VFD models of 132kW Output
W
380V±15%
Input
S and higher filter
50/60Hz
filter T PE
Fuse
Figure 4.7 Main circuit wiring diagram for the VFD models of AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%)
Note:
 The fuse, DC reactor, braking unit, braking resistor, input reactor, input filter, output reactor and
output filter are optional parts. For details, see "Optional peripheral accessories".
 P1 and (+) have been short connected by default for the 380V 132kW and higher VFD models. If
the VFD needs to connect to an external DC reactor, remove the short connector between P1
and (+).
 When the braking resistor needs to be connected, remove the yellow warning labels marked with
PB, (+) and (-) from the terminal block before connecting the braking resistor wire. Otherwise,
poor contact may result.
- 25 -
Braking unit
DC reactor
DC+ Braking
resistor
DC-
P1 (+) (-)
U Output
reactor
Input R V M
3PH power
reactor
VFDs of 22kW and higher Output
S W filter
660V±15%
50/60Hz Input
filter T PE
Fuse
Figure 4.8 Main circuit wiring diagram for the VFD models of AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%)
Note:
 The fuse, DC reactor, braking resistor, input reactor, input filter, output reactor and output filter are
optional parts. For details, see "Optional peripheral accessories".
 P1 and (+) have been short connected by default. If the VFD needs to connect to an external DC
reactor, remove the short connector between P1 and (+).
 When the braking resistor needs to be connected, remove the yellow warning labels marked with
(+) and (-) from the terminal block before connecting the braking resistor wire. Otherwise, poor
contact may result.
- 26 -
4.3.2 Main circuit terminal diagram
Figure 4.9 Main circuit terminal diagram for 3PH 380V 22kW and lower VFD models
Figure 4.10 Main circuit terminal diagram for 3PH 380V 30–37kW VFD models
Figure 4.11 Main circuit terminal diagram for 3PH 380V 45–110kW VFD models
- 27 -
Figure 4.12 Main circuit terminal diagram for 660V 22–45kW VFD models
Figure 4.13 Main circuit terminal diagram for 660V 55–132kW VFD models
- 28 -
Figure 4.14 Main circuit terminal diagram for 380V 132–200kW and 660V 160–220kW VFD models
- 29 -
Terminal
380V 132kW and
Sign Function description
380V 110kW and lower higher
660V all series
3PH AC input terminal, connected
R, S, T Main circuit power input
to the grid.
3PH AC output terminal, connected
U, V, W VFD output
to the motor in most cases.
DC reactor terminal 1
P1 Not available
P1 and (+) connect to external DC
Braking resistor terminal DC reactor terminal 2 reactor terminals.
(+)
1 Braking unit terminal 1
(+) and (-) connect to external
(-) / Braking unit terminal 2
- 30 -
Terminal
380V 132kW and
Sign Function description
380V 110kW and lower higher
660V all series
braking unit terminals.
Braking resistor terminal
PB Not available PB and (+) connect to external
2
braking resistor terminals.
Grounding terminal for safe
protection; each machine must
PE Grounding resistor less than 10Ω
carry two PE terminals and proper
grounding is required.
Note:
 Do not use asymmetrical motor cables. If there is a symmetrical grounding conductor in the motor
cable besides the conductive shielded layer, ground the grounding conductor on the VFD end
and motor end.
 Braking resistor, braking unit and DC reactor are optional parts.
 Route the motor cable, input power cable and control cables separately.
 "Not available" means this terminal is not for external connection.
4.3.3 Wiring procedure of the main circuit terminals

1. Connect the ground wire of the input power cable to the PE terminal of the VFD, connect the
3PH input cable to the R, S and T terminals, and tighten up.
2. Connect the ground wire of the motor cable to the PE terminal of the VFD, connect the motor
3PH cable to the U, V and W terminals, and tighten up.
3. Connect optional parts such as the braking resistor that carries cables to designated positions.
4. Fasten all the cables outside the VFD mechanically if allowed.
The screw is The screw is

not fastened. fastened.
Figure 4.17 Screw installation diagram
- 31 -
4.4 Standard wiring of control circuit

4.4.1 Wiring diagram of basic control circuit
GD350-19 series VFD

Forward running S1
SW2 AO1
Analog output
Reverse running S2 0-10V/0-20mA
V I GND
Fault reset S3
Y1
S4 Y1 output
CME
HDIA
HDIB
HDO
COM High-speed pulse output and open
COM collector output are available for
PW choice.
+24V
PE
485+
SW3
RS485
Power used for
485- communication
+10V ON OFF
frequency setting
AI1 485G
Multi-function analog input
AI2
GND
RO1A
PE
-10V RO1B
Relay 1 output
(External)
RO1C
Safety switch
S2 RO2A
Safety input
H1 RO2B
S1 Relay 2 output
H2 RO2C
Open
circuit
Safety controller
Safety state
+24V
feedback
Figure 4.18 Wiring diagram of control circuit

Terminal
Instruction
name
+10V Locally provided +10.5V power supply
AI1 1. Input range: AI1 voltage/current can choose 0–10V / 0–20mA; AI2: -10V –
+10V;
AI2
2. Input impedance: 20kΩ during voltage input; 250Ω during current input;
- 32 -
Terminal
Instruction
name
3. Whether the input is voltage or current is set through P05.50;
4. Resolution ratio: When 10V corresponds to 50Hz, the min. resolution ratio is
5mV;
5. Deviation: ±0.5% at 25°C, when input is above 5V/10mA.
GND +10.5V reference zero potential
1. Output range: 0–10V or 0–20mA
AO1 2. Whether the output is voltage or current is set through the switch SW2
3. Deviation: ±0.5% at 25°C, when input is above 5V/10mA.
RO1A
RO1 relay output; RO1A is NO, RO1B is NC, RO1C is common terminal
RO1B
Contact capacity: 3A/AC250V, 1A/DC30V
RO1C
RO2A
RO2 relay output; RO2A is NO, RO2B is NC, RO2C is common terminal
RO2B
Contact capacity: 3A/AC250V, 1A/DC30V
RO2C
1. Switch capacity: 200mA/30V
HDO 2. Range of output frequency: 0–50kHz
3. Duty ratio: 50%
COM Common terminal of +24V
CME Common terminal of open collector output; short connected to COM by default
Switch capacity: 200mA/30V
Y1
Range of output frequency: 0–1kHz
485+ RS485 communication port, RS485 differential signal port and standard RS485
communication port must use twisted shielded pair; the 120ohm terminal matching
485-
resistor of RS485 communication is connected by the switch SW3.
PE Grounding terminal
Use to provide input digital working power from the external to the internal.
PW
Voltage range: 12–30V
+24V User power provided by the VFD, maximum output current 200mA.
S1 Digital input 1 1. Internal impedance: 3.3kΩ
S2 Digital input 2 2. Accept 12–30V voltage input
S3 Digital input 3 3. Bi-directional input terminal, supporting NPN/PNP connection
modes
4. Max. input frequency: 1kHz
S4 Digital input 4 5. All are programmable digital input terminals, the functions of
which be set through function codes
HDIA Besides S1–S4 functions, the terminals can also act as high frequency pulse input
channels
Max. input frequency: 50kHz;
HDIB
Duty ratio: 30%–70%;
Supporting quadrature encoder input; equipped with speed-measurement function
+24V—H1 STO input 1 1. Safe torque off (STO) redundant input, connected to the
external NC contact. When the contact opens, STO acts and the
VFD stops output;
2. Safety input signal wires use shielded wires whose length is
+24V—H2 STO input 2 within 25m;
3. The H1 and H2 terminals are short connected to +24V by
default. Remove the short connectors from the terminals before
using STO function.
- 33 -
4.4.2 Input/output signal connection diagram
You can select the NPN/PNP mode and internal/external power through the U-type short connector.
NPN internal mode is adopted by default.
R01AR02A S1 S2 S3 S4 HDIA HDIB AI1 AI2 +10V
R01BR02B H1 +24V+24V PW COM HDO Y1 AO1 GND
R01CR02C PE H2 +24V COM COM CME 485+485-485G
U-type short U-type short U-type short U-type short USB port Keypad port
connector between connector between connector between connector between
H1 and +24V H2 and +24V +24V and PW COM and +CME
Figure 4.19 Position of U-type short connector
Note: As shown in Figure 4.19, the USB port can be used to upgrade the software, and the keypad
port can be used to connect an external keypad. The external keypad cannot be used when the
keypad of the VFD is used.
If input signal comes from NPN transistors, set the U-type short connector between +24V and PW
based on the power used according to the following figure.
S1 S1
S2 S2
COM COM
COM COM
+ 24V + 24V +24V
PW PW
+ 24V + 24V
Internal power（NPN mode） External power（NPN mode）
Figure 4.20 NPN mode
If input signal comes from PNP transistor, set the U-type short connector based on the power used
according to the following figure.
- 34 -
S1 S1
S2 S2
COM COM
COM COM
+ 24V + 24V
PW PW
+ 24V + 24V
Internal power（PNP mode） External power（PNP mode）
Figure 4.21 PNP mode

4.4.3 Control circuit wiring of I/O extension card 2
Goodrive350-19 series extension card

Extension terminal
S5 S5
Extension terminal
S6 S6
Extension terminal
S7 S7
Extension terminal
S8 S8
COM
PW
+24V
PE
RO3A
Relay 3 output
PT1+
RO3C
PT2+ Temperature input

RO4A
PT-
Relay 4 output
PE RO4C
(Externally connected
temperature resistor)
Figure 4.22 Control circuit wiring of I/O extension card 2
- 35 -
PT1+ PT- PT2+
S5 S6 S7 S8 R04A R04C
+24V PW COM COM R03A R03C
Figure 4.23 Terminal layout of I/O extension card 2
Terminal Description
Independent PT100 and PT1000 inputs: PT1+ connects to PT100 resistor, while
PT1+
PT2+ connects to PT1000 resistor
1. Resolution: 1°C
2. Range: -20°C–150°C
PT2+ 3. Detection precision: 3°C
4. Supporting disconnection protection
PT- Reference zero potential of PT100/PT1000
RO3A RO3 relay output; RO3A is NO, RO3C is common terminal
RO3C Contact capacity: 3A/AC250V, 1A/DC30V
RO4A RO4 relay output; RO4A is NO, RO4C is common terminal
RO4C Contact capacity: 3A/AC250V, 1A/DC30V
Used to provide input digital working power from the external to the internal
PW
Voltage range: 24(-20%)–48VDC(+10%), 24(-10%)–48VAC(+10%) voltage input
+24V User power provided by the VFD; maximum output current 200mA
- 36 -
Terminal Description
1. Internal impedance: 6.6kΩ

S5 Digital input 5
2. Supporting the voltage input from external power supply
(-20%)24–48VDC(+10%), (-10%)24–48VAC(+10%)
S6 Digital input 6
3. Supporting the 24V internal power supply
S7 Digital input 7 4. Bi-directional input terminal, supporting NPN/PNP connection

modes
5. Max. input frequency: 1kHz
6. All are programmable digital input terminals, the functions of

which can be set through function codes
S8 Digital input 8
7. Supporting PTC overtemperature protection during DC power
supply, and the PTC acting at 2.5kΩ (internal power 24V is
recommended), but not supporting PTC overtemperature protection
during AC power supply
Note:
 You can install extension cards (optional) for 1.5–5.5kW VFD models and you are
recommended to install them at slot 2.
 I/O extension card 2 has been installed at slot 3 for 7.5kW and higher VFD models as standard
configuration.
4.5 Wiring protection
4.5.1 Protecting the VFD and input power cable in short circuit
The VFD and input power cable can be protected during short-circuit to avoid thermal overload.
Carry out protective measures according to the following requirements.
- 37 -
VFD
Input cable
M3 ~
Fuse
Figure 4.24 Fuse configuration
Note: Select the fuse according to operation manual. During short-circuit, the fuse will protect input
power cables to avoid damage to the VFD; when internal short-circuit occurred to the VFD, it can
protect neighboring equipment from being damaged.
4.5.2 Protecting the motor and motor cable in short circuit
If the motor cable is selected according to the VFD rated current, the VFD can perform short-circuit
protection for the motor and motor cable, without the use of other protective devices.
 If the VFD is connected to multiple motors, an additional thermal overload switch

or breaker must be used to protect the motor and motor cable. Such a device
may use the fuse to cut off the short-circuit current.
4.5.3 Protecting the motor from thermal overload

According to the requirements, the motor must be protected to prevent thermal overload. Once
overload is detected, you must cut off the current. The VFD is equipped with motor thermal overload
protection function, which will block output and cut off the current (if necessary) to protect the motor.
4.5.4 Bypass connection
In critical occasions, power-variable frequency conversion circuit is necessary to ensure proper
operation of the system when VFD fault occurs. In some special cases, for example, only soft startup
is needed, it will convert to power-frequency operation directly after soft startup, corresponding
bypass link is also needed.
 Do not connect the power supply to the VFD output terminals U, V and W. The
voltage applied to the motor cable may cause permanent damage to the VFD.
If frequent switchover is needed, you can use the switch/contactor which carries mechanical interlock
to ensure motor terminals are not connected to input power cables and VFD output ends
simultaneously.
- 38 -
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Commissioning
5 Commissioning
5.1 Commissioning lifting in open-loop vector control
5.1.1 Wiring
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
V M
S S GD350-19 VFD 3~
W
T T PE
Lifting S1 RO1A Brake

Lowering S2
RO1B output
Graded reference terminal 1 S3
Graded reference terminal 2 S4 RO1C
Graded reference terminal 3 HDIA
Graded reference terminal 4 HDIB RO2A
S5 VFD fault
Fault reset RO2B output
Brake feedback S6
RO2C
S7
S8
COM Y1
PW CME
HDO Brake check
+24V
reminding/Overloa
CME d reminding
COM
+24V
Figure 5.1 Wiring for lifting in open-loop vector control
Note: If the wiring is performed according to Figure 5.1, most VFD parameters need no adjustment. If
the onsite function terminals are inconsistent with the terminals shown in the figure, adjust the input
and output terminal functions according to the actual wiring after selecting the open-loop vector
controlled lifting application macro.
5.1.2 Commissioning procedure
1. Check the wiring and ensure the wiring is proper.
2. Set P00.18=1.
3. Set P02 motor parameters.
4. Set P00.15=2. The keypad displays "-ΓUN-". Press the RUN key to perform static autotuning.
5. Set P90.00=1 to select the open-loop vector controlled lifting function macro.
6. Perform low-speed trial running.
- 39 -
Note: In closed-loop mode, when the encoder is abnormal, set P90.00=1 to switch to the open-loop
vector control mode. The two modes are different in the brake timing sequence logic, and therefore
you need to adjust P01 and P90 parameters accordingly.
5.1.3 Macro parameters (P90.00=1)
Function
Name Setting Remarks
code
P00.00 Speed control mode 1 SVC mode 1
Command running
P00.01 1 Terminal
channel
P00.03 Max. output frequency 100.00Hz
Upper limit of running
P00.04 90.00Hz
frequency
Setting channel of A
P00.06 15 Graded multi-step speed
frequency command
P00.11 ACC time 1 8.0s
P00.12 DEC time 1 4.0s
P00.14 Carrier frequency setting 1.5kHz
Starting frequency of direct
P01.01 1.00Hz
start
P01.15 Stop speed 1.50 Hz
P01.24 Stop speed delay 0.4s
HDIA is digital input
P05.00 HDI input type 0x11
HDIB is digital input
P05.03 Function of S3 terminal 77 Graded reference terminal 1
P05.05 Function of HDIA terminal 79 Graded reference terminal 3
P05.06 Function of HDIB terminal 80 Graded reference terminal 4
P06.00 HDO output type 1 Open collector output
P06.02 HDO output selection 56 Brake detection reminding
P06.03 RO1 output selection 49 Brake output
P06.04 RO2 output selection 5 VFD fault
VFD or motor Underload protection is enabled to
P11.08 0x021
overload/underload alarm enhance equipment safety
Underload pre-alarm
P11.11 15%
detection level
P25.01 Function of S5 terminal 7 Fault reset
P25.02 Function of S6 terminal 75 Brake feedback signal
Enabling brake-oriented
P90.04 1 The brake is controlled by the VFD.
logic
- 40 -
Function
code
Graded multi-step speed
P90.06 10.0% Corresponding to the max. frequency
reference 0
reference 1
reference 2
reference 3
reference 4
Forward brake release Corresponding to the motor rated
P90.14 50.0%
torque torque
Reverse brake release Corresponding to the motor rated
P90.15 30.0%
torque torque
Forward brake release
P90.16 3.00Hz
frequency
Reverse brake release
P90.17 3.00Hz
frequency
Forward brake closing
P90.18 3.00Hz
frequency
Reverse brake closing
P90.19 3.50Hz
frequency
Delay before forward
P90.20 0.000s
brake release
Delay after forward brake
P90.22 0.500s
release
P90.24 0.000s
brake closing
P90.26 0.100s
closing
Torque verification fault
P90.30 2.000s
detection time
Enabling the monitoring on Enable the brake current monitoring
P90.31 1
brake status (and brake feedback detection)
P91.08 2 Constant power speed limit
function selection
Note: The macro parameter table does not contain some parameters that are factory default
- 41 -
parameters.
5.1.4 Points for attention
 If you only want to check whether the VFD runs properly, set P90.00=0(Common mode).
 If you perform empty-load commissioning, set P90.00 to 1 (Lifting in open-loop vector control),
set P11.08 to 0x000 to disable underload protection, and set P90.14 and P90.15 to 0 to prevent
the torque verification fault reporting caused by empty load. In addition, if no external braking
resistor is connected, you need to increase the ACC/DEC time to prevent the bus overvoltage
fault reporting caused by too fast stop.
 If there is a brake feedback signal, set P25.02 to 75, and the macro has been set by default. In
addition, set P90.31 to 1. If there is no brake feedback signal, set P90.31 to 0 to prevent the
misreporting of a brake feedback fault.
 During onsite commissioning, if the VFD terminal signal upward/downward running command is
inconsistent with the load lifting/lowering direction, adjust any two phase sequences of VFD
output terminals U, V, and W.
 If PLC control is used, speed signal and other input and output signal functions need to be
adjusted according to the actual control logic.
 This macro can meet the requirements of most lifting application cases, and the performance
parameters have been optimized and do not need to be adjusted in most cases. If an exception
occurs, see the function parameter chapter for adjustment or contact the technical support.
- 42 -
5.2 Commissioning lifting in closed-loop vector control

5.2.1 Wiring
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
V M
S S GD350-19 VFD 3~
W
T T PE
Lifting S1 PWR
Lowering S2 PGND
Graded reference terminal 1 S3 A1+
Graded reference terminal 2 S4 A1- PG
Graded reference terminal 3 HDIA B1+
Graded reference terminal 4 HDIB B1-
Fault reset S5 Z1+
Brake feedback S6 Z1-
S7
S8
COM
RO1A Brake
PW RO1B output
RO1C
+24V
RO2A
VFD fault
RO2B
output
RO2C
Y1 Brake failure
output
CME
HDO Brake check
reminding/
CME overload
COM reminding
+24V
Figure 5.2 Wiring for lifting in closed-loop vector control
and output terminal functions according to the actual wiring after selecting the closed-loop vector
5.2.2 Commissioning procedure for hoisting-up closed-loop vector control
2. Set P00.18=1.
3. Set motor nameplate parameters in P02.
5. Set P90.00=1, set the encoder type parameter P20.00, set the pulse per resolution (PPR)
- 43 -
parameter P20.01. Perform low-speed upward running. Check the value of P18.00. If the value is
negative, the encoder direction is reversed. Then you only need to set P20.02=0x001.
6. Set P90.00=2 to select the lifting closed-loop vector application macro.

Function
code
P00.00 Speed control mode 3 Closed-loop vector control mode
Command running
P00.01 1 Terminal
channel
P00.04 90.00Hz
frequency
frequency command
P00.14 Carrier frequency setting 1.5kHz
Starting frequency of
P01.01 0.00Hz
direct start
Hold time of starting
P01.02 0.3s
frequency
Current loop integral
P03.10 3500
coefficient I
P05.06 Function of HDIB terminal 80 Graded reference terminal 4
P06.00 HDO output type 1 Open collector output
P06.01 Y output selection 57 Brake failure alarm
P06.02 HDO output selection 56 Brake detection reminding
P11.08 0x021
P11.11 Underload pre-alarm 10%
- 44 -
Function
code
detection level
Speed deviation detection
P11.14 20.0%
value
Speed deviation detection Speed deviation protection can be
P11.15 2.0s
time performed.
P25.02 Function of S6 terminal 75 Brake feedback signal
logic
reference 0
reference 1
reference 2
reference 3
reference 4
P90.14 50.0% Corresponding to the motor rated torque
torque
P90.15 30.0% Corresponding to the motor rated torque
torque
P90.16 0.20Hz
frequency
P90.17 0.20Hz
frequency
P90.18 0.50Hz
frequency
P90.19 1.00Hz
frequency
P90.20 0.000s
brake release
P90.22 0.500s
release
P90.24 0.000s
brake closing
- 45 -
Function
code
P90.26 0.100s
closing
P90.30 2.000s
detection time
Enabling the monitoring Enable the brake current monitoring (and
P90.31 1
on brake status brake feedback detection)
P91.08 2 Constant power speed limit
function selection
Zero servo protection
P93.02 1 Zero servo input slows down
mode
parameters.
 If you perform empty-load commissioning, set P90.00 to 2 (Lifting in closed-loop vector control)
first, set P11.08 to 0x000 to disable underload protection, and set P90.14 and P90.15 to 0 to
prevent the torque verification fault reporting caused by empty load. In addition, if no external
braking resistor is connected, you need to increase the ACC/DEC time to prevent the bus
overvoltage fault reporting caused by too fast stop.
addition, set P90.31 to 1. Since the closed-loop mode is used, the brake current monitoring
function is automatically enabled after the setting, and you can set P90.34 to set whether the
reference speed is used if the brake status is incorrect. If there is no brake feedback signal, set
P90.31 to 0 to prevent the misreporting of a brake feedback fault.
 In closed-loop mode, brake slip verifying is enabled by default. If you need to check the running
status of the VFD without a brake, set P93.01 to 0 to disable brake slip verifying.
inconsistent with the hook lifting/lowering, swap any two phase wires of VFD output terminals U,
V, and W.
 This macro can meet the requirements of most tower crane lifting application cases, and the
performance parameters have been optimized and do not need to be adjusted in most cases. If
an exception occurs, see the function parameter chapter for adjustment or contact the technical
support.
- 46 -
5.3 Commissioning horizontal moving

5.3.1 Wiring
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
V M
S S GD350-19 VFD 3~
W
T T PE
Forward running S1 RO1A VFD fault

Reverse running S2
RO1B output
Multi-step speed
setting terminal 1 S3
Multi-step speed
setting terminal 2 S4 RO1C
Fault reset HDIA
Coasting to stop HDIB RO2A
Brake
S5 RO2B output
S6 RO2C
S7
S8
COM Y1
PW CME
HDO
+24V
CME
COM
+24V
Figure 5.3 Wiring for horizontal moving
and output terminal functions according to the actual wiring after selecting the horizontal moving
application macro.
2. Set P00.18=1.
4. Set P90.00=3 to select the horizontal moving function macro.
- 47 -
Function
code
P00.01 Command running channel 1 Terminal
P00.04 60.00Hz
frequency
P00.06 6 Multi-step speed running
frequency command
P01.01 0.20Hz
start
P01.15 Stop speed 0.10 Hz
P05.03 Function of S3 terminal 16 Multi-step speed setting terminal 1
P05.05 Function of HDIA terminal 7 Fault reset
P05.06 Function of HDIB terminal 6 Coasting to stop
P10.02 Multi-step speed 0 10.0% Corresponding to the max. frequency
Enable software and hardware
P11.05 Current limit selection 0x11
current limit.
P11.26 Enabling special functions 1
P90.04 Enabling brake-oriented logic 1 The brake is controlled by the VFD.
P90.12 50.0%
current current
P90.13 50.0%
current current
parameters.
- 48 -
 If you perform empty-load commissioning, set P90.00 to 3 (Horizontal moving function macro),
the torque verification fault reporting caused by empty load.
inconsistent with the hook lifting/lowering, swap any two phase wires of VFD output terminals U,
V, and W.
 This macro can meet the requirements of most horizontal moving application cases, and the
support.
5.4 Commissioning tower crane rotating
5.4.1 Wiring
Braking resistor
(+) PB
T T W M
S S GD350-19 VFD V
R R U 3~
M
RO1A 3~
Forward
running S1 RO1B
Reverse running S2 VFD fault
Multi-step speed setting terminal 1 S3 RO1C
Multi-step speed setting terminal 2 S4
Multi-step speed setting terminal 3 HDIA RO2A
Fault reset HDIB RO2B Zero-speed
Coasting to stop S5 running
S6 RO2C
S7
Y1
S8
COM CME
HDO
PW
CME
+24V COM
+24V
Figure 5.4 Wiring for tower crane rotating
and output terminal functions according to the actual wiring after selecting the tower crane rotating
application macro.
2. Set P00.18=1.
- 49 -
4. Set P90.00=4 to select the tower crane rotating function macro.

Function
code
Setting channel of A frequency
command
P00.11 ACC time 1 10.0s Low-frequency ACC time
P00.12 DEC time 1 18.0s Low-frequency DEC time
P01.01 1.50Hz
start
P01.15 Stop speed 1.00Hz
P05.05 Function of HDIA terminal 18 Multi-step speed setting terminal 3
P05.06 Function of HDIB terminal 7 Fault reset
P06.04 RO2 output selection 9 Running in zero speed
Output terminal polarity
P06.05 0X04 The polarity of RO1 is reversed.
selection
P08.00 ACC time 2 15.0s High-frequency ACC time
P08.01 DEC time 2 13.0s High-frequency DEC time
Switching frequency of ACC/DEC time 2 is used when P08.19
P08.19 16.00Hz
ACC/DEC time is exceeded.
P25.01 Function of S5 terminal 6 Coasting to stop
Extension card input terminal
P25.10 0x01 The S5 terminal polarity is negative.
polarity
parameters.
- 50 -
 If you perform empty-load commissioning, set P90.00 to 4 (Tower crane rotating function macro),
and set P11.08 to 0x000 to disable underload protection.
 During onsite commissioning, if the VFD terminal signal forward/reverse running command is
inconsistent with the load running direction, adjust any two phase sequences of VFD output
terminals U, V, and W.
 This macro can meet the requirements of most tower crane rotating application cases, and the
support.
5.5 Commissioning the conical motor function
5.5.1 Wiring
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R U
R
V M
S S GD350-19 VFD 3~
W
T T
PE
FWD S1 RO1A
REV
S2 VFD fault
RO1B output
Multi-step setting terminal 1 S3
Coasting to stop S4 RO1C
Fault reset HDIA
COM
PW
+24V
Figure 5.5 Wiring for the conical motor
and output terminal functions according to the actual wiring after selecting the conical motor
application macro.
2. Set P00.18=1.
- 51 -
4. Set P90.00=5 to select the conical motor function macro.

Table 5.1 Parameter settings
Function
code
Setting channel of A frequency
command
Time taken to accelerate from
P00.11 ACC time 1 3
0Hz to the max. frequency.
Time taken to decelerate from
P00.12 DEC time 1 2
the max. frequency to 0Hz.
P01.01 Starting frequency of direct start 2.00 2.00Hz
Multi-step speed setting
P05.03 Function of S3 terminal 16
terminal
P05.04 Function of S4 terminal 6 Coasting to stop
P05.05 Function of HDIA terminal 7 Fault reset
P06.03 RO1 output selection 5 Fault output
50% of the max. output
P10.02 Multi-step speed 0 50.0%
frequency P00.03
100% of the max. output
P10.04 Multi-step speed 1 100.0%
frequency P00.03
Enabling the conical motor Enable the conical motor
P91.00 1
function function
 If the direction is incorrect when the heavy load runs upward during lifting in forward running
mode, adjust any two phase sequences of VFD output terminals U, V, and W but not change the
value of P00.13.
 The starting frequency cannot be set too low. During onsite commissioning, ensure the starting
frequency is set properly so that the brake can be turned on, and ensure the brake has been
turned on before running.
 The lifting ACC time can be 3s at most. If the ACC time is too long, the brake may not be opened.
 The rated voltage must be at least 380V. If the grid rated voltage is too low (lower than 85% Ue),
the brake cannot be opened; if the voltage is too low, the speed cannot be boosted.
- 52 -
 When the conical motor performs constant-power variable-frequency speed regulation (boost),
the max. rotational speed cannot exceed 1.2 times the rated speed (60Hz). Otherwise, the motor
cannot run properly since the pressure spring cannot be pushed due to the axial magnetic pull
force reduce, and therefore the VFD encounters the current limit or overcurrent fault.
5.6 Commissioning lifting in space voltage vector control
5.6.1 Wiring
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
V M
S S GD350-19 VFD 3~
W
T T PE
Lifting S1 RO1A Brake

Lowering S2
RO1B output
Graded reference terminal 1 S3
Graded reference terminal 2 S4 RO1C
Graded reference terminal 3 HDIA RO2A
Brake feedback HDIB VFD fault
RO2B output
Fault reset S5
RO2C
COM
PW
+24V
Figure 5.6 Wiring for lifting in space voltage vector control
and output terminal functions according to the actual wiring after selecting the space voltage vector
2. Set P00.18=1 to restore to the factory settings.
3. Set P02 motor parameters.
4. Set P90.00=9 to select the space voltage vector controlled lifting function macro.
- 53 -
Note: In closed-loop mode, when the encoder is abnormal, set P90.00=9 to switch to the space
voltage vector control mode. The two modes are different in the brake timing sequence logic, and
therefore you need to adjust P01, P04, and P90 parameters accordingly.
Function
code
P00.04 90.00Hz
frequency
frequency command
P04.01 Torque boost of motor 1 0.1% Disable automatic torque boost.
Torque boost cut-off of
P04.02 0.1%
motor 1
Enabling I/F mode for
P04.40 1 Enable the I/F mode.
asynchronous motor 1
P05.06 Function of HDIB terminal 75 Brake feedback
P11.08 0x021
Underload pre-alarm
P11.11 15%
detection level
logic
reference 0
- 54 -
Function
code
reference 1
reference 2
reference 3
P90.12 50.0%
current current
P90.13 50.0%
current current
P90.16 1.50Hz
frequency
P90.17 1.50Hz
frequency
P90.18 1.50Hz
frequency
P90.19 1.50Hz
frequency
Enabling the monitoring on Enable the brake current monitoring
P90.31 1
brake status (and brake feedback detection)
parameters.
 If you perform empty-load commissioning, set P90.00 to 9 (Lifting in space voltage vector control),
the torque verification fault reporting caused by empty load. In addition, if no external braking
resistor is connected, you need to increase the ACC/DEC time to prevent the bus overvoltage
fault reporting caused by too fast stop.
addition, set P90.31 to 1. If there is no brake feedback signal, set P90.31 to 0 to prevent the
misreporting of a brake feedback fault.
- 55 -
 This macro can meet the requirements of most lifting application cases, and the performance
parameters have been optimized and do not need to be adjusted in most cases. If an exception
occurs, see the function parameter chapter for adjustment or contact the technical support.
5.7 Commissioning winching in closed-loop vector control (applicable to
lifting in mineral wells and winches)
5.7.1 Wiring
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
V M
S S GD350-19 VFD 3~
W
T T
PE
Lifting S1
S2
Lowering
Fault reset S3
+24V
Upward position limit S4 COM
PG
HDIA
HDIB
COM
PW
+24V
RO1A
Brake output
+10V RO1B
AI1 RO1C
GND
RO2A
VFD fault
RO2B output
RO2C
Figure 5.7 Wiring for winching in closed-loop vector control (recommended analog reference 0V–10V)
- 56 -
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
V M
S S GD350-19 VFD 3~
W
T T PE
Lifting S1
Lowering S2
Fault reset S3 +24V
Upward position limit S4 COM PG
HDIA
HDIB
COM
PW
+24V
RO1A Brake
+10V RO1B output
AI2 RO1C
-10V (externally RO2A

connected) VFD fault
RO2B output
RO2C
Figure 5.8 Wiring for winching in closed-loop vector control (using analog reference -10V–10V)
2. Set P00.18=1.
5. Set P90.00=11 to select the closed-loop controlled winching function macro.

Table 5.2 Parameter settings for the closed-loop vector controlled winching application macro
(recommended analog reference 0V–10V)
Function
code
Command running
P00.01 1 Terminal
channel
P00.06 1 AI1
frequency command
Setting channel of B
P00.07 0 Keypad
frequency command
- 57 -
Function
code
P00.11 ACC time 1 10.0s
P05.03 Function of S3 terminal 64 Upward position limit
P05.24 Lower limit value of AI1 0.20V 0.00V–P05.26. Adjust the value
according to the actual situation.
P05.28 Input filter time of AI1 0.100s 0.000s–10.000s
HDIA high-speed pulse
P05.38 2 Input through the encoder
input function
HDIB high-speed pulse
input function
Measuring the speed through HDIA
P20.15 Speed measuring mode 1
and HDIB
logic
Enabling forward torque
Enable forward torque for
P90.05 for reverse-running 0x01
reverse-running start/stop
start/stop
P90.14 Forward brake release 50.0% Corresponding to the motor rated
torque torque
P90.15 Reverse brake release 50.0% Corresponding to the motor rated
torque torque
P90.16 1.00Hz
frequency
P90.17 1.00Hz
frequency
P90.18 1.00Hz
frequency
P90.19 1.00Hz
frequency
- 58 -
Table 5.3 Parameter settings for the closed-loop vector controlled winching application macro (using
analog reference -10V–10V)
Function
code
Command running
P00.01 1 Terminal
channel
P00.06 2 AI2
frequency command
P00.07 0 Keypad
frequency command
P00.11 ACC time 1 10.0s
P05.29 Lower limit value of AI2 -10.00V -10.00V–P05.31
P05.30 Corresponding setting of 100.0% -300.0%–300.0%
lower limit of AI2
P05.31 Intermediate value 1 of -0.10V P05.29–P05.33
AI2
intermediate value 1 of
AI2
P05.33 Intermediate value 2 of 0.10V P05.31–P05.35
AI2
AI2
P05.35 Upper limit value of AI2 10.00V P05.33–10.00V
upper limit of AI2
HDIA high-speed pulse
input function
HDIB high-speed pulse
input function
P20.15 Speed measuring mode 1 Measuring the speed through HDIA
- 59 -
Function
code
and HDIB
logic
start/stop
torque torque
torque torque
P90.16 1.00Hz
frequency
P90.17 1.00Hz
frequency
P90.18 1.00Hz
frequency
P90.19 1.00Hz
frequency
 If you perform empty-load commissioning, set P90.00 to 11, and set P90.14 and P90.15 to 0,
preventing the VFD from reporting the torque verification fault tPF due to empty load. If no
braking resistor is externally connected, increase the ACC/DEC time, preventing the VFD from
reporting the bus overvoltage fault due to fast stop.
 This macro can meet the requirements of most closed-loop vector controlled winching application
cases, and the performance parameters have been optimized and do not need to be adjusted in
most cases. If an exception occurs, see the function parameter chapter for adjustment or contact
the technical support.
- 60 -
5.8 Commissioning winching in open-loop vector control (applicable to lifting

in mineral wells and winches)
5.8.1 Wiring
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
GD350-19 VFD V M
S S 3~
W
T T PE
FWD running S1 RO1A

S2 Brake
REV running RO1B
S3 output
Upward position limit
Fault reset S4 RO1C
COM
RO2A
PW
RO2B VFD fault
+24V output
+10V RO2C
AI1
GND
Figure 5.9 Wiring for winching in open-loop vector control (recommended analog reference 0V–10V)
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
GD350-19 VFD V M
S S 3~
W
T T PE
FWD running S1 RO1A

S2 Brake
REV running RO1B
S3 output
Upward position limit
Fault reset S4 RO1C
COM
RO2A
PW
RO2B VFD fault
+24V output
+10V RO2C
AI2
-10V (externally
connected)
Figure 5.10 Wiring for winching in open-loop vector control (using analog reference -10V–10V)
Note: If the onsite function terminals are inconsistent with the terminals shown in the wiring diagrams,
select the open-loop vector controlled winching function macro and adjust the input and output
- 61 -
terminal functions according to the actual wiring. The recommended analog reference is 0V–10V.
2. Set P00.18=1.
5. Set P90.00=12 to select the open-loop controlled winching function macro.

Table 5.4 Parameter settings for the open-loop vector controlled winching application macro
(recommended analog reference 0V–10V)
Function
code
P00.00 Speed control mode 1 SVC 1
Command running
P00.01 1 Terminal
channel
P00.06 1 AI1
frequency command
P00.07 0 Keypad
frequency command
P00.11 ACC time 1 10.0s
P05.24 Lower limit value of AI1 0.20V 0.00V–P05.26. Adjust the value
logic
start/stop
torque torque
- 62 -
Function
code
torque torque
P90.16 2.00Hz
frequency
P90.17 2.00Hz
frequency
P90.18 2.00Hz
frequency
P90.19 2.00Hz
frequency
Table 5.5 Parameter settings for the open-loop vector controlled winching application macro (using
analog reference -10V–10V)
Function
code
P00.00 Speed control mode 1 SVC 1
Command running
P00.01 1 Terminal
channel
P00.06 2 AI2
frequency command
P00.07 0 Keypad
frequency command
P00.11 ACC time 1 10.0s
P05.29 Lower limit value of AI2 -10.00V -10.00V–P05.31
lower limit of AI2
P05.31 Intermediate value 1 of -0.10V P05.29–P05.33
AI2
AI2
P05.33 Intermediate value 2 of 0.10V P05.31–P05.35
AI2
- 63 -
Function
code
AI2
P05.35 Upper limit value of AI2 10.00V P05.33–10.00V
upper limit of AI2
logic
start/stop
torque torque
torque torque
P90.16 2.00Hz
frequency
P90.17 2.00Hz
frequency
P90.18 2.00Hz
frequency
P90.19 2.00Hz
frequency
 If you perform empty-load commissioning, set P90.00 to 12, and set P90.14 and P90.15 to 0,
preventing the VFD from reporting the torque verification fault tPF due to empty load. If no
braking resistor is externally connected, increase the ACC/DEC time, preventing the VFD from
reporting the bus overvoltage fault due to fast stop.
 This macro can meet the requirements of most open-loop vector controlled winching application
cases, and the performance parameters have been optimized and do not need to be adjusted in
most cases. If an exception occurs, see the function parameter chapter for adjustment or contact
- 64 -
the technical support.

5.9 Commissioning the brake function
5.9.1 Commissioning brake in space voltage vector control
1. Set P90.04 to 1 to enable the brake function.
2. Set relay brake output. If RO2 is connected to the braking contactor, set P06.04 to 49.
3. If the brake contactor has the feedback function, connect the brake feedback wire to an input
terminal, for example, S3. Then set P05.03 to 75 indicating brake feedback signal. Set P90.31
to 1 to enable brake feedback detection.
4. In lifting application, enable the I/F function, set P04.40 to 1, set P04.41, and set P04.52. In
horizontal moving application, you can choose whether to enable the I/F function.
5. Set P90.12 (Forward brake release current) and P90.13 (Reverse brake release current) to
ensure there is enough torque before the brake is opened.
6. Set the brake timing sequence, including the forward/reverse brake release frequency,
forward/reverse brake closing frequency, delay before forward brake release (T1), delay before
reverse brake release (T5), delay after forward brake release (T2), delay after reverse brake
release (T6), delay before forward brake closing (T3), delay before reverse brake closing (T7),
delay after forward brake closing (T4), and delay after reverse brake closing (T8).
Note: If delay before reverse brake release (T5), delay after reverse brake release (T6), delay before
reverse brake closing (T7), and delay after reverse brake closing (T8) are set to 0, the delay
parameters for forwarding running are used.
7. Perform trial running and check whether the brake timing sequence is correct.
- 65 -
Space voltage vector control mode
FWD/REV
running
command
Set
frequency
End frequency for

exiting I/F mode T3/T7 T4/T8
(P04.50) T1/T5 T2/T6
Starting frequency
for exiting I/F FWD/REV brake
FWD/REV
mode (P04.44) closing frequency
brake P90.16/
release P90.17 P90.18/
Output frequency P90.19
frequency Torque
verifying is
I/F FWD/REV OK
current setpoint
(P04.41/P04.51)
Torque verification
current
(P90.12/P90.13)
Output current
Release
Brake Close Close

opening
command
Open
Close
Close
Brake action
Brake
feedback
T1: Delay before forward brake release P90.20 T3: Delay before forward brake closing P90.24
T2: Delay after forward brake release P90.22 T4: Delay after forward brake closing P90.26
T5: Delay before reverse brake release P90.21 T7: Delay before reverse brake closing P90.25
T6: Delay after reverse brake release P90.23 T8: Delay after reverse brake closing P90.27
8. Adjust braking comfortability, which can be implemented by using the following methods.
A. In I/F mode, you can decrease the brake release frequency and brake closing frequency and
adjust the T1–T8 delay parameters in the timing sequence so that the impact is reduced. Note that
the brake release frequency and brake closing frequency are greater than P01.01 (Starting frequency)
and P01.15 (Stop speed) in most cases.
B. During the reverse-running stop, you can apply the forward torque, that is, for reverse-running start,
you can perform forward brake release and then perform reverse running; for reverse-running stop,
you can switch reverse running to forward running, close the brake, and then perform forward-running
stop. This ensures there is no slip is felt during reverse start or stop. Forward torque is enabled by
setting P90.05. The timing sequence is as follows:
- 66 -
(FWD/REV)
Running
command
FWD
T1 T2 T3 T4
brake Frequency of
release grade 1 or 2 FWD brake
frequency closing
FWD output P90.16 frequency
frequency Torque verifying is OK P90.18
Close Release Close

Brake control
signal
REV
T5 T6 T7 T8
brake
REV brake
release
closing
frequency
REV output frequency
P90.17
frequency P90.19
Torque verifying is OK
Frequency of
grade 1 or 2
Brake
feedback
signal
Brake
action
C. During the stop process, you can enable the maintenance frequency so that the device runs at a
low speed within a small period of time before the stop, since impact may be caused if the device
directly stops at a high speed. The maintenance frequency for stop can be enabled by setting P90.29
to a value greater than 0. You can set the maintenance frequency through P90.30. The timing
sequence is as follows:
- 67 -
FWD Run
running
command
Frequency
T1 T2 of grade 1 T3 T4
FWD or 2 FWD
brake
Maintenance
frequency
T0 brake
release closing
FWD output frequency
frequency
frequency
Torque
verification OK
Brake Close Release Close

control
signal
T0: Maintenance frequency hold time for DEC stop P90.29
Maintenance frequency: Maintenance frequency for DEC stop P90.28
FWD brake release/closing frequency: P90.16/P90.18
D. If two segments of ACC/DEC time are used, you can increase ACC/DEC time at low frequency
running to ensure smoothness at low-frequency start or stop. You can set P08.19 (Switching
frequency of ACC/DEC time) to a value greater than 0 to enable two segments of ACC/DEC time and
then the ACC/DEC time 1 (P00.11 and P00.12) and ACC/DEC time 2 (P08.00 and P08.01) are used.
Frequency f
Frequency
of grade 1
or 2
P08.19
0
t
P00.11 P08.00 P08.01
P00.11: ACC time 1 P00.12: DEC time 1 P00.12

P08.00: ACC time 2 P08.01: DEC time 2
P08.19: ACC/DEC time switchover frequency point
- 68 -
5.9.2 Commissioning brake in open/closed-loop vector control
1. Set P90.04 to 1 to enable the brake function.
2. Set relay brake output. If RO1 is connected to the brake contactor, set P06.03 to 49.
3. If the brake contactor has the feedback function, connect the brake feedback wire to an input
terminal, for example, S6. Then set P25.02 to 75 indicating brake feedback signal. Set P90.31
to 1 to enable brake feedback detection. In closed-loop mode, the brake current monitoring
function is enabled automatically. If a brake exception occurs, a protection method is applied
depending on the present current and the value of P90.34. Skip this step if the braking
contactor has no feedback function.
4. Set P90.14 (Forward brake release torque) and P90.13 (Reverse brake release torque) to
ensure there is enough torque before the brake is opened. You do not need to set P90.12 and
P90.13. In closed-loop mode, you can set P93.00 (Brake slip speed threshold) to check
whether the braking torque is enough.
5. Set the brake timing sequence, including the forward/reverse brake release frequency,
forward/reverse brake closing frequency, delay before forward brake release (T1), delay before
reverse brake release (T5), delay after forward brake release (T2), delay after reverse brake
release (T6), delay before forward brake closing (T3), delay before reverse brake closing (T7),
delay after forward brake closing (T4), and delay after reverse brake closing (T8).
6. In closed-loop mode, you can decrease the brake release frequency and brake closing
frequency and adjust the T1–T8 delay parameters in the timing sequence.
7. Perform trial running and check whether the brake timing sequence is correct.
- 69 -
Open/closed loop vector control mode
FWD/REV
running
command
Set
frequency
T3/T7 T4/T8
T1/T5 T2/T6
FWD/REV
brake closing
FWD/REV frequency
P90.16/
brake release P90.18/
Output frequency P90.17 P90.19
frequency Torque
verifying is
OK
Current upper
limit
Torque verification
current
(P90.12/P90.13)
Output current
Torque upper
limit
FWD/REV brake
release torque
(P90.14/P90.15)
Torque current
Release
Brake Close Close

opening
command
Open
Close
Brake Close
action
Brake
feedback
5.9.3 Description about torque verification and brake slip

After the VFD runs, the VFD output current or torque is checked before the brake release. If the VFD
output current or torque is greater than the output current or torque setting (P90.12 or P90.15) and
the situation lasts 60ms, torque verification succeeds. If torque verification does not pass after the
- 70 -
torque verification time P90.30 is reached, the torque verification fault tPF is reported.
Torque (%)
Torque verification
delay 60ms
Torque
verification time
P90.30
Frequency (Hz)
In closed-loop mode, if the brake slip fault delay P93.01 is greater than 0, the brake slip detection
function is enabled. During torque verification, if the motor (encoder) speed exceeds the set brake slip
speed threshold P93.00 and the situation duration exceeds P93.01, the brake failure fault bE is
reported.
The torque verification and brake slip flowchart is as follows:
- 71 -
Start
Enable brake
control
Brake system starts

checking
Torque reference
Brake slip speed limit
reference
N Motor torque > N

Torque Motor speed <
verification Slip speed limit?
reference?
Y Y
Torque verification Torque verification

Torque slip pass Brake slip fault delay
fault detection time pass reached
reached
Reports torque Reports brake slip

verification fault fault
Torque verification pass
Torque slip pass
Brake system allows to

open the brake
5.9.4 Commissioning parameters

Function
Name Description Default
code
0–1
0: The brake is controlled by an
P90.04 Enabling brake-oriented logic external controller. 0
1: The brake is controlled by the
VFD.
0x00–0x11
Ones place: indicates whether to
enable forward torque for
Enabling forward torque for reverse-running start
P90.05 0x00
reverse-running start/stop 0: Disable
(The reverse-running start direction
complies with the command.)
1: Enable
- 72 -
Function
code
(The reverse-running start direction is
always the forward-running
direction.)
Tens place: indicates whether to
enable forward torque for
reverse-running stop
0: Disable
(The reverse-running stop direction
complies with the command.)
1: Enable
(The reverse-running stop direction is
always the forward-running
direction.)
0.0–200.0% (of the motor rated
P90.12 Forward brake release current 0.0%
current)
P90.13 Reverse brake release current 0.0%
current)
P90.14 Forward brake release torque 0.0%
torque)
P90.15 Reverse brake release torque 0.0%
torque)
P90.16 0.00–20.00Hz 3.00Hz
frequency
P90.17 0.00–20.00Hz 3.00Hz
frequency
P90.18 0.00–20.00Hz 3.00Hz
frequency
P90.19 0.00–20.00Hz 3.00Hz
frequency
Delay before forward brake
P90.20 0.000–5.000s 0.300s
release
0.000–5.000s
Delay before reverse brake
P90.21 The value 0 indicates the delay 0.000s
release
before forward brake release is used.
P90.22 0.000–5.000s 0.300s
release
P90.23 Delay after reverse brake 0.000–5.000s 0.000s
- 73 -
Function
code
release The value 0 indicates the delay after
forward brake release is used.
Delay before forward brake
P90.24 0.000–5.000s 0.300s
closing
0.000–5.000s
Delay before reverse brake
P90.25 The value 0 indicates the delay 0.000s
closing
before forward brake closing is used.
P90.26 0.000–5.000s 0.300s
closing
0.000–5.000s
Delay after reverse brake
P90.27 The value 0 indicates the delay after 0.000s
closing
forward brake closing is used.
P90.28 Maintenance frequency for stop 0.00–50.00Hz 5.00Hz
Maintenance frequency hold
P90.29 0.00–5.000S 0.000s
time for stop
P90.30 0.00–10.000S 3.000s
detection time
0–1
0: Disable
1: Enable the brake current
monitoring (and brake feedback
detection)
After the brake is enabled, the brake
status monitoring function can be
enabled.
In open-loop mode: If a brake
feedback exception occurs, a fault is
Enabling the monitoring on
P90.31 reported after the brake feedback 0
brake status
exception delay P90.32.
In closed-loop mode: During the stop,
if a brake feedback exception occurs,
a fault is reported after the brake
feedback exception delay P90.32.
During running, if a brake feedback
exception occurs, the current is
monitored after the brake feedback
exception delay P90.32. If the
present current is less than the
- 74 -
Function
code
monitored current, it is considered
that the brake is not closed, and the
action specified by P90.34 is
performed. If the present current is
greater than the brake monitoring
current threshold, an action is
performed depending on the actual
frequency. If the actual frequency is
lower than the forward braking
frequency in forward running or the
actual frequency is lower than the
reverse braking frequency, it is
considered that the brake has been
closed, and a fault needs to be
reported.
Brake feedback exception delay
P90.32 0.00–20.000S 1.000s
(brake feedback detection time)
0.0%–200.0%
P90.33 Brake monitoring current 100.0% corresponding to the motor 100.0%
rated current
0–1
0: Disable (Report the brake
Enabling speed reference under
P90.34 feedback fault directly) 0
brake status error
1: Enable (Report the brake feedback
alarm simultaneously)
Speed reference under brake
P90.35 0.00–50.00Hz 5.00Hz
status error
0–1
Brake selection for
P90.37 0: Perform switchover without braking 0
forward/reverse switchover
1: Perform switchover with braking
P93.00 Brake slip speed threshold 1.00–5.00Hz 1.00Hz
0.000–5.000s
The value 0 indicates brake slip is not
P93.01 Brake slip 0.500s
detected, while a non-zero value
indicates brake slip is detected.
- 75 -
5.10 Commissioning the master/slave function

5.10.1 Master/slave function description
Master/slave control is classified into power balance and speed synchronization.
1. Master/slave power balance
Master/slave power balance is a control method that distributes the load between two or more motors
to achieve even balance. When a transmission device is driven by two or more motors, and two or
more motor shafts are coupled with each other through gears, chains or conveyor belts, it is
necessary to distribute the load between the motors through the master/slave control method to meet
the control accuracy requirements.
High-speed
brake
Fan Fan
Lifting motor 1 Lifting motor 2
Low-speed Low-speed
brake brake
Figure 5.11 Mechanical structure diagram 1
In general, if multiple VFDs control multiple motors through belt connection, it is considered as flexible
connection (or soft connection). When flexible connection is applied, generally, the slave adopts the
speed control mode, and then the droop function is used to achieve better power balance
performance. Therefore, in the terminal master/slave mode, master/slave mode a is recommended; in
the CAN communication master/slave mode, master/slave mode 0 is recommended.
In general, if multiple VFDs control multiple motors through shaft, gear, or chain connection, it is
considered as rigid connection (or hard connection). When rigid connection is applied, generally, the
slave adopts the torque control mode for better power balance performance. Therefore, in the
terminal master/slave mode, master/slave mode b is recommended; in the CAN communication
master/slave mode, master/slave mode 1 is recommended.
- 76 -
2. Master/slave speed synchronization
Master/slave speed synchronization is used for the speed synchronization between two motors.
Using the function requires that both motors have the encoder installed, and the VFD has the encoder
pulse counting function. The mechanical structure is shown in the following figure:
Low-speed
brake
High-speed
brake High-speed
brake
Fan
Fan
Lifting motor 1
Lifting motor 2
Figure 5.12 Mechanical structure diagram 2
Since master/slave speed synchronization requires speed consistency, the VFD must use the
closed-loop mode. Therefore, only master/slave mode 4 in the CAN communication master/slave
mode can be used.
5.10.2 Terminal master/slave function
A. Using the VFD high-speed pulse input terminal HDIA and high-speed pulse output terminal
HDO to implement simplified master/slave control
The wiring diagram is as follows:
Master Slave
GD350-19 VFD GD350-19 VFD
HDO HDIA
COM COM
1. Terminal master/slave mode a
The master adopts the speed control mode and sends the ramp frequency to the slave HDIA terminal
through the HDO terminal. The slave adopts the speed control mode and the frequency reference is
set by the HDIA terminal. Then, adjust reduction ratio of droop control P08.30 of the salve to meet
- 77 -
power balance.
Master setting parameters:
Function
Name Description Setting
code
0: Open collector high-speed pulse output
P06.00 HDO output type 0
1: Open collector output
HDO high-speed pulse 0–47
P06.16 2
output 2: Ramp reference frequency
Slave setting parameters:
Function
code
Setting channel of A 0–15
P00.06 4
frequency command 4: High speed pulse HDIA
0x00–0x11
Ones: HDIA input type
0: HDIA is high-speed pulse input
P05.00 HDI input type 1: HDIA is digital input 0x00

Tens: HDIB input type
0: HDIB is high-speed pulse input
1: HDIB is digital input

Reduction ratio of
P08.30 0.00–50.00Hz 1.00hz
droop control
2. Terminal master/slave mode b
The master adopts the speed control mode and sends the torque current to the slave HDIA terminal
through the HDO terminal. The slave adopts the torque control mode and the torque reference is set
by the HDIA terminal.
Master setting parameters:
Function
code
0–47
HDO high-speed pulse
P06.16 22: Torque current (relative to three times the 22
output
motor rated current)
Slave setting parameters:
- 78 -
Function
code
Torque setting mode 0–12
P03.11 5
selection 5: Set through HDIA
0x00–0x11

B. Using the VFD analog input terminal (for example, AI1) and analog output terminal (for
example, AO1) to implement simplified master/slave control
The wiring diagram is as follows:
Master Slave
AO1 AI1
GND GND
1. Terminal master/slave mode a
The master adopts the speed control mode and sends the ramp frequency to the slave AI1 terminal
through the AO1 terminal. The slave adopts the speed control mode and the frequency reference is
set by the AI1 terminal. Then, adjust reduction ratio of droop control P08.30 of the salve to meet
power balance.
Master parameters:
Function
code
0–47
P06.14 AO1 output selection 2
2: Ramp reference frequency
- 79 -
Slave parameters:
Function
code
Setting channel of A 0–15
P00.06 1
frequency command 1: AI1
Reduction ratio of
P08.30 0.00–50.00Hz 1.00hz
droop control
2. Terminal master/slave mode b
The master adopts the speed control mode and sends the torque current to the slave AI1 terminal
through the AO1 terminal. The slave adopts the torque control mode and the torque reference is set
by the AI1 terminal.
Master parameters:
Function
code
0–47
P06.14 AO1 output selection 22: Torque current (relative to three times the 22
Slave parameters:
Function
code
Torque setting mode 0–12
P03.11 2
selection 2: AI1
Note: When the terminal master/slave function is used, commissioning is unrelated to P28.
5.10.3 Communication master/slave function
The VFDs can implement the master/slave function by using the CAN master/slave communication
card. The wiring diagram is as follows:
Master Slave
CAN CAN
master/slave CANH CANH master/slave
communication communication
CANL CANL card
card
The specific CAN communication master/slave modes are: master/slave mode 0–2 are master/slave
- 80 -
power balance modes, master/slave mode 4 is the master/slave speed synchronization mode, and
master/slave mode 3 is reserved. Master/slave mode 0 and master/slave mode 1 are used often.
1. Master/slave mode 0 (P28.02 ones place=0)
Basic principle: Both the master and slave adopt the speed control mode, and the power balance is
achieved by the droop control.
Commissioning method: Set P28.00 to 1 for the master, set P28.00 to 2 for the slave, set the ones
place of P28.02 to 0 both for the master and slave to select master/slave mode 0, and adjust P28.03
for the slave based on the actual situation.
The master sends the running command and speed to the slave through CAN communication. The
slave starts according to the command given by the master and runs according to the speed given by
the master. At this time, adjust the droop frequency of the slave P08.30 to meet the power balance
requirement.
2. Master/slave mode 1 (P28.02 ones place=1)
Basic principle: The master and slave must use the vector control mode of the same type, the master
uses speed control, and the slave will be forced to use the torque control mode.
for the slave based on the actual situation. The slave will be switched to torque mode automatically,
and therefore P03 parameters do not need to be adjusted.
The master sends the running command and speed to the slave through CAN communication. The
slave starts according to the command given by the master and runs according to the torque given by
the master.
3. Master/slave mode 2 (Combined mode, P28.02 ones place=2)
Basic principle: The slave starts in the speed control mode (master/slave mode 0) and then switches
to the torque mode (master/slave mode 1) at a certain frequency point.
and P28.04 for the slave based on the actual situation. In addition, set P28.05.
The master sends the running command, speed and torque to the slave through CAN communication.
The slave starts according to the command given by the master and runs according to the speed
given by the master if the switching frequency point is not reached but runs according to the torque
given by the master if the switching frequency point is reached.
4. Master/slave mode 3 (Reserved)
5. Master/slave mode 4 (Closed-loop master/slave mode, speed synchronization mode)
Basic principle: In the position synchronization mode, speed synchronization means to compare the
position pulse counts of the master and slave and correct the position pulse error at the slave side so
- 81 -
as to reduce the error to 0. The master and slave must be equipped with encoders. The master and
slave adopt speed control, using position pulse difference for speed correction.
Commissioning method:
Set P28.00 to 1 for the master, set P28.00 to 2 for the slave, and set the ones place of P28.02 to 4
both for the master and slave to select master/slave mode 4.
If there is a transmission ratio between the slave and master, set the P28.07, P28.08 and P28.09.
When the pulse difference between the slave and master is greater than P28.09, a fault is reported
directly. When the pulse difference between the slave and master is less than P28.08, speed
correction is not performed. When the pulse difference between the slave and master is greater than
P28.08 but less than P28.09, speed correction is performed, and adjust P28.12, P28.13, and P28.14
when necessary. In addition, you can set P28.10.
The master sends the running command, speed, and position pulse to the slave through CAN
communication. The slave performs speed correction by comparing the local position pulse with the
position pulse sent from the master.
Note: Open-loop vector control is applicable only to master/slave modes 0–3, while closed-loop
vector control is applicable to all the master/slave mode.
Function
code
0: The master/slave control is invalid

Master/slave mode
P28.00 1: This machine is a master 0
selection
2: This machine is a slave
Master/slave
0: CAN
P28.01 communication 0
1: Reserved
selection
Ones: Master/slave running mode selection
0: Master/slave mode 0
(The master and slave adopt speed control and

maintains the power balance by droop control)
Master/slave control
P28.02 0x001
mode (The master and slave must be in the same
type of vector control mode. The master is
speed control, and the slave will be forced to be
in the torque control mode.)
The slave starts in the speed mode
- 82 -
Function
code
(master/slave mode 0) first and then switches to
the torque mode at a certain frequency point
(master/slave mode 1).
3: Master/slave mode 3 (Reserved)

(Both the master and slave adopt speed
control, and the slave performs power balance
depending on the speed loop integral result of
the master.)
4: Master/slave mode 4 (Closed-loop
master/slave mode)
The master and slave must be equipped with

encoders. The master and slave adopt speed
control, using position pulse difference for
speed correction.
Tens: Slave start command source selection
0: Follow the master to start
1: Determined by P00.01
Hundreds: indicates whether to enable slave

transmitting/master receiving
0: Enable
1: Disable
P28.03 Slave speed gain 0.0–500.0% 100.0%
P28.04 Slave torque gain 0.0–500.0% 100.0%
Speed/torque mode
switching frequency
P28.05 0.00–10.00Hz 5.00
point of master/slave
mode 2
P28.06 Number of slaves 0–15 1
Master/slave
transmission unit pulse
P28.07 0.00–100.00 1.00
ratio for position
synchronization
Position 0–50000
P28.08 synchronization When the position difference is greater than 50
deviation deadzone P28.08, correction on the slave is valid.
- 83 -
Function
code
setting
0–50000
Position
When the position difference is greater than
P28.09 synchronization 1000
P28.09, a master/slave position fault is
deviation threshold
reported.
Position
P28.10 synchronization 0.0–100.0% 5.0%
regulator output limit
0–1
0: Automatic
During stop, the position synchronization pulse
Position count is automatically reset.
P28.11 synchronization pulse 1: Terminal based 0
count reset method If the input terminal selects the position
synchronization pulse count reset function, the
pulse count is automatically reset when there is
signal input.
Position
P28.12 synchronization 0.000–10.000 0.005
proportional coefficient
Position
P28.13 synchronization 0.01–80.00s 8.00s
integral time
Position
P28.14 synchronization filtering 0.00–10.00s 0.05s
time
5.11 Motor and macro switchover
5.11.1 Switchover description
The VFD provides three sets of motor parameters, and you can switch between motors through the
terminal switching function. First, you need to set the ones place of P08.31 to 0, and then use input
terminal function 35 (switching motor 1 to motor 2) and input terminal function 88 (switching to motor
3) to perform motor switchover.
In addition, application macros can be switched. Set P90.03 to set the terminal-based method of
switching application macros, and set P90.00 and P90.01 to select application macros. After the
corresponding motor is switched, the application macro is switched accordingly.
The wiring diagram for motor switching is as follows (you can see the example in section 5.11.2 for
the VFD reference terminals):
- 84 -
KM1
M1
3~
KM2
GD350-19 M2
VFD 3~
S1(Switch from motor 1 to motor 2)
S2(Switch
motor 2 from motor 1 to motor 3) KM 3
motor 2
M3
3~
Note:
 Switching from motor 1 to motor 2 takes priority over switching from motor 1 to motor 3. That is,
the signal for switching from motor 1 to motor 3 is detected only after no signal for switching from
motor 1 to motor 2 is detected.
 The motor parameters for motor 2 are separate from those for motor 3. Group P12 and group
P29 contain motor parameters for motor 2 and motor parameters for motor 3. However, motor 2
and motor 3 use similar parameters for control modes, such as VF and vector control parameters.
 During motor switching, the terminals to which application macros have assigned values cannot
be used for switching. Otherwise, if an application macro changes the value assigned to a
terminal, the value is overwritten, resulting in switching failure.
5.11.2 Description about switching from motor 2 to motor 3
The terminal input function does not contain the ability to switch from motor 2 to motor 3. To switch
from motor 2 to motor 3, remove the signal for switching from motor 1 to motor 2, and then input the
signal for switching from motor 1 to motor 3. If the signal for switching from motor 1 to motor 2 and
switching from motor 1 to motor 3 are given simultaneously, the signal for switching from motor 1 to
motor 2 is affected since the switching from motor 1 to motor 2 has higher priority (as mentioned
earlier), and motor 2 is used automatically.
Example:
If S1 is set to have terminal function 35 (for switching from motor 1 to motor 2) and S2 is set to have
terminal function 88 (for switching from motor 1 to motor 3), there are four types of combination:
S1 status S2 status Current motor Contactor switch status

status
OFF OFF Switching to motor 1 KM1 closed, KM2 opened, KM3 opened
ON OFF Switching to motor 2 KM1 opened, KM2 closed, KM3 opened
OFF ON Switching to motor 3 KM1 opened, KM2 opened, KM3 closed
ON ON Switching to motor 2 KM1 opened, KM2 closed, KM3 opened
- 85 -
5.11.3 Motor and macro switchover parameters
Function
code
0x00–0x14
Ones: Switchover channel
0: Terminal
1: MODBUS communication
2: PROFIBUS/CANopen/DeviceNet
Switchover between communication
P08.31 0x00
motor 1 and motor 2 3: Ethernet communication
4: EtherCat/Profinet communication
Tens: Whether to allow switchover during

running
0: Disallow
1: Allow
0–12
0: Common application mode
1: Lifting mode 1 (in open-loop vector control)
2: Lifting mode 2 (in closed-loop vector control)
3: Horizontal moving mode (in space voltage
vector control)
4: Tower crane rotating mode
5: Conical motor application mode
Hoisting function macro 6: User-defined function macro 1
P90.00 0
setting 7: User-defined function macro 2
8: User-defined function macro 3
9: Lifting mode 3 (in space voltage vector
control)
10: Construction hoist mode
11: Closed-loop winching (for lifting in mineral
wells and winches)
12: Open-loop winching (for lifting in mineral
wells and winches)
0–12
Terminal-switched The switched function macro is determined by
P90.01 0
function macro setting P90.03.
- 86 -
Function
code
vector control)
9: Lifting mode 3 (in space voltage vector
control)
wells and winches)
12: Open-loop winching (for lifting in mineral
wells and winches)
0–3
0: None
1: Enter the settings of user-defined function
User-defined function macro 1
P90.02 0
macro setting 2: Enter the settings of user-defined function
macro 2
macro 3
0–4
0: No function macro switchover
1: Switch from motor 1 to motor 2
Method for terminals to 2: Switch from motor 1 to motor 3
P90.03 0
switch function macros 3: Switch from the master to the slave
4: Switch from the slave to the master
5: Switch to SVC1 control (open-loop vector
control 1)
- 87 -
5.11.4 Motor and macro switchover flowchart
Start
Set P08.31 (Channel

for switchover between
motor 1 and motor 2)
N
P08.31=0 Switch through other
(Switch through communication means
terminal)?
Terminal function 35 for N Terminal function 88 for N

switching from motor 1 switching from motor 1
to motor 2 is valid? to motor 3 is valid?
Y Y
Switch to motor 2 Switch to motor 3 Switch to motor 1
N Set P90.03=1 (switch Set P90.03=2 (switch N

motor 1 to motor 2) to from motor 1 to motor
switch the function 3) to switch the
macro? function macro?
Y Y
Switched to the Switched to the

function macro function macro
specified by P90.01 specified by P90.00
- 88 -
5.11.5 User-defined macros
You can enter user-defined function macro settings through P90.02.
Function
code
0–3
0: None
User-defined function macro 1
P90.02 0
macro setting 2: Enter the settings of user-defined function
macro 2
macro 3
When P90.02=1, you will automatically enter A80.00–A80.41 to set related function codes.
Currently, there are 42 common function codes available for you to define macros. The three
user-defined macro tables are the same. The following lists A80.00–A80.41.
User-
Related
defined Setting
function Name Description Default
function range
code
list
0: SVC mode 0
1: SVC mode 1
A80.00 P00.00 Speed control mode 2: V/F control mode 0–3 2
3: Closed-loop vector control
mode
0: Keypad
Command running
A80.01 P00.01 1: Terminal 0–2 0
channel
2: Communication
0: Keypad
A80.02 P00.06 1–14: See chapter 7. 0–15 0
frequency command
15: Graded multi-step speed
A80.03 P00.11 ACC time 1 0.0–3600.0s 0.0–3600.0 10.0s
A80.04 P00.12 DEC time 1 0.0–3600.0s 0.0–3600.0 10.0s
0: Straight line
A80.05 P01.05 ACC/DEC mode 0–1 0
1: S curve
0: Decelerate to stop
A80.06 P01.08 Stop mode 0–1 0
1: Coast to stop
- 89 -
User-
Related
defined Setting
function range
code
list
Enabling I/F mode
A80.07 P04.40 for asynchronous 0–1 0–1 0
motor 1
Forward current
setting in I/F mode
A80.08 P04.41 0.0–200.0% 0.0–200.0% 120.0%
for asynchronous
motor 1
Reverse current
setting in I/F mode
A80.09 P04.52 0.0–200.0% 0.0–200.0% 120.0%
for asynchronous
motor 1
0x00–0x11
0: HDIA is high-speed pulse

input
A80.10 P05.00 HDI input type 1: HDIA is digital input 0x00–0x11 0
0: HDIB is high-speed pulse

input

Function of S3
A80.11 P05.03 0–89 0
terminal 0: No function
Function of S4 1: Forward running
A80.12 P05.04 0–89 0
terminal 2: Reverse running
Function of HDIA 3–89: See chapter 7.
A80.13 P05.05 0–89 0
terminal
A80.14 P06.01 Y output selection 0: Invalid 0–66 0
RO1 output
A80.15 P06.03 1: In running 0–66 0
selection
2: In forward running
RO2 output
A80.16 P06.04 3: In reverse running 0–66 0
selection
4–64: See chapter 7.
A80.17 P10.02 Multi-step speed 0 0.0–100.0% 0.0–100.0 0.0%
- 90 -
User-
Related
defined Setting
function range
code
list
Function of S5
A80.22 P25.01 0–89 0
terminal
Same as group P05.
Function of S6
A80.23 P25.02 0–89 0
terminal
0–1
0: The brake is controlled by
Enabling
A80.24 P90.04 an external controller. 0–1 0
brake-oriented logic
1: The brake is controlled by
the VFD.
0x00–0x11
Ones place: indicates
whether to enable forward
torque for reverse-running
start
0: Disable
(The reverse-running start
direction complies with the
command.)
1: Enable
Enabling forward (The reverse-running start
torque for direction is always the
A80.25 P90.05 0x00–0x11 0x00
reverse-running forward-running direction.)
start/stop Tens place: indicates
whether to enable forward
torque for reverse-running
stop
0: Disable
(The reverse-running stop
direction complies with the
command.)
1: Enable
(The reverse-running stop
direction is always the
- 91 -
User-
Related
defined Setting
function range
code
list
forward-running direction.)
Graded multi-step
A80.26 P90.06 0.0–100.0% 0.0–100.0 0.0%
speed reference 0
Graded multi-step
A80.27 P90.07 0.0–100.0% 0.0–100.0 0.0%
speed reference 1
Graded multi-step
A80.28 P90.08 0.0–100.0% 0.0–100.0 0.0%
speed reference 2
Graded multi-step
A80.29 P90.09 0.0–100.0% 0.0–100.0 0.0%
speed reference 3
Graded multi-step
A80.30 P90.10 0.0–100.0% 0.0–100.0 0.0%
speed reference 4
Forward brake 0.0–200.0% (of the motor
A80.31 P90.12 0.0–200.0 0.0%
release current rated current)
Reverse brake 0.0–200.0% (of the motor
A80.32 P90.13 0.0–200.0 0.0%
release current rated current)
Forward brake
A80.33 P90.16 0.00–20.00Hz 0.00–20.00 3.00Hz
release frequency
Reverse brake
A80.34 P90.17 0.00–20.00Hz 0.00–20.00 3.00Hz
release frequency
Forward brake
A80.35 P90.18 0.00–20.00Hz 0.00–20.00 3.00Hz
closing frequency
Reverse brake
A80.36 P90.19 0.00–20.00Hz 0.00–20.00 3.00Hz
closing frequency
A80.37 P90.20 0.000–5.000s 0.000–5.000 0.300s
brake release
Delay after forward
A80.38 P90.22 0.000–5.000s 0.000–5.000 0.300s
brake release
A80.39 P90.24 0.000–5.000s 0.000–5.000 0.300s
brake closing
Delay after forward
A80.40 P90.26 0.000–5.000s 0.000–5.000 0.300s
brake closing
0–1
Enabling the
0: Disable
A80.41 P90.31 monitoring on brake 0–1 0
1: Enable (brake feedback
status
detection)
- 92 -
User-
Related
defined Setting
function range
code
list
A81.00–
Same as A80.00–A80.41
A81.41
A82.00–
Same as A80.00–A80.41
A82.41
5.12 Measuring heights
5.12.1 Commissioning description
1. Internal measuring (Motor encoder)

Full layer
winding turns
P93.13
Upward limit position Gear box

P93.09
Initial Encoder
Rope diameter
droop of drum
length P93.15
P19.15
P93.12 Lifting
P93.17 motor
P93.11 Winding turns
of outermost
layer P93.14
P93.18
Downward limit position

Ground
Figure 5.13 Internal measuring (motor encoder), using pulleys
- 93 -
Winding turns of outermost layer Full layer winding turns

P93.14 P93.13
P93.09
Encoder
P93.15
Lifting motor
Upward limit
position
P93.12 Rope
droop
length P19.15
P93.11 P93.17
P93.18
Downward
limit position
Ground
Figure 5.14 Internal measuring (motor encoder), without pulleys
- 94 -
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
V M
S S GD350-19 VFD 3~
W
T T PE
Lifting S1 PWR
Lowering S2 PGND
Graded reference terminal 3 HDIA B1+
Graded reference terminal 4 HDIB B1-
Fault reset S5 Z1+
Brake feedback
S6 Z1-
Upward limit position S7
Downward limit position S8
COM
RO1A Brake
RO1B output
PW
RO1C
+24V RO2A
VFD fault
RO2B output
RO2C
Y1 Brake failure
output
CME
HDO Brake check
reminding/
CME Overload
COM reminding
+24V
Figure 5.15 Wiring for internal measuring (motor encoder)
According to figure 5.15, you need to set the suspension ratio P93.10 when pulleys are used, so that
the height can be correctly measured in the closed-loop mode. Then the measured encoder pulse
count is used to calculate the actual running distance of the motor. During the first running, the upper
limit needs to be calibrated. You need to use a PG card to connect the encoder (see Appendix A.6 for
specific connection method), set P00.00=3 (Closed-loop control mode), P93.08=1 to enable internal
measuring (motor encoder), and then set winding drum and cable parameters such as P93.09,
P93.10, P93.11, P93.12, P93.13, P93.14 and P93.15.
The procedure for first running is as follows:
- 95 -
1. Set the upward limit terminal. For example, set P25.03=64, which indicates the S7
terminal is used as for upper limit input.
2. Enable forward running (upward) and stop when the upward limit position is reached.
Then perform calibration.
3. Record the values of P93.12 and P93.13 and reset P19.15, P19.16, and P19.17.
4. After the calibration, send the running command through the S2 terminal to run
downward. Check the values of P19.15, P19.16, and P19.17.
If the downward limit position needs to be used as the reference point, the procedure for first running
is as follows:
1. Set the upward and downward limit terminals S7 and S8. For example, set P25.03=64
and P25.04=65.
Then perform calibration.
3. Record the values of P93.12 and P93.13 and reset P19.15, P19.16, and P19.17.
4. Send the running command through the S2 terminal to run downward only if the
downward limit terminal S8 is valid. P93.17 displays the height from the upward limit
position to the downward limit position and P93.18 displays 0.
5. The calibration is completed, which indicates proper running. P93.17 displays the height
from the downward limit position to the upward limit position, P93.18 displays the height
using the downward limit position as the reference point (the height is 0 at the downward
limit position, the height is positive when it is above the downward limit position, the
height is negative when it is under the downward limit position), and P19.15 displays the
height using the upward limit position as the reference point (the height is 0 at the
upward limit position, and only downward running is allowed when the upward limit
position is reached, and P19.15 indicates the rope droop length when the upward limit
position is not reached).
- 96 -
2. External measuring (HDI)

Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
V M
S S GD350-19 VFD 3~
W
T T PE
Lifting S1
Lowering S2
Graded reference terminal 1 S3 +24V
Graded reference terminal 2 S4 COM Encoder
Graded reference terminal 3 S5 HDIA
Graded reference terminal 4 S6 HDIB
Upward limit position S7
S8
Pulley
COM
PW
RO1A Brake
+24V
RO1B output
RO1C
RO2A
VFD fault
RO2B output
RO2C
Y1
CME
HDO
CME
COM
+24V
Figure 5.16 Wiring for external measuring (HDI) (In open-loop mode)
Note: During external measuring (HDI), only 24V incremental encoders can be used to measure
pulley rotational speeds.
- 97 -
Braking resistor
(+) PB
R R U
V M
S S GD350-19 VFD 3~
W
T T PE
Lifting S1 PWR
Lowing S2 PGND
Graded reference terminal 3 S5 B1+
Graded reference terminal 4 S6 B1-
Upward limit position S7 Z1+
S8 Z1-
COM
PW
RO1A Brake
+24V
RO1B output
RO1C
RO2A
VFD fault
RO2B output
+24V RO2C
COM
Encoder HDIA
HDIB Y1 Brake failure
output
CME
Pulley HDO Brake check
reminding/
CME Overload
COM reminding
+24V
Figure 5.17 Wiring for external measuring (HDI) (In closed-loop mode)
Note: During external measuring (HDI), only 24V incremental encoders can be used to measure
pulley rotational speeds.
- 98 -
Pulley
diameter
Upward limit
P93.15
position
Encoder mounted
on pulley shaft
Rope droop
P93.09=1
length
P93.12
P19.15
Lifting motor
P93.17
P93.11
P93.18

Ground
Figure 5.18 External measuring (HDI)
You need to set P05.38=2 and P05.44=2 to connect the encoder to HDIA and HDIB. In
open/closed-loop mode, the encoder measures the encoder pulse count at the pulley side to calculate
the actual cable running distance of pulley. Before first running, perform upward limit calibration.
The procedure for first running is as follows:
1. Set the upward limit terminal. For example, set P25.03=64, which indicates the S7
terminal is used as for upper limit input.
Then perform calibration. Reset P19.15, P19.16, and P19.17.
3. After the calibration, send the running command through the S2 terminal to run
downward. Check the values of P19.15, P19.16, and P19.17.
If the downward limit position needs to be used as the reference point, the procedure for first running
is as follows:
1. Set the upward and downward limit terminals S7 and S8. For example, set P25.03=64
and P25.04=65.
Then perform calibration. Reset P19.15, P19.16, and P19.17.
3. Send the running command through the S2 terminal to run downward only if the
downward limit terminal S8 is valid. P93.17 displays the height from the upward limit
position to the downward limit position and P93.18 displays 0.
4. The calibration is completed, which indicates proper running. P93.17 displays the height
from the downward limit position to the upward limit position, P93.18 displays the height
using the downward limit position as the reference point (the height is 0 at the downward
limit position, the height is positive when it is above the downward limit position, the
height is negative when it is under the downward limit position), and P19.15 displays the
- 99 -
height using the upward limit position as the reference point (the height is 0 at the
upward limit position, and only downward running is allowed when the upward limit
position is reached, and P19.15 indicates the rope droop length when the upward limit
position is not reached).
Note: During external measuring (HDI) (for the encoder to measuring the pulley rotational speed),
P93.09 indicates the transmission ratio between the encoder and pulley, while P93.15 indicates the
pulley diameter.
5.12.2 Parameter about height measuring
Table 5.6 Parameters about internal measuring (motor encoder)
Function
code
0: SVC mode 0
1: SVC mode 1
2: Space voltage vector control mode
P00.00 Speed control mode 3
3: Closed-loop vector control mode
Note: If 0, 1 or 3 is selected, it is required to carry
out motor parameter autotuning first.
0: Keypad
Command running
P00.01 1: Terminal 1
channel
2: Communication
Function of S1
P05.01 1: Forward running 1
terminal
Function of S2
P05.02 2: Reverse running 2
terminal
Function of S7
P25.03 64: Limit of forward run (upward) 64
terminal
Function of S8
P25.04 65: Limit of reverse run (downward) 65
terminal
Speed measuring 0: Speed measuring by PG card/height measuring
P20.15 0
mode on local
0–1
0: Disable
1: Enable internal measuring (motor encoder)
(in closed-loop mode, the encoder measures
Enabling height
P93.08 speeds and heights) 1
measuring
2: Enable external measuring (HDI)
(in open/closed-loop mode, the pulley encoder
measures heights)
Note: When P93.08=2 and P20.15=0, HDI is used
- 100 -
Function
code
to measure heights.
Mechanical
P93.09 0.01–300.00 10.00
transmission ratio
P93.10 Suspension ratio 1–4 1
Rope length
P93.11 0.00m–50.00 0.00
compensation
P93.12 Cable diameter 0.1–100.0mm 10.0mm
Per-layer turns of
P93.13 1–200 30
drum winding
Initial turns of drum 0–P93.11 (Winding turns of the outermost layer in
P93.14 0
winding upward limit)
100.0–2000.0mm
Initial diameter of
P93.15 (Max. drum diameter in upward limit, including cable 600.0mm
drum
thickness)
0x00–0x11
Ones place:
0: The upward limit position is not reached.
Enabling 1: The upward limit position is reached.
P93.16 upward/downward Tens place: 0x00
limit position check 0: The downward limit position is not reached.
1: The downward limit position is reached.
Note: It is used to measure heights when there is no
upward/downward limit devices.
Height status check
Total height 0.00–655.35m (Total height measured from the
P93.17 0.00m
measured upward limit position to the downward limit position)
-50.00m –655.35m (Using the downward limit
P93.18 Measured height 1 0.00m
position as the reference point)
0.00–655.35m
P19.15 Measured height (Hook lowering distance using the upward limit 0.00m
MSB of measured
P19.16 0–65535 0
height
LSB of measured
P19.17 0–65535 0
height
- 101 -
Table 5.7 Parameters about external measuring (HDI)
Function
code
0: SVC mode 0
1: SVC mode 1
2: Space voltage vector control mode
3: Closed-loop vector control mode
0: Keypad
Command running
channel
2: Communication
0x00–0x11

Function of S1
P05.01 1: Forward running 1
terminal
Function of S2
P05.02 2: Reverse running 2
terminal
Speed measuring 0: Speed measuring by PG card/height measuring
P20.15 0
mode on local
Function of S7
P25.03 64: Limit of forward run (upward) 64
terminal
Function of S8
P25.04 65: Limit of reverse run (downward) 65
terminal
HDIA high-speed 2: Input through the encoder, used in combination
P05.38 2
pulse input function with HDIB
HDIB high-speed 2: Input through the encoder, used in combination
P05.44 2
pulse input function with HDIA
0–1
Enabling height 0: Disable
P93.08 2
measuring 1: Enable internal measuring (motor encoder)
(in closed-loop mode, the encoder measures
- 102 -
Function
code
speeds and heights)
(in open/closed-loop mode, the pulley encoder
measures heights)
to measure heights.
Mechanical
P93.09 0.01–300.00 1.00
transmission ratio
P93.10 Suspension ratio 1–4 1
Rope length
P93.11 0.00m–50.00 0.00
compensation
P93.12 Cable diameter 0.1–100.0mm 10.0mm
P93.15 Pulley diameter 100.0–2000.0mm 600.0mm
Height status check
Total height 0.00–655.35m (Total height measured from the
P93.17 0.00m
measured upward limit position to the downward limit position)
-50.00m–655.35m (Using the downward limit
P93.18 Measured height 1 0.00m
P19.15 Measured height 0.00–655.35m (Hook lowering distance) 0.00m
MSB of measured
P19.16 0–65535 0
height
LSB of measured
P19.17 0–65535 0
height
- 103 -
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Operating
6 Operating
This chapter describes how to operate the VFD by the keypad.
6.2 Keypad
The keypad is used to control GD350-19 VFD, read the status data, and set the parameters.
Figure 6.1 Keypad diagram
Note:
 The LED keypad is a standard configuration for the VFD. In addition, if you need, the LCD keypad
(an optional part) can be provided. The LCD keypad supports multiple languages, parameter
copying function, and ten-row high-definition display. The installation size of the LCD is
compatible with the LED keypad.
 If you need install the keypad on another position rather than on the VFD, use M3 screws or a
keypad installation bracket. The installation bracket is an optional part for the 380V 1.5–30kW
and 500V 4–18.5kW VFD models, but it is a standard part for the 380V 37–500kW, 500V
22–75kW, and 660V VFD models.
No. Item Description
VFD running status indicator.
LED off: The VFD is stopped.

RUN/TUNE
LED blinking: The VFD is autotuning
parameters.
Status
1
indicator LED on: The VFD is running.
Forward or reverse running indicator.
FWD/REV LED off: The VFD is running forward.
LED on: The VFD is running reversely.
LOCAL/REMOT Indicates whether the VFD is controlled
- 104 -

through the keypad, terminals, or
communication.
LED off: The VFD is controlled through the
keypad.
LED blinking: The VFD is controlled through
terminals.
LED on: The VFD is controlled through
remote communication.
Fault indicator.
LED on: in fault state

TRIP
LED off: in normal state
LED blinking: in pre-alarm state

Unit displayed currently
Hz Frequency unit
Unit RPM Rotational speed unit

2
indicator A Current unit
% Percentage
V Voltage unit
Five-digit LED displays various monitoring data and alarm codes such as the
set frequency and output frequency.
Display Means Display Means Display Means
0 0 1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4 5 5
6 6 7 7 8 8
Digital
3 9 9 A A B B
display zone
C C d d E E
F F H H I I
L L N N n n
o o P P r r
S S t t U U
v v . . - -
Digital
4 Tuning frequency. For details, see the description of P08.41.
potentiometer
PRG Programming Press it to enter or exit level-1 menus or

5 Buttons ESC
key delete a parameter.
- 105 -

DATA Press it to enter menus in cascading mode or
ENT Entry key
confirm the setting of a parameter.
Up Press it to increase data or move upward.
Down Press it to decrease data or move downward.
Press it to select display parameters

rightward in the interface for the device in
SHIFT Right-shifting
stopped or running state or to select digits to
change during parameter setting.
Press it to run the device when using the
RUN Run
keypad for control.
Press it to stop the device that is running.
STOP The function of this key is restricted by
RST Stop/Reset
P07.05. In fault alarm state, this key can be
used for reset in any control modes.
QUICK Multifunctional
JOG The function is determined by P07.04.
shortcut key
6.3 Keypad display

The display state of GD350-19 series keypad is divided into stop parameter display state, running
parameter display state and fault alarm display state.
6.3.1 Displaying fault information
After detecting a fault signal, the VFD enters the fault alarm state immediately, the fault code blinks on
the keypad, and the TRIP indicator is on. You can perform fault reset by using the STOP/RST key,
control terminals, or communication commands.
If the fault still persists, the fault code is continuously displayed.

6.3.2 Editing function codes
You can press the PRG/ESC key to enter the editing mode in stopped, running, or fault alarm state (if
a user password is used, see the description of P07.00). The editing mode contains two levels of
menus in the following sequence: Function code group or function code number → Function
parameter. You can press the DATA/ENT key to enter the function parameter display interface. On the
function parameter display interface, you can press the DATA/ENT key to save parameter settings or
press the PRG/ESC key to exit the parameter display interface.
- 106 -
PRG DATA PRG DATA PRG DATA

ESC ENT ESC ENT ESC ENT
QUICK QUICK QUICK

JOG SHIFT JOG SHIFT JOG SHIFT
STOP STOP STOP

RUN RST RUN RST RUN RST
Parameters displayed in stopped

Parameters displayed in running state Information displayed in faulty state
state
Figure 6.2 Keypad display
6.4 Operations on keypad

You can perform various operations on the rectifier by using a keypad. For details about the structure
of the function codes, see the function code list.
6.4.1 Modifying function codes
The VFD has three levels menu, which are:
1. Group number of function code (first-level menu)
2. Tab of function code (second-level menu)
3. Set value of function code (third-level menu)
Remarks: Press both the PRG/ESC and the DATA/ENT can return to the second-level menu from the
third-level menu. The difference is: pressing DATA/ENT will save the set parameters into the control
panel, and then return to the second-level menu with shifting to the next function code automatically;
while pressing PRG/ESC will directly return to the second-level menu without saving the parameters,
and keep staying at the current function code.
Under the third-level menu, if the parameter has no flickering bit, it means the function code cannot be
modified. The possible reasons could be:
1) This function code is not modifiable parameter, such as actual detected parameter, operation
records and so on;
2) This function code is not modifiable in running state, but modifiable in stop state.
Example: Set function code P00.01 from 0 to 1.
- 107 -
PRC DATA
ESC ENT
PRC PRC
ESC ESC
All digits are blinking. The units place is blinking. The units place is blinking. The units place is blinking.
PRC DATA
ESC ENT
DATA
ENT
The units place is blinking.

»
Note: When setting the value, you can press SHIFT and + to modify the value.
Figure 6.3 Sketch map of modifying parameters

6.4.2 How to set the password of the VFD
Goodrive350-19 VFDs provide password protection function. Set P07.00 to gain the password and
the password protection becomes valid instantly after quitting from the function code editing state.
Press PRG/ESC again to the function code editing state, "0.0.0.0.0" will be displayed. Unless using
the correct password, you cannot enter it.
Set P07.00 to 0 to cancel password protection function.
The password protection becomes effective instantly after retreating form the function code editing
state. Press PRG/ESC again to the function code editing state, "0.0.0.0.0" will be displayed. Unless
using the correct password, the operators cannot enter it.
PRC
ESC
PRC
ESC
All digits are blinking. The units place is blinking. The units place is blinking.
PRC DATA
ESC ENT
PRC
ESC
DATA
ENT
PRC
ESC
The units place is blinking. The units place is blinking. The units place is blinking.
»
Figure 6.4 Sketch map of password setting

6.4.3 How to view the VFD state through function codes
Goodrive350-19 series VFDs provide group P17 as the state inspection group. You can enter P17
directly to view the state.
- 108 -
PRC
ESC
PRC
ESC
All digits are blinking. The units place is blinking. The units place is blinking.
PRC DATA
ESC ENT
PRC
ESC
DATA
ENT
PRC
ESC
The units place is blinking. The units place is blinking. The units place is blinking.
»
Figure 6.5 Sketch map of state viewing

6.5 Basic operation instruction
6.5.1 What this section contains
This section introduces the function modules inside the VFD.
 Ensure all the terminals are fixed and tightened firmly.
 Ensure the motor matches with the VFD power.

6.5.2 Common commissioning procedure
The common operation procedure is shown as follows (taking motor 1 as an example).
- 109 -
Start
Power on after confirming the

wiring is correct
Restore to default settings
Set the motor parameters of Set the motor parameters of

P02.01–P02.05 as per the P02.15–P02.19 as per the
motor nameplate motor nameplate
Press QUICK/JOG to jog
If the motor rotates in wrong direction, power off

and exchange the motor wires of any two phases,
and power on again
Set autotuning mode

(P00.15)
Complete parameter rotary Complete parameter static Partial parameter rotary

autotuning autotuning autotuning
Start autotuning after pressing

RUN key, and stop after
autotuning is done
Set running command channel

(P00.01, P00.02)
Set running frequency
Set speed running control

mode (P00.00)
SVPWM control mode

SVC 1 (P00.00=0) SVC 2 (P00.00=1)
(P00.00=2)
Set vector control parameters Set vector control parameters Set V/F parameters in P04
in P03 group in P03 group group
Set start/stop control

parameters in P01 group
Run after running command
Stop after stop command
End
- 110 -
Note: If a fault occurred, find out the fault cause according to "fault tracking".
The running command channel can be set by terminal commands besides P00.01 and P00.02.
Multi-function Multi-function terminal Multi-function terminal

Current running
terminal function (36) function (37) function (38)
command channel
Command switches Command switches to Command switches to
P00.01
to keypad terminal communication
Keypad / Terminal Communication
Terminal Keypad / Communication
Communication Keypad Terminal /
Note: "/" means this multi-function terminal is valid under current reference channel.
Related parameter list:
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0:SVC 0
1:SVC 1
2:SVPWM
3:VC
Note: If 0, 1 or 3 is selected, it is required to
carry out motor parameter autotuning first.
0: Keypad
Running command
channel
2: Communication
0:MODBUS
1:PROFIBUS/CANopen/Devicenet
Communication running 2:Ethernet
P00.02 0
command channel 3:EtherCat/Profinet
4:PLC programmable card
5:Bluetooth card
0: No operation
Motor parameter 1: Rotary autotuning; carry out
P00.15 0
autotuning comprehensive motor parameter autotuning;
rotary autotuning is used in cases where high
- 111 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
control precision is required;
2: Static autotuning 1 (comprehensive

autotuning); static autotuning 1 is used in
cases where the motor cannot be
disconnected from load;
3: Static autotuning 2 (partial autotuning) ;

when current motor is motor 1, only P02.06,
P02.07 and P02.08 will be autotuned; when
current motor is motor 2, only P12.06,
P12.07 and P12.08 will be autotuned.
0: No operation
1: Restore to default value
2: Clear fault history

Function parameter
P00.18 Note: After the selected function operations 0
restoration
are done, this function code will be restored
to 0 automatically. Restoration to default
value will clear the user password. Exercise
caution before using this function.
0: Asynchronous motor
P02.00 Type of motor 1 0
1: Synchronous motor
Rated power of Model

P02.01 0.1–3000.0kW
asynchronous motor 1 depended
Rated frequency of
P02.02 0.01Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 50.00Hz
Rated speed of Model

P02.03 1–36000rpm
Rated voltage of Model

P02.04 0–1200V
Rated current of Model

P02.05 0.8–6000.0A
- 112 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value

P02.15 0.1–3000.0kW
synchronous motor 1 depended
Rated frequency of
synchronous motor 1
Number of pole pairs of

P02.17 1–50 2
synchronous motor 1

P02.18 0–1200V

P02.19 0.8–6000.0A
Function of multi-function 36: Command switches to keypad

P05.01–
digital input terminal 37: Command switches to terminal /
P05.06
(S1–S4, HDIA, HDIB) 38: Command switches to communication
Range: 0–4
0: No operation
1: Upload parameters to the keypad
Function parameter 2: Download all parameters (including motor
P07.01 0
copying parameters)
3: Download non-motor parameters.
4: Download motor parameters.
Range: 0x00–0x27
Ones: QUICK/JOG key function selection
0: No function
1: Jogging
P07.02 QUICK/JOG key function 2: Reserved 0x01
3: Switching between forward/reverse

rotation
4: Clear UP/DOWN setting
5: Coast to stop
- 113 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
6: Switch running command reference mode

by sequence
7: Reserved
Tens: Reserved
6.5.3 Vector control

Asynchronous motors are featured with high order, non-linear, strong coupling and multi-variables,
which makes it very difficult to control asynchronous motors during actual application. The vector
control theory aims to solve this problem through measuring and controlling the stator current vector
of asynchronous motor, and decomposing the stator current vector into exciting current (current
component which generates internal magnet field) and torque current (current component which
generates torque) based on field orientation principle, and then controlling the amplitude value and
phase position of these two components (namely, control the stator current vector of motor) to realize
decoupling control of exciting current and torque current, thus achieving high-performance speed
regulation of asynchronous motor.
GD350-19 series VFD carries built-in speed sensor-less vector control algorithm, which can be used
to drive the asynchronous motor and permanent-magnet synchronous motor simultaneously. As the
core algorithm of vector control is based on accurate motor parameter model, the accuracy of motor
parameters will impact the control performance of vector control. It is recommended to input accurate
motor parameters and carry out motor parameter autotuning before vector operation.
As vector control algorithm is complicated, you should be cautious of regulation on dedicated function
parameters of vector control.
- 114 -
R S T
Rectifier
bridge
φ + ACR
Calculate im exciting
- current Park PWM
conversion pulse IGBT
bridge
+ + ACR
Calculate iT Uu UW UV
torque current
- -
iT
φ Position
Uu
1wr observation UV Voltage
Speed detection
1wr UW
identific
ation
Flux linkage
observation
iU
Park
Clark Current iV
iM conversio conversion detection
n
iW
iT
Motor
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0: SVC 0
1: SVC 1
2: SVPWM
P00.00 Speed control mode 3: VC 2
Note: If 0, 1 or 3 is selected, it is required
to carry out motor parameter autotuning
first.
0: No operation
1: Rotary autotuning; carry out

comprehensive motor parameter
autotuning; rotary autotuning is used in
Motor parameter cases where high control precision is
P00.15 0
autotuning required;

- 115 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
3: Static autotuning 2 (partial autotuning) ;

when current motor is motor 1, only
P02.06, P02.07 and P02.08 will be
autotuned; when current motor is motor 2,
only P12.06, P12.07 and P12.08 will be
autotuned.
Speed loop proportional

P03.00 0–200.0 20.0
gain 1
P03.01 Speed loop integral time 1 0.000–10.000s 0.200s
Switching low point

P03.02 0.00Hz–P03.05 5.00Hz
frequency
Speed loop proportional

P03.03 0–200.0 20.0
gain 2
P03.04 Speed loop integral time 2 0.000–10.000s 0.200s
Switching high point

P03.05 P03.02–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 10.00Hz
frequency
P03.06 Speed loop output filter 0–8 (corresponds to 0–28/10ms) 0
Electromotion slip
P03.07 compensation coefficient of 50%–200% 100%
vector control
Brake slip compensation

P03.08 50%–200% 100%
coefficient of vector control
Current loop proportional

P03.09 0–65535 1000
coefficient P
Current loop integral

P03.10 0–65535 1000
coefficient I
- 116 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
1: Set via keypad (P03.12)
2: Set via AI1 (100% corresponds to three

times of rated motor current)
3: Set via AI2 (the same as above)
5: Set via pulse frequency HDIA (the same

as above)
6: Set via multi-step torque (the same as

above)
7: Set via MODBUS communication (the

same as above)
Torque setup mode
P03.11 8: Set via PROFIBUS/CANopen/DeviceNet 1
selection
communication (the same as above)
9: Set via Ethernet communication (the

same as above)
10: Set via pulse frequency HDIB (the

same as above)
11: Set via EtherCat/Profinet

communication
12: Set via PLC
Note: For the options 2–12, 100%

corresponds to three times of rated motor
current.
P03.12 Torque set by keypad -300.0%–300.0% (motor rated current) 50.0%
P03.13 Torque reference filter time 0.000–10.000s 0.010s
0: Keypad (P03.16)
Source of upper limit 1: AI1 (100% corresponds to max.

P03.14 frequency setup of forward frequency) 0
rotation in torque control 2: AI2 (the same as above)
3: AI3 (the same as above)
- 117 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
4: Pulse frequency HDIA (the same as

above)
5: Multi-step speed (the same as above)
6: MODBUS communication (the same as

above)
7: PROFIBUS /CANopen/ DeviceNet

8: Ethernet communication (the same as

above)
9: Pulse frequency HDIB (the same as

above)
11: PLC
12: Reserved
Note: For the options 1–11, 100%

corresponds to the max. frequency.
Source of upper limit

0: Keypad (P03.17)
P03.15 frequency setup of reverse 0
1–11: same as P03.14
rotation in torque control
Keypad limit value of upper

P03.16 limit frequency of forward 50.00Hz
Value range: 0.00 Hz–P00.03 (Max. output
frequency)
Keypad limit value of upper
P03.17 limit frequency of reverse 50.00Hz
0: Keypad (P03.20)
1: AI1 (100% relative to three times of

Source of upper limit setup
motor current)
P03.18 of the torque when 0
motoring
4: Pulse frequency HDIA (the same as
- 118 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
above)

above)
7: Ethernet communication (the same as

above)
8: Pulse frequency HDIB (the same as

above)
10: PLC
11: Reserved
Note: For the options 1–10, 100% is

relative to three times of motor current.
Source of upper limit setup 0: Keypad (P03.21)

P03.19 0
of brake torque 1–10: the same as P03.18
Set upper limit of the torque

P03.20 180.0%
when motoring via keypad
0.0–300.0% (rated motor current)
Set upper limit of brake
P03.21 180.0%
torque via keypad
Flux-weakening coefficient
P03.22 0.1–2.0 0.3
in constant power area
Min. flux-weakening point

P03.23 10%–100% 20%
in constant power area
P03.24 Max. voltage limit 0.0–120.0% 100.0%
P03.25 Pre-exciting time 0.000–10.000s 0.300s
0:Disable
P03.32 Torque control enable 0
1:Enable
P03.35 Control optimization setting Ones place: Reserved 0x0000
- 119 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0: Reserved
1: Reserved
Tens place: Reserved
0: Reserved
1: Reserved
Hundreds place: ASR integral separation

enabling
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Thousands place: Reserved
0: Reserved
1: Reserved
Range: 0x0000–0x1111
P03.36 ASR differential gain 0.00–10.00s 0.00s
High-frequency ACR In the closed-loop vector control mode

P03.37 1000
proportional coefficient (P00.00=3), when the frequency is lower
than the ACR high-frequency switching
High-frequency ACR
P03.38 threshold (P03.39), the ACR PI parameters 1000
integral coefficient
are P03.09 and P03.10; and when the
frequency is higher than the ACR
high-frequency switching threshold
(P03.39), the ACR PI parameters are
P03.37 and P03.38.
ACR high-frequency
P03.39 Setting range of P03.37: 0–20000 100.0%
switching threshold
Setting range of P03.38: 0–20000
Setting range of P03.39: 0.0–100.0%

(relative to the maximum frequency)
P17.32 Flux linkage 0.0–200.0% 0.0%
6.5.4 SVPWM control mode

GD350-19 VFD also carries built-in SVPWM control function. SVPWM mode can be used in cases
where mediocre control precision is enough. In cases where a VFD needs to drive multiple motors, it
- 120 -
is also recommended to adopt SVPWM control mode.
GD350-19 VFD provides multiple kinds of V/F curve modes to meet different field needs. You can
select corresponding V/F curve or set the V/F curve as needed.
Suggestions:
1. For the load with constant moment, for example, conveyor belt which runs in straight line, as
the moment must be constant during the whole running process, it is recommended to adopt
straight-type V/F curve.
2. For the load with decreasing moment, for example, fan and water pump, as the relation
between its actual torque and speed is squared or cubed, it is recommended to adopt the V/F curve
corresponds to power 1.3, 1.7 or 2.0.
Output voltage
Vb
Torque -down V/F curve (1.3th order)
Straight-type Torque -down V/F curve (1.7th order)
Torque -down V/F curve (2.0th order)
Square-type
Output frequency
fb
GD350-19 VFD also provides multi-point V/F curve. You can alter the V/F curve outputted by VFD
through setting the voltage and frequency of the three points in the middle. The whole curve consists
of five points starting from (0Hz, 0V) and ending in (fundamental motor frequency, rated motor
voltage). During setup, it is required that 0≤f1≤f2≤f3≤Fundamental motor frequency, and
0≤V1≤V2≤V3≤Rated motor voltage
Output voltage
100%Vb
V3
V2
V1
Output frequency
f1 f2 f3 fb Hz
GD350-19 VFD provides dedicated function codes for SVPWM control mode. You can improve the
performance of SVPWM through settings.
1. Torque boost
Torque boost function can effectively compensate for the low-speed torque performance during
SVPWM control. Automatic torque boost has been set by default to enable the VFD to adjust the
- 121 -
torque boost value based on actual load conditions.
Note:
(1) Torque boost is effective only under torque boost cut-off frequency;
(2) If the torque boost is too large, low-frequency vibration or overcurrent may occur to the motor, if
such situation occurs, lower the torque boost value.
Output voltage V
boost
cut-off
Output frequency f
2. Energy-saving run
During actual running, the VFD can search for the max. efficiency point to keep running in the most
efficient state to save energy.
Note:
(1) This function is generally used in light load or no-load cases.
(2) This function is not suitable in cases where load transient occur frequently.
3. V/F slip compensation gain
SVPWM control belongs to open-loop mode, which will cause motor speed to fluctuate when motor
load transients. In cases where strict speed requirement is needed, you can set the slip compensation
gain to compensate for the speed variation caused by load fluctuation through internal output
adjustment of VFD.
The setting range of slip compensation gain is 0–200%, in which 100% corresponds to the
rated slip frequency.
Note: Rated slip frequency= (Rated synchronous speed of motor – Rated speed of motor) × (Number
of motor pole pairs)/60
4. Oscillation control
Motor oscillation often occurs in SVPWM control in large-power drive applications. To solve this
problem, GD350-19 series VFD sets two function codes to control the oscillation factor, and you can
set the corresponding function code based on the occurrence frequency of oscillation.
Note: The larger the set value, the better the control effect, however, if the set value is too large, it
may easily lead to too large VFD output current.
5. Asynchronous motor I/F control
- 122 -
Generally, the I/F control mode is valid for asynchronous motors. It can be used for synchronous
motors only when the motor frequency is extremely low. The I/F control described in this manual is
only involved with asynchronous motors. I/F control is implemented by performing closed-loop control
on the total VFD output current. The output voltage adapts to the current reference, and open-loop
control is separately performed over the frequency of the voltage and current.
Customized V/F curve (V/F separation) function:

Voltage
setting
P04.28 Keypad 0
AI1 1
AI2 2 Straight-type V/F curve 0
Multi-point V/F curve 1

AI3 3
Torque-down V/F curve (power
1.3) 2
HDIA 4
3
Multi-step speed 1.7)
5
4
PID 2.0)
6
Customized V/F curve 5
MODBUS 7 P04.29 voltage acceleration time P04.31 output max. voltage
PROFIBUS\CANopen 8 P04.30 voltage deceleration time P04.32 output min. voltage P04.00 V/F curve setting of motor 1
Ethernet 9
Frequency
setting
HDIB 10
EtherCat/Profinet 11 Keypad 0
PLC card 12 AI1 1
P04.27 (voltage setting AI2 2

channel)
AI3 V /F curve
3
Frequency set through keypad HDIA 4
P00.10 Multi-step speed 5

P00.11 acceleration time 1 P00.04 running frequency upper limit
PID 6
P00.12 deceleration time 1
P00.05 running frequency lower limit
MODBUS 7
PROFIBUS\CANopen 8
Ethernet 9 PWM output
HDIB 10
EtherCat/Profinet 11
PLC card 12
P00.06 (Setting channel of A frequency

command)
When selecting customized V/F curve function, you can set the reference channels and
acceleration/deceleration time of voltage and frequency respectively, which will form a real-time V/F
curve through combination.
Note: This V/F curve separation can be applied in various variable-frequency power source scenarios.
However, exercise cautious when setting parameters as improper setting may damage the machine.
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0:SVC 0
1:SVC 1
2:SVPWM
3:VC
- 123 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
P00.03 Max. output frequency P00.04–400.00Hz 50.00Hz

P00.04 P00.05–P00.03 50.00Hz
frequency
Lower limit of running

P00.05 0.00Hz–P00.04 0.00Hz
frequency
Model
P00.11 Acceleration time 1 0.0–3600.0s
depended
Model
P00.12 Deceleration time 1 0.0–3600.0s
depended
Rated power of

P02.04 0–1200V
0: Straight-type V/F curve
1: Multi-point V/F curve
V/F curve setting of 2: Torque-down V/F curve (power 1.3)

P04.00 0
motor 1 3: Torque-down V/F curve (power 1.7)
4: Torque-down V/F curve (power 2.0)
5: Customized V/F (V/F separation)
Torque boost of motor

P04.01 0.0%: (automatic) 0.1%–10.0% 0.0%
1
Motor 1 torque boost

P04.02 0.0%–50.0% (rated frequency of motor 1) 20.0%
cut-off
V/F frequency point 1

P04.03 0.00Hz–P04.05 0.00Hz
of motor 1
- 124 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
V/F voltage point 1 of

P04.04 0.0%–110.0% 0.0%
motor 1

P04.05 P04.03– P04.07 0.00Hz
of motor 1

P04.06 0.0%–110.0% 0.0%
motor 1

P04.07 P04.05–P02.02 or P04.05–P02.16 0.00Hz
of motor 1

P04.08 0.0%–110.0% 0.0%
motor 1
V/F slip compensation

P04.09 0.0–200.0% 100.0%
gain of motor 1
Low-frequency
P04.10 oscillation control 0–100 10
factor of motor 1
High-frequency
factor of motor 1
Oscillation control
threshold of motor 1
0: Straight V/F curve;
V/F curve setup of 2: Torque-down V/F curve (1.3th order)

P04.13 0
motor 2 3: Torque-down V/F curve (1.7th order)
4: Torque-down V/F curve (2.0th order)
5: Customize V/F (V/F separation)
Torque boost of motor

P04.14 0.0%: (automatic) 0.1%–10.0% 0.0%
2
- 125 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Motor 2 torque boost

P04.15 0.0%–50.0% (rated frequency of motor 1) 20.0%
cut-off

P04.16 0.00Hz–P04.18 0.00Hz
of motor 2

P04.17 0.0%–110.0% 0.0%
motor 2

P04.18 P04.16–P04.20 0.00Hz
of motor 2

P04.19 0.0%–110.0% 0.0%
motor 2

P04.20 P04.18–P02.02 or P04.18–P02.16 0.00Hz
of motor 2

P04.21 0.0%–110.0% 0.0%
motor 2
V/F slip compensation

P04.22 0.0–200.0% 100.0%
gain of motor 2
Low-frequency
factor of motor 2
High-frequency
factor of motor 2
Oscillation control
threshold of motor 2
0: No
P04.26 Energy-saving run 0
1: Automatic energy-saving run
Channel of voltage 0: Keypad; output voltage is determined by P04.28

P04.27 0
setup 1: AI1
- 126 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: HDIA
5: Multi-step
6: PID
8: PROFIBUS/CANopen communication
9: Ethernet communication
10: HDIB
12: PLC card
13: Reserved
Set voltage value via

P04.28 0.0%–100.0% (rated motor voltage) 100.0%
keypad
P04.29 Voltage increase time 0.0–3600.0s 5.0s
Voltage decrease
P04.30 0.0–3600.0s 5.0s
time
P04.31 Output max. voltage P04.32–100.0% (rated motor voltage) 100.0%
P04.32 Output min. voltage 0.0%–P04.31 (rated motor voltage) 0.0%
Flux-weakening
P04.33 coefficient in the 1.00–1.30 1.00
constant power zone
When the synchronous motor VF control mode is

enabled, this parameter is used to set the reactive
Input current 1 in
current of the motor when the output frequency is
P04.34 synchronous motor 20.0%
lower than the frequency set in P04.36.
VF control
Setting range: -100.0%–+100.0% (of the rated
current of the motor)
- 127 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value

Input current 2 in
P04.35 synchronous motor 10.0%
higher than the frequency set in P04.36.
VF control

Frequency threshold
enabled, this parameter is used to set the
for input current
frequency threshold for the switching between input
P04.36 switching in 50.00Hz
current 1 and input current 2.
synchronous motor
Setting range: 0.00 Hz–P00.03 (Max. output
VF control
frequency)
Reactive current
closed-loop
proportional
P04.37 proportional coefficient of the reactive current 50
coefficient in
closed-loop control.
synchronous motor
Setting range: 0–3000
VF control

Reactive current
enabled, this parameter is used to set the integral
closed-loop integral
P04.38 coefficient of the reactive current closed-loop 30
time in synchronous
control.
motor VF control

enabled, this parameter is used to set the output
Reactive current limit of the reactive current closed-loop control. A
closed-loop output greater value indicates a higher reactive
P04.39 8000
limit in synchronous closed-loop compensation voltage and higher
motor VF control output power of the motor. In general, you do not
need to modify this parameter.
P04.40 Enable I/F mode for 0: Disabled 0
- 128 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
asynchronous motor 1 1: Enabled
Note: The I/F mode is not applicable to conical

motors.
When I/F control is adopted for asynchronous

Current setting in I/F motor 1, this parameter is used to set the output
P04.41 mode for current. The value is a percentage in relative to the 120.0%
asynchronous motor 1 rated current of the motor.
Setting range: 0.0–200.0%

Proportional
motor 1, this parameter is used to set the
coefficient in I/F mode
P04.42 proportional coefficient of the output current 350
for asynchronous
motor 1

Integral coefficient in
motor 1, this parameter is used to set the integral
P04.43 I/F mode for 150
coefficient of the output current closed-loop control.

motor 1, this parameter is used to set the starting
frequency for switching off the output current
Starting frequency for closed-loop control. When the frequency is lower
switching off I/F mode than the value of this parameter, the current
P04.44 10.00Hz
for asynchronous closed-loop control in the I/F control mode is
motor 1 enabled; and when the frequency is higher than
that, the current closed-loop control in the I/F
control mode is disabled.
Setting range: 0.00–20.00 Hz
0: Disable
Enabling I/F mode for 1: Enable

P04.45 0
asynchronous motor 2 Note: The I/F mode is not applicable to conical
motors.
- 129 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value

Current setting in I/F motor 2, this parameter is used to set the output
P04.46 mode for current. The value is a percentage in relative to the 120.0%
asynchronous motor 2 rated current of the motor.

Proportional
motor 2, this parameter is used to set the
coefficient in I/F mode
P04.47 proportional coefficient of the output current 350
for asynchronous
motor 2

Integral coefficient in
P04.48 I/F mode for 150
coefficient of the output current closed-loop control.

motor 2, this parameter is used to set the Starting
Starting frequency for closed-loop control. When the frequency is lower
switching off I/F mode than the value of this parameter, the current
P04.49 10.00Hz
for asynchronous closed-loop control in the I/F control mode is
motor 2 enabled; and when the frequency is higher than
End frequency for

switching off I/F mode
P04.50 P04.44–P00.03 25.00Hz
for asynchronous
motor 1
End frequency for

switching off I/F mode
P04.51 P04.49–P00.03 25.00Hz
for asynchronous
motor 2
- 130 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Current setting for

reverse running in I/F
P04.52 0.0–200.0% 120.0%
mode for
Current setting for

reverse running in I/F
P04.53 0.0–200.0% 120.0%
mode for
6.5.5 Torque control

GD350-19 VFD supports torque control and speed control. Speed control mode aims to stabilize the
speed to keep the set speed consistent with the actual running speed, meanwhile, the max.
load-carrying capacity is restricted by torque limit. Torque control mode aims to stabilize the torque to
keep the set torque consistent with the actual output torque, meanwhile, the output frequency is
restricted by upper/lower limit.
- 131 -
P00.00 (Speed control mode)
2
Speed control
1 Start
Invalid
0
P03.12
Torque set by Keypad
keypad Set upper limit
P03.13
0 Output torque
AI1 Torque reference filter time Torque control limit
1 Motoring
Terminal function 29 P17.09
AI2 Switching between torque control
2
and speed control
Goodrive350-19 series VFD
3
AI3 Valid Speed
4 Upper Motoring
control
limit of torque Torque
HDIA 5 Invalid brake upper control
torque limit
Multi-step speed 6
P03.14
7 (Source of setting upper limit frequency
MODBUS of forward rotation in torque control)
8 P17.15
PROFIBUS\CANopen Braking
9 Torque reference P03.16
value Keypad-set upper
Ethernet 10 0 Keypad
limit frequency of
11 forward rotation in
1 AI1
HDIB Keypad torque control
12 2 AI2
AI1 P03.19
EtherCat/Profinet (Source of setting brake 3 AI3
P03.11
Torque setting mode torque upper limit) HDIA
P03.21 AI2 4
PLC card selection 0
Brake torque upper Multi-step speed
1 5
limit set through AI3
keypad MODBUS
2 6
HDIA PROFIBUS\CANopen
3 7
- 132 -
8 Ethernet
MODBUS 4
5 9 Reserved
PROFIBUS\CANopen
6 10
HDIB
Ethernet 7 11
8 P03.18
(Source of setting motoring torque EtherCat/Profinet
9 P03.15
HDIB upper limit)
10 (Source of setting upper limit frequency PLC card
of reverse rotation in torque control)
EtherCat/Profinet Keypad
P03.17
AI1 Keypad-set upper limit
PLC card
0 Keypad frequency of reverse
AI2 0
P03.20 1 1 AI1
Motoring torque AI3
2 2 AI2
upper limit set
through keypad HDIA AI3
3 3
4 4 HDIA
MODBUS
Multi-step speed
5 5
PROFIBUS\CANopen MODBUS
6 6
Ethernet PROFIBUS\CANopen
7 7
8 Ethernet
8
HDIB
9 9 HDIB
EtherCat/Profinet 10 10
EtherCat/Profinet
11
PLC card
PLC card
Operating
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0:SVC 0
1:SVC 1
Speed control 2:SVPWM
P00.00 2
mode 3:VC
Note: If 0, 1 or 3 is selected, it is required to
carry out motor parameter autotuning first.
Torque control 0:Disable

P03.32 0
enable 1:Enable
2: Set via AI1 (100% corresponds to three times

of rated motor current)
5: Set via pulse frequency HDIA (the same as

above)
6: Set via multi-step torque (the same as above)
7: Set via MODBUS communication (the same

Torque setup
P03.11 as above) 0
mode selection
8: Set via PROFIBUS/CANopen/DeviceNet
9: Set via Ethernet communication (the same as

above)
10: Set via pulse frequency HDIB (the same as

above)
11: Set via EtherCat/Profinet communication
12: Set via PLC
Note: Set mode 2–12, 100% corresponds to

three times of rated motor current.
Torque set by
P03.12 -300.0%–300.0% (rated motor current) 50.0%
keypad
- 133 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Torque reference
P03.13 0.000–10.000s 0.010s
filter time
0: Keypad (P03.16)
1: AI1 (100% corresponds to max. frequency)
4: Pulse frequency HDIA (the same as above)
5: Multi-step (the same as above)
Source of upper 6: MODBUS communication (the same as

limit frequency above)
P03.14 setup of forward 7: PROFIBUS /CANopen/ DeviceNet 0
rotation in torque communication (the same as above)
control
8: Ethernet communication (the same as above)
9: Pulse frequency HDIB (the same as above)
11: PLC
12: Reserved
Note: For the options 1-11, 100% is relative to

the max. frequency.
0: Keypad (P03.17)

Source of upper
limit frequency
P03.15 setup of reverse 0
rotation in torque 5: Multi-step (the same as above)
control 6: MODBUS communication (the same as
above)

- 134 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
11: PLC
12: Reserved
Note: For the options 1-11, 100% is relative to

the max. frequency.
Keypad limit value

of upper limit
P03.16 frequency of 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 50.00 Hz
forward rotation in
torque control
Keypad limit value

of upper limit
P03.17 frequency of 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 50.00 Hz
reverse rotation in
torque control
0: Keypad (P03.20)
1: AI1 (100% relative to three times of motor

current)
Source of upper 4: Pulse frequency HDIA (the same as above)
limit setup of the 5: MODBUS communication (the same as

P03.18 0
torque during above)
motoring 6: PROFIBUS/CANopen/DeviceNet
10: PLC
- 135 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
11: Reserved
Note: Source 1–10, 100% relative to three times

of motor current.
0: Keypad (P03.21)
current)
Source of upper above)
P03.19 limit setup of brake 6: PROFIBUS/CANopen/DeviceNet 0
torque communication (the same as above)
10: PLC
11: Reserved
Note: Source 1–10, 100% relative to three times
of motor current.
Set upper limit of

the torque when
P03.20 0.0–300.0% (rated motor current) 180.0%
motoring via
keypad
Set upper limit of

P03.21 brake torque via 0.0–300.0% (rated motor current) 180.0%
keypad
Motor output
P17.09 -250.0–250.0% 0.0%
torque
Torque reference
P17.15 -300.0–300.0% (rated motor current) 0.0%
value
- 136 -
6.5.6 Motor parameter
 Check the safety conditions surrounding the motor and load machineries
before autotuning as physical injury may occur due to sudden start of motor during
autotuning.
 Although the motor does not run during static autotuning, the motor is stilled
supplied with power, do not touch the motor during autotuning; otherwise, electric
shock may occur.
 If the motor has been connected to load, do not carry out rotary autotuning;
otherwise, misact or damage may occur to the VFD. If rotary autotuning is carried out
on a motor which has been connected to load, wrong motor parameters and motor
misacts may occur. Disconnect the load to carry out autotuning if necessary.
GD350-19 VFD can drive asynchronous motors and synchronous motors, and it supports two sets of
motor parameters, which can be switched over by multi-function digital input terminals or
communication modes.
Start
Select running
command channel
(P00.01)
Terminal Communication
Keypad (P00.01=0)
(P00.01=1) (P00.01=2)
P08.31 set LED

The switch-over
ones to 0
channel for motor 1 and
motor 2 (P08.31) P08.31 sets P08.31 sets P08.31 sets
ones to 2 ones to 3 ones to 4
Terminal function 35 PROFIBUS

MODBUS Ethernet EtherCat/Profinet
Motor 1 switches to CANopen
P08.31 set LED communication communication communication
motor 2 communication
ones to 1
Communication setting value

2009H
BIT0–1=00 BIT0–1=01
Invalid Valid
Motor 1 Motor 2
The control performance of the VFD is based on accurate motor model, therefore, you need to carry
out motor parameter autotuning before running the motor for the first time (take motor 1 as an
example).
- 137 -
Ready
P00.01=0 (controlled by
keypad)
Synchronous Asynchronous
motor Motor type motor
(P02.00)
P02.00=1 P02.00=0
Input motor nameplate Input motor nameplate

(P02.12–P02.19) (P02.01–P02.05)
Set autotuning mode
Complete parameter Complete parameter Partial parameter rotary

rotary autotuning static autotuning autotuning
Press "RUN" key to start

autotuning
During autotuning
Autotuning finished
Note:
1. Motor parameters must be set correctly according to motor nameplate;
2. If rotary autotuning is selected during motor autotuning, it is a must to disconnect the motor from
load to put the motor in static and no-load state, failed to do so may lead to inaccurate autotuned
results. At this time, the asynchronous motor can autotune P02.06–P02.10, and synchronous
motor can autotune P02.20–P02.23.
3. If static autotuning is selected during motor autotuning, there is no need to disconnect the motor
from load, as only part of the motor parameters have been autotuned, the control performance
- 138 -
may be impacted, under such situation, the asynchronous motor can autotune P02.06–P02.10,
while synchronous motor can autotune P02.20–P02.22, P02.23 (counter-emf constant of
synchronous motor 1) can be obtained via calculation.
4. Motor autotuning can be carried out on current motor only, if you need to perform autotuning on
the other motor, switch over the motor through selecting the switch-over channel of motor 1 and
motor 2 by setting the ones of P08.31.
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0: Keypad
P00.01 Running command channel 1: Terminal 0
2: Communication
0: No operation
1: Rotary autotuning; carry out

comprehensive motor parameter
autotuning; rotary autotuning is used in
cases where high control precision is
required;

P00.15 Motor parameter autotuning 0
3: Static autotuning 2 (partial

autotuning) ; when current motor is motor
1, only P02.06, P02.07 and P02.08 will
be autotuned; when current motor is
motor 2, only P12.06, P12.07 and P12.08
will be autotuned.

P02.01 0.1–3000.0kW
P02.02 Rated frequency of 0.01Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 50.00Hz
- 139 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Rated speed of Model

P02.03 1–36000rpm

P02.04 0–1200V

P02.05 0.8–6000.0A
Stator resistance of Model

P02.06 0.001–65.535Ω
Rotor resistance of Model

P02.07 0.001–65.535Ω
Leakage inductance of Model

P02.08 0.1–6553.5mH
Mutual inductance of Model

P02.09 0.1–6553.5mH
No-load current of Model

P02.10 0.1–6553.5A
Rated power of synchronous Model

P02.15 0.1–3000.0kW
motor 1 depended
Rated frequency of
synchronous motor 1

P02.17 1–50 2
synchronous motor 1

P02.18 0–1200V

P02.19 0.8–6000.0A
P02.20 Stator resistance of 0.001–65.535Ω Model
- 140 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Direct-axis inductance of Model

P02.21 0.01–655.35mH
Quadrature-axis inductance Model

P02.22 0.01–655.35mH
of synchronous motor 1 depended
Counter-emf constant of
P02.23 0–10000 300
synchronous motor 1
Function of multi-function
P05.01–
digital input terminal (S1–S4, 35: Motor 1 switches to motor 2 /
P05.06
HDIA,HDIB)
0x00–0x14
Ones: Switch-over channel
0: Switch over by terminal
1: Switch over by MODBUS

communication
2: Switch over by PROFIBUS / CANopen

Switching between motor 1 /Devicenet
P08.31 00
and motor 2 3: Switch over by Ethernet
communication
4: Switch over by EtherCat/Profinet

communication
Tens: Motor switch-over during running
0: Disable switch-over during running
1: Enable switch-over during running

P12.01 0.1–3000.0kW
P12.02 Rated frequency of 0.01Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 50.00Hz
- 141 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Rated speed of
P12.03 1–36000rpm
Rated voltage of
P12.04 0–1200V
Rated current of
P12.05 0.8–6000.0A
Stator resistance of
P12.06 0.001–65.535Ω
Rotor resistance of Model

P12.07 0.001–65.535Ω
Leakage inductance of
P12.08 0.1–6553.5mH
Mutual inductance of
P12.09 0.1–6553.5mH
No-load current of
P12.10 0.1–6553.5A
Rated power of synchronous

P12.15 0.1–3000.0kW
motor 2
Rated frequency of
synchronous motor 2

P12.17 1–50 2
synchronous motor 2

P12.18 0–1200V

P12.19 0.8–6000.0A
P12.20 Stator resistance of 0.001–65.535Ω Model
- 142 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Direct-axis inductance of Model

P12.21 0.01–655.35mH
Quadrature-axis inductance Model

P12.22 0.01–655.35mH
of synchronous motor 2 depended
Counter-emf constant of
P12.23 0–10000 300
synchronous motor 2
6.5.7 Start/stop control

The start/stop control of the VFD is divided into three states: start after running command at power-up;
start after restart-at-power-cut function is effective; start after automatic fault reset. Descriptions for
these three start/stop control states are presented below.
There are three start modes for the VFD, which are start at starting frequency, start after DC brake,
and start after speed-tracking. You can select the proper start mode based on field conditions.
For large-inertia load, especially in cases where reversal may occur, you can choose to start after DC
brake or start after speed-racking.
Note: It is recommended to drive synchronous motors in direct start mode.
1. Logic diagram for running command after power-up

Direct start
Straight-type
1f acceleration/deceleration
P00.03
ce o n
De roce
pro lerati
Starting
ss
ce
p
P01.00
lera ss
frequency of
ce
Running mode of start

Ac
direct start
tio
n
Hold time of starting frequency 1t
0 0 1f
Start after DC brake P00.11
P00.12
Acceleration
Deceleration time Jump 1/2* jump amplitude 3
time
N 1 frequency 3 1/2* jump amplitude 3
Jogging? P01.05
Acceleration/deceleration mode Jump 1/2* jump amplitude 2
Brake 1 selection frequency 2 1/2* jump amplitude 2
2
current
Y before start 1/2* jump amplitude 1
S curve-type Jump
1f
acceleration/deceleration frequency 1 1/2* jump amplitude 1
P00.03
Brake time before
proc tion
Decel ess
start 1t
ess
lera
proc
eratio
Acce
1t
Start after speed-tracking
P00.11
P00.12
Acceleration
Deceleration time
time
1f
P08.06
ce o n
De roce
Running
pro lerati
ce
ss
frequency of
p
lera ss
jogging
ce
tio
Ac
1t
P08.07
P08.08
Acceleration
Deceleration time
time
2. Logic diagram for restart after power-off
- 143 -
Run
Run
Standby
0 Keypad The running state Stop

before power cut Stop
0
N N
Restart after Communi
power-cut 1 Y cation
Delay time of restart Y 2
Waiting time of restart at
>P01.123
power-cut>P01.22 N
P01.21
(restart at power-cut) 0
Termin FWD/REV
1 Y
al Whether running terminal
command is valid 1
P00.01 Run
Running command channel
P01.18
(Power-on terminal running protection
selection)
3. Logic diagram for restart after automatic fault reset

In running
VFD fault
Automatic reset times N

of VFD fault<P08.28
Automatic reset
interval of VFD N
fault>P08.29
Y
VFD fault reset, Display fault
start running code, and stop
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0: Keypad
P00.01 Running command channel 1: Terminal 0
2: Communication
Model
depended
Model
P00.12 Deceleration time 1 0.0–3600.0s
depended
0: Direct start
1: Start after DC brake

P01.00 Running mode of start 0
2: Start after speed-track 1
3: Start after speed-track 2
- 144 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value

P01.01 0.00–50.00Hz 0.50Hz
start
Hold time of starting

P01.02 0.0–50.0s 0.0s
frequency
P01.03 DC brake current before start 0.0–100.0% 0.0%
P01.04 DC brake time before start 0.00–50.00s 0.00s
0: Straight line
1: S curve
Acceleration/deceleration
P01.05 Note: If mode 1 is selected, it is required 0
mode
to set P01.07, P01.27 and P01.08
accordingly.
0: Decelerate to stop
P01.08 Stop mode 0
1: Coast to stop
Starting frequency of DC
brake after stop
Waiting time of DC brake

P01.10 0.00–50.00s 0.00s
after stop
P01.11 DC brake current of stop 0.0–100.0% 0.0%
P01.12 DC brake time of stop 0.00–50.00s 0.00s
Deadzone time of
P01.13 0.0–3600.0s 0.0s
forward/reverse rotation
0: Switch over after zero frequency
Forward/reverse rotation 1: Switch over after starting frequency

P01.14 0
switch-over mode 2: Switch over after passing stop speed
and delay
P01.15 Stop speed 0.00–100.00Hz 0.50 Hz
P01.16 Stop speed detection mode 0: Set value of speed (the only detection 1
- 145 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
mode valid in SVPWM mode)
1: Detection value of speed
0: Terminal running command is invalid

Power-on terminal running at power up
P01.18 0
protection selection 1: Terminal running command is valid at
power up
Action selection when the 0: Run at the lower limit frequency

running frequency is below
P01.19 1: Stop 0
lower limit (lower limit should
be larger than 0) 2: Sleep
P01.20 Wake-up-from-sleep delay 0.0–3600.0s (valid when P01.19 is 2) 0.0s
0: Restart is disabled
P01.21 Restart after power cut 0
1: Restart is enabled
Waiting time of restart after

P01.22 0.0–3600.0s (valid when P01.21 is 1) 1.0s
power cut
P01.23 Start delay 0.0–60.0s 0.0s
P01.24 Stop speed delay 0.0–100.0s 0.0s
0: No voltage output
Open-loop 0Hz output
P01.25 1: With voltage output 0
selection
2: Output as per DC brake current of stop
Deceleration time of
P01.26 0.0–60.0s 2.0s
emergency-stop
Time of starting section of

P01.27 0.0–50.0s 0.1s
deceleration S curve
Time of ending section of

P01.28 0.0–50.0s 0.1s
deceleration S curve
P01.29 Short-circuit brake current 0.0–150.0% (rated VFD current) 0.0%
- 146 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Hold time of short-circuit

P01.30 0.00–50.00s 0.00s
brake at startup
Hold time of short-circuit

P01.31 0.00–50.00s 0.00s
brake at stop
1: Forward running
2: Reverse running
4: Forward jogging
5: Reverse jogging
6: Coast to stop
P05.01– Digital input function 7: Fault reset
/
P05.06 selection
8: Running pause
21: Acceleration/deceleration time

selection 1

selection 2
30: Acceleration/deceleration disabled
P08.06 Running frequency of jog 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 5.00Hz
Model
P08.07 Acceleration time at jogging 0.0–3600.0s
depended
Model
P08.08 Deceleration time at jogging 0.0–3600.0s
depended
Model
depended
Model
P08.01 Declaration time 2 0.0–3600.0s
depended
Model
depended
P08.03 Declaration time 3 0.0–3600.0s Model
- 147 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
depended
Model
depended
Model
P08.05 Declaration time 4 0.0–3600.0s
depended
0.00–P00.03 (Max. output frequency)
Switching frequency of 0.00Hz: No switch over

P08.19 acceleration/deceleration If the running frequency is larger than 0
time P08.19, switch to acceleration
/deceleration time 2
0: Max. output frequency
Reference frequency of 1: Set frequency

P08.21 acceleration/deceleration 2: 100Hz 0
time
Note: Valid for straight-line
acceleration/deceleration only
P08.28 Automatic fault reset times 0–10 0
Automatic fault reset time

P08.29 0.1–3600.0s 1.0s
interval
6.5.8 Frequency setting

GD350-19 series VFD supports multiple kinds of frequency reference modes, which can be
categorized into two types: main reference channel and auxiliary reference channel.
There are two main reference channels, namely frequency reference channel A and frequency
reference channel B. These two channels support simple arithmetical operation between each other,
and they can be switched dynamically by setting multi-function terminals.
There is one input mode for auxiliary reference channel, namely terminal UP/DOWN switch input. By
setting function codes, you can enable the corresponding reference mode and the impact made on
the VFD frequency reference by this reference mode.
The actual reference of VFD is comprised of the main reference channel and auxiliary reference
channel.
- 148 -
P00.10 Keypad
AI1
AI2 P00.06
Frequency set by keypad (A frequency command
AI3 selection)
0
HDI
1
Simple PLC 2
3
Multi-step speed
P17.00 P17.02
4
Set Ramps reference
PID 5 frequency frequency
6
MODBUS
7 A
PROFIBUS\CANopen P00.04 (upper limit of running
8 0 frequency)
B
Ethernet 9 1
A+B 2 +
Pulse string AB 10
3
11 A-B
HDIB +
A 4
frequency
Max（A，B） 5
EtherCat/Profinet command P00.05 (lower limit of running
P00.09 frequency)
Min（A，B） (combination mode of setup
PLC card
source)
P00.10 Keypad P00.07

(B frequency command 1
Frequency set by keypad selection)
AI1 0
P00.03
0 (max. output
AI2
frequency)
1
AI3 2 P00.08 (B frequency command reference
object selection)
3
HDIA
4
Simple PLC 5
6
Multi-step speed
7
PID 8
MODBUS 9
10
PROFIBUS\CANopen Terminal function 33 P17.14
11 Clear frequency Digital Terminal function 12
increase/decrease setup adjustment Clear frequency
Ethernet
temporarily value of increase/decrease setup
keypad
Pulse string AB Valid Valid
0 0
Invalid Invalid
HDIB
EtherCat/Profinet
0
UP/DOWN enable
PLC card
P08.44 ones P08.44 tens setup
(UP/DOWN terminal (frequency control
UP/DOWN terminal control setting) selection)
GD350-19 VFD supports switch-over between different reference channels, and the rules for channel
switch-over are shown below.
Multifunction terminal Multifunction terminal Multifunction terminal
Present reference
function 13 function 14 function 15
channel
Channel A switches to Combination setup Combination setup
P00.09
channel B switches to channel A switches to channel B
A B / /
B A / /
A+B / A B
A-B / A B
Max (A, B) / A B
Min (A, B) / A B
Note: "/" indicates this multi-function terminal is invalid under present reference channel.
When setting the auxiliary frequency inside the VFD via multi-function terminal UP (10) and DOWN
(11), you can increase/decrease the frequency quickly by setting P08.45 (UP terminal frequency
incremental change rate) and P08.46 (DOWN terminal frequency decrement change rate).
- 149 -
UP terminal frequency incremental integral speed P08.45

F DOWN terminal frequency decremental integral speed P08.46
UP terminal state
UP terminal
function selection=10 Sx
T
DOWN terminal state
DOWN terminal Sy
function selection=11 T
Function Default
Name Description
code value
P00.03 Max. output frequency P00.04–400.00Hz 50.00Hz

P00.04 P00.05–P00.03 50.00Hz
frequency
Lower limit of running

P00.05 0.00Hz–P00.04 0.00Hz
frequency
Setting channel of A 0: Keypad

P00.06 0
frequency command 1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: High speed pulse HDIA
5: Simple PLC program
6: Multi-step speed running
Setting channel of B 7: PID control

P00.07 15
frequency command 8: MODBUS communication
communication
11: High speed pulse HDIB
12: Pulse string AB
- 150 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
14: PLC card
Reference object of B 0: Max. output frequency

P00.08 0
frequency command 1: A frequency command
0: A
1: B
Combination mode of setup 2: (A+B)

P00.09 0
source 3: (A-B)
4: Max (A, B)
5: Min (A, B)
10: Frequency increase (UP)
11: Frequency decrease (DOWN)
12: Clear frequency increase/decrease

setting
Function of multi-function
P05.01– 13: Switch-over between setup A and
digital input terminal (S1–S4, /
P05.06 setup B
HDIA, HDIB)
14: Switch-over between combination
setup and setup A
15: Switch-over between combination

setup and setup B
0x000–0x221
Ones: Frequency enabling selection
0: UP/DOWN terminal setting is valid
1: UP/DOWN terminal setting is invalid

P08.44 UP/DOWN terminal control 0x000
Tens: Frequency control selection
0: Valid only when P00.06=0 or P00.07=0
1: Valid for all frequency modes
2: Invalid for multi-step speed when
- 151 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
multi-step speed takes priority
Hundreds: Action selection at stop
0: Valid
1: Valid during running, clear after stop
2: Valid during running, clear after

receiving stop command
UP terminal frequency
P08.45 0.01–50.00 Hz/s 0.50 Hz/s
incremental change rate
DOWN terminal frequency

P08.46 0.01–50.00 Hz/s 0.50 Hz/s
decrement change rate
P17.00 Set frequency 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 0.00Hz
P17.02 Ramps reference frequency 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 0.00Hz
P17.14 Digital adjustment value 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 0.00Hz
6.5.9 Analog input

GD350-19 series VFD carries two analog input terminals (AI1 is 0–10V/0–20mA; voltage input or
current input can be set by P05.50); AI2 is -10–10V) and two high-speed pulse input terminals. Each
input can be filtered separately, and the corresponding reference curve can be set by adjusting the
reference corresponds to the max. value and min. value.
- 152 -
Analog input curve setting

Analog input filter
P05.24
P05.25 P05.28
AI1 input voltage P05.26
P05.27
P17.19
AI1 P05.29
AI2 input voltage P05.30
P05.31
P17.20 P05.32 P05.37
P05.33
P05.34
AI2 P05.35
P05.36
HDIA input frequency
P17.21
0
0
P05.39
HDIA 1 P05.40 P05.43
1 P05.41
2 P05.42
P05.00
P05.38
（HDIA input type）
(HDIA high-speed pulse input function
selection)
HDIB input frequency
0
0 AI1/AI2/HDI
P17.22
HDIB 1 P05.45 P05.49

1 P05.46
2 P05.47
P05.48
P05.00
P05.44
（HDIB input type）
(HDIB high-speed pulse input function
selection)
Ones： 0: Set input via frequency

P05.00 0: HDIA is high-speed pulse input P05.38 1: Reserved
1: HDIA is digital input 2: Input via encoder
Tens： 0: Set input via frequency

P05.00 0: HDIB is high-speed pulse input P05.44 1: Reserved
1: HDIB is digital input 2: Input via encoder
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0x00–0x11
P05.24 Lower limit value of AI1 0.00V–P05.26 0.00V
Corresponding setting of
P05.25 -100.0%–100.0% 0.0%
lower limit of AI1
- 153 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
P05.26 Upper limit value of AI1 P05.24–10.00V 10.00V
P05.27 -100.0%–100.0% 100.0%
upper limit of AI1
P05.28 Input filter time of AI1 0.000s–10.000s 0.100s
P05.29 Lower limit value of AI2 -10.00V–P05.31 -10.00V
P05.30 -100.0%–100.0% -100.0%
lower limit of AI2
P05.31 Intermediate value 1 of AI2 P05.29–P05.33 0.00V
P05.32 -100.0%–100.0% 0.0%
intermediate value 1 of AI2
P05.33 Intermediate value 2 of AI2 P05.31–P05.35 0.00V
P05.34 -100.0%–100.0% 0.0%
intermediate value 2 of AI2
P05.35 Upper limit value of AI2 P05.33–10.00V 10.00V
P05.36 -100.0%–100.0% 100.0%
upper limit of AI2
P05.37 Input filter time of AI2 0.000s–10.000s 0.100s
0: Set input via frequency
HDIA high-speed pulse input 1: Reserved

P05.38 0
function 2: Input via encoder, used in
combination with HDIB
Lower limit frequency of

P05.39 0.000 KHz – P05.41 0.000KHz
HDIA
P05.40 -100.0%–100.0% 0.0%
lower limit frequency of HDIA
P05.41 Upper limit frequency of P05.39 –50.000KHz 50.000KHz
- 154 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
HDIA
P05.42 upper limit frequency of -100.0%–100.0% 100.0%
HDIA
HDIA frequency input filter

P05.43 0.000s–10.000s 0.030s
time
HDIB high-speed pulse input 1: Reserved

P05.44 0
function selection 2: Input via encoder, used in
combination with HDIA
Lower limit frequency of

P05.45 0.000 KHz – P05.47 0.000KHz
HDIB
P05.46 -100.0%–100.0% 0.0%
lower limit frequency of HDIB
Upper limit frequency of

P05.47 P05.45 –50.000KHz 50.000KHz
HDIB
P05.48 upper limit frequency of -100.0%–100.0% 100.0%
HDIB
HDIB frequency input filter

P05.49 0.000s–10.000s 0.030s
time
0–1
P05.50 AI1 input signal type 0: Voltage type 0
1: Current type
Note: When you set P90.04=1 and use the analog reference frequency, use terminals to give the
forward and reverse running commands.
6.5.10 Analog output
GD350-19 series VFD carries one analog output terminal (0–10V/0–20mA) and one high-speed pulse
output terminal. Analog output signals can be filtered separately, and the proportional relation can be
- 155 -
adjusted by setting the max. value, min. value, and the percentage of their corresponding output.
Analog output signal can output motor speed, output frequency, output current, motor torque and
motor power at a certain proportion.
0
Analog output selection Analog output curve setting Analog output filter
1 P06.17
P06.14 P06.18 P06.21 AO1
P06.19
2
P06.20
(Default value is 0)
P06.00 .
(HDO output type)
P06.27
0 .
P06.28
P06.16 P06.29 P06.31 HDO
19 P06.30
1 (Default value is 0)
20
0: Open collector high-speed

P06.00 pulse output
1: Open-collector output
Instructions for output:
Setting Function Description
0 Running frequency 0–Max. output frequency
1 Set frequency 0–Max. output frequency
2 Ramps reference frequency 0–Max. output frequency
0–Synchronous speed corresponding to Max. output

3 Running speed
frequency
Output current (relative to

4 0–Two times of rated current of VFD
VFD)
Output current (relative to

5 0–Two times of rated current of motor
motor)
6 Output voltage 0–1.5 times of rated voltage of VFD
7 Output power 0–Two times of rated power
8 Set torque value 0–Two times of rated current of motor
9 Output torque 0–Two times of rated current of motor
- 156 -
10 AI1 input value 0–10V/0–20mA
11 AI2 input value -10V–10V
12 AI3 input value 0–10V/0–20mA
Input value of high-speed

13 0.00–50.00kHz
pulse HDIA
Set value 1 of MODBUS

14 -1000–1000, 1000 corresponds to 100.0%
communication
Set value 2 of MODBUS -1000–1000, 1000 corresponds to 100.0%

15
communication
Set value 1 of
16 PROFIBUS/CANopen -1000–1000, 1000 corresponds to 100.0%
communication
Set value 2 of
17 PROFIBUS/CANopen -1000–1000, 1000 corresponds to 100.0%
communication
Ethernet communication set -1000–1000, 1000 corresponds to 100.0%

18
value 1
Ethernet communication set -1000–1000, 1000 corresponds to 100.0%

19
value 2
High-speed pulse HDIB input

20 0.00–50.00kHz
value
21 Reserved variable
Torque current (bipolar, 100% 0–Two times of rated current of motor

22
corresponds to 10V)
Exciting current (100% 0–One times of rated current of motor

23
corresponds to 10V)
24 Set frequency (bipolar) 0–Max. output frequency
25 Ramps reference frequency 0–Max. output frequency
- 157 -
(bipolar)
26 Running speed (bipolar) 0–Max. output frequency
EtherCat/Profinet
27 -1000–1000, 1000 corresponds to 100.0%
communication set value 2
28 C_AO1 from PLC 1000 corresponds to 100.0%
29 C_AO2 from PLC 1000 corresponds to 100.0%
30 Running speed 0–Two times of rated synchronous speed of motor
31–47 Reserved variable
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0: Open collector high-speed pulse

P06.00 HDO output type output 0
P06.14 AO1 output selection 0: Running frequency 0
1: Set frequency
P06.15 Reserved variable 0
2: Ramps reference frequency
3: Running speed
4: Output current (relative to twice the

VFD rated current)
5: Output current (relative to twice the

P06.16 HDO high-speed pulse output 6: Output voltage (relative to 1.5 times 0
the VFD rated voltage)
7: Output power (relative to twice the

motor rated power)
8: Set torque value (relative to twice the

motor rated torque)
9: Output torque (relative to twice the
- 158 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
motor rated torque)
10: Analog AI1 input value
11: Analog AI2input value
12: Analog AI3 input value
13: Input value of high-speed pulse

HDIA
14: Set value 1 of MODBUS

communication
15: Set value 2 of MODBUS

communication
16: Set value 1 of PROFIBUS/CANopen

communication
17: Set value 2 of PROFIBUS/CANopen

communication
18: Ethernet communication set value 1
19: Ethernet communication set value 2
20: High-speed pulse HDIB input value

set value 1
22: Torque current (relative to triple the

23: Exciting current (relative to triple the

24: Set frequency (bipolar)
25: Ramps reference frequency

(bipolar)
26: Running speed (bipolar)

set value 2
28: C_AO1 from PLC (You need to set

P27.00 to 1.)
- 159 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
29: C_AO2 from PLC (You need to set

P27.00 to 1.)
30: Running speed (relative to twice the

synchronous speed of motor)
31–47: Reserved variable
P06.17 Lower limit of AO1 output -300.0%–P06.19 0.0%
Corresponding AO1 output of

P06.18 0.00V–10.00V 0.00V
lower limit
P06.19 Upper limit of AO1 output P06.17–100.0% 100.0%
Corresponding AO1 output of

P06.20 0.00V–10.00V 10.00V
upper limit
P06.21 AO1 output filter time 0.000s–10.000s 0.000s
P06.22–
Reserved variable 0–65535 0
P06.26
P06.27 Lower limit of HDO output -300.0%–P06.29 0.0%
Corresponding HDO output of

P06.28 0.00–50.00kHz 0.0kHz
lower limit
P06.29 Upper limit of HDO output P06.27–100.0% 100.0%
Corresponding HDO output of

P06.30 0.00–50.00kHz 50.00kHz
upper limit
P06.31 HDO output filter time 0.000s–10.000s 0.000s
6.5.11 Digital input

GD350-19 series VFD carries four programmable digital input terminals and two HDI input terminals.
The function of all the digital input terminals can be programmed by function codes. HDI input
terminal can be set to act as high-speed pulse input terminal or common digital input terminal; if it is
set to act as high-speed pulse input terminal, you can also set HDIA or HDIB high-speed pulse input
to serve as the frequency reference and encoder signal input.
- 160 -
P05.08 (input terminal polarity) P05.09 (digital filter time)
Digital function selection
0 P05.12 P05.13 0
S1 T delay T delay P05.01
1 -1
(Default value is 1) 1
0 P05.14 P05.15
S2 T delay T delay P05.02 2
1 -1
0 P05.16 P05.17 3 Run P17.11
S3 T delay T delay P05.03 Digital input
1 -1
terminal state
(Default value is 7) 4
0 P05.18 P05.19
Fault?
S4 T delay T delay P05.04
1 -1 5
(Default value is 0) Fault P07.39
Input terminal
state of present
. fault
P05.00
(HDI input type)
0 P05.20 P05.21
HDIA T delay T delay P05.05 .
0 1 -1
0 P05.22 P05.23
1 .
HD1B T delay T delay P05.06
1 -1
.
29
30
This parameter is used to set the corresponding function of digital multi-function input terminals.
Note: Two different multi-function input terminals cannot be set to the same function.
The VFD does not act even if there is signal input; you
0 No function can set the unused terminals to "no function" to avoid
misacts.
1 Forward running (FWD)

Control the forward/reverse running of the VFD by
external terminals.
2 Reverse running (REV)
Set the VFD running mode to 3-wire control mode by this

3 3-wire control/Sin
terminal. See P05.13 for details.
4 Forward jogging
Frequency when jogging, see P08.06, P08.07 and
P08.08 for jogging acceleration/deceleration time.
5 Reverse jogging
The VFD blocks output, and the stop process of motor is

uncontrolled by the VFD. This mode is applied in cases of
6 Coast to stop
large-inertia load and free stop time; its definition is the
Same as P01.08, and it is mainly used in remote control.
External fault reset function, its function is the Same as

7 Fault reset the STOP/RST key on the keypad. This function can be
used in remote fault reset.
The VFD decelerates to stop, however, all the running

8 Running pause parameters are in memory state, such as PLC
parameter, wobbling frequency, and PID parameter. After
- 161 -
this signal disappears, the VFD will revert to the state

before stop.
When external fault signal is transmitted to the VFD, the

9 External fault input
VFD releases fault alarm and stops.
10 Frequency increase (UP) Used to change the frequency-increase/decrease

command when the frequency is given by external
Frequency decrease
11 terminals.
(DOWN)
K1
UP terminal
K2
DOWN terminal
K3 UP/DOWM
Zeroing terminal
COM
Clear frequency
12
increase/decrease setting
The terminal used to clear frequency-increase/decrease
setting can clear the frequency value of auxiliary channel
set by UP/DOWN, thus restoring the reference frequency
to the frequency given by main reference frequency
command channel.
Switching between A setting

13 Used to switch between the frequency setting channels.
and B setting
A frequency reference channel and B frequency
Switching between reference channel can be switched by no. 13 function;
14 combination setting and A the combination channel set by P00.09 and the A
setting frequency reference channel can be switched by no. 14
function; the combination channel set by P00.09 and the
Switching between
B frequency reference channel can be switched by no. 15
15 combination setting and B
function.
setting
16 Multi-step speed terminal 1 16-step speeds can be set by combining digital states of
these four terminals.
17 Multi-step speed terminal 2
Note: Multi-step speed 1 is low bit, multi-step speed 4
18 Multi-step speed terminal 3 is high bit.
Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step
19 Multi-step speed terminal 4 speed 4 speed 3 speed 2 speed 1

BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
- 162 -
Pause multi-step speed selection function to keep the set

20 Multi-step speed pause
value in present state.
Acceleration/deceleration Use these two terminals to select four groups of

21
time selection 1 acceleration/decoration time.
Acceleration or
Terminal Terminal Corresponding
deceleration time
1 2 parameter
selection
Acceleration/
OFF OFF P00.11/P00.12
deceleration time 1
22 Acceleration/
time selection 2 ON OFF P08.00/P08.01
deceleration time 2
Acceleration/
OFF ON P08.02/P08.03
deceleration time 3
Acceleration/
ON ON P08.04/P08.05
deceleration time 4
Restart simple PLC process and clear previous PLC

23 Simple PLC stop reset
state information.
The program pauses during PLC execution, and keeps

24 Simple PLC pause running in current speed step. After this function is
cancelled, simple PLC keeps running.
PID is ineffective temporarily, and the VFD maintains

25 PID control pause
current frequency output.
The VFD pauses at current output. After this function is

Wobbling frequency pause
26 canceled, it continues wobbling-frequency operation at
(stop at current frequency)
current frequency.
Wobbling frequency reset

27 The set frequency of VFD reverts to center frequency.
(revert to center frequency)
28 Counter reset Zero out the counter state.
29 Switching between speed The VFD switches from torque control mode to speed
- 163 -
control and torque control control mode, or vice versa.
Ensure the VFD will not be impacted by external signals

30 (except for stop command), and maintains current output
disabled
frequency.
31 Counter trigger Enable pulse counting of the counter.
When the terminal is closed, the frequency value set by

UP/DOWN can be cleared to restore the reference
Clear frequency
frequency to the frequency given by frequency command
33 increase/decrease setting
channel; when terminal is disconnected, it will revert to
temporarily
the frequency value after frequency increase/decrease
setting.
The VFD starts DC brake immediately after the command

34 DC brake
becomes valid.
Switching between motor 1 When this terminal is valid, you can realize switch-over
35
and motor 2 control of two motors.
When this terminal is valid, the running command

Command switches to channel will switch to keypad compulsorily. If this function
36
keypad becomes invalid, the running command channel will
revert to the original state.

Command switches to channel will switch to terminal compulsorily. If this
37
terminal function becomes invalid, the running command channel
will revert to the original state.

Command switches to channel will switch to communication compulsorily. If this
38
communication function becomes invalid, the running command channel
will revert to the original state.
When this terminal is valid, motor pre-exciting will be

39 Pre-exciting command
started until this terminal becomes invalid.
Clear power consumption After this command becomes valid, the power
40
quantity consumption quantity of the VFD will be zeroed out.
- 164 -
Maintain power When this command is valid, current operation of the

41
consumption quantity VFD will not impact the power consumption quantity.
Source of upper torque limit When this command is valid, the upper limit of the torque
42
switches to keypad will be set by keypad.
Position reference point

43 Valid only for S1, S2, and S3.
input
44 Prohibit spindle orientation The spindle positioning function is invalid.
Spindle zeroing/local
45 Used to trigger spindle positioning.
positioning zeroing
Spindle zero-point position

46 Terminal-selected spindle zero-point position 1.
selection 1
Spindle zero-point position

47 Terminal-selected spindle zero-point position 2.
selection 2
Spindle scale-division
48 Terminal-selected spindle scale-division 1.
selection 1
selection 2
selection 3
Position/speed control
51 Used to switch position control and speed control.
switching terminal
52 Pulse input inhibition When the terminal is valid, pulse input is invalid.
53 Clear position deviation Used to clear the input deviation of the position loop.
Position proportional gain

54 Used to switch position proportional gains.
switchover
Enable cyclic digital When the digital positioning mode is valid, the cyclic
55
positioning positioning function can be enabled.
56 Emergency stop When this command is valid, the motor decelerate to
- 165 -
emergency stop as per the time set by P01.26.
Motor over-temperature
57 Motor stops at motor over-temperature fault input.
fault input
When this terminal is valid in stop state, switch to

59 FVC switches to V/F control
SVPWM control.
When this terminal is valid in stop state, switch to

60 Switch to FVC control
closed-loop vector control.
Switching the output polarity of PID, this terminal should

61 PID polarity switch-over
be used in conjunction with P09.03
Switch to SVC1 control

Switching from closed-loop vector control to open-loop
62 (open-loop vector control
vector control
mode 1)
When the thousands place in P21.00 is set to enable
servo, the servo enabling terminal is valid. If the VFD is
63 Enable servo
managed to enter zero servo control, at this time, no start
command is needed.
Forward rotation position limit for stop. When receiving
64 FWD position limit
this signal during forward rotation, the VFD stops.
Reverse rotation position limit for stop. When receiving
65 REV position limit
this signal during reverse rotation, the VFD stops.
66 Clear the encoder counting Zero out the position counting value
When the terminal function is valid, the pulse input is

67 Pulse increase
increased according to the P21.27 pulse speed.
Enable pulse When the pulse superimposition is enabled, pulse

68
superimposition increase and pulse decrease are effective.
When the terminal function is valid, the pulse input is

69 Pulse decrease
decreased according to the P21.27 pulse speed.
When the terminal is valid, the proportional numerator is

70 Electronic gear selection switched to the P21.30 numerator of the 2nd command
ratio.
71 Switch to the master When the terminal is valid, the switchover from the slave
- 166 -
to the master can be implemented.
When the terminal is valid, the switchover from the

72 Switch to the slave
master to the slave can be implemented.
73 Enable the VFD When the terminal is valid, the VFD is enabled.
74 Contactor feedback signal Contactor status feedback.
75 Brake feedback signal Brake status feedback.
Operating lever zero-point When the terminal is valid, the operating level sets the
76
position zero-point input signal.
77 Graded reference terminal 1 Five terminals can be used to implement graded speed
setting.
78 Graded reference terminal 2
Trml1 Trml 2 Trml 3 Trml 4 Trml 5 Speed setting
79 Graded reference terminal 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Graded setting 0
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Graded setting 1
80 Graded reference terminal 4
ON ON OFF OFF OFF Graded setting 2
ON ON ON OFF OFF Graded setting 3
81 Graded reference terminal 5 ON ON ON ON OFF Graded setting 4
ON ON ON ON ON Graded setting 5
When the terminal is valid, the VFD enters the upward

82 Upward DEC limit position slow speed area and runs at the frequency specified by
P91.35.
When the terminal is valid, the VFD enters the downward

Downward DEC limit
83 slow speed area and runs at the frequency specified by
position
P91.35.
Light load speed boost When P91.08=5, the terminal command is valid, light
84
signal load speed boost is performed.
When the terminal command is valid, brake detection is

85 Brake detection
performed
Supporting only the terminals S5–S8 of EC-IO502-00.

Valid signal of PTC
86 When receiving this signal, the PTC overtemperature
overtemperature
alarm or fault is reported.
- 167 -
Position synchronization The position synchronization pulse counter status is

87
pulse counting reset cleared.
Switchover between motors When the terminal is valid, the switchover between the
88
1 and 3 two motors can be controlled.
When the terminal command is valid, the VFD stops with

89 Anti-snag protection input the torque specified by P92.27 within the time specified
by P92.28.
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0x00–0x11
P05.01 Function of S1 terminal 0: No function 1
1: Forward running
2: Reverse running
3: 3-wire control/Sin
P05.04 Function of S4 terminal 4: Forward jogging 0
P05.05 Function of HDIA terminal 5: Reverse jogging 0

6: Coast to stop
P05.06 Function of HDIB terminal 0
7: Fault reset
8: Running pause
9: External fault input

P05.07 Reserved variables 0
10: Frequency increase (UP)
- 168 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
12: Clear frequency

13: Switch-over between setup A and

setup B
14: Switch-over between

combination setting and A setting
15: Switch-over between

combination setting and setup B
16: Multi-step speed terminal 1
20: Multi-step speed pause

selection 1

selection 2
23: Simple PLC stop reset
24: Simple PLC pause
25: PID control pause
26: Wobbling frequency pause
27: Wobbling frequency reset
28: Counter reset
29: Switching between speed control

and torque control
30: Acceleration/deceleration
disabled
31: Counter trigger
32: Reserved
33: Clear frequency

- 169 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
temporarily
34: DC brake
35: Switching between motor 1 and

motor 2
36: Command switches to keypad
37: Command switches to terminal
38: Command switches to

communication
39: Pre-exciting command
40: Zero out power consumption

quantity
41: Maintain power consumption

quantity
42: Source of upper torque limit

switches to keypad
43: Position reference point input

(valid only for S1, S2, and S3)
44: Prohibit spindle orientation
45: Spindle zeroing/local positioning
zeroing
46: Spindle zero-point position
selection1
47: Spindle zero-point position
selection2
48: Spindle scale-division selection 1
51: Position/speed control switching
terminal
52: Pulse input inhibition
53: Clear position deviation
54: Position proportional gain
switchover
55: Enable cyclic digital positioning
- 170 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
56: Emergency stop
57: Motor over-temperature fault

input
59: Switch to V/F control
60: Switch to FVC control
61: PID polarity switch-over
62: Switch to SVC1 control

(open-loop vector control mode 1)
63: Enable the servo
64: FWD position limit
65: REV position limit
66: Zero out encoder counting
67: Pulse increase
68: Enable pulse superimposition
69: Pulse decrease
70: Electronic gear selection
71: Switch to the master
72: Switch to the slave
73: Enable the VFD
74: Contactor feedback signal

75: Brake feedback signal
76: Operating lever zero-point
position
77: Graded reference terminal 1
82: Upward DEC limit position
83: Downward DEC limit position
84: Light load speed boost signal
85: Brake detection
- 171 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
86: Valid signal of PTC

overtemperature (Supporting only
the terminals S5–S8 of
EC-IO502-00)
87: Position synchronization pulse
counting reset
88: Switchover between motors 1
and 3
89: Anti-snag protection input
P05.08 Polarity of input terminal 0x00–0x3F 0x00
P05.09 Digital filter time 0.000–1.000s 0.010s
0x00–0x3F (0: disable, 1: enable)
BIT0: S1 virtual terminal
P05.10 Virtual terminal setting BIT2: S3 virtual terminal 0x00
BIT4: HDIA virtual terminal
BIT8: HDIB virtual terminal
0: 2-wire control 1
1: 2-wire control 2
P05.11 2-wire or 3-wire control mode 0
2: 3-wire control 1
3: 3-wire control 2
P05.12 S1 terminal switch-on delay 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
P05.13 S1 terminal switch-off delay 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
- 172 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
P05.20 HDIA terminal switch-on delay 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
P05.21 HDIA terminal switch-off delay 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
P05.22 HDIB terminal switch-on delay 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
P05.23 HDIB terminal switch-off delay 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
Input terminal state of present

P07.39 0
fault
P17.12 Digital input terminal state 0
6.5.12 Digital output

GD350-19 series VFD carries two groups of relay output terminals, one open collector Y output
terminal and one high-speed pulse output (HDO) terminal. The function of all the digital output
terminals can be programmed by function codes, of which the high-speed pulse output terminal HDO
can also be set to high-speed pulse output or digital output by function code.
P06.05 output polarity
Digital output selection Digital switch-on delay Digital switch-off delay
0 selection
P17.12
Run
Y P06.06 0 P06.07 Digital input
1 terminal state
P06.01 T delay T delay
2 1 -1 Fault？
（Default value: 0）
0 P07.38
3 Fault Digital output
HDO P06.08 0 P06.09 terminal state
1 4 P06.02 T delay T delay of current fault
1
5 （Default value: 0） -1
P06.00
HDO
input type . ROI 0
P06.10 P06.11
delay delay
. P06.03 T delay T delay P06.05, P17.12, P07.38 display
1 -1
（Default value: 1） Y BIT0 HDO BIT1
. ROI BIT2 RO2 BIT3
RO2 P06.12 0 P06.13 0: Open collector high-
.
P06.04 T delay T delay P06.00 speed pulse output
1 1: Open collector output
29 （Default value: 5） -1
30
The table below lists the options for the above four function parameters, and you are allowed to select
the same output terminal functions repetitively.
0 Invalid Output terminal has no function
1 In running Output ON signal when there is frequency output during
- 173 -
running
Output ON signal when there is frequency output during

2 In forward running
forward running

3 In reverse running
reverse running

4 In jogging
jogging
5 VFD fault Output ON signal when VFD fault occurred
Frequency level detection

6 Refer to P08.32 and P08.33
FDT1
Frequency level detection

7 Refer to P08.34 and P08.35
FDT2
8 Frequency reached Refer to P08.36
Output ON signal when the VFD output frequency and

9 Running in zero speed
reference frequency are both zero.
Reach upper limit Output ON signal when the running frequency reaches
10
frequency upper limit frequency
Reach lower limit Output ON signal when the running frequency reached
11
frequency lower limit frequency
Main circuit and control circuit powers are established,

12 Ready to run the protection functions do not act; when the VFD is
ready to run, output ON signal.
13 In pre-exciting Output ON signal during pre-exciting of the VFD
Output ON signal after the pre-alarm time elapsed based

14 Overload pre-alarm on the pre-alarm threshold; see P11.08–P11.10 for
details.
Output ON signal after the pre-alarm time elapsed based

15 Underload pre-alarm on the pre-alarm threshold; see P11.11–P11.12 for
details.
- 174 -
Simple PLC state Output signal when current stage of simple PLC is
16
completed completed
Simple PLC cycle Output signal when a single cycle of simple PLC
17
completed operation is completed
Output corresponding signal based on the set value of

Virtual terminal output of
23 MODBUS; output ON signal when it is set to 1, output
MODBUS communication
OFF signal when it is set to 0
Virtual terminal output of Output corresponding signal based on the set value of
24 Profibus/CANopen/ PROFIBUS/CANopen; output ON signal when it is set to
DeviceNet communication 1, output OFF signal when it is set to 0
Output corresponding signal based on the set value of

Virtual terminal output of
25 Ethernet; output ON signal when it is set to 1, output OFF
Ethernet communication
signal when it is set to 0.
DC bus voltage Output is valid when the bus voltage is above the
26
established undervoltage threshold of the inverter.
27 Z pulse output Output is valid when the encoder Z pulse is arrived, and
is invalid after 10 ms.
28 During pulse superposition Output is valid when the pulse superposition terminal
input function is valid
29 STO action Output when STO fault occurred
30 Positioning completed Output is valid when position control positioning is

completed
31 Spindle zeroing completed Output is valid when spindle zeroing is completed
32 Spindle scale-division Output is valid when spindle scale-division is completed

completed
33 In speed limit Output is valid when the frequency is limited
34 Virtual terminal output of The corresponding signal is output according to the set
EtherCat/Profinet value of Profinet communication. When it is set to 1, the
communication ON signal is output, and when it is set to 0, the OFF
- 175 -
signal is output.
35 Reserved
36 Speed/position control Output is valid when the mode switch-over is completed

switch-over completed
37–40 Reserved
41 C_Y1 C_Y1 from PLC (You need to set P27.00 to 1.)
42 C_Y2 C_Y2 from PLC (You need to set P27.00 to 1.)
43 C_HDO C_HDO from PLC (You need to set P27.00 to 1.)
44 C_RO1 C_RO1 from PLC(You need to set P27.00 to 1.)
45 C_RO2 C_RO2 from PLC (You need to set P27.00 to 1.)
The contactor is VFD controlled. It outputs the ON signal

48 Contactor output
during running and it outputs the OFF signal during stop.
It outputs the ON signal during brake release and it

49 Brake output
outputs the OFF signal during brake closing.
If the torque verification succeeds, and the running

Ready to release the frequency is no less than the brake release frequency, it
50
brake outputs the ON signal when it is ready to release the
brake. Otherwise, it outputs the OFF signal.
If the stop command is given, and the running frequency

is no greater than the brake closing frequency, it outputs
51 Ready to close the brake
the ON signal when it is ready to close the brake.
Otherwise, it outputs the OFF signal.
Upward limit position The output is valid when the upward limit position is
52
reached reached.
Downward limit position The output is valid when the downward limit position is
53
reached reached.
- 176 -
54 Low voltage protection The output is valid at low voltage.
55 Overload protection The output is valid at overload.
When the brake detection reminding time is reached, it

56 Brake detection reminding outputs the ON signal. Otherwise, it outputs the OFF
signal.
57 Brake failure alarm The output is valid when the brake fails.
The output is valid when an input phase loss alarm is

58 Input phase loss alarm
reported.
The output is valid when a FWD loose rope protection or

59 Loose rope status
REV loose rope alarm or fault occurs.
60 In motor 1 state The output is valid when motor 1 is selected.
The output is valid when a PT100 temperature alarm is

63 PT100 temperature alarm
reported.
PT1000 temperature The output is valid when a PT1000 temperature alarm is

64
alarm reported.
Boosting the speed with It outputs the ON signal when the speed is boosted with
65
light load light load.
Derating the frequency It outputs the ON signal when the frequency is derated
66
with voltage with the voltage.
Function Default
Name Description
code value

- 177 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
P06.01 Y output selection 0: Invalid 0
1: In running
P06.02 HDO output selection 0
2: In forward running
Relay RO1 output
P06.03 3: In reverse running 1
selection
4: In jogging
5: VFD fault
6: Frequency level detection FDT1
8: Frequency reached
9: Running in zero speed
10: Reach upper limit frequency
11: Reach lower limit frequency
12: Ready to run
13: In pre-exciting
14: Overload pre-alarm
15: Underload pre-alarm

Relay RO2 output
P06.04 16: Simple PLC stage completed 5
selection
17: Simple PLC cycle completed
18: Reach set counting value
19: Reach designated counting value
20: External fault is valid
21: Reserved
22: Reach running time
23: Virtual terminal output of MODBUS

communication
24: Virtual terminal output of

POROFIBUS/CANopen communication
25: Virtual terminal output of Ethernet

communication
- 178 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
26: DC bus voltage established
27: Z pulse output
28: During pulse superposition
29: STO action
30: Positioning completed
31: Spindle zeroing completed
32: Spindle scale-division completed
33: In speed limit

EtherCat/Profinet communication
35: Reserved
36: Speed/position control switch-over

completed
37–40: Reserved
41: C_Y1 from PLC (You need to set P27.00

to 1.)
42: C_Y2 from PLC (You need to set P27.00

to 1.)
43: C_HDO from PLC (You need to set

P27.00 to 1.)
44: C_RO1 from PLC (You need to set

P27.00 to 1.)

P27.00 to 1.)

P27.00 to 1.)

P27.00 to 1.)
48: Contactor output

49: Brake output
50: Ready to release the brake
51: Ready to close the brake
- 179 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
52: Upward limit position reached

53: Downward limit position reached
54: Low voltage protection
55: Overload protection
56: Brake detection reminding
57: Brake failure alarm
58: Input phase loss alarm
59: Loose rope state (FWD loose rope
protection, REV loose rope alarm/fault)
60: In motor 1 state
63: PT100 temperature alarm
65: Boosting the speed with light load
66: Derating the frequency with voltage
Output terminal polarity

P06.05 0x00–0x0F 0x00
selection
P06.06 Y switch-on delay 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
P06.07 Y switch-off delay 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
P06.08 HDO switch-on delay 0.000–50.000s (valid only when P06.00=1) 0.000s
P06.09 HDO switch-off delay 0.000–50.000s (valid only when P06.00=1) 0.000s
Relay RO1 switch-on

P06.10 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
delay
Relay RO1 switch-off

P06.11 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
delay
Relay RO2 switch-on

P06.12 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
delay
Relay RO2 switch-off

P06.13 0.000–50.000s 0.000s
delay
- 180 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Output terminal state of

P07.40 0
present fault
Digital output terminal

P17.13 0
state
6.5.13 Simple PLC

Simple PLC is a multi-step speed generator, and the VFD can change the running frequency and
direction automatically based on the running time to fulfill process requirements. Previously, such
function was realized with external PLC, while now, the VFD itself can achieve this function.
GD350-19 series VFD can realize 16-step speeds control, and provide four groups of
acceleration/deceleration time for you to choose from.
After the set PLC completes one cycle (or one section), one ON signal can be output by the
multi-function relay.
P10.01 (simple PLC memory selection)
P10.00（simple PLC mode）
0 No memory
after power off
0 Stop after running Power cut during Set frequency
once running 1 Memory after Restart running
power off 0
after the first
1 Keep running in the Setup of running section
final value after parameters of each
running once PLC stage
0
Normal running P17.00
2
Cyclic running 1 Continue running at
1 the frequency when
interruption occurred
PLC mode
P10.36 Terminal function 23
(PLC restart mode) Simple PLC stop reset
Digital output 16
Simple PLC state completed
Digital output 17
Simple PLC cycle completed
Function Default
Name Description
code value

P05.01– Digital input function
24: Simple PLC pausing
P05.06 selection
25: PID control pausing
P06.01– Digital output function 16: Simple PLC phase reached
P06.04 selection 17: Simple PLC cycle reached
- 181 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0: Stop after running once
1: Keep running in the final value after

P10.00 Simple PLC mode 0
running once
2: Cyclic running
Simple PLC memory 0: No memory after power down

P10.01 0
selection 1: Memory after power down
P10.02 Multi-step speed 0 -100.0–100.0% 0.0%
P10.03 Running time of 0th step 0.0–6553.5s (min) 0.0s
P10.05 Running time of 1st step 0.0–6553.5s (min) 0.0s
P10.07 Running time of 2nd step 0.0–6553.5s (min) 0.0s
P10.09 Running time of 3rd step 0.0–6553.5s (min) 0.0s
- 182 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
P10.34 time of 0–7 stage of simple 0x0000–0XFFFF 0000
PLC
P10.35 time of 8–15 stage of simple 0x0000–0XFFFF 0000
PLC
0: Restart from the first section

P10.36 PLC restart mode 1: Continue running at the frequency 0
when interruption occurred
P17.00 Set frequency 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 0.00Hz
P17.27 Simple PLC and current 0–15 0
- 183 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
stage number of multi-step

speed
6.5.14 Multi-step speed running

Set the parameters used in multi-step speed running. GD350-19 VFD can set 16-step speeds, which
are selectable by multi-step speed terminals 1–4, corresponding to multi-step speed 0 to multi-step
speed 15.
P10.02 multi-step speed 0 BIT0
P10.34
Terminal function 16 P10.03 running time of 0th step BIT1
Acceleration/deceleration time
Multi-step speed OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
selection of 0–7 section of
terminal 1
simple PLC
Terminal function 17 P10.04 multi-step speed 1 BIT2
Multi-step speed OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
P10.05 running time of 1st step BIT3
terminal 2
Terminal function 18
Multi-step speed OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 00 P00.10 acceleration time 1
terminal 3 P10.06 multi-step speed 2 BIT4 P00.12 deceleration time 1
Terminal function 19 P10.07 running time of 2nd step BIT5
Multi-step speed OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
terminal 4
01 P08.00 acceleration time 2
P10.08 multi-step speed 3 BIT6 P08.01 deceleration time 2
Multi-step speed 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P10.09 running time of 3rd step BIT7

Multi-step speed 15 P10.10 multi-step speed 4 BIT8 P08.03 deceleration time 3
P10.11 running time of 4th step BIT9

Multi-step speed 0
Multi-step speed 1 P10.14 multi-step speed 6 BIT12


P10.17 running time of 7th step BIT15 Valid
Frequency-hold
ON OFF
Running command
Invalid Multi-step speed
P10.18 multi-step speed 8 BIT0 P10.35
output
Terminal function 16 P10.19 running time of 8th step BIT1 Acceleration/deceleration time
Multi-step speed selection of 8–15 section of
terminal 1
simple PLC
Multi-step speed P10.20 multi-step speed 9 BIT2
terminal 2 P10.21 running time of 9th step BIT3
Multi-step speed 00 P00.10 acceleration time 1
terminal 3
Terminal function 19 P10.23 running time of 10th step BIT5
Multi-step speed
terminal 4
Multi-step speed OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 10 P08.02 acceleration time 3
terminal 1 P10.26 multi-step speed 12 BIT8 P08.03 deceleration time 3
Multi-step speed OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
terminal 2
Terminal function 18 P10.28 multi-step speed 13 BIT10 P08.15 deceleration time 4
Multi-step speed OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON P10.29 running time of 13th step BIT11
terminal 3
Multi-step speed ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
terminal 4 P10.30 multi-step speed 14 BIT12
Multi-step speed 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Function Default
Name Description
code value

P05.01–
Digital input function selection 17: Multi-step speed terminal 2
P05.06
- 184 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value

20: Multi-step speed pausing
P10.05 Running time of 1st step 0.0–6553.5s (min) 0.0s
P10.07 Running time of 2nd step 0.0–6553.5s (min) 0.0s
P10.09 Running time of 3rd step 0.0–6553.5s (min) 0.0s
- 185 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
Acceleration/decoration time
P10.34 selection of 0–7 section of 0x0000–0XFFFF 0000
simple PLC
Acceleration/decoration time
P10.35 selection of 8–15 section of 0x0000–0XFFFF 0000
simple PLC
Simple PLC and current steps 0

P17.27 0–15
of multi-step speed
6.5.15 Graded multi-step speed reference

Graded reference is a speed reference method for hoisting applications. Graded reference supports
the graded operating lever mode and graded remote-control mode. Graded reference can implement
6-step speeds by combing the five graded multi-step reference terminals.
- 186 -
Graded Graded Graded Graded Graded Function

Speed
reference reference reference reference reference code
setting
terminal 1 terminal 2 terminal 3 terminal 4 terminal 5
OFF OFF OFF OFF Graded multi-step
OFF P90.06
speed reference 0
NO OFF OFF Graded multi-step
OFF OFF P90.07
speed reference 1
Graded multi-step P90.08
NO NO OFF OFF OFF speed reference 2
OFF OFF Graded multi-step

NO NO NO P90.09
speed reference 3
Graded multi-step P90.10
NO NO NO NO OFF
speed reference 4
Graded multi-step
NO NO NO NO NO P90.11
speed reference 5
,
Default
Function code Name Description
value
P05.01–P05.06 77: Graded reference terminal 1

I/O extension Digital input function
card selection
P25.01–P25.08
P90.06 Graded multi-step speed -100.0–100.0%, relative to 0.0%
reference 0 P00.03
reference 1 P00.03
reference 2 P00.03
reference 3 P00.03
reference 4 P00.03
reference 5 P00.03
Note: The multi-step settings of a higher grade can be closed only after the multi-step settings of all
lower grades are closed.
6.5.16 Local encoder input
GD350-19 series VFD supports pulse count function by inputting the count pulse from HDI
high-speed pulse port. When the actual count value is no less than the set value, digital output
terminal outputs count-value-reached pulse signal, and the corresponding count value is cleared.
- 187 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
0x00–0x11
HDIA high-speed pulse input 1: Reserved

P05.38 0
function 2: Input via encoder, used in combination
with HDIB
HDIB high-speed pulse input 1: Reserved

P05.44 0
function selection 2: Input via encoder, used in combination
with HDIA
P18.00 Actual frequency of encoder -999.9–3276.7Hz 0.0Hz
0: PG card
P20.15 Speed measuring mode 1: local; realized by HDIA and HDIB; 0
supports incremental 24V encoder only
6.5.17 Commissioning procedures for position control and spindle positioning function
1. Commissioning procedures for closed-loop vector control of asynchronous motor
Step 1: Restore to default value via keypad
Step 2: Set P00.03, P00.04 and P02 group motor nameplate parameters
Step 3: Motor parameter autotuning
Carry out rotary parameter autotuning or static parameter autotuning via keypad, if the motor can be
disconnected from load, then you can carry out rotary parameter autotuning; otherwise, carry out
static parameter autotuning, the parameter obtained from autotuning will be saved in P02 motor
parameter group automatically.
- 188 -
Step 4: Verify whether the encoder is installed and set properly
a) Confirm the encoder direction and parameter setup
Set P20.01 (encoder pulse-per-revolution), set P00.00=2 and P00.10=20Hz, and run the VFD, at this
point, the motor rotates at 20Hz, observe whether the speed measurement value of P18.00 is correct,
if the value is negative, it indicates the encoder direction is reversed, under such situation, set P20.02
to 1; if the speed measurement value deviates greatly, it indicates P20.01 is set improperly. Observe
whether P18.02 (encoder Z pulse count value) fluctuates, if yes, it indicates the encoder suffers
interference or P20.01 is set improperly, requiring you to check the wiring and the shielding layer.
b) Determine Z pulse direction
Set P00.10=20Hz, and set P00.13 (running direction) to forward and reverse direction respectively to
observe whether the difference value of P18.02 is less than 5, if the difference value remains to be
larger than 5 after setting Z pulse reversal function of P20.02, power off and exchange phase A and
phase B of the encoder, and then observe the difference between the value of P18.02 during forward
and reverse rotation. Z pulse direction only affects the forward/reverse positioning precision of the
spindle positioning carried out with Z pulse.
Step 5: Closed-loop vector pilot-run
Set P00.00=3, and carry out closed-loop vector control, adjust P00.10 and speed loop and current
loop PI parameter in P03 group to make it run stably in the whole range.
Step 6: Flux-weakening control
Set flux-weakening regulator gain P03.26=0–8000, and observe the flux-weakening control effect.
P03.22–P03.24 can be adjusted as needed.
2. Commissioning procedures for closed-loop vector control of synchronous motor
Step 1: Set P00.18=1, restore to default value
Step 2: Set P00.00=3 (VC) , set P00.03, P00.04, and motor nameplate parameters in P02 group.
Step 3: Set P20.00 and P20.01 encoder parameters
When the encoder is resolver-type encoder, set the encoder pulse count value to (resolver
pole pair number × 1024), for example, if pole pair number is 4, set P20.01 to 4096.
Step 4: Ensure the encoder is installed and set correctly
When motor stops, observe whether P18.21 (resolver angle) fluctuates, if it fluctuates sharply,
check the wiring and grounding. Rotates the motor slowly, observe whether P18.21 changes
accordingly. If yes, it indicates motor is connected correctly; if the value of P18.02 keeps
constant at a non-zero value after rotating for multiple circles, it indicates encoder Z signal is
correct.
Step 5: Autotuning of initial position of magnetic pole
Set P20.11=2 or 3 (3: rotary autotuning; 2: static autotuning), press RUN key to run the VFD.
- 189 -
a) Rotary autotuning (P20.11 = 3)
Detect the position of current magnetic pole when autotuning starts, and then accelerates to 10Hz,
autotuning corresponding magnetic pole position of encoder Z pulse, and decelerate to stop.
During running, if ENC1O or ENC1D fault occurred, set P20.02=1 and carry out autotuning again.
After autotuning is done, the angle obtained from autotuning will be saved in P20.09 and P20.10
automatically.
b) Static autotuning
In cases where the load can be disconnected, it is recommended to adopt rotary autotuning
(P20.11=3) as it has high angle precision. If the load cannot be disconnected, you can adopt static
autotuning (P20.11=2). The magnetic pole position obtained from autotuning will be saved in P20.09
and P20.10.
Step 6: Closed-loop vector pilot-run
Adjust P00.10 and speed loop and current loop PI parameter in P03 group to make it run stably in the
whole range. If oscillation occurred, reduce the value of P03.00, P03.03, P03.09 and P03.10. If
current oscillation noise occurred during low speed, adjust P20.05.
Note: It is necessary to re-determine P20.02 (encoder direction) and carry out magnetic pole position
autotuning again if the wiring of motor or encoder is changed.
3. Commissioning procedures for pulse string control
Pulse input is operated based on closed-loop vector control; speed detection is needed in the
subsequent spindle positioning, zeroing operation and division operation.
Step 1: Restore to default value by keypad
Step 2: Set P00.03, P00.04 and motor nameplate parameters in P02 group
Step 3: Motor parameter autotuning: rotary parameter autotuning or static parameter autotuning
Step 4: Verity the installation and settings of encoder. Set P00.00=3 and P00.10=20Hz to run the
system, and check the control effect and performance of the system.
Step 5: Set P21.00=0001 to set positioning mode to position control, namely pulse-string control.
There are four kinds of pulse command modes, which can be set by P21.01 (pulse command mode).
Under position control mode, you can check high bit and low bit of position reference and feedback,
P18.02 (count value of Z pulse), P18.00 (actual frequency of encoder), P18.17 (pulse command
frequency) and P18.19 (position regulator output) via P18, through which you can figure out the
relation between P18.8 (position of position reference point) and P18.02, pulse command frequency
P18.17, feedforward P18.18 and position regulator output P18.19.
Step 6: The position regulator has two gains, namely P21.02 and P21.03, and they can be switched
by speed command, torque command and terminals.
Step 7: When P21.08 (output limit of position controller) is set to 0, the position control will be invalid,
- 190 -
and at this point, the pulse string acts as frequency source, P21.13 (position feedforward gain) should
be set to 100%, and the speed acceleration/deceleration time is determined by the acceleration
/deceleration time of pulse string, the pulse string acceleration/deceleration time of the system can be
adjusted. If the pulse string acts as the frequency source in speed control, you can also set P21.00 to
0000, and set the frequency source reference P00.06 or P00.07 to 12 (set by pulse string AB), at this
point, the acceleration/deceleration time is determined by the acceleration/deceleration time of the
VFD, meanwhile, the parameters of pulse string AB is still set by P21 group. In speed mode, the filter
time of pulse string AB is determined by P21.29.
Step 8: The input frequency of pulse string is the Same as the feedback frequency of encoder pulse,
the relation between them can be changed by altering P21.11 (numerator of position command ratio)
and P21.12 (denominator of position command ratio)
Step 9: When running command or servo enabling is valid (by setting P21.00 or terminal function 63),
it will enter pulse string servo running mode.
4. Commissioning procedures for spindle positioning
Spindle orientation is to realize orientation functions like zeroing and division based on closed-loop
vector control
Frequency
Deceleration time of spindle orientation
Speed of
accurate-stop
of spindle
P21.09 Completion Time
range of positioning
Running command
Zeroing command
Zeroing selection terminal 1

Hold time of positioning completion signal
Positioning completion signal
P21.10 Detection time P21.25 Hold time of positioning completion signal

for positioning completion
Step 1–4: These four steps are the Same as the first four steps of the commissioning procedures for
closed-loop vector control, which aim to fulfill the control requirements of closed-loop vector control,
thus realizing spindle positioning function in either position control or speed control mode.
Step 5: Set P22.00.bit0=1 to enable spindle positioning, set P22.00.bit1 to select spindle zero input. If
the system adopts encoder for speed measurement, set P22.00.bit1 to 0 to select Z pulse input; if the
system adopts photoelectric switch for speed measurement, set P22.00.bit1 to 1 to select
photoelectric switch as zero input; set P22.00.bit2 to select zero search mode, set P22.00.bit3 to
enable or disable zero calibration, and select zero calibration mode by setting P22.00.bit7.
Step 6: Spindle zeroing operation
a) Select the positioning direction by setting P22.00.bit4;
b) There are four zero positions in P22 group, you can choose one out of four zeroing positions
- 191 -
by setting zeroing input terminal selection (46, 47) in P05 group. When executing zeroing function,
the motor will stop accurately at corresponding zeroing position according to the set positioning
direction, which can be viewed via P18.10;
c) The positioning length of spindle zeroing is determined by the deceleration time of

accurate-stop and the speed of accurate-stop;
Step 7: Spindle scale-division operation
There are seven scale-division positions in P22 group, you can choose one out of seven
scale-division positions by setting scale-division input terminal selection (48, 49, 50) in P05 group.
Enable corresponding scale-division terminal after the motor stops accurately, and the motor will
check the scale-division position state and switch to corresponding position incrementally, at this point,
you can check P18.09.
Step 8: Priority level of speed control, position control and zeroing
The priority level of speed running is higher than that of the scale division, when the system runs in
scale-division mode, if spindle orientation is prohibited, the motor will turn to speed mode or position
mode.
The priority level of zeroing is higher than that of the scale division.
Scale-division command is valid when the scale-division terminal is from 000 state to non-000 state,
for example, in 000–011, the spindle executes scale division 3. The transition time during terminal
switch-over needs to be less than 10ms; otherwise, wrong scale division command may be executed.
Step 9: Hold positioning
The position loop gain during positioning is P21.03; while the position loop gain in
positioning-completion-hold state is P21.02. In order to keep sufficient position-hold force and ensure
no system oscillation occurred, adjust P03.00, P03.01, P20.05 and P21.02.
Step 10: Positioning command selection (bit6 of P22.00)
Electric level signal: Positioning command (zeroing and scale division) can be executed only when
there is running command or the servo is enabled.
Step 11: Spindle reference point selection (bit0 of P22.00)
Encoder Z pulse positioning supports the following spindle positioning modes:
a) the encoder is installed on the motor shaft, the motor shaft and spindle is 1:1 rigid connection;
b) the encoder is installed on the motor shaft, the motor shaft and spindle is 1:1 belt connection;
At this point, the belt may slip during high-speed running and cause inaccurate positioning, it is
recommended to install proximity switch on the spindle.
c) The encoder is installed on the spindle, and the motor shaft is connected to the spindle with belt,
the drive ratio is not necessarily 1:1;
At this point, set P20.06 (speed ratio of the mounting shaft between motor and encoder), and set
- 192 -
P22.14 (spindle drive ratio) to 1. As the encoder is not installed on the motor, the control performance
of closed-loop vector will be affected.
Proximity switch positioning supports the following spindle positioning modes:
a) The encoder is installed on the motor shaft, the drive ratio between motor shaft and spindle is
not necessarily 1:1;
At this point, it is required to set P22.14 (spindle drive ratio).
5. Commissioning procedures for digital positioning
The diagram for digital positioning is shown below.

Frequency
Positioning
speed
P21.22 Hold time Time

of positioning arrival
Running command
Cyclic positioning
enable signal terminal
Positioning completion signal
P21.25 Hold time of positioning completion signal
closed-loop vector control, which aim to fulfill the control requirements of closed-loop vector control.
Step 5: Set P21.00=0011 to enable digital positioning. Set P21.17, P21.11 and P21.12 (set positioning
displacement) according to actual needs ; set P21.18 and P21.19 (set positioning speed); set P21.20
and P21.21 (set acceleration/deceleration time of positioning).
Step 6: Single positioning operation
Set P21.16.bit1=0, and the motor will carry out single positioning action and stay in the positioning
position according to the setup in step 5.
Step 7: Cyclic positioning operation
Set P21.16.bit1=1 to enable cyclic positioning. The cyclic positioning is divided into continuous mode
and repetitive mode; you can also carry out cyclic positioning through terminal function (no. 55,
enable digital positioning cycle)
6. Commissioning procedures for positioning of photoelectric switch
Photoelectric switch positioning is to realize positioning function based on closed-loop vector control.
- 193 -
Frequency
Directdeceleration positioning Directdeceleration positioning
Constant speed+
deceleration positioning Constant speed+
deceleration positioning
Time
Running command
Photoelectric switch
arrival signal
Cyclic positioning
enable signal
Positioning completion
signal
closed-loop vector control, which aim to fulfill the control requirements of closed-loop vector control.
Step 5: Set P21.00=0021 to enable photoelectric switch positioning, the photoelectric switch signal
can be connected to S8 terminal only, and set P05.03=43, meanwhile, set P21.17, P21.11 and
P21.12 (set positioning displacement) based on actual needs; set P21.21 (deceleration time of
positioning), however, when present running speed is too fast or the set positioning displacement is
too small, the deceleration time of positioning will be invalid, and it will enter direct deceleration
positioning mode.
Step 6: Cyclic positioning
After positioning is done, the motor will stay in current position. You can set cyclic positioning through
input terminal function selection (55: enable cyclic digital positioning) in P05 group; when the terminal
receives cyclic positioning enable signal (pulse signal), the motor will continue running in the set
speed as per the speed mode and re-enter positioning state after encountering photoelectric switch.
Step 7: Hold positioning
The position loop gain during positioning is P21.03; while the position loop gain in
positioning-completion-hold state is P21.02. In order to keep sufficient position-hold force and ensure
no system oscillation occurred, adjust P03.00, P03.01, P20.05 and P21.02.
6.5.18 Fault handling
GD350-19 series VFD provides abundant information concerning fault handling for easy
maintenance.
- 194 -
In running
Fault occurred, and the

keypad displayed fault
code
Figure out the fault

cause based on the
fault code
Figure out the most possible

cause according to P07.33–
P07.40
N Rule out
fault based on
corresponding
solutions
Consult with INVT

N
Run again
Proper running
Function Default
Name Description
code value
P07.27 Type of present fault 0: No fault 0
1: Inverter unit U phase protection (OUt1)

P07.28 Type of the last fault /
2: Inverter unit V phase protection (OUt2)
P07.29 Type of the last but one fault /
3: Inverter unit W phase protection
P07.30 Type of the last but two fault (OUt3) /
4: Overcurrent during acceleration (OC1)

Type of the last but three
P07.31 /
fault 5: Overcurrent during deceleration (OC2)
6: Overcurrent during constant speed

(OC3)
P07.32 Type of the last but four fault 7: Overvoltage during acceleration (OV1)
8: Overvoltage during deceleration (OV2)
- 195 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
9: Overvoltage during constant speed

(OV3)
10: Bus undervoltage fault (UV)
11: Motor overload (OL1)
12: VFD overload (OL2)
13: Phase loss on input side (SPI)
14: Phase loss on output side (SPO)
15: Rectifier module overheat (OH1)
16: Inverter module overheat (OH2)
17: External fault (EF)
18: 485 communication fault (CE)
19: Current detection fault (ItE)
20: Motor autotuning fault (tE)
21: EEPROM operation fault (EEP)
22: PID feedback offline fault (PIDE)
23: Braking unit fault (bCE)
24: Running time reached (END)
25: Electronic overload (OL3)
26: Keypad communication error (PCE)
27: Parameter upload error (UPE)
28: Parameter download error (DNE)
29: Profibus DP communication fault

(E-DP)
30: Ethernet communication fault

(E-NET)
31: CANopen communication fault

(E-CAN)
32: To-ground short-circuit fault 1 (ETH1)
- 196 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
34: Speed deviation fault (dEu)
35: Mal-adjustment fault (STo)
36: Underload fault (LL)
37: Encoder offline fault (ENC1O)
38: Encoder reversal fault (ENC1D)
39: Encoder Z pulse offline fault (ENC1Z)
40: Safe torque off (STO)
41: Channel H1 safety circuit exception

(STL1)
42: Channel H2 safety circuit exception

(STL2)
43: Channel H1 and H2 exception (STL3)
44: Safety code FLASH CRC check fault

(CrCE)
45: PLC card defined fault 1 (P-E1)

55: Repetitive extension card type fault

(E-Err)
56: Encoder UVW loss fault (ENCUV)
57: Profinet communication timeout fault

(E-PN)
58: CAN communication fault (SECAN)
59: Motor over-temperature fault (OT)
60: Card slot 1 card identification failure
- 197 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
(F1-Er)

(F2-Er)

(F3-Er)
63: Card slot 1 card communication

timeout fault (C1-Er)


66: EtherCat communication fault

(E-CAT)
67: Bacnet communication fault (E-BAC)
68: DeviceNet communication fault

(E-DEV)
69: Master-slave synchronous CAN

slave fault (S-Err)
70: VFD not enabled (dIS)

71: Contactor feedback fault (tbE)
72: Brake feedback fault (FAE)
73: Torque verification fault (tPF)
74: Operating lever zero-position fault
(STC)
75: Low speed running protection fault
(LSP)
76: Terminal command exception (tCE)
77: Power-on terminal command
exception (POE)
78: Loose rope protection fault (SLE)
79: Brake failure (bE)
80: Master/slave position synchronization
fault (ELS)
81: Analog speed reference deviation
- 198 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
fault (AdE)
82: PT100 overtemperature (OtE1)
84: Set frequency fault (SFE)
85: Current imbalance fault (Cuu)
86: PTC overtemperature fault (PtcE)
P07.33 Running frequency of present fault 0.00Hz
P07.34 Ramps reference frequency of present fault 0.00Hz
P07.35 Output voltage of present fault 0V
P07.36 Output current of present fault 0.0A
P07.37 Bus voltage of present fault 0.0V
P07.38 Max. temperature of present fault 0.0°C
P07.39 Input terminal state of present fault 0
P07.40 Output terminal state of present fault 0
P07.41 Running frequency of the last fault 0.00Hz
P07.42 Ramps reference frequency of the last fault 0.00Hz
P07.43 Output voltage of the last fault 0V
P07.44 Output current of the last fault 0.0A
P07.45 Bus voltage of the last fault 0.0V
P07.46 Max. temperature of the last fault 0.0°C
P07.47 Input terminal state of the last fault 0
P07.48 Output terminal state of the last fault 0
P07.49 Running frequency of the last but one fault 0.00Hz
P07.50 Ramps reference frequency of the last but one fault 0.00Hz
- 199 -
Function Default
Name Description
code value
P07.51 Output voltage of the last but one fault 0V
P07.52 Output current of the last but one fault 0.0A
P07.53 Bus voltage of the last but one fault 0.0V
P07.54 Max. temperature of the last but one fault 0.0°C
P07.55 Input terminal state of the last but one fault 0
P07.56 Output terminal state of the last but one fault 0
- 200 -
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Function parameter list
7 Function parameter list

This chapter lists all the function codes and corresponding description of each function code.
7.2 Function parameter list
Function parameters of GD350-19 series VFD are categorized according to functions. Among the
function groups, P90–P93 are hoisting function groups, P98 is the analog input/output calibration
group, and P99 is the factory function group which cannot be accessed by users. The function code
adopts three-level menu, for example, "P08.08" indicates it is the no. 8 function code in P8 group.
The function group numbers correspond to the level-1 menus, the function codes correspond to the
level-2 menus, and the function parameters correspond to the level-3 menus.
1. The content of the function code table is as follows:
Column 1 "Function code ": Code of the function group and parameter
Column 2 "Name": Full name of the function parameter
Column 3 "Description": Detailed description of the function parameter
Column 4 " Default value": Initial value set in factory
Column 5 " Modify": Whether the function parameter can be modified, and conditions for the
modification
"○" indicates that the value of the parameter can be modified when the VFD is in
stopped or running state.
"◎" indicates that the value of the parameter cannot be modified when the VFD is in
running state.
"●" indicates that the value of the parameter is detected and recorded, and cannot be
modified.
(The VFD automatically checks and constrains the modification of parameters, which helps
prevent incorrect modifications.)
2. The parameters adopt the decimal system (DEC). If the hexadecimal system is adopted, all bits
are mutually independent on data during parameter editing, and the setting ranges at some bits
can be hexadecimal (0–F).
3. "Default value" indicates the factory setting of the function parameter. If the value of the
parameter is detected or recorded, the value cannot be restored to the factory setting.
4. To better protect parameters, the VFD provides the password protection function. After a
password is set (that is, P07.00 is set to a non-zero value), "0.0.0.0.0" is displayed when you
press the PRG/ESC key to enter the function code editing interface. You need to enter the
correct user password to enter the interface. For the factory parameters, you need to enter the
- 201 -
correct factory password to enter the interface. (You are not advised to modify the factory
parameters. Incorrect parameter setting may cause operation exceptions or even damage to
the VFD.) When password protection does not take effect, you can change the password any
time. When P07.00 is set to 0, no user password is used. When P07.00 is set to a non-zero
value during VFD power-on, parameters are prevented from being modified by using the user
password function. When you modify function parameters through serial communication, the
user password protection function is also applicant and compliant with the same rule.
7.2.1 P00 Basic functions
Function Default
Name Description Modify
code value
0: SVC 0
1: SVC 1
Speed control 2: SVPWM
P00.00 2 ◎
mode 3: VC
Running 0: Keypad
P00.01 command 1: Terminal 0 ○

channel 2: Communication
0: MODBUS
1: PROFIBUS/CANopen/Devicenet
2: Ethernet
Communication 3: EtherCat/Profinet
P00.02 running command 4: PLC programmable card 0 ○
channel 5: Wireless communication card
Note: 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are extended functions

which are available only when corresponding
cards are used.
Used to set the maximum output frequency of the

Max. output VFD. It is the basis of frequency setup and the
P00.03 50.00Hz ◎
frequency acceleration/deceleration.
Setting range: Max. (P00.04, 10.00) –150.00Hz
The upper limit of running frequency is upper limit

Upper limit of
P00.04 value of VFD output frequency. This value cannot 50.00Hz ◎
running frequency
be greater than the maximum output frequency.
- 202 -
Function Default
code value
When the set frequency is higher than the upper

limit frequency, the VFD runs at the upper limit
frequency.
Setting range: P00.05–P00.03 (Max. output

frequency)
The lower limit of running frequency is the lower

limit value of VFD output frequency.
When the set frequency is lower than the lower

limit frequency, the VFD runs at the lower limit
Lower limit of
P00.05 frequency. 0.00Hz ◎
running frequency
Note: Max. output frequency ≥ upper limit
frequency ≥ lower limit frequency.
Setting range: 0.00Hz–P00.04 (upper limit of

running frequency)
Setting channel of 0: Keypad

P00.06 A frequency 1: AI1 0 ○
command
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: High speed pulse HDIA
5: Simple PLC program
6: Multi-step speed running
7: PID control
Setting channel of 8: MODBUS communication

P00.07 B frequency 9: PROFIBUS / CANopen / DeviceNet 1 ○
command communication
11: High speed pulse HDIB
12: Pulse string AB
14: PLC card
- 203 -
Function Default
code value
Reference object
P00.08 of B frequency 0 ○
1: A frequency command
command
0: A
1: B
Combination
2: (A+B)
P00.09 mode of setting 0 ○
3: (A-B)
source
4: Max. (A, B)
5: Min. (A, B)
When A and B frequency commands are set by

keypad, the value is the initial digital set value of
Set frequency via
P00.10 the VFD frequency. 50.00Hz ○
keypad
Setting range: 0.00 Hz–P00.03 (Max. output
frequency)
Acceleration Acceleration time is the time needed for Model

P00.11 ○
time 1 accelerating from 0Hz to Max. output frequency depended
(P00.03).
Deceleration time is the time needed from

decelerating from Max. output frequency (P00.03)
to 0Hz.
Deceleration Goodrive350-19 series VFD defines four groups of Model

P00.12 ○
time 1 acceleration and deceleration time, which can be depended
selected via multi-function digital input terminals
(P05 group). The acceleration/deceleration time of
the VFD is the first group by default.
Setting range of P00.11 and P00.12: 0.0–3600.0s
0: Run in default direction
P00.13 Running direction 1: Run in reverse direction 0 ○
2: Reverse running is prohibited
- 204 -
Function Default
code value
Note: It can be modified only after P11.26 is 1

indicating special functions are enabled.
Carrier Electro magnetic Noise and leakage Cooling

frequency noise current level
1kHz High Low Low
10kHz
15kHz Low High High
The relation between the model and carrier

frequency is shown below.
Default value of
Model carrier
frequency
0.4–11kW 4kHz
380V
Above 15kW 1.5kHz
Carrier frequency Model
P00.14 ○
setup 22–55kW 4kHz depended
660V
Above 75kW 2kHz
Advantages of high carrier frequency are as

follows: ideal current waveform, few current
harmonics and small motor noise.
Disadvantages of high carrier frequency are as

follows: growing switch consumption, enlarged
temperature rise, impacted output capacity; under
high carrier frequency, the VFD needs to be
derated for use, meanwhile, the leakage current
will increase, which increases electromagnetic
interference to the surroundings.
While low carrier frequency is the contrary. Low

carrier frequency will cause unstable operation at
low frequency, decrease the torque, or even lead
- 205 -
Function Default
code value
to oscillation.
The carrier frequency of VFD is set properly by

default, and it should not be changed at will.
If the default carrier frequency is exceeded during

use, derating is required, derate by 10% for every
additional 1k carrier frequency.
Setting range: 1.0–15.0kHz
0: No operation
1: Rotary autotuning; carry out comprehensive

motor parameter autotuning; rotary autotuning is
used in cases where high control precision is
required;
2: Static autotuning 1 (comprehensive autotuning);

static autotuning 1 is used in cases where the
motor cannot be disconnected from load;
Motor parameter
P00.15 3: Static autotuning 2 (partial autotuning) ; when 0 ◎
autotuning
current motor is motor 1, only P02.06, P02.07 and
P02.08 will be autotuned; when current motor is
motor 2, only P12.06, P12.07 and P12.08 will be
autotuned.
4: Dynamic autotuning 2 (only valid to

asynchronous motors)
5: Static autotuning 2 on certain parameters (only

valid to asynchronous motors)
0: Invalid
1: Valid during the whole process

P00.16 AVR function Automatic voltage regulation function is used to 1 ○
eliminate the impact on the output voltage of VFD

when bus voltage fluctuates.
P00.17 Reserved Reserved
- 206 -
Function Default
code value
0: No operation
1: Restore to default value
2: Clear fault history

Function 3: Lock keypad parameters
P00.18 parameter 0 ◎
Note: After the selected function operations are
restoration
done, this function code will be restored to 0
automatically. Restoration to default value will
clear the user password, this function should be
used with caution.
7.2.2 P01 Start/stop control
Function Default
code value
0: Direct start
1: Start after DC brake
Running mode of 2: Start after speed-tracking 1

P01.00 0 ◎
start 3: Start after speed-tracking 2

Starting frequency of direct startup is the initial

Starting frequency frequency when the VFD starts. See P01.02 (hold
P01.01 0.50Hz ◎
of direct start time of starting frequency) for details.
Setting range: 0.00–50.00Hz

Output frequency
fmax
F1 set by P01.01
Hold time of f1 T1 set by P01.02
P01.02 0.0s ◎
starting frequency
T
t1
A proper starting frequency can increase the

torque during startup. Within the hold time of
- 207 -
Function Default
code value
starting frequency, the output frequency of VFD is

the starting frequency, and then it runs from the
starting frequency to the target frequency, if the
target frequency (frequency command) is below
the starting frequency, the VFD will be standby
rather than running. The starting frequency value
is unlimited by the lower limit frequency.
Setting range: 0.0–50.0s
DC brake current During starting, the VFD will first perform DC brake
P01.03 0.0% ◎
before start based on the set DC brake current before startup,
and then it will accelerate after the set DC brake
time before startup elapses. If the set DC brake
time is 0, DC brake will be invalid.
The larger the DC brake current, the stronger the

DC brake time brake force. The DC brake current before startup
P01.04 0.00s ◎
before start refers to the percentage relative to rated VFD
current.
Setting range of P01.04: 0.00–50.00s
This function code is used to select the frequency

variation mode during starting and running.
0: Straight line; the output frequency increases or

decreases in straight line;
Output frequency f
fmax
Acceleration/dece
P01.05 0 ◎
leration mode
Time t
t1 t2
1: S curve; the output frequency increases or

decreases in S curve;
S curve is generally used in cases where smooth

start/stop is required, for example, elevator,
conveyer belt, etc.
- 208 -
Function Default
code value
Output frequency f
fmax
Time t
t1 t2
Note: When it is set to 1, set P01.06, P01.07,

P01.27 and P01.28 accordingly.
Time of starting The curvature of S curve is determined by

section of acceleration range and acceleration and
P01.06 0.1s ◎
acceleration S deceleration time.
curve Output frequency f
t1=P01.06
Time of ending t2=P01.07
t3=P01.27
section of Time t t4=P01.28
P01.07 0.1s ◎
acceleration S t1 t2 t3 t4
curve
0: Decelerate to stop; after stop command is valid,

the VFD lowers output frequency based on the
deceleration mode and the defined deceleration
time, after the frequency drops to the stop speed
P01.08 Stop mode 0 ○
(P01.15), the VFD stops.
1: Coast to stop; after stop command is valid, the

VFD stops output immediately, and the load coasts
to stop as per mechanical inertia.
Starting frequency
Starting frequency of DC brake after stop; during
P01.09 of DC brake after 0.00Hz ○
decelerating to stop, when this frequency is
stop
reached, DC brake will be performed after stop.
Waiting time of Demagnetization time (waiting time of DC brake

P01.10 DC brake after after stop): Before the DC brake, the VFD will 0.00s ○
stop block output, and after the demagnetization time
- 209 -
Function Default
code value
DC brake current elapses, DC brake will start. This function is used

P01.11 to prevent overcurrent fault caused by DC brake 0.0% ○
of stop
during high speed.
DC brake current after stop: it means the DC brake

force applied, the larger the current, the stronger
the DC brake effect.
P01.09
Time t
DC brake time of Acceleration Constant speed P13.15

P01.12 P01.04 Deceleration
0.00s ○
stop P01.23 P13.14
P01.10 P01.12
In running
Setting range of P01.09: 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max.

output frequency)
This function code refers to the transition time of

the threshold set by P01.14 during setting
forward/reverse rotation of the VFD, as shown
below.
Output frequency f
Deadzone time of
Forward
P01.13 forward/reverse Switch over after 0.0s ○
starting frequency
rotation Starting Switch over after
frequency zero frequency
Time t
Deadzone
Reverse
time
Forward/reverse 0: Switch over after zero frequency

P01.14 rotation 1: Switch over after starting frequency 1 ◎
switch-over mode 2: Switch over after passing stop speed and delay
- 210 -
Function Default
code value
P01.15 Stop speed 0.00–100.00Hz 0.50Hz ◎
0: Set value of speed (the only detection mode

Stop speed
P01.16 valid in SVPWM mode) 0 ◎
detection mode
1: Detection value of speed
Stop speed
P01.17 0.00–100.00s 0.50s ◎
detection time
When the running command channel is controlled

by terminals, the system will detect running
terminal state automatically during power up.
0: Terminal running command is invalid during

power up. The VFD will not run during power up
even if the running command terminal is detected
to be valid, and the system is in running protection
state. The VFD will run only after this terminal is
cancelled and enabled again.
1: Terminal running command is valid during

Running
power up. The system will start the VFD
P01.18 protection of 0 ○
automatically after initialization is done if the
power-on terminal
running command terminal is detected to be valid
during power up.
2: During power on, the terminal-given running

command is invalid, and the POE fault is reported.
During power on, the VFD does not run but reports
the fault, although the running command terminal
is valid. The fault disappears only when the
running command is canceled.
Note: This function must be set with caution,

otherwise, serious consequences may occur.
Action selection This function code is used to set the running state
when the running of VFD when the set frequency is below lower limit
P01.19 frequency is 0 ◎
frequency.
below lower limit
0: Run in lower limit of the frequency
(lower limit should
- 211 -
Function Default
code value
be larger than 0) 1: Stop
2: Sleep
When the set frequency is below lower limit

frequency, the VFD coasts to stop; when the set
frequency is above lower limit again and continues
to be so after the time set by P01.20 elapses, the
VFD will be restored to running state automatically.
This function code is used to set the sleep delay.

When the running frequency of VFD is below the
lower limit frequency, the VFD enters sleep state;
when the set frequency is above the lower limit
again and continues to be so after the time set by
P01.20 elapses, the VFD will run automatically.
Wake-up-from-sle Output frequency f

P01.20 t1＜t2, the inverter does not run 0.0s ○
ep delay t1+t2=t3, the inverter runs
t3=P01.20
t1 t2
t3 Time t
Run Sleep Run
Setting range: 0.0–3600.0s (valid when P.01.19 is

2)
This function code sets the automatic running of

the VFD at next power-on after power down.
Restart after 0: Disable restart

P01.21 0 ○
power cut 1: Enable restart, namely the VFD will run
automatically after the time set by P01.22 elapses
if the starting conditions are met.
Waiting time of This function code sets the waiting time before
P01.22 restart after power automatically running at next power-on after power 1.0s ○
cut down.
- 212 -
Function Default
code value
Output frequency t1=P01.22
t2=P01.23
t1 t2
t
Running
Running Power off Power on
Setting range: 0.0–3600.0s (valid when P01.21 is

1)
This function code sets the delay of the VFD’s

wake-up-from-sleep after running command is
given, the VFD will start to run and output after the
P01.23 Start delay 0.0s ○
time set by P01.23 elapses to realize brake
release.
P01.24 Stop speed delay 0.0–600.0s 0.0s ○
0: No voltage output
Open-loop 0Hz
P01.25 1: With voltage output 0 ○
output selection
2: Output as per DC brake current of stop
Deceleration time
P01.26 of 0.0–60.0s 2.0s ○
emergency-stop
Time of starting
section of
P01.27 0.0–50.0s 0.1s ◎
deceleration S
curve
Time of ending
section of
P01.28 0.0–50.0s 0.1s ◎
deceleration S
curve
Short-circuit brake When the VFD starts in direct start mode

P01.29 0.0% ○
current (P01.00=0), set P01.30 to a non-zero value to
- 213 -
Function Default
code value
Hold time of enter short-circuit brake.
P01.30 short-circuit brake During stop, if the running frequency of VFD is 0.00s ○
at startup below the starting frequency of brake after stop,
set P01.31 to a non-zero value to enter
short-circuit brake after stop, and then carry out
DC brake in the time set by P01.12 (refer to
Hold time of P01.09–P01.12).
P01.31 short-circuit brake 0.00s ○
Setting range of P01.29: 0.0–150.0% (VFD)
at stop
Pre-exciting time 0.000s

P01.32 0–10.000s ○
for jogging
Starting frequency 0.00Hz

P01.33 of stop braking 0–P00.03 ○
during jogging
Delay to enter the 0.0s

P01.34 0–3600.0s ○
sleep state
7.2.3 P02 Parameters of motor 1
Function Default
code value
P02.00 Type of motor 1 0 ◎
Rated power of
Model
P02.01 asynchronous 0.1–3000.0kW ◎
depended
motor 1
Rated frequency
P02.02 of asynchronous 0.01Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 50.00Hz ◎
motor 1
P02.03 Rated speed of 1–36000rpm Model ◎
- 214 -
Function Default
code value
asynchronous depended
motor 1
Rated voltage of
Model
P02.04 asynchronous 0–1200V ◎
depended
motor 1
Rated current of
Model
P02.05 asynchronous 0.8–6000.0A ◎
depended
motor 1
Stator resistance
Model
P02.06 of asynchronous 0.001–65.535Ω ○
depended
motor 1
Rotor resistance
Model
depended
motor 1
Leakage
inductance of Model
P02.08 0.1–6553.5Mh ○
motor 1
Mutual inductance
Model
P02.09 of asynchronous 0.1–6553.5Mh ○
depended
motor 1
No-load current of
Model
P02.10 asynchronous 0.1–6553.5A ○
depended
motor 1
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient 1 of
P02.11 0.0–100.0% 80.0% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 1
Magnetic
P02.12 0.0–100.0% 68.0% ○
saturation
- 215 -
Function Default
code value
coefficient 2 of
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 1
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient 3 of
P02.13 0.0–100.0% 57.0% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 1
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient 4 of
P02.14 0.0–100.0% 40.0% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 1
Rated power of
Model
P02.15 synchronous 0.1–3000.0KW ◎
depended
motor 1
Rated frequency
P02.16 of synchronous 0.01Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 50.00Hz ◎
motor 1
Number of pole
pairs of
P02.17 1–128 2 ◎
synchronous
motor 1
Rated voltage of
Model
P02.18 synchronous 0–1200V ◎
depended
motor 1
Rated current of
Model
P02.19 synchronous 0.8–6000.0A ◎
depended
motor 1
- 216 -
Function Default
code value
Stator resistance
Model
P02.20 of synchronous 0.001–65.535Ω ○
depended
motor 1
Direct-axis
inductance of Model
P02.21 0.01–655.35Mh ○
synchronous depended
motor 1
Quadrature-axis
inductance of Model
P02.22 0.01–655.35Mh ○
motor 1
Counter-emf
constant of
P02.23 0–10000 300 ○
synchronous
motor 1
P02.24 Reserved 0x0000–0xFFFF 0 ●
P02.25 Reserved 0%–50% (rated motor current) 10% ●
0: No protection
1: Common motor (with low-speed compensation).

As the cooling effect of common motor will be
degraded in low speed, the corresponding
electronic thermal protection value should also be
adjusted properly, the low compensation here
Overload
means to lower the overload protection threshold
P02.26 protection of 2 ◎
of the motor whose running frequency is below
motor 1
30Hz.
2: Frequency-variable motor (without low speed

compensation). As the cooling effect of
frequency-variable motor is not affected by the
rotating speed, there is no need to adjust the
protection value during low speed running.
P02.27 Overload Motor overload multiples M=Iout/(In×K) 100.0% ○
- 217 -
Function Default
code value
protection In is rated motor current, lout is VFD output

coefficient of current, K is motor overload protection coefficient.
motor 1 The smaller the K, the larger the value of M, and
the easier the protection.
M=116%: protection will be applied when motor

overloads for 1h; M=200%: protection will be
applied when motor overloads for 60s; M>=400%:
protection will be applied immediately.
Time t
1h
1m
Motor overload multiple
116% 200 %
Setting range: 20.0%–120.0%
Power display This function adjusts the power display value of

calibration motor 1 only, and it does not affect the control
P02.28 1.00 ○
coefficient of performance of the VFD.
motor 1 Setting range: 0.00–3.00
0: Display as per motor type; under this mode, only

parameters related to current motor type will be
Parameter display
P02.29 displayed. 0 ○
of motor 1
1: Display all; under this mode, all the motor
parameters will be displayed.
System inertia of
P02.30 0–30.000kgm2 0 ○
motor 1
P02.31– Reserved
0–65535 0 ○
P02.32 variables
- 218 -
7.2.4 P03 Vector control of motor 1
Function Default
code value
Speed loop Parameters of P03.00–P03.05 fit for vector control

P03.00 20.0 ○
proportional gain 1 mode only. Below P03.02, speed loop PI
parameter is P03.00 and P03.01; above P03.06,
Speed loop
P03.01 speed loop PI parameter is P03.03 and P03.04; in 0.200s ○
integral time 1
between, PI parameter is obtained by linear
Switch low point variation between two groups of parameters, as

P03.02 shown below. 5.00Hz ○
frequency
PI parameter
Speed loop
P03.03 proportional gain P03.00，P03.01 20.0 ○
2
Speed loop P03.03，P03.04

P03.04 Output frequency f 0.200s ○
integral time 2
P03.02 P03.05
The speed loop dynamic response characteristics

of vector control can be adjusted by setting the
proportional coefficient and integral time of speed
regulator. Increase proportional gain or decrease
integral time can accelerate dynamic response of
speed loop, however, if the proportional gain is too
large or integral time is too small, system
oscillation and overshoot may occur; if
proportional gain is too small, stable oscillation or
Switch over high speed offset may occur.
P03.05 10.00Hz ○
point frequency
Speed loop PI parameter is closely related to the
system inertial, you should make adjustment
based on default PI parameter according to
different load characteristics to fulfill different
needs.
Setting range of P03.00:0.0–200.0;
Setting range of P03.02: 0.00Hz–P03.05
Setting range of P03.03: 0.0–200.0
- 219 -
Function Default
code value
Setting range of P03.05: P03.02–P00.03 (Max.

output frequency)
Speed loop output

P03.06 0–8 (corresponds to 0–2^8/10ms) 0 ○
filter
Vector control slip

compensation
P03.07 Slip compensation coefficient is used to adjust the 100% ○
coefficient
slip frequency of vector control to improve speed
(motoring)
control precision. This parameter can be used to
Vector control slip control speed offset.
compensation
P03.08 Setting range: 50–200% 100% ○
coefficient
(generating)
Current loop Note:

P03.09 proportional 1、 These two parameters are used to adjust PI 1000 ○
coefficient P parameters of current loop; it affects dynamic
response speed and control precision of the
system directly. The default value needs no
adjustment under common conditions;
2、 Fit for SVC mode 0 (P00.00=0) and VC mode

Current loop
(P00.00=3);
P03.10 integral coefficient 1000 ○
I 3、 The value of this function code will be updated
automatically after parameter autotuning of
synchronous motor is done.
0–1: Set via keypad (P03.12)
2: Set via AI1 (100% corresponds to three times of

Torque setup rated motor current)
P03.11 0 ○
mode selection 3: Set via AI2 (the same as above)
5: Set via pulse frequency HDIA (the same as
- 220 -
Function Default
code value
above)
6: Set via multi-step torque (the same as above)
7: Set via MODBUS communication (the same as

above)
8: Set via PROFIBUS/CANopen/DeviceNet

9: Set via Ethernet communication (the same as

above)
10: Set via pulse frequency HDIB (the same as

above)
11: Set via EtherCat/Profinet communication
12: Set via PLC
Torque set by
P03.12 -300.0%–300.0% (rated motor current) 20.0% ○
keypad
Torque reference
P03.13 0.000–10.000s 0.010s ○
filter time
0: Keypad (P03.16)

Source of upper
limit frequency 5: Multi-step (the same as above)
P03.14 setup of forward 6: MODBUS communication (the same as above) 0 ○
rotation in torque
control
11: PLC
- 221 -
Function Default
code value
12: Reserved
0: Keypad (P03.17)
5: Multi-step (the same as above)

Source of upper
6: MODBUS communication (the same as above)
limit frequency
P03.15 setup of reverse 0 ○
rotation in torque
control 8: Ethernet communication (the same as above)
11: PLC
12: Reserved
Note: For the options 1-11, 100% is relative to the

max. frequency.
Keypad limit value

This function code is used to set frequency limit.
of upper limit
100% corresponds to the max. frequency. P03.16
P03.16 frequency of 50.00Hz ○
sets the value when P03.14=1; P03.17 sets the
forward rotation in
value when P03.15=1.
torque control
Setting range: 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max. output
Max. output
P03.17 frequency) 50.00Hz ○
frequency
0: Keypad (P03.20)
Source of upper
limit setup of the
P03.18 current) 0 ○
torque during
motoring
- 222 -
Function Default
code value
10: PLC
11: Reserved
0: Keypad (P03.21)

current)

Source of upper
P03.19 limit setup of 0 ○
brake torque
10: PLC
11: Reserved
Set upper limit of

the torque when
P03.20 180.0% ○
motoring via
This function code is used to set torque limit.
keypad
Setting range: 0.0–300.0% (rated motor current)
Set upper limit of
P03.21 brake torque via 180.0% ○
keypad
- 223 -
Function Default
code value
Flux-weakening Used when asynchronous motor is in

coefficient of flux-weakening control.
P03.22 0.3 ○
constant-power
T
zone
Flux-weakening
coefficient of motor
0.1
1.0
2.0
f
Min. flux-weakening limit of motor
Min.
P03.22 and P03.23 are valid during constant
flux-weakening
power. When motor speed is above rated speed,
P03.23 point of 20% ○
motor enters flux-weakening running state. The
constant-power
flux-weakening control coefficient can change the
zone
flux-weakening curvature, the larger the
coefficient, the steeper the curve, the smaller the
coefficient, the smoother the curve.
Setting range of P03.23: 10%–100%
P03.24 sets the maximum output voltage of the

VFD, which is the percentage of rated motor
P03.24 Max. voltage limit voltage. This value should be set according to field 100.0% ○
conditions.
Setting range:0.0–120.0%
Carry out motor pre-exciting during starting to build

a magnetic field inside the motor to improve the
P03.25 Pre-exciting time 0.300s ○
torque characteristics of motor during starting.
Flux-weakening
P03.26 0–8000 1000 ○
proportional gain
Vector control 0: Display as per actual value

P03.27 0 ○
speed display 1: Display as per the set value
- 224 -
Function Default
code value
Static friction
P03.28 compensation 0.0–100.0% 0.0% ○
coefficient
Corresponding
P03.29 frequency point of 0.50– P03.31 1.00Hz ○
static friction
High speed
friction
P03.30 0.0–100.0% 0.0% ○
compensation
coefficient
Corresponding
frequency of high
P03.31 P03.29–400.00Hz 50.00Hz ○
speed friction
torque
Torque control 0:Disable

P03.32 0 ◎
enable 1:Enable
Flux weakening
P03.33 0–8000 1200 ○
integral gain
0–0x1111
Ones place: Torque command selection
0: Torque reference
1: Torque current reference

Control
0: Reserved
P03.35 optimization 0x0000 ○
1: Reserved
setting
Hundreds place: ASR integral separation enabling
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Thousands place: Reserved
0: Reserved
- 225 -
Function Default
code value
1: Reserved
Range: 0x0000–0x1111
Speed loop
P03.36 0.00–10.00s 0.00s ○
differential gain
High-frequency
current loop Under closed-loop vector control mode (P00.00=3)
P03.37 1000 ○
proportional and P03.39, the current loop PI parameters are
coefficient P03.09 and P03.10; above P03.39, the PI
parameters are P03.37 and P03.38.
High-frequency
P03.38 current loop Setting range of P03.37: 0–65535 1000 ○
integral coefficient Setting range of P03.38: 0–65535
Current loop Setting range of P03.39: 0.0–100.0% (relative to

P03.39 high-frequency max. frequency) 100.0% ○
switch-over point
Inertia
0: Disable
P03.40 compensation 0 ○
1: Enable
enable
Upper limit of Limit the max. inertia compensation torque to

inertia prevent inertia compensation torque from being
P03.41 10.0% ○
compensation too large.
torque Setting range: 0.0–150.0% (rated motor torque)
Inertia Filter times of inertia compensation torque, used to

P03.42 compensation smooth inertia compensation torque. 7 ○
filter times Setting range: 0–10
Due to friction force, it is required to set certain

Inertia
identification torque for the inertia identification to
P03.43 identification 10.0% ○
be performed properly.
torque value
0.0–100.0% (rated motor torque)
Enable inertia 0: No operation

P03.44 0 ◎
identification 1: Enable
- 226 -
7.2.5 P04 V/F control
Function Default
code value
This group of function code defines the V/F curve

of motor 1 to satisfy different load characteristics
needs.
0: Straight V/F curve; fit for constant-torque load
2: Torque down V/F curve (1.3th order)
3: Torque down V/F curve (1.7th order)
4: Torque down V/F curve (2.0nd order)
Curve 2–4 are suitable for torque-variable load of

fan pump and similar equipment. You can make
adjustment based on load characteristics to
achieve optimal energy-saving effect.
V/F curve setup of
P04.00 0 ◎
motor 1 5: Customized V/F (V/F separation); under this
mode, V is separated from f. You can adjust f
through the frequency reference channel set by
P00.06 to change the curve characteristic, or
adjust V through the voltage reference channel set
by P04.27 to change the curve characteristics.
Note: The Vb in the figure below corresponds to

rated motor voltage, and fb corresponds to rated
motor frequency.
Output voltage
Torque step-down V/F curve (1.3th order)

Linear type
Torque step-down V/F curve (1.7th order)
Torque step-down V/F curve (2.0nd order)
Square type
Output frequency
Torque boost of In order to compensate for low-frequency torque

P04.01 0.0% ○
motor 1 characteristics, you can make some boost
compensation to the output voltage. P04.01 is
relative to the maximum output voltage Vb.
Motor 1 torque
P04.02 P04.02 defines the percentage of cut-off frequency 20.0% ○
boost cut-off
of manual torque boost to the rated motor
frequency fb. Torque boost can improve the
- 227 -
Function Default
code value
low-frequency torque characteristics of V/F.
You should select torque boost based on the load,

for example, larger load requires larger torque
boost, however, if the torque boost is too large, the
motor will run at over-excitation, which will cause
increased output current and motor heat-up, thus
degrading the efficiency.
When torque boost is set to 0.0%, the VFD is

automatic torque boost.
Torque boost cut-off threshold: Below this

frequency threshold, the torque boost is valid,
exceeding this threshold will nullify torque boost.
Output voltage
v b
v boost Output
frequency
f Cut-off f
Setting range of P04.01: 0.0%: (automatic)

0.1%–10.0%
Setting range of P04.02: 0.0%–50.0%
V/F frequency
P04.03 0.00Hz ○
point 1 of motor 1
When P04.00 =1 (multi-point V/F curve), you can
V/F voltage point
P04.04 set V/F curve via P04.03–P04.08. 00.0% ○
1 of motor 1
V/F curve is usually set according to the
V/F frequency characteristics of motor load.
P04.05 0.00Hz ○
point 2 of motor 1 Note: V1<V2<V3, f1<f2<f3. If low-frequency
voltage is set too high, motor overheat or

V/F voltage point
P04.06 burnt-down may occur, and overcurrent stall or 0.0% ○
2 of motor 1
overcurrent protection may occur to the VFD.
V/F frequency
P04.07 0.00Hz ○
point 3 of motor 1
- 228 -
Function Default
code value
Output voltage
100.0% Vb
V3
V2
Output
V1 frequency(Hz)
f1 f2 f3 fb
Setting range of P04.04: 0.0%–110.0% (rated

V/F voltage point
P04.08 voltage of motor 1) 00.0% ○
3 of motor 1
Setting range of P04.05: P04.03–P04.07

voltage of motor 1)
Setting range of P04.07: P04.05–P02.02 (rated

frequency of asynchronous motor 1) or P04.05–
P02.16 (rated frequency of synchronous motor 1)

voltage of motor 1)
This parameter is used to compensate for the

motor rotating speed change caused by load
change in the SVPWM mode, and thus improve
the rigidity of the mechanical characteristics of the
motor. You need to calculate the rated slip
frequency of the motor as follows:
V/F slip
P04.09 compensation △f=fb-n×p/60 0.0% ○
gain of motor 1 where fb is the rated frequency of motor 1,
corresponding to P02.02; n is the rated speed of
motor 1, corresponding to P02.03; p is the number
of pole pairs of motor 1. 100% corresponds to the
rated slip frequency △f of motor 1.
Low-frequency Under SVPWM control mode, the motor,

P04.10 10 ○
oscillation control especially the large-power motor may experience
- 229 -
Function Default
code value
factor of motor 1 current oscillation during certain frequencies,

which may lead to unstable motor operation, or
High-frequency
even VFD overcurrent, you can adjust these two
P04.11 oscillation control 10 ○
parameters properly to eliminate such
factor of motor 1
phenomenon.

Oscillation control
P04.12 threshold of motor 30.00Hz ○
1 Setting range of P04.12: 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max.
output frequency)
This parameter defines the V/F curve of motor 2 of

the Goodrive350-19 series to meet various load
characteristic requirements.
0: Straight V/F curve

V/F curve setup of 1: Multi-point V/F curve
P04.13 0 ◎
motor 2
4: Torque-down V/F curve (2.0nd order)
5: Customize V/F (V/F separation)
Torque boost of Note: Refer to the parameter description of

P04.14 0.0% ○
motor 2 P04.01 and P04.02.
Setting range of P04.14: 0.0%: (automatic)

0.1%–10.0%
Motor 2 torque
P04.15 20.0% ○
boost cut-off Setting range of 0.0%–50.0% (relative to rated
frequency of motor 2)
V/F frequency Note: Refer to the parameter description of

P04.16 0.00Hz ○
point 1 of motor 2 P04.03–P04.08
V/F voltage point Setting range of P04.16: 0.00Hz–P04.18

P04.17 00.0% ○
1 of motor 2 Setting range of P04.17:0.0%–110.0% (rated
voltage of motor 2)
V/F frequency
P04.18 0.00Hz ○
point 2 of motor 2 Setting range of P04.18: P04.16–P04.20
- 230 -
Function Default
code value
V/F voltage point Setting range of P04.19: 0.0%–110.0% (rated

P04.19 voltage of motor 2) 00.0% ○
2 of motor 2
Setting range of P04.20: P04.18–P12.02 (rated
V/F frequency
P04.20 frequency of asynchronous motor 2) or 0.00Hz ○
point 3 of motor 2
P04.18–P12.16 (rated frequency of synchronous
motor 2)
V/F voltage point
P04.21 Setting range of P04.21:0.0%–110.0%(rated 00.0% ○
3 of motor 2
voltage of motor 2)
This parameter is used to compensate for the

motor rotating speed change caused by load
change in the SVPWM mode, and thus improve
the rigidity of the mechanical characteristics of the
motor. You need to calculate the rated slip
frequency of the motor as follows:
V/F slip
P04.22 compensation △f=fb-n*p/60 0.0% ○
gain of motor 2 where fb is the rated frequency of motor 2,
corresponding to P12.02; n is the rated speed of
motor 2, corresponding to P12.03; p is the number
of pole pairs of motor 2. 100% corresponds to the
rated slip frequency △f of motor 2.
Low-frequency In the SVPWM mode, current oscillation may

P04.23 oscillation control easily occur on motors, especially large-power 10 ○
factor of motor 2 motors, at some frequency, which may cause
unstable running of motors or even overcurrent of
High-frequency
VFDs. You can modify this parameter to prevent
P04.24 oscillation control 10 ○
current oscillation.
factor of motor 2
Oscillation control Setting range of P04.24: 0–100

P04.25 threshold of motor Setting range of P04.25: 0.00 Hz–P00.03 (Max. 30.00Hz ○
2 output frequency)
P04.26 Energy-saving run 0: No action 0 ◎
- 231 -
Function Default
code value
1: Automatic energy-saving operation
Under light-load state, the motor can adjust the

output voltage automatically to achieve
energy-saving purpose
0: Keypad; output voltage is determined by P04.28
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: HDIA
5: Multi-step (the set value is determined by P10

group)
Channel of 6: PID
P04.27 0 ○
voltage setup 7: MODBUS communication
communication
10: HDIB
12: PLC programmable card
13: Reserved
When the channel for voltage setup is set to

Set voltage value "keypad", the value of this function code is digital
P04.28 100.0% ○
via keypad voltage set value.
Voltage increase Voltage increase time means the time needed

P04.29 5.0s ○
time from outputting the min. voltage to accelerating to
output the max. voltage.
Voltage decrease Voltage decrease time means the time needed

P04.30 5.0s ○
time from outputting max. voltage to outputting the min.
voltage
- 232 -
Function Default
code value
Output max. Set the upper/lower limit value of output voltage.

P04.31 100.0% ◎
voltage
Vmax t1=P04.29
t2=P04.30
V set
Vmin
Output min. t1 t2 Time t
P04.32 0.0% ◎
voltage
Setting range of P04.31: P04.32–100.0% (rated
motor voltage)
Setting range of P04.32: 0.0%–P04.31
Flux-weakening
coefficient in the
P04.33 1.00–1.30 1.00 ○
constant power
zone

Input current 1 in
P04.34 synchronous 20.0% ○
lower than the frequency set in P04.36.
motor VF control

Input current 2 in
P04.35 synchronous 10.0% ○
higher than the frequency set in P04.36.
motor VF control
Frequency When the synchronous motor VF control mode is

threshold for input enabled, this parameter is used to set the
P04.36 current switching frequency threshold for the switching between 50.00Hz ○
in synchronous input current 1 and input current 2.
motor VF control Setting range: 0.00 Hz–P00.03 (Max. output
- 233 -
Function Default
code value
frequency)
Reactive current
closed-loop
proportional
P04.37 proportional coefficient of the reactive current 50 ○
coefficient in
synchronous
motor VF
Reactive current When the synchronous motor VF control mode is

closed-loop enabled, this parameter is used to set the integral
P04.38 integral time in coefficient of the reactive current closed-loop 30 ○
synchronous control.
motor VF control Setting range: 0–3000

enabled, this parameter is used to set the output
Reactive current
limit of the reactive current in the closed-loop
closed-loop
control. A greater value indicates a higher reactive
P04.39 output limit in 8000 ○
closed-loop compensation voltage and higher
synchronous
output power of the motor. In general, you do not
motor VF control
need to modify this parameter.
Enable I/F mode

0: Disabled
P04.40 for asynchronous 0 ◎
1: Enabled
motor 1

Current setting in
motor 1, this parameter is used to set the output
I/F mode for
P04.41 current. The value is a percentage in relative to the 120.0% ○
asynchronous
rated current of the motor.
motor 1
Proportional When I/F control is adopted for asynchronous

coefficient in I/F motor 1, this parameter is used to set the
P04.42 350 ○
mode for proportional coefficient of the output current
asynchronous closed-loop control.
- 234 -
Function Default
code value
motor 1 Setting range: 0–5000

Integral coefficient
in I/F mode for
P04.43 coefficient of the output current closed-loop 150 ○
asynchronous
control.
motor 1

closed-loop control. When the output frequency is
lower than the value of this parameter, the current
closed-loop control in the I/F control mode is
enabled; and when the output frequency is higher
than P04.50, the current closed-loop control in the
I/F control mode is disabled.
Output
frequency
Starting frequency
P04.50
for switching off P04.44
P04.44 I/F mode for 10.00Hz ○
asynchronous
motor 1
Output
current
P04.41/P
04.52
Note: The frequency for completely switching off

the I/F control is a half of the motor rated
frequency.
Enabling I/F mode

P04.45 0: Disable 0 ◎
for asynchronous
- 235 -
Function Default
code value
motor 2 1: Enable
Note: The I/F mode is not applicable to conical

motor applications.

Current setting in
motor 2, this parameter is used to set the output
I/F mode for
P04.46 current. The value is a percentage in relative to the 120.0% ○
asynchronous
rated current of the motor.
motor 2
Proportional When I/F control is adopted for asynchronous

coefficient in I/F motor 2, this parameter is used to set the
P04.47 mode for proportional coefficient of the output current 350 ○
asynchronous closed-loop control.
motor 2 Setting range: 0–5000

in I/F mode for
P04.48 coefficient of the output current closed-loop 150 ○
asynchronous
control.
motor 2

Starting frequency
closed-loop control. When the frequency is lower
for switching off
than the value of this parameter, the current
P04.49 I/F mode for 10.00Hz ○
closed-loop control in the I/F control mode is
asynchronous
enabled; and when the frequency is higher than
motor 2
End frequency for

switching off I/F
P04.50 P04.44–P00.03 25.00Hz ○
mode for
asynchronous
- 236 -
Function Default
code value
motor 1
End frequency for

switching off I/F
P04.51 mode for P04.49–P00.03 25.00Hz ○
asynchronous
motor 2
Current setting for

reverse running in
P04.52 I/F mode for 0.0–200.0% 120.0% ○
asynchronous
motor 1
Current setting for
reverse running in
P04.53 I/F mode for 0.0–200.0% 120.0% ○
asynchronous
motor 2
7.2.6 P05 Input terminals
Function Default
code value
0x00–0x11
P05.00 HDI input type 1: HDIA is digital input 0x00 ◎
Function of S1
P05.01 0: No function 1 ◎
terminal
1: Forward running
Function of S2
P05.02 2: Reverse running 2 ◎
terminal
- 237 -
Function Default
code value
Function of S3 3: 3-wire control/Sin

P05.03 7 ◎
terminal 4: Forward jogging
5: Reverse jogging
Function of S4
P05.04 0 ◎
terminal 6: Coast to stop
7: Fault reset
Function of HDIA
P05.05 0 ◎
terminal 8: Running pause
9: External fault input

Function of HDIB
P05.06 0 ◎
terminal 10: Frequency increase (UP)
12: Clear frequency increase/decrease setting
13: Switch-over between setup A and setup B
14: Switch-over between combination setup and

setup A
15: Switch-over between combination setup and

setup B

P05.07 Reserved 0 ◎
20: Multi-step speed pause
21: Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1
22: Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2
24: Simple PLC pause
25: PID control pause
26: Wobbling frequency pause
27: Wobbling frequency reset
28: Counter reset
29: Switch-over between speed control and torque
- 238 -
Function Default
code value
control
30: Acceleration/deceleration disabled
31: Counter trigger
32: Reserved
33: Clear frequency increase/decrease setting

temporarily
34: DC brake
35: Switch-over between motor 1 and motor 2
36: Command switches to keypad
37: Command switches to terminal
38: Command switches to communication
39: Pre-exciting command
40: Zero out power consumption quantity
41: Maintain power consumption quantity
42: Source of upper torque limit switches to

keypad
43: Position reference point input (only S6, S7 and

S8 are valid)
44: Spindle orientation disabled
45: Spindle zeroing/local positioning zeroing
46: Spindle zero position selection 1
47: Spindle zero position selection 2
48: Spindle scale division selection 1
51: Position control and speed control switch-over

terminal
52: Pulse input disabled
53: Clear position deviation cleared
- 239 -
Function Default
code value
54: Switch over position proportional gain
55: Enable cyclic positioning of digital position

positioning
56: Emergency stop
57: Motor over-temperature fault input
58: Enable rigid tapping
59: Switches to V/F control
60: Switches to FVC control
61: PID polarity switch-over

control mode 1)
63: Enable servo
64: Limit of forward run
65: Limit of reverse run
66: Zero out encoder counting
67: Pulse increase
68: Enable pulse superimposition
69: Pulse decrease
70: Electronic gear selection
71: Switch to the master
72: Switch to the slave
73: Enable the VFD
74: Contactor feedback signal

75: Brake feedback signal
76: Operating lever zero-point position
82: Upward DEC limit position
- 240 -
Function Default
code value
83: Downward DEC limit position

84: Light load speed boost signal
85: Brake detection
86: Valid signal of PTC overtemperature
(Supporting only the terminals S5 – S8 of
EC-IO502-00)
87: Position synchronization pulse counting reset
88: Switchover between motors 1 and 3
89: Anti-snag protection input
This function code is used to set the polarity of

input terminals.
When the bit is set to 0, input terminal polarity is

Polarity of input
P05.08 positive; 0x000 ○
terminal
negative;
0x000–0x3F
Set S1–S4, filter time of HDI terminal sampling. In

cases where interference is strong, increase the
P05.09 Digital filter time 0.010s ○
value of this parameter to avoid mal-operation.
0.000–1.000s

Virtual terminal
P05.10 BIT2: S3 virtual terminal 0x00 ◎
setting
BIT4: HDIA virtual terminal
BIT5: HDIB virtual terminal
Used to set the 2/3 Wire control mode.
0: 2-Wire control 1; integrate enabling function with

2/3 Wire control
P05.11 direction. This mode is the most popular dual-line 0 ◎
mode
mode. Direction of motor rotation is determined by
the defined FWD/REV terminal command.
- 241 -
Function Default
code value
Running
FWD REV
command
FWD
K1 OFF OFF Stop
Forward
REV ON OFF
running
K2
Reverse
OFF ON
running
COM
ON ON Hold
1: 2-wire control 2; separate enabling function with

direction. In this mode, the defined FWD is
enabling terminal, and the direction is determined
by the state of REV.
Running
FWD REV
command
FWD
K1 OFF OFF Stop
Forward
REV ON OFF
running
K2
OFF ON Stop
COM
ON ON Reverse
running
2: 3-wire control 1; This mode defines Sin as

enabling terminal, and the running command is
generated by FWD, the direction is controlled by
REV. During running, the Sin terminal should be
closed, and terminal FWD generates a rising edge
signal, then the VFD starts to run in the direction
set by the state of terminal REV; the VFD should
be stopped by disconnecting terminal Sin.
- 242 -
Function Default
code value
SB1
FWD
SB2
SIn
REV
K
COM
The direction control during running is shown

below.
Previous Current
Sln REV running running
direction direction
Forward Reverse
ON OFF→ON
Reverse Forward
Reverse Forward
ON ON→OFF
Forward Reverse
ON
ON→OFF Decelerate to stop
OFF
Sln: 3-wire control/Sin, FWD: Forward running,

REV: Reverse running
3: 3-wire control 2; This mode defines Sin as

enabling terminal. The running command is
generated by FWD or REV, and they control the
running direction. During running, the terminal Sin
should be closed, and terminal FWD or REV
generates a rising edge signal to control the
running and direction of VFD; the VFD should be
stopped by disconnecting terminal Sin.
- 243 -
Function Default
code value
SB1
FWD
SB2
Sln
SB3
REV
COM
Running
Sln FWD REV
direction
ON Forward
ON OFF→ON
OFF Forward
ON Reverse
ON OFF→ON
OFF Reverse
Decelerate to
ON→OFF
stop
Sln: 3-wire control/Sin, FWD: Forward running,

REV: Reverse running
Note: For dual-line running mode, when

FWD/REV terminal is valid, if the VFD stops due to
stop command given by other sources, it will not
run again after the stop command disappears
even if the control terminals FWD/REV are still
valid. To make the VFD run again, you need to
trigger FWD/REV again, for example, PLC
single-cycle stop, fixed-length stop, and valid
STOP/RST stop during terminal control. (See
P07.04.)
S1 terminal These function codes define corresponding delay

P05.12 0.000s ○
switch-on delay of the programmable input terminals during level
- 244 -
Function Default
code value
S1 terminal variation from switch-on to switch-off .

P05.13 0.000s ○
switch-off delay Si electrical level
S2 terminal Si valid invalid valid invalid

P05.14 Switcn-on Switcn-off
0.000s ○
switch-on delay
delay delay
S2 terminal
P05.15 Setting range: 0.000–50.000s 0.000s ○
switch-off delay
Note: After a virtual terminal is enabled, the state
S3 terminal of the terminal can be changed only in
P05.16 0.000s ○
switch-on delay communication mode. The communication
address is 0x200A.
S3 terminal
P05.17 0.000s ○
switch-off delay
S4 terminal
P05.18 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
S4 terminal
P05.19 0.000s ○
switch-off delay
HDIA terminal
P05.20 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
HDIA terminal
P05.21 0.000s ○
switch-off delay
HDIB terminal
P05.22 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
HDIB terminal
P05.23 0.000s ○
switch-off delay
Lower limit value These function codes define the relation between
P05.24 0.00V ○
of AI1 analog input voltage and corresponding set value
of analog input. When the analog input voltage
Corresponding
exceeds the range of max./min. input, the max.
P05.25 setting of lower 0.0% ○
input or min. input will be adopted during
limit of AI1
calculation.
P05.26 Upper limit value When analog input is current input, 0–20mA 10.00V ○
- 245 -
Function Default
code value
of AI1 current corresponds to 0–10V voltage.
In different applications, 100% of analog setting

Corresponding
corresponds to different nominal values.
P05.27 setting of upper 100.0% ○
limit of AI1 The figure below illustrates several settings.
Corresponding setting
Input filter time of 100%
P05.28 0.030s ○
AI1
Lower limit value

P05.29 -10V 0 AI
-10.00V ○
of AI2 10V
20mA
AI1
AI2
Corresponding
P05.30 setting of lower -100% -100.0% ○
limit of AI2
Input filter time: Adjust the sensitivity of analog
Intermediate
P05.31 input, increase this value properly can enhance 0.00V ○
value 1 of AI2
the anti-interference capacity of analog variables;
Corresponding however, it will also degrade the sensitivity of
setting of analog input.
P05.32 0.0% ○
intermediate Note: AI1 can support 0–10V/0–20mA input, when
value 1 of AI2 AI1 selects 0–20mA input; the corresponding
voltage of 20mA is 10V; AI2 supports -10V–+10V
Intermediate
P05.33 input. 0.00V ○
value 2 of AI2
Setting range of P05.24: 0.00V–P05.26
Corresponding
Setting range of P05.25: -300.0%–300.0%
setting of
P05.34 Setting range of P05.26: P05.24–10.00V 0.0% ○
intermediate
value 2 of AI2 Setting range of P05.27: -300.0%–300.0%
Setting range of P05.28: 0.000s–10.000s

Upper limit value
P05.35 10.00V ○
of AI2 Setting range of P05.29: -10.00V–P05.31

Corresponding
P05.36 setting of upper Setting range of P05.31: P05.29–P05.33 100.0% ○
limit of AI2 Setting range of P05.32: -300.0%–300.0%
Input filter time of Setting range of P05.33: P05.31–P05.35

P05.37 0.030s ○
AI2 Setting range of P05.34: -300.0%–300.0%
- 246 -
Function Default
code value
Setting range of P05.35: P05.33–10.00V

HDIA high-speed
1: Reserved
P05.38 pulse input 0 ◎
function 2: Input via encoder, used in combination with
HDIB
Lower limit 0.000

P05.39 0.000 KHz – P05.41 ○
frequency of HDIA KHz
Corresponding
setting of lower
P05.40 -300.0%–300.0% 0.0% ○
limit frequency of
HDIA
Upper limit 50.000

P05.41 P05.39 –50.000KHz ○
frequency of HDIA KHz
Corresponding
setting of upper
P05.42 -100.0%–100.0% 100.0% ○
limit frequency of
HDIA
HDIA frequency
P05.43 0.000s–10.000s 0.030s ○
input filter time

HDIB high-speed
1: Reserved
P05.44 pulse input 0 ◎
function selection 2: Encoder input, it should be used in combination
with HDIA
Lower limit 0.000

P05.45 0.000 KHz – P05.47 ○
frequency of HDIB KHz
Corresponding
P05.46 -300.0%–300.0% 0.0% ○
setting of lower
- 247 -
Function Default
code value
limit frequency of
HDIB
Upper limit 50.000

P05.47 P05.45 –50.000KHz ○
frequency of HDIB KHz
Corresponding
setting of upper
P05.48 -300.0%–300.0% 100.0% ○
limit frequency of
HDIB
HDIB frequency
P05.49 0.000s–10.000s 0.030s ○
input filter time
0: Voltage type
AI1 input signal 1: Current type

P05.50 0 ◎
type Note: You can set the AI1 input signal type
through the corresponding function code.
7.2.7 P06 Output terminals
Function Default
code value
0: Open collector high-speed pulse output: Max.

frequency of the pulse is 50.00kHz. For details
P06.00 HDO output type about the related functions, see P06.27–P06.31. 0 ◎
1: Open collector output: For details about the
related functions, see P06.02.
P06.01 Y output selection 0: Invalid 0 ○
HDO output 1: In running

P06.02 0 ○
selection 2: In forward running
Relay RO1 output 3: In reverse running

P06.03 1 ○
selection 4: In jogging
P06.04 Relay RO2 output 5: VFD fault 5 ○
- 248 -
Function Default
code value
selection 6: Frequency level detection FDT1
8: Frequency reached
9: Running in zero speed
10: Reach upper limit frequency
11: Reach lower limit frequency
12: Ready to run
13: In pre-exciting
14: Overload pre-alarm
15: Underload pre-alarm
16: Simple PLC stage completed
17: Simple PLC cycle completed
18: Reach set counting value
19: Reach designated counting value
20: External fault is valid
21: Reserved
22: Reach running time
23: Virtual terminal output of MODBUS

communication

POROFIBUS/CANopen communication
25: Virtual terminal output of Ethernet

communication
26: DC bus voltage established
27: Z pulse output
28: During pulse superposition
29: STO action
30: Positioning completed
31: Spindle zeroing completed
- 249 -
Function Default
code value
32: Spindle scale-division completed
33: In speed limit
34: Virtual terminal output of EtherCat/Profinet

communication
35: Reserved
36: Speed/position control switch-over completed
37: Any frequency reached
38–40: Reserved
41: C_Y1 from PLC (You need to set P27.00 to 1.)
42: C_Y2 from PLC (You need to set P27.00 to 1.)
43: C_HDO from PLC (You need to set P27.00 to

1.)
44: C_RO1 from PLC (You need to set P27.00 to

1.)

1.)

1.)

1.)
48: Contactor output

49: Brake output
50: Ready to release the brake
51: Ready to close the brake
52: Upward limit position reached
53: Downward limit position reached
54: Low voltage protection
55: Overload protection
56: Brake detection reminding
57: Brake failure alarm
58: Input phase loss alarm
59: Loose rope state (FWD loose rope protection,
REV loose rope alarm/fault)
- 250 -
Function Default
code value

65: Boosting the speed with light load
66: Derating the frequency with voltage
Output terminal This function code is used to set the polarity of

polarity selection output terminals.

positive;
When the bit is set to 1 input terminal polarity is

P06.05 00 ○
negative.
BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
RO2 RO1 HDO Y
Setting range: 0x0–0xF
P06.06 Y switch-on delay 0.000s ○
P06.07 Y switch-off delay 0.000s ○

This function code defines the corresponding
HDO switch-on
P06.08 delay of the level variation from switch-on to 0.000s ○
delay
switch-off.
HDO switch-off Y electric level
P06.09 0.000s ○
delay invalid
Y valid Invalid Valid
Switch on Switch off
Relay RO1 delay delay
P06.10 0.000s ○
switch-on delay Setting range: 0.000–50.000s
Relay RO1 Note: P06.08 and P06.09 are valid only when
P06.11 0.000s ○
switch-off delay P06.00=1.
Relay RO2
P06.12 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
- 251 -
Function Default
code value
Relay RO2
P06.13 0.000s ○
switch-off delay
AO1 output 0: Running frequency (0–Max. output frequency)

P06.14 0 ○
selection 1: Set frequency (0–Max. output frequency)
2: Ramp reference frequency (0–Max. output

frequency)
3: Running speed (0–Synchronous rotation speed

corresponding to max. output frequency)
4: Output current (0–Twice the VFD rated current)
5: Output current (0– Twice the motor rated

current)
6: Output voltage (0–1.5 times the VFD rated

voltage)
7: Output power (0–Twice the motor rated power)
8: Set torque value (0–Twice the motor rated

torque)
9: Output torque (0–Twice the motor rated torque)

HDO high-speed
P06.16 0 ○
pulse output 10: Analog AI1 input value (0–10V/0–20mA)
11: Analog AI2 input value(0–10V)
12: Analog AI3 input value(0–10V/0–20mA)
13: High-speed pulse HDIA input value

(0.00–50.00kHz)
14: MODBUS communication set value 1 (0–1000)
15: MODBUS communication set value 2 (0–1000)
communication set value 1 (0–1000)
communication set value 2 (0–1000)
18: Ethernet communication set value 1 (0–1000)
19: Ethernet communication set value 2 (0–1000)
- 252 -
Function Default
code value
20: High-speed pulse HDIB input value

(0.00–50.00kHz)
21: EtherCat/Profinet communication set value 1

(0–1000)
22: Torque current (0–Triple the motor rated

current)
23: Exciting current (0–Triple the motor rated

current)
24: Set frequency (bipolar, 0–Max. output

frequency)
25: Ramps reference frequency (bipolar, 0–Max.

output frequency)
26: Running speed (bipolar; 0–Synchronous

rotation speed corresponding to max. output
frequency)
27: EtherCat/Profinet communication set value 2

(0–1000)
28: C_AO1 from PLC (You need to set P27.00 to

1.) (0–1000)
29: C_AO2 from PLC (You need to set P27.00 to

1.) (0–1000)
30: Running speed (0–Twice the synchronous

speed of motor)
31: Output torque (Actual value, 0–Twice motor

rated torque)
32–47: Reserved variable
Lower limit of AO1

P06.17 Above function codes define the relation between 0.0% ○
output
output value and analog output. When the output
value exceeds the set max./min. output range, the
Corresponding
upper/low limit of output will be adopted during
P06.18 AO1 output of 0.00V ○
calculation.
lower limit
- 253 -
Function Default
code value
Upper limit of AO1 When analog output is current output, 1mA

P06.19 corresponds to 0.5V voltage. In different 100.0% ○
output
applications, 100% of output value corresponds to
Corresponding different analog outputs.
P06.20 AO1 output of AO
10V (20mA) 10.00V ○
upper limit
0.0% 100.0%
Setting range of P06.17: -300.0%–P06.19

AO1 output filter
P06.21 0.000s ○
time Setting range of P06.18: 0.00V–10.00V
Setting range of P06.19: P06.17–100.0%
Setting range of P06.20: 0.00V–10.00V
Lower limit of
P06.27 -300.0%–P06.29 0.00% ○
HDO output
Corresponding
P06.28 HDO output of 0.00–50.00kHz 0.00kHz ○
lower limit
Upper limit of
P06.29 P06.27–100.0% 100.0% ○
HDO output
Corresponding
50.00
P06.30 HDO output of 0.00–50.00kHz ○
kHz
upper limit
HDO output filter

P06.31 0.000s–10.000s 0.000s ○
time
Frequency 0–P00.03 1.00Hz ○

P06.33 reaching
detection value
Frequency 0–3600.0s 0.5s ○

P06.34
reaching
- 254 -
Function Default
code value
detection time
7.2.8 P07 HMI
Function Default
code value
0–65535
Set it to any non-zero value to enable password

protection.
00000: Clear previous user password and disable

password protection.
After user password becomes valid, if wrong

password is inputted, you will be denied entry. It is
P07.00 User password necessary to keep the user password in mind. 0 ○
Password protection will be effective one minute

after exiting function code edit state, and it will
display "0.0.0.0.0" if you press PRG/ESC key to
enter function code edit state again, you need to
input the correct password.
Note: Restoring to default values will clear

user password, use this function with caution.
Range: 0–4
0: No operation
Function 1: Upload parameters to the keypad
P07.01 parameter 2: Download all parameters (including motor 0 ◎

copying parameters)
3: Download non-motor parameters.
4: Download motor parameters.
Range: 0x00–0x27
Ones: Function selection of QUICK/JOG key

P07.02 Function of keys 0x01 ◎
0: No function
1: Jogging
- 255 -
Function Default
code value
2: Reserved
3: Forward/reverse rotation switch-over
4: Clear UP/DOWN setting
5: Coast to stop
6: Switch over the running command reference

mode in sequence
7: Reserved
Tens: Reserved
When P07.02=6, set the switch-over sequence of

running command channel.
Running
command channel 0: keypad control→terminal control→
P07.03 switch-over communication control 0 ○
sequence of 1: keypad control←→terminal control
QUICK key 2: keypad control←→communication control
3: terminal control←→communication control
Validness selection of stop function of STOP/RST.
For fault reset, STOP/RST is valid under any

situation.
Stop function
P07.04 selection of 0: valid only for panel control only 0 ○
STOP/RST key 1: valid for both panel and terminal control
2: valid for both panel and communication control
3: valid for all control modes
Displayed
parameter
P07.05 0x0000–0xFFFF 0x03FF
selection 1 for
running state
Displayed
parameter
P07.06 0x0000–0xFFFF 0x0000
selection 2 for
running state
- 256 -
Function Default
code value
Displayed
parameter
P07.07 0x0000–0xFFFF 0x00FF
selection for
stopped state
Frequency display 0.01–10.00

P07.08 1.00 ○
coefficient Display frequency=running frequency× P07.08
0.1–999.9%
Speed display
P07.09 Mechanical speed=120×display running 100.0% ○
coefficient
frequency×P07.09/number of motor pole pairs
Linear speed 0.1–999.9%

P07.10 1.0% ○
display coefficient Linear speed=mechanical speed×P07.10
Temperature of
P07.11 rectifier bridge -20.0–120.0°C / ●
module
Temperature of
P07.12 -20.0–120.0°C / ●
VFD module
Software version
P07.13 1.00–655.35 / ●
of control board
Accumulated
P07.14 0–65535h / ●
running time
High bit of VFD

P07.15 power Display the power consumption of the VFD. / ●
consumption VFD power consumption=P07.15×1000+P07.16
Low bit of VFD Setting range of P07.15: 0–65535 kWh (×1000)

P07.16 power Setting range of P07.16: 0.0–999.9 kWh / ●
consumption
P07.17 Reserved / /
Rated power of
P07.18 0.4–3000.0kW / ●
VFD
- 257 -
Function Default
code value
Rated voltage of
P07.19 50–1200V / ●
VFD
Rated current of
P07.20 0.1–6000.0A / ●
VFD
P07.21 Factory barcode 1 0x0000–0xFFFF / ●
Type of present 0: No fault

P07.27 / ●
fault 1: Inverter unit U phase protection (OUt1)
Type of the last 2: Inverter unit V phase protection (OUt2)

P07.28 / ●
fault 3: Inverter unit W phase protection (OUt3)
Type of the last 4: Overcurrent during acceleration (OC1)

P07.29 / ●
but one fault 5: Overcurrent during deceleration (OC2)
Type of the last 6: Overcurrent during constant speed (OC3)

P07.30 / ●
but two fault 7: Overvoltage during acceleration (OV1)
Type of the last 8: Overvoltage during deceleration (OV2)

P07.31 / ●
but three fault 9: Overvoltage during constant speed (OV3)
10: Bus undervoltage fault (UV)
11: Motor overload (OL1)
12: VFD overload (OL2)

Type of the last
P07.32 13: Phase loss on input side (SPI) / ●
but four fault
14: Phase loss on output side (SPO)
15: Rectifier module overheat (OH1)
16: Inverter module overheat (OH2)
- 258 -
Function Default
code value
17: External fault (EF)
18: 485 communication fault (CE)
19: Current detection fault (ItE)
20: Motor autotuning fault (tE)
21: EEPROM operation fault (EEP)
22: PID feedback offline fault (PIDE)
23: Braking unit fault (bCE)
24: Running time reached (END)
25: Electronic overload (OL3)
26: Keypad communication error (PCE)
27: Parameter upload error (UPE)
28: Parameter download error (DNE)
29: Profibus communication fault (E-DP)
30: Ethernet communication fault (E-NET)
31: CANopen communication fault (E-CAN)
34: Speed deviation fault (dEu)
35: Mal-adjustment fault (STo)
36: Underload fault (LL)
37: Encoder offline fault (ENC1O)
38: Encoder reversal fault (ENC1D)
39: Encoder Z pulse offline fault (ENC1Z)
41: Channel H1 safety circuit exception (STL1)
42: Channel H2 safety circuit exception (STL2)
43: Channel H1 and H2 exception (STL3)
44: Safety code FLASH CRC fault (CrCE)
45: PLC card customized fault 1 (P-E1)
- 259 -
Function Default
code value
55: Repetitive extension card type fault (E-Err)
56: Encoder UVW loss fault (ENCUV)
57: Profibus communication fault (E-PN)
58: CANopen communication fault (ESCAN)
59: Motor over-temperature fault (OT)
60: Card slot 1 card identification failure (F1-Er)
63: Card slot 1 card communication timeout fault

(C1-Er)

(C2-Er)

(C3-Er)
66: EtherCat communication fault (E-CAT)
67: Bacnet communication fault (E-BAC)
68: DeviceNet communication fault (E-DEV)
69: Master-slave synchronous CAN slave fault

(S-Err)
70: VFD not enabled (dIS)

71: Contactor feedback fault (tbE)
- 260 -
Function Default
code value
72: Brake feedback fault (FAE)

73: Torque verification fault (tPF)
74: Operating lever zero-position fault (STC)
75: Low speed running protection fault (LSP)
76: Terminal command exception (tCE)
77: Power-on terminal command exception (POE)
78: Loose rope protection fault (SLE)
79: Brake failure (bE)
80: Master/slave position synchronization fault
(ELS)
81: Analog speed reference deviation fault (AdE)
84: Set frequency fault (SFE)
85: Current imbalance fault (Cuu)
86: PTC overtemperature fault (PtcE)
Running
P07.33 frequency of 0.00Hz ●
present fault
Ramps reference
P07.34 frequency of 0.00Hz ●
present fault
Output voltage of
P07.35 0V ●
present fault
Output current of
P07.36 0.0A ●
present fault
Bus voltage of
P07.37 0.0V ●
present fault
Max. temperature
P07.38 0.0°C ●
of present fault
Input terminal
P07.39 0 ●
state of present
- 261 -
Function Default
code value
fault
Output terminal
P07.40 state of present 0 ●
fault
Running
P07.41 frequency of the 0.00Hz ●
last fault
Ramps reference
last fault
Output voltage of
P07.43 0V ●
the last fault
Output current of
P07.44 0.0A ●
the last fault
Bus voltage of the

P07.45 0.0V ●
last fault
Max. temperature
P07.46 -20.0–120.0°C 0.0°C ●
of the last fault
Input terminal
P07.47 state of the last 0 ●
fault
Output terminal
fault
Running
last but one fault
Ramps reference
last but one fault
- 262 -
Function Default
code value
Output voltage of
P07.51 the last but one 0V ●
fault
Output current of
P07.52 the last but one 0.0A ●
fault
Bus voltage of the

P07.53 0.0V ●
last but one fault
Max. temperature
P07.54 of the last but one -20.0–120.0°C 0.0°C ●
fault
Input terminal
but one fault
Output terminal
but one fault
7.2.9 P08 Enhanced functions
Function Default
code value
Acceleration Model
P08.00 ○
time 2 See P00.11 and P00.12 for detailed definitions. depended

P08.01 ○
time 2 acceleration/deceleration time, which can be depended
selected by multi-function digital input terminal
Acceleration (P05 group). The acceleration/deceleration time of Model
P08.02 ○
time 3 the VFD is the first group by default. depended
Deceleration Setting range: 0.0–3600.0s Model

P08.03 ○
time 3 depended
- 263 -
Function Default
code value
Acceleration Model
P08.04 ○
time 4 depended
Deceleration Model
P08.05 ○
time 4 depended
This function code is used to define the reference

Running
frequency of the VFD during jogging.
P08.06 frequency of 5.00Hz ○
jogging
frequency)
Acceleration time Jogging acceleration time is the time needed for

P08.07 the VFD to accelerate from 0Hz to Max. output ○
of jogging
frequency (P00.03).
Model
Jogging deceleration time is the time needed from
depended
Deceleration time decelerating from Max. output frequency (P00.03)
P08.08 ○
of jogging to 0Hz.
P08.09 Jump frequency 1 When the set frequency is within the range of jump 0.00Hz ○
frequency, the VFD will run at the boundary of
Jump frequency
P08.10 jump frequency. 0.00Hz ○
amplitude 1
The VFD can avoid mechanical resonance point
P08.11 Jump frequency 2 by setting the jump frequency, and three jump 0.00Hz ○
frequency points can be set. If the jump frequency
Jump frequency
P08.12 points are set to 0, this function will be invalid. 0.00Hz ○
amplitude 2
Set frequency f
1/2* jump amplitude 3
P08.13 Jump frequency 3 Jump
frequency 3 0.00Hz ○

Jump
frequency 2 1/2* jump amplitude 2

Jump
frequency 1 1/2* jump amplitude 1
Jump frequency
P08.14 0.00Hz ○
amplitude 3 Time t

frequency)
- 264 -
Function Default
code value
Amplitude of ○
P08.15 wobbling 0.0–100.0% (relative to set frequency) 0.0%
frequency
Amplitude of jump 0.0–50.0% (relative to amplitude of wobbling ○

P08.16 0.0%
frequency frequency)
Rise time of ○
P08.17 wobbling 0.1–3600.0s 5.0s
frequency
Descend time of ○
P08.18 wobbling 0.1–3600.0s 5.0s
frequency
Switching 0.00–P00.03 (Max. output frequency)
frequency of 0.00Hz: no switch-over

P08.19 0.00Hz ○
acceleration/decel Switch to acceleration/deceleration time 2 if the
eration time running frequency is larger than P08.19
Frequency
threshold of the
P08.20 0.00–50.00Hz 2.00Hz ○
start of droop
control

Reference
1: Set frequency
frequency of
P08.21 2: 100Hz 0 ◎
acceleration/decel
eration time Note: Valid for straight acceleration/deceleration
only
Output torque 0: Calculated based on torque current

P08.22 0 ○
calculation mode
Number of
0: Two decimal points
P08.23 decimal points of 0 ○
1: One decimal point
frequency
- 265 -
Function Default
code value
0: No decimal point
Number of
1: One
P08.24 decimal points of 0 ○
2: Two
linear speed
3: Three
P08.25 Set count value P08.26–65535 0 ○
Designated count
P08.26 0–P08.25 0 ○
value
P08.27 Set running time 0–65535min 0min ○
Automatic fault Automatic fault reset times: When the VFD selects
P08.28 0 ○
reset times automatic fault reset, it is used to set the times of
automatic reset, if the continuous reset times
exceeds the value set by P08.29, the VFD will
report fault and stop to wait for repair.
Interval of automatic fault reset: select the interval

time from when fault occurred to automatic fault
Automatic fault
P08.29 reset actions. 1.0s ○
reset time interval
After VFD starts, if no fault occurred during 60s,
the fault reset times will be zeroed out.
This function code sets the variation rate of the

VFD output frequency based on the load; it is
Reduction ratio of
P08.30 mainly used in balancing the power when multiple 0.00Hz ○
droop control
motors drive the same load.
0x00–0x14
Switch-over Ones: Switch-over channel

P08.31 between motor 1 0: Switch over by terminal 0x00 ◎
and motor 2
1: Switch over by MODBUS communication
2: Switch over by
- 266 -
Function Default
code value
PROFIBUS/CANopen/DeviceNet
3: Switch over by Ethernet communication
4: Switch over by EtherCat/Profinet

communication
Tens: Motor switch over during running
0: Disable switch over during running
1: Enable switch over during running
FDT1 level When the output frequency exceeds the

P08.32 50.00Hz ○
detection value corresponding frequency of FDT level,
multi-function digital output terminal outputs
FDT1 lag
P08.33 "frequency level detection FDT" signal, this signal 5.0% ○
detection value
will be valid until the output frequency lowers to
FDT2 level below the corresponding frequency (FDT

P08.34 level-FDT lag detection value), the waveform is 50.00Hz ○
detection value
shown in the figure below.
Output frequency f
FDT level FDT lag
Time t
Y1,
FDT2 lag RO1, RO2 Time t
P08.35 5.0% ○
detection value
output frequency)
Setting range of P08.33: 0.0–100.0% (FDT1 level)

output frequency)
Setting range of P08.35: 0.0–100.0% (FDT2 level)
When the output frequency is within the positive

Detection value
/negative detection range of the set frequency, the
P08.36 for frequency 0.00Hz ○
multi-function digital output terminal outputs
arrival
"frequency arrival" signal as shown below.
- 267 -
Function Default
code value
Output frequency
Set Detection amplitude

frequency
Time t
Y,
RO1, RO2 Time t

frequency)
0x00–0x11
Ones place:
0: Disable energy-consumption
Enable energy- 1: Enable energy-consumption

P08.37 consumption Tens place: 0x01 ○
brake
0: Disable braking short circuit protection
1: Enable braking short circuit protection
There is no braking short circuit protection for the

22kW and lower VFD models by default.
220V
voltage:
Set the starting bus voltage of 380.0V;
Energy-
energy-consumption brake, adjust this value 380V
consumption
P08.38 properly can brake the load effectively. The default voltage: ○
brake threshold
value will change with the change of voltage class. 700.0V;
voltage
Setting range: 200.0–2000.0V 660V
voltage:
1120.0V
Running mode of 0: Common running mode

P08.39 0 ○
cooling fan 1: The fan keeps running after power up
- 268 -
Function Default
code value
2: Running mode 2
0x0000–0x1121
Ones: PWM mode
0: PWM mode 1, 3PH and 2PH modulation
1: PWM mode 2, 3PH modulation
Tens: PWM low-speed carrier wave limit
0: Limit low-speed carrier wave, limit mode 1

P08.40 PWM selection 0x1101 ◎
1: Limit low-speed carrier wave, limit mode 2
2: No limit on low-speed carrier
Hundreds: Reserved
Thousands: PWM loading mode
0: Interrupt loading
1: Normal loading
0x00–0x11
Ones
0: Overmodulation is invalid
1: Overmodulation is valid
Tens
0: Mild overmodulation
Overmodulation 1: Deepened overmodulation

P08.41 01 ◎
selection Hundreds: carrier frequency limit selection
0: Limit
1: Not limit
Thousands: Output voltage compensation

selection
0: Not compensate
1: Compensate
P08.42 Reserved 000–1223 0x0003 ○
- 269 -
Function Default
code value
P08.43 Reserved 0.01–10.00 0.10s ○
0x000–0x221
Ones: Frequency control selection
0: UP/DOWN terminal setup is valid
1: UP/DOWN terminal setup is invalid
Tens: Frequency control selection
0: Valid only when P00.06=0 or P00.07=0

UP/DOWN
1: All frequency modes are valid
P08.44 terminal control 0x000 ○
setup 2: Invalid for multi-step speed when multi-step
speed takes priority
Hundreds: Action selection during stop
0: Valid
1: Valid during running, clear after stop
2: Valid during running, clear after receiving stop

command
UP terminal
frequency
P08.45 0.01–50.00Hz/s 0.50Hz/s ○
incremental
integral rate
DOWN terminal
frequency
P08.46 0.01–50.00Hz/s 0.50Hz/s ○
decrement
change rate
0x000–0x111
Ones: Action selection for frequency setup (by

Action selection keypad digits) during power down
for frequency
P08.47 0: Save during power down 0x000 ○
setup during
power down 1: Zero out during power down
Tens: Action selection for frequency setup (by

MODBUS) during power down
- 270 -
Function Default
code value
0: Save during power down
1: Zero out during power down
Hundreds: Action selection for frequency setup (by

DP communication) during power down
0: Save during power down
1: Zero out during power down
High bit of initial

Set the initial value of power consumption.
P08.48 value of power 0° ○
Initial value of power consumption=P08.48×1000+
consumption
P08.49
Low bit of initial
Setting range of P08.48: 0–59999 kWh (k)
P08.49 value of power 0.0° ○
Setting range of P08.49: 0.0–999.9 kWh
consumption
This function code is used to enable flux braking

function.
0: Invalid
100–150: The larger the coefficient, the stronger

the brake intensity
The VFD enables motor to decelerate quickly by

increasing the motor flux which converts energy
generated during braking into thermal energy.
The VFD monitors motor state continuously even

P08.50 Flux braking during flux braking, thus flux braking can be 0 ○
applied in motor stop or used to change motor
speed. The flux braking also carries the following
advantages.
1) Brake immediately after sending stop

command, removing the need to wait for flux to
attenuate.
2) Better cooling effect. During flux braking, the

stator current of the motor increases, while the
rotor current does not change, while the cooling
effect of stator is much more effective than that of
- 271 -
Function Default
code value
the rotor.
Current regulation This function code is used to adjust the current

P08.51 coefficient on display value on the AC input side. 0.56 ○
input side 0.00–1.00
0: STO alarm lock
Alarm-lock means STO alarm must be reset after

state restoration when STO occurs.
P08.52 STO lock 1: STO alarm unlock 0 ○
Alarm-unlock means when STO occurs, after state

restoration, STO alarm will disappear
automatically.
Bias value of
0.00 Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency)
upper limit
P08.53 Note: This parameter is valid only for the torque 0.00Hz ○
frequency of
control mode.
torque control
0: No limit on acceleration or deceleration

Acceleration/dece
leration selection 1: Acceleration/deceleration time 1
P08.54 of upper limit 2: Acceleration/deceleration time 2 0 ○
frequency of 3: Acceleration/deceleration time 3
torque control
4: Acceleration/deceleration time 4
7.2.10 P09 PID control
Function Default
code value
When frequency command (P00.06, P00. 07) is

set to 7, or channel of voltage setup (P04.27) is set
PID reference to 6, the VFD running mode is process PID control.

P09.00 0 ○
source This parameter determines the target reference
channel of process PID.
0: Keypad (P09.01)
- 272 -
Function Default
code value
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: High-speed pulse HDIA
5: Multi-step
communication
9: High-speed pulse HDIB
11: Programmable extension card
12: Reserved
The set target value of process PID is relative

value, the set 100% corresponds to 100% of the
feedback signal of controlled system.
The system operates based on the relative value

(0–100.0%)
You need to set this parameter when P09.00 is set

Pre-set PID
to 0, the reference value of this parameter is the
P09.01 reference of 0.0% ○
feedback variable of the system.
keypad
Setting range: -100.0%–100.0%
This parameter is used to select PID feedback

channel.
0: AI1
PID feedback 1: AI2

P09.02 0 ○
source 2: AI3
3: High-speed pulse HDIA
- 273 -
Function Default
code value
communication
7: High-speed pulse HDIB
9: Programmable extension card
10: Reserved
Note: The reference channel and feedback

channel cannot overlap; otherwise, PID cannot be
controlled effectively.
0: PID output is positive characteristic: namely, the

feedback signal is larger than the PID reference,
which requires the VFD output frequency to
decrease for PID to reach balance, for example,
PID output tension PID control of winding
P09.03 0 ○
characteristics 1: PID output is negative characteristics: namely
the feedback signal is less than PID reference,
which requires VFD output frequency to increase
for PID to reach balance, for example, tension PID
control of unwinding.
This function code is suitable for proportional gain

P of PID input.
It determines the regulation intensity of the whole

PID regulator, the larger the value of P, the
stronger the regulation intensity. If this parameter
Proportional gain is 100, it means when the deviation between PID
P09.04 1.80 ○
(Kp) feedback and reference is 100%, the regulation
amplitude of PID regulator (ignoring integral and
differential effect) on output frequency command is
the max. frequency (ignoring integral and
differential actions).
Setting range: 0.00–100.00
It determines the speed of integral regulation 0.90s

P09.05 Integral time (Ti) ○
made on the deviation between PID feedback and
- 274 -
Function Default
code value
reference by PID regulator. When the deviation

between PID feedback and reference is 100%, the
regulation of integral regulator (ignoring integral
and differential actions), after undergoing
continuous regulation during this time period, can
reach Max. output frequency (P00.03)
The shorter the integral time, the stronger the

regulation intensity.
It determines the intensity of the regulation made

on the change rate of deviation between PID
feedback and reference by PID regulator. If
feedback changes by 100% during this period, the
Derivative time regulation of differential regulator (ignoring integral

P09.06 and differential actions) is Max. output frequency 0.00s ○
(Td)
(P00.03)
The longer the derivative time, the stronger the

regulation intensity.
It means the sampling cycle of feedback. The

regulator operates once during each sampling
Sampling cycle
P09.07 cycle. The larger the sampling cycle, the slower 0.001s ○
(T)
the response.
It is the max. allowable deviation of PID system

output value relative to closed-loop reference
Limit of PID value. Within this limit, PID regulator stops
P09.08 0.0% ○
control deviation regulation. Set this function code properly to
regulate the precision and stability of PID system.
- 275 -
Function Default
code value
Deviation
Feedback
limit
Reference
Time t
Output
frequency f
Time t
Upper limit value These two function codes are used to set the
P09.09 100.0% ○
of PID output upper/lower limit value of PID regulator.
100.0% corresponds to Max. output frequency

(P00.03) or max. voltage (P04.31)
Lower limit value
P09.10 0.0% ○
of PID output Setting range of P09.09: P09.10–100.0%
Setting range of P09.10: -100.0%–P09.09
Feedback offline Set PID feedback offline detection value, when the
P09.11 0.0% ○
detection value detection value is no more than the feedback
offline detection value, and the duration exceeds
the value set in P09.12, the VFD will report "PID
feedback offline fault", and keypad displays PIDE.
Output frequency
t1＜T2, so the VFD
continues running
t2=P09.12
Feedback offline
P09.12 P09.11
PIDE 1.0s ○
detection time T
t1 t2
Running Fault output PIDE
0x0000–0x1111
PID control
P09.13 Ones: 0x0001 ○
selection
0: Continue integral control after the frequency
- 276 -
Function Default
code value
reaches upper/lower limit
1: Stop integral control after the frequency reaches

upper/lower limit
Tens:
0: The Same as the main reference direction
1: Contrary to the main reference direction
Hundreds:
0: Limit based on the max. frequency
1: Limit based on A frequency
Thousands:
0: A+B frequency, acceleration /deceleration of

main reference A frequency source buffering is
invalid
1: A+B frequency, acceleration/ deceleration of

main reference A frequency source buffering is
valid, acceleration and deceleration are
determined by P08.04 (acceleration time 4).
0.00–100.00
Low-frequency switching point: 5.00Hz,

Low-frequency
high-frequency switching point: 10.00Hz (P09.04
P09.14 proportional gain 1.00 ○
corresponds to high-frequency parameter), and
(Kp)
the middle is the linear interpolation between these
two points
Acceleration/
P09.15 deceleration time 0.0–1000.0s 0.0s ○
of PID command
Filter time of PID

P09.16 0.000–10.000s 0.000s ○
output
P09.18 Low frequency 0.00–10.00s 0.90s ○

integral time
- 277 -
Function Default
code value
P09.19 Low frequency 0.00–10.00s 0.00s ○

differential time
P09.20 Low frequency 0–P09.21 5.00Hz ○

point of switching
PID parameters
P09.21 High frequency P09.20–P00.03 10.00Hz ○

point of switching
PID parameters
7.2.11 P10 Simple PLC and multi-step speed control
Function Default
code value
0: Stop after running once; the VFD stops

automatically after running for one cycle, and it
can be started only after receiving running
command.
1: Keep running in the final value after running

P10.00 Simple PLC mode 0 ○
once; The VFD keeps the running frequency and
direction of the last section after a single cycle.
2: Cyclic running; the VFD enters the next cycle

after completing one cycle until receiving stop
command and stops.
0: No memory after power down

Simple PLC 1: Memory after power down; PLC memories its
P10.01 0 ○
memory selection running stage and running frequency before power
down.
P10.02 Multi-step speed 0 Setting range of the frequency in 0th –15th sections 0.0% ○
are -100.0–100.0%, 100% corresponds to Max.
Running time of
P10.03 output frequency P00.03. 0.0s(min) ○
0th step
th th
Setting range of the running time in 0 –15
P10.04 Multi-step speed 1 sections are 0.0–6553.5s (min), the time unit is 0.0% ○
- 278 -
Function Default
code value
Running time of determined by P10.37.

P10.05 0.0s(min) ○
1st step When simple PLC operation is selected, it is
required to set P10.02–P10.33 to determine the
P10.06 Multi-step speed 2 0.0% ○
running frequency and running time of each
Running time of section.

P10.07 0.0s(min) ○
2nd step Note: The symbol of multi-step speed determines
the running direction of simple PLC, and the
negative value means reverse running.
Running time of
P10.09 0.0s(min) ○
3rd step Deceleration time P10.28
(two sections)
P10.04 P10.30
P10.10 Multi-step speed 4 P10.02 0.0% ○

P10.32
Running time of Acceleration time

P10.11 (two sections) 0.0s(min) ○
4th step P10.06
P10.12 Multi-step speed 5 P10.03 P10.05 P10.07 P10.31 P10.33 0.0% ○
Running time of When selecting multi-step speed running, the

P10.13 multi-step speed is within the range of 0.0s(min) ○
5th step
-fmax–fmax, and it can be set continuously. The
P10.14 Multi-step speed 6 start/stop of multi-step stop is also determined by 0.0% ○
P00.01.
Running time of
P10.15 Goodrive350-19 series VFD can set 16-step 0.0s(min) ○
6th step
speed, which are set by combined codes of
P10.16 Multi-step speed 7 multi-step terminals 1–4 (set by S terminal, 0.0% ○
correspond to function code P05.01–P05.06) and
Running time of
P10.17 correspond to multi-step speed 0 to multi-step 0.0s(min) ○
7th step
speed 15.
Running time of
P10.19 0.0s(min) ○
8th step
Running time of
P10.21 0.0s(min) ○
9th step
- 279 -
Function Default
code value
Output frequency
3
Multi-step speed 4
○
2
P10.22 1
5 0.0%
10 0
6
13
14
7
t
8 12
9 11 15
Running time of 10
P10.23 0.0s(min) ○
10th step terminal 1
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON t
ON ON ON ON t
terminal 2
Multi-step speed ON ON
P10.24 terminal 3
t
0.0% ○
11 ON t
terminal 4
Running time of
P10.25 0.0s(min) ○
11th step
When terminal 1, terminal 2, terminal 3 and
Multi-step speed terminal 4 are OFF, the frequency input mode is
P10.26 0.0% ○
12 set by P00.06 or P00.07. When terminal 1,
terminal 2, terminal 3 and terminal 4 are not all
Running time of
P10.27 th OFF, the frequency set by multi-step speed will 0.0s(min) ○
12 step
prevail, and the priority of multi-step setting is
Multi-step speed higher than that of the keypad, analog, high-speed
P10.28 0.0% ○
13 pulse, PID, and communication settings.
The relation between terminal 1, terminal 2,

Running time of
P10.29 th terminal 3 and terminal 4 are shown in the table 0.0s(min) ○
13 step
below.
Multi-step speed Trml 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
P10.30 0.0% ○
14 Trml 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
Trml 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

Running time of
P10.31 th Trml 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0.0s(min) ○
14 step
Step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Multi-step speed Trml 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
P10.32 0.0% ○
15 Trml 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
Trml 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

Running time of
P10.33 th
15 step
Trml 4 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0.0s(min) ○
Step 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Acceleration/dece
Detailed illustration is shown in the table below.
leration time of 0th
P10.34 ACC/ ACC/ ACC/ ACC/ 0x0000 ○
–7th step of simple Function
Binary Step DEC DEC DEC DEC
code
PLC time 1 time 2 time 3 time 4
- 280 -
Function Default
code value
BIT1 BIT0 0 00 01 10 11
BIT3 BIT2 1 00 01 10 11
BIT5 BIT4 2 00 01 10 11
BIT7 BIT6 3 00 01 10 11
P10.34
BIT9 BIT8 4 00 01 10 11
BIT11 BIT10 5 00 01 10 11
BIT13 BIT12 6 00 01 10 11
BIT15 BIT14 7 00 01 10 11
BIT1 BIT0 8 00 01 10 11
BIT3 BIT2 9 00 01 10 11
BIT5 BIT4 10 00 01 10 11
BIT7 BIT6 11 00 01 10 11
P10.35
BIT9 BIT8 12 00 01 10 11
Acceleration/dece BIT11 BIT10 13 00 01 10 11
leration time of 8th BIT13 BIT12 14 00 01 10 11
P10.35 0x0000 ○
– 15th step of BIT15 BIT14 15 00 01 10 11
simple PLC Select corresponding acceleration/deceleration

time, and then convert 16-bit binary number into
hexadecimal number, finally, set corresponding
function code.
Acceleration/deceleration time 1 is set by P00.11

and P00.12; Acceleration/deceleration time 2 is set
by P08.00 and P08.01; Acceleration/deceleration
time 3 is set by P08.02 and P08.03; Acceleration
/deceleration time 4 is set by P08.04 and P08.05.
Setting range: 0x0000–0xFFFF
0: Restart from the first step, namely if the VFD

stops during running (caused by stop command,
fault or power down), it will run from the first step
after restart.
1: Continue running from the step frequency when

P10.36 PLC restart mode interruption occurred, namely if the VFD stops 0 ◎
during running (caused by stop command or fault),
it will record the running time of current step, and
enters this step automatically after restart, then
continue running at the frequency defined by this
step in the remaining time.
P10.37 Multi-step time 0: s; the running time of each step is counted in 0 ◎
- 281 -
Function Default
code value
unit seconds;
1: min; the running time of each step is counted in

minutes;
7.2.12 P11 Protection parameters
Function Default
code value
0x000–0x1111
Ones place: Reserved
Tens place:
0: Disable output phase loss protection
1: Enable output phase loss protection
Hundreds place:
Phase-loss Model
P11.00 0: Disable hardware input phase loss protection ○
protection depended
1: Enable hardware input phase loss protection
Thousands place:
0: During stop, if a hardware input phase loss fault

occurs, it reports SPI.
1: During stop, if a hardware input phase loss fault

occurs, it reports A-SPI.
Frequency-drop at
0: Disable
P11.01 transient power 0 ○
1: Enable
down
P11.02 Energy braking 0: Enable 0 ◎

selection for stop 1: Disable
0: Disable
Overvoltage stall
P11.03 1: Enable 0 ○
protection
- 282 -
Function Default
code value
DC bus voltage V
Overvoltage stall
threshold
Time t
Output
frequency
Time t

120–150% (standard bus voltage) (380V) 136%

Overvoltage stall
P11.04 ○
protection voltage
120–150% (standard bus voltage) (220V) 120%
During accelerated running, as the load is too

large, the actual acceleration rate of motor is lower
than that of output frequency, if no measures are
taken, the VFD may trip due to overcurrent during
acceleration.
0x00–0x21
Ones: Hardware and software current-limit action

selection
Current-limit 0: Invalid
P11.05 10 ◎
selection
1: Always valid
Tens: Hardware current-limit overload alarm

selection
0: OL2 is valid
1: OL2 is invalid
2: Reserved

Automatic Current-limit protection function detects output

P11.06 250.0% ◎
current-limit level current during running, and compares it with the
- 283 -
Function Default
code value
current-limit level defined by P11.06, if it exceeds

the current-limit level, the VFD will run at stable
frequency during accelerated running, or run in
decreased frequency during constant-speed
running; if it exceeds the current-limit level
continuously, the VFD output frequency will drop
continuously until reaching lower limit frequency.
When the output current is detected to be lower
than the current-limit level again, it will continue
Frequency-drop accelerated running.
10.00
P11.07 rate during current Output current A ◎
Current-limit Hz/s
limit threshold
Output frequency f Time t
Set
frequency
Constant
Acceleration speed
Time t
Setting range of P11.07: 0.00–50.00Hz/s
VFD or motor
P11.08 overload/underloa 0x0000 ○
d pre-alarm
If the VFD or motor output current is larger than
Overload the overload pre-alarm detection level (P11.09),
P11.09 pre-alarm and the duration exceeds the overload pre-alarm 150% ○
detection level detection time (P11.10), overload pre-alarm signal
will be outputted.
Overload
P11.10 pre-alarm 1.00s ○
detection time
- 284 -
Function Default
code value
Output current
Overload pre-alarm
threshold
Time t
Pre-alarm time t Pre-alarm time t
Y,
RO1, RO2
Time t
Setting range of P11.08:
Enable and define overload pre-alarm function of

the VFD and motor
Setting range: 0x000–0x131
Ones:
0: Motor overload/underload pre-alarm, relative to

rated motor current;
1: VFD overload/underload pre-alarm, relative to

rated VFD current.
Tens:
0: The VFD continues running after

overload/underload alarm;
1: The VFD continues running after underload

alarm, and stops running after overload fault;
2: The VFD continues running after overload

alarm, and stops running after underload fault;
3: The VFD stops running after overload/underload

fault.
Hundreds:
0: Always detect
1: Detect during constant-speed running
Setting range of P11.09: P11.11–200%
- 285 -
Function Default
code value
Underload Underload pre-alarm signal will be outputted if the

P11.11 pre-alarm output current of the VFD or motor is lower than 25% ○
detection level underload pre-alarm detection level (P11.11), and
the duration exceeds underload pre-alarm
Underload detection time (P11.12).
P11.12 pre-alarm Setting range of P11.11: 0– P11.09 0.05s ○
detection time
This function code is used to set the action of fault

output terminals during undervoltage and fault
reset.
0x00–0x11
Fault output Ones:
P11.13 terminal action 0x00 ○
0: Act during undervoltage fault
during fault
1: Do not act during undervoltage fault
Tens:
0: Act during fault reset
1: Do not act during fault reset
0.0–50.0%
Speed deviation
P11.14 This parameter is used to set the speed deviation 10.0% ○
detection value
detection value.
This parameter is used to set the speed deviation

detection time. If P11.14 is set to a non-zero value,
and the speed deviation is greater than the value
Speed deviation
P11.15 of P11.14, which lasts the time specified by 2.0s ○
detection time
P11.15, the speed deviation fault dEu is reported.
Note: Speed deviation protection will be invalid if

P11.15 is set to 0.0.
- 286 -
Function Default
code value
Speed
Actual detection
value
Set detection
value
t1 t2 Time t
Running Fault outputdEu

t1<t2, so the VFD continues running
t2=P11.15
0–1
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Bus voltage Vdc
Standard bus
voltage
Automatic
frequency-reducti
P11.16 0 ○
on during voltage Time t
drop
Output frequency f
Set frequency
Bus voltage
Standard bus voltage
* Set frequency
Time t
Proportional This parameter is used to set the proportional

coefficient of coefficient of the bus voltage regulator during
P11.17 voltage regulator undervoltage stall. 100 ○
during Setting range: 0–1000
undervoltage stall
Integral coefficient This parameter is used to set the integral

of voltage coefficient of the bus voltage regulator during
P11.18 40 ○
regulator during undervoltage stall.
undervoltage stall Setting range: 0–1000
- 287 -
Function Default
code value

coefficient of coefficient of the active current regulator during
P11.19 current regulator undervoltage stall. 25 ○
undervoltage stall

of current coefficient of the active current regulator during
P11.20 150 ○
regulator during undervoltage stall.
undervoltage stall Setting range: 0–2000

coefficient of coefficient of the bus voltage regulator during
P11.21 voltage regulator overvoltage stall. 60 ○
overvoltage stall

of voltage coefficient of the bus voltage regulator during
P11.22 10 ○
regulator during overvoltage stall.
overvoltage stall Setting range: 0–1000

coefficient of coefficient of the active current regulator during
P11.23 current regulator overvoltage stall. 60 ○
overvoltage stall

of current coefficient of the active current regulator during
P11.24 250 ○
regulator during overvoltage stall.
overvoltage stall Setting range: 0–2000
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Enable VFD
P11.25 0
overload integral When this parameter is set to 0, the overload
timing value is reset to zero after the VFD is
stopped. In this case, the determination of VFD
- 288 -
Function Default
code value
overload takes more time, and therefore the

effective protection over the VFD is weakened.
When this parameter is set to 1, the overload

timing value is not reset, and the overload timing
value is accumulative. In this case, the
determination of VFD overload takes less time,
and therefore the protection over the VFD can be
performed more quickly.
The VFD overload curve is similar to the following:

Overload time
60min
30min
10min
5min
60s
45s
30s
15s VFD rated
6s current %
3s
1s 114% 123% 132% 141% 150% 159% 168% 177% 186% 195% 204%
Overload start 1 Overload end 1 Overload start 2
Start/stop command Start Start
Overload counting
When P11.25=0 P17.48
Time t
Overload counting
When P11.25=1
P17.48
Time t
0–1
0: Disable special functions
Time t
1: Enable special functions
Special functions include P11.03 Overvoltage stall
Enable special
P11.26 protection, P11.05 Current-limit selection, P01.00 0 ◎
functions
Running mode of start, and P00.13 Running
direction.
When the value is set to 0, special function codes
are restored to the factory settings and are not
- 289 -
Function Default
code value
displayed, and therefore cannot be modified.

When the value is set to 1, special function codes
can be modified and used normally.
Note: Use this function only in special cases.
0x00–0x11 0x00 ◎
Vibration control Ones place:
P11.27 method for VF 0: Method 1
control 1: Method 2
Function Default
code value
Rated power of
Model
depended
motor 2
Rated frequency
motor 2
Rated speed of
Model
P12.03 asynchronous 1–36000rpm ◎
depended
motor 2
Rated voltage of
Model
depended
motor 2
Rated current of
Model
depended
motor 2
P12.06 Stator resistance 0.001–65.535Ω Model ○
- 290 -
Function Default
code value
of asynchronous depended
motor 2
Rotor resistance
Model
depended
motor 2
Leakage
inductance of Model
P12.08 0.1–6553.5mH ○
motor 2
Mutual inductance
Model
P12.09 of asynchronous 0.1–6553.5mH ○
depended
motor 2
No-load current of
Model
depended
motor 2
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient 1 of
P12.11 0.0–100.0% 80% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 2
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient 2 of
P12.12 0.0–100.0% 68% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 2
Magnetic
saturation
P12.13 coefficient 3 of 0.0–100.0% 57% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
- 291 -
Function Default
code value
motor 2
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient 4 of
P12.14 0.0–100.0% 40% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 2
Rated power of
Model
P12.15 synchronous 0.1–3000.0kW ◎
depended
motor 2
Rated frequency
motor 2
Number of pole
pairs of
P12.17 1–128 2 ◎
synchronous
motor 2
Rated voltage of
Model
depended
motor 2
Rated voltage of
Model
depended
motor 2
Stator resistance
Model
depended
motor 2
Direct-axis
inductance of Model
P12.21 0.01–655.35mH ○
motor 2
Quadrature-axis
P12.22 0.01–655.35mH Model ○
inductance of
- 292 -
Function Default
code value
motor 2
Counter-emf
constant of
P12.23 0–10000V 300 ○
synchronous
motor 2
P12.24 Reserved 0–0xFFFF 0x0000 ●
P12.25 Reserved 0%–50% (of the rated current of the motor) 10% ●
0: No protection
Overload
1: Common motor (with low-speed compensation)
P12.26 protection of 2 ◎
motor 2 2: Frequency-variable motor (without low-speed
compensation)
Motor overload multiples M = Iout/(In×K)
In is rated motor current, lout is VFD output

current, K is motor overload protection coefficient.
The smaller the K, the larger the value of M, the

easier the protection.
if M is 116%, protection will be applied when motor

overloads for 1h; if M is 200%, protection will be
Overload
applied when motor overloads for 60s; if M is no
protection
P12.27 less than 400%, protection will be applied 100.0% ○
coefficient of
immediately.
motor 2
Time t
1h
1min
Motor overload multiples
116 % 200 %
Power display
P12.28 0.00–3.00 1.00 ○
calibration
- 293 -
Function Default
code value
coefficient of
motor 2
0: Display based on the motor type; under this

mode, only parameters related to current motor
Parameter display
P12.29 type will be displayed. 0 ○
of motor 2
1: Display all; under this mode, all the parameters
will be displayed.
System inertia of
P12.30 0–30.000kgm2 0.000 ○
motor 2
7.2.14 P13 Control parameters of synchronous motor
Function Default
code value
This parameter is used to set the reduction rate of

Reduction rate of the input reactive current. When the active current
the injection of the synchronous motor increases to some
P13.00 current of extent, the input reactive current can be reduced 80.0% ○
synchronous to improve the power factor of the motor.
motor Setting range: 0.0%–100.0% (of the rated current
of the motor)
0: No detection
Initial pole
P13.01 1: High-frequency current injection 0 ◎
detection mode
2: Pulse superposition
Pull-in current is the pole position orientation

current; pull-in current 1 is valid within the lower
limit of pull-in current switch-over frequency
P13.02 Pull-in current 1 threshold. If you need to increase the starting 20.0% ○
torque, increase the value of this function code
properly.
Setting range: 0.0%–100.0% (rated motor current)
- 294 -
Function Default
code value
Pull-in current is the pole position orientation

current; pull-in current 2 is valid within the upper
limit of pull-in current switch-over frequency
P13.03 Pull-in current 2 10.0% ○
threshold, and you do not need to change pull-in
current 2 under common situations.
Setting range: 0.0%–100.0% (rated motor current)
Switch-over
P13.04 frequency of input 0.00Hz–P00.03 (Max. output frequency) 10.00Hz ○
current
High-frequency
superposition
P13.05 200Hz–1000Hz 500Hz ◎
frequency
(reserved)
This parameter is used to set the pulse current

threshold when the initial magnetic pole position is
detected in the pulse mode. The value is a
Pulse current
P13.06 percentage in relative to the rated current of the 100.0% ◎
setting
motor.
Setting range: 0.0–300.0% (of the rated voltage of

the motor)
Reserved
P13.07 0.0–400.0 0.0 ○
variables
Control parameter
P13.08 0–0xFFFF 0 ○
1
This parameter is used to set the frequency

threshold for enabling the counter-electromotive
force phase-locked loop in SVC 0. When the
Control parameter running frequency is lower than the value of this
P13.09 2.00 ○
2 parameter, the phase-locked loop is disabled; and
when the running frequency is higher than that, the
phase-locked loop is enabled.
Setting range: 0–655.35
- 295 -
Function Default
code value
Reserved
P13.10 0.0–359.9 0.0 ○
variables
This parameter is used to adjust the

responsiveness of anti-maladjustment function. If
Maladjustment the load inertia is large, increase the value of this
P13.11 0.5s ○
detection time parameter properly, however, the responsiveness
may slow down accordingly.
High-frequency
This parameter is valid when the motor speed
compensation
exceeds the rated speed. If motor oscillation
P13.12 coefficient of 0.0 ○
occurred, adjust this parameter properly.
synchronous
motor
P13.13 High-frequency 0–300.0% 20.0% ◎

injection current
7.2.15 P14 Serial communication function
Function Default
code value
When the master is writing frames, and the slave

communication address is set to 0, it is the
broadcast communication address, and all the
Local slaves on the MODBUS bus will accept this frame,
P14.00 communication but the slave never responds. 1 ○
address Local communication address is unique in the
communication network, which is the basis for
point-to-point communication between the upper
computer and the VFD.
Note: The slave address cannot be set to 0.
P14.01 Communication This parameter is used to set the data 4 ○
- 296 -
Function Default
code value
baud rate setup transmission speed between upper computer and

the VFD.
0: 1200BPS
1: 2400BPS
2: 4800BPS
3: 9600BPS
4: 19200BPS
5: 38400BPS
6: 57600BPS
7: 115200BPS
Note: Baud rate of the upper computer must be

the Same as the VFD; otherwise, communication
cannot be performed. The larger the baud rate, the
faster the communication speed.
The data format of upper computer must be the

Same as the VFD; otherwise, communication
cannot be performed.
0: No parity check (N, 8, 1) for RTU

Data bit check 1: Even parity (E, 8, 1) for RTU
P14.02 1 ○
setup
2: Odd parity (O, 8, 1) for RTU
3: No parity check (N, 8, 2) for RTU
4: Even parity (E, 8, 2) for RTU
5: Odd parity (O, 8, 2) for RTU
0–200ms
It refers to the time interval from when the data is

received by the VFD to the moment when the data
Communication is sent to the upper computer. If the response
P14.03 5 ○
response delay delay is less than the system processing time, the
response delay will be subject to system

processing time; if the response delay is longer
than the system processing time, data will be sent
- 297 -
Function Default
code value
to the upper computer at a delay after data

process is done by system.
0.0 (invalid) –60.0s
This parameter will be invalid if it is set to 0.0;
When it is set to a non-zero value, if the time

interval between current communication and the
next communication exceeds the communication
Communication
P14.04 timeout period, the system will report "485 0.0s ○
timeout period
communication fault" (CE).
Under common situations, it is set to 0.0. In

systems which have continuous communication,
you can monitor the communication condition by
setting this parameter.
0: Alarm and coast to stop
1: Do not alarm and continue running
Transmission 2: Do not alarm and stop as per the stop mode

P14.05 0 ○
error processing (under communication control mode only)
3: Do not alarm and stop as per the stop mode
(under all control modes)
0x00–0x11
Ones:
0: Write operation has response

Communication
P14.06 1: Write operation has no response 0x00 ○
processing action
Tens:
0: Communication password protection is invalid
1: Communication password protection is valid
- 298 -
7.2.16 P15 Functions of communication extension card 1
Function Default
code value
P15.00–
See GD350 communication extension card operation manual for details.
P15.27
P15.28 Master/slave CAN 0–127 1 ◎

communication
address
P15.29 Master/slave CAN 0: 50Kbps 2 ◎

communication 1: 100 Kbps
baud rate
2: 125Kbps
selection
3: 250Kbps
4: 500Kbps
5: 1M bps
P15.30 Master/slave CAN 0.0 (invalid)–300.0s 0.0s ○

communication
timeout period
P15.31–
P15.69
7.2.17 P16 Functions of communication extension card 2
Function Default
code value
P16.00–
P16.23
Identification time 0.0–600.0s

P16.24 for the extension If it is set to 0.0, identification fault will not be 0.0s 0.0
card in card slot 1 detected
Identification time 0.0–600.0s

P16.25 0.0s 0.0
for the extension If it is set to 0.0, offline fault will not be detected
- 299 -
Function Default
code value
card in card slot 2
Identification time
0.0–600.0s
P16.26 for the extension 0.0s /
If it is set to 0.0, offline fault will not be detected
card in card slot 3
Communication
timeout period of 0.0–600.0s
P16.27 0.0s /
extension card in If it is set to 0.0, offline fault will not be detected
card slot 1
Communication
P16.28 0.0s /
card slot 2
Communication
P16.29 0.0s /
card slot 3
P16.30–
P16.69
P17 State-check functions
Function Default
code value
Displays current set frequency of the VFD.

P17.00 Set frequency 50.00Hz ●
Range: 0.00Hz–P00.03
Displays current output frequency of the VFD.

P17.01 Output frequency 0.00Hz ●
Displays current ramps reference frequency of the

Ramps reference
P17.02 VFD. 0.00Hz ●
frequency
- 300 -
Function Default
code value
Displays current output voltage of the VFD.

P17.03 Output voltage 0V ●
Range: 0–1200V
Displays the valid value of current output current of

P17.04 Output current the VFD. 0.0A ●
Range: 0.0–5000.0A
Displays current motor speed.

P17.05 Motor speed 0 RPM ●
Range: 0–65535RPM
Displays current torque current of the VFD.

P17.06 Torque current 0.0A ●
Range: -3000.0–3000.0A
Displays current exciting current of the VFD.

P17.07 Exciting current 0.0A ●
Range: -3000.0–3000.0A
Displays current motor power; 100% relative to

rated motor power, positive value is motoring
P17.08 Motor power state, negative value is generating state. 0.0% ●
Range: -300.0–300.0% (relative to rated motor
power)
Displays current output torque of the VFD; 100%

relative to rated motor torque, during forward
running, positive value is motoring state, negative
Motor output
P17.09 value is generating state, during reverse running, 0.0% ●
torque
positive value is generating state, negative value is
motoring state.
Range: -250.0–250.0%
The estimated motor rotor frequency under

Estimated motor
P17.10 open-loop vector condition. 0.00Hz ●
frequency
Range: 0.00– P00.03
Displays current DC bus voltage of the VFD.

P17.11 DC bus voltage 0V ●
Range: 0.0–2000.0V
- 301 -
Function Default
code value
Displays current digital input terminal state of the

VFD.
Digital input
P17.12 0x00–0x3F 0 ●
terminal state
Corresponds to HDIB, HDIA, S4, S3, S2 and S1
respectively
Displays current digital output terminal state of the

VFD.
Digital output
P17.13 0x0–0xF 0 ●
terminal state
Corresponds to RO2, RO1, HDO and Y1
respectively
Displays the regulating variable by UP/DOWN

Digital adjustment
P17.14 terminals of the VFD. 0.00Hz ●
variable
Relative to percentage of the rated torque of

Torque reference
P17.15 current motor, display torque reference. 0.0% ●
value
Range: -300.0%–300.0% (rated motor current)
P17.16 Linear speed 0–65535 0 ●
Reserved
P17.17 0–65535 0 ●
variables
P17.18 Count value 0–65535 0 ●
Displays input signal of AI 1

P17.19 AI1 input voltage 0.00V ●
Range: 0.00–10.00V
Displays input signal of AI2

P17.20 AI2 input voltage 0.00V ●
Range: -10.00V–10.00V
HDIA input Displays input frequency of HDIA 0.000

P17.21 ●
frequency Range: 0.000–50.000kHz kHz
- 302 -
Function Default
code value
HDIB input Displays input frequency of HDIB 0.000

P17.22 ●
frequency Range: 0.000–50.000kHz kHz
PID reference Displays PID reference value

P17.23 0.0% ●
value Range: -100.0–100.0%
PID feedback Displays PID feedback value

P17.24 0.0% ●
value Range: -100.0–100.0%
Motor power Displays the power factor of current motor.

P17.25 1.00 ●
factor Range: -1.00–1.00
Current running Displays current running time of the VFD.

P17.26 0m ●
time Range: 0–65535min
Simple PLC and

Displays simple PLC and current step number of
current step
P17.27 multi-step speed 0 ●
number of
Range: 0–15
multi-step speed
Displays the speed loop ASR controller output

Motor ASR value under vector control mode, relative to the
P17.28 0.0% ●
controller output percentage of rated torque of the motor.
Range: -300.0%–300.0% (rated motor current)
Pole angle of
Displays initial identification angle of synchronous
open-loop
P17.29 motor 0.0 ●
synchronous
Range: 0.0–360.0
motor
Phase
Displays phase compensation of synchronous
compensation of
P17.30 motor 0.0 ●
synchronous
Range: -180.0–180.0
motor
High-frequency
P17.31 superposition 0.0%–200.0% (rated motor current) 0.0 ●
current of
- 303 -
Function Default
code value
synchronous
motor
P17.32 Motor flux linkage 0.0%–200.0% 0.0% ●
Display the exciting current reference value under

Exciting current
P17.33 vector control mode 0.0A ●
reference
Range: -3000.0–3000.0A
Display torque current reference value under

Torque current
P17.34 vector control mode 0.0A ●
reference
Range: -3000.0–3000.0A
Display the valid value of incoming current on AC

AC incoming
P17.35 side 0.0A ●
current
Range: 0.0–5000.0A
Display output torque value, during forward

running, positive value is motoring state, negative
value is generating state; during reverse running,
P17.36 Output torque 0.0Nm ●
positive value is generating state, negative value is
motoring state.
Range: -3000.0Nm–3000.0Nm
Motor overload
P17.37 0–65535 0 ●
count value
Process PID
P17.38 -100.0%–100.0% 0.00% ●
output
Parameter
P17.39 download wrong 0.00–99.00 0.00 ●
function code
Ones: Control mode
Motor control 0: Vector 0

P17.40 0x2 ●
mode 1: Vector 1
2: SVPWM control
- 304 -
Function Default
code value
3: VC
Tens: Control state
0: Speed control
1: Torque control
2: Position control
Hundreds: Motor number
0: Motor 1
1: Motor 2
Upper limit of the

P17.41 torque when 0.0%–300.0% (rated motor current) 180.0% ●
motoring
Upper limit of
P17.42 0.0%–300.0% (rated motor current) 180.0% ●
brake torque
Upper limit
frequency of
P17.43 0.00–P00.03 50.00Hz ●
forward running of
torque control
Upper limit
frequency of
P17.44 0.00–P00.03 50.00Hz ●
reverse running of
torque control
Inertia
P17.45 compensation -100.0%–100.0% 0.0% ●
torque
Friction
P17.46 compensation -100.0%–100.0% 0.0% ●
torque
P17.47 Motor pole pairs 0–65535 0 ●
VFD overload
P17.48 0–65535 0 ●
count value
- 305 -
Function Default
code value
Frequency set by
P17.49 0.00–P00.03 0.00Hz ●
A source
Frequency set by
P17.50 0.00–P00.03 0.00Hz ●
B source
PID proportional
P17.51 -100.0%–100.0% 0.00% ●
output
PID integral
P17.52 -100.0%–100.0% 0.00% ●
output
PID differential
P17.53 -100.0%–100.0% 0.00% ●
output
Present
P17.54 0.00–100.00 0.00% ●
proportional gain
Present integral
P17.55 0.00–10.00s 0.00% ●
time
Present
P17.56 0.00–10.00s 0.00% ●
differential time
7.2.18 P18 Closed-loop control state check
Function Default
code value
The actual-measured encoder frequency; the

Actual frequency value of forward running is positive; the value of
P18.00 0.0Hz ●
of encoder reverse running is negative.
Range: -999.9–3276.7Hz
Encoder position Encoder count value, quadruple frequency,

P18.01 0 ●
count value Range: 0–65535
Encoder Z pulse Corresponding count value of encoder Z pulse.

P18.02 0 ●
count value Range: 0–65535
P18.03 High bit of position High bit of position reference value, zero out after 0 ●
- 306 -
Function Default
code value
reference value stop.
Range: 0–30000
Low bit of position reference value, zero out after

Low bit of position
P18.04 stop. 0 ●
reference value
Range: 0–65535
High bit of position feedback value, zero out after

High bit of position
P18.05 stop. 0 ●
feedback value
Range: 0–30000
Low bit of position feedback value, zero out after

Low bit of position
P18.06 stop. 0 ●
feedback value
Range: 0–65535
Deviation between current reference position and

P18.07 Position deviation actual running position. 0 ●
Range: -32768–32767
Position of Position of reference point of Z pulse when the

P18.08 position reference spindle stops accurately. 0 ●
point Range: 0–65535
Current position setup when the spindle stops

Current position
P18.09 accurately. 0.00 ●
setup of spindle
Range: 0–359.99
Current position
Current position when spindle stops accurately.
P18.10 when spindle 0 ●
Range: 0–65535
stops accurately
Z pulse direction display. When the spindle stops

accurately, there may be a couple of pulses’ error
Encoder Z pulse between the position of forward and reverse
P18.11 0 ●
direction orientation, which can be eliminated by adjusting Z
pulse direction of P20.02 or exchanging phase AB
of encoder.
- 307 -
Function Default
code value
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Encoder Z pulse Reserved.

P18.12 0.00 ●
angle Range: 0.00–359.99
Encoder Z pulse Reserved.

P18.13 0 ●
error times Range: 0–65535
High bit of
P18.14 encoder pulse 0–65535 0 ●
count value
Low bit of encoder

P18.15 0–65535 0 ●
pulse count value
Main control -3276.8–3276.7Hz

P18.16 board speed 0.0Hz ●
measuring value
Pulse command (A2, B2 terminal) is converted to

Pulse command the set frequency, and it is valid under pulse
P18.17 0.00Hz ●
frequency position mode and pulse speed mode.
Range: 0–655.35Hz
Pulse command (A2, B2 terminal) is converted to

Pulse command the set frequency, and it is valid under pulse
P18.18 0.00Hz ●
feedforward position mode and pulse speed mode.
Range: 0–655.35Hz
The output frequency of the position regulator

Position regulator
P18.19 during position control. 0 ●
output
Range: 0–65535
Count value of Count value of resolver.

P18.20 0 ●
resolver Range: 0–65535
P18.21 Resolver angle The pole position angle read according to the 0.00 ●
- 308 -
Function Default
code value
resolver-type encoder.
Range: 0.00–359.99
Pole angle of
closed-loop Current pole position.
P18.22 0.00 ●
synchronous Range: 0.00–359.99
motor
State control word

P18.23 0–65535 0 ●
2
High bit of count

P18.24 value of pulse 0–65535 0 ●
reference
Low bit of count

P18.25 value of pulse 0–65535 0 ●
reference
PG card speed -3276.8–3276.7Hz

P18.26 0.0Hz ●
measuring value
Encoder UVW
P18.27 0–7 0 ●
sector
Encoder PPR
P18.28 (pulse-per- 0–65535 0 ●
revolution) display
Angle
compensation
P18.29 value of -180.0–180.0 0.00 ●
synchronous
motor
Reserved
P18.30 0–65535 0 ●
variables
Pulse reference Z
P18.31 0–65535 0 ●
pulse value
- 309 -
Function Default
code value
P18.32 Main control -3276.8–3276.7Hz 0.0Hz ●

board measured
speed with pulse
reference
P18.33 PG card -3276.8–3276.7Hz 0.0Hz ●

measured speed
with pulse
reference
P18.34 Present encoder 0–63 0 ●

filter width
P18.35 Reserved 0–65535 0 ●
7.2.19 P19 Extension card state check
Function Default
code value
Type of extension 0–65535

P19.00 0 ●
card at slot 1 0: No card
Type of extension 1: PLC programmable card

P19.01 0 ●
card at slot 2 2: I/O card 1
3: Incremental PG card
4: Incremental PG card with UVW
5: Ethernet communication card
6: DP communication card
Type of extension 7: Bluetooth card

P19.02 0 ●
card at slot 3 8: Resolver PG card
9: CANopen communication card
10: WIFI card
11: Profinet communication card
12: Sine/Cosine PG card without CD signal
- 310 -
Function Default
code value
13: Sine/Cosine PG card with CD signal
14: Absolute encoder PG card
15: CAN master/slave communication card
16: MODBUS communication card
17: EtherCat communication card
18: BacNet communication card
19: DeviceNet communication card
20: I/O card 2 for hoisting
Software version of
P19.03 the extension card 0.00–655.35 0.00 ●
in card slot 1
Software version of
in card slot 2
Software version of
in card slot 3
Input state of
P19.06 extension I/O card 0–0xFFFF 0 ●
terminals
Output state of
P19.07 extension I/O card 0–0xFFFF 0 ●
terminals
AI3 input voltage

P19.09 of extension I/O 0.00–10.00V 0.00V ●
card
0–13
0: No alarm
Alarm display
P19.10 1: Input phase loss alarm (A-SPI) 0 ●
value
2: Upward position limit alarm (A-LU)
3: Downward position limit alarm (A-Ld)
- 311 -
Function Default
code value
4: Low voltage protection alarm (A-LvP)

5: Overload protection alarm (A-OL)
6: Brake failure alarm (A-bS)
7: Brake feedback alarm (A-FA)
8: Loose rope protection alarm (A-SL)
9: PT100 overtemperature alarm (A-Ot1)
10: PT1000 overtemperature alarm (A-Ot2)
11: PT100 disconnection alarm (A-Pt1)
12: PT1000 disconnection alarm (A-Pt2)
13: PTC overtemperature alarm (A-Ptc)
P19.11 Torque for load 0.0%–150.0% (of the motor rated torque) 0.0% ●
detection
P19.12 Brake detection 0.0–1000.0h 0.0 ●

reminding interval
P19.13 Present step of 0–6 0 ●

graded multi-step
speed
P19.14 Zero-point 0–2 0 ●

position status 0: VFD in running, with zero-point position input
1: VFD stopped, with zero-point position signal
input, zero-point position delay reached
(zero-point position valid)
2: In the condition of status 1, running command

valid when running command given and zero-point
position left (no zero-point position signal input)
P19.15 Measured height 0.00–655.35m 0.00 ●
(Hook lowering distance using the upward limit

P19.16 MSB of measured 0–65535 0 ●

height
P19.17 LSB of measured 0–65535 0 ●

height
- 312 -
Function Default
code value
P19.18 PT100 present -50.0–150.0°C 0.0°C ●

temperature
P19.19 PT100 present 0–4096 0 ●

digital
P19.20 PT1000 present -50.0–150.0°C 0.0°C ●

temperature
P19.21 PT1000 present 0–4096 0 ●

digital
P19.22 Brake slip speed 0.00Hz–10.00Hz 0.00Hz ●
P19.23 Brake slip pulse 0–65535 0 ●

value
P19.24 Light load speed 0–3 0 ●

boost status 0: Normal
1: FWD light load speed boost
2: RVS light load speed boost
3: Constant-power speed boost
P19.25 Status of derating 0–1 0 ●

frequency with 0: Normal
voltage 1: Derating frequency with voltage
P19.26 Torque value for 0.0%–150.0% (of the motor rated torque) 0.0% ●
stable rope
loosening
P19.27 Present load 0.0–100.0%/s 0.0% ●

torque change
ratio of stable
lifting
P19.28 Stable lifting 0–1 0 ●

status 0: Normal
1: In stable state
P19.29 Current imbalance 0.0–6553.5 0.0 ●
- 313 -
Function Default
code value
multiple
7.2.20 P20 Encoder of motor 1
Function Default
code value
0: Incremental encoder
Encoder type 1: Resolver-type encoder

P20.00 0 ●
display 2: Sin/Cos encoder
3: Endat absolute encoder
Number of pulses generated when the encoder

Encoder pulse
P20.01 revolves for one circle. 1024 ◎
number
Ones: AB direction
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Tens: Z pulse direction (reserved)
P20.02 Encoder direction 0: Forward 0x000 ◎
1: Reverse
Hundreds: CD/UVW pole signal direction
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Detection time of The detection time of encoder offline fault

P20.03 encoder offline (ENC1O). 1.0s ○
fault Setting range: 0.0–10.0s
Detection time of
Detection time of encoder reversal fault(ENC1D).
P20.04 encoder reversal 0.8s ○
fault
P20.05 Filter times of Setting range: 0x00–0x99 0x33 ○
- 314 -
Function Default
code value
encoder detection Ones: Low-speed filter time, corresponds to

2^(0–9)×125us.
Tens: High-speed filter times, corresponds

to2^(0–9)×125us.
Speed ratio You need to set this parameter when the encoder
between encoder is not installed on the motor shaft and the drive
P20.06 1.000 ○
mounting shaft ratio is not 1.
and motor Setting range: 0.001–65.535
Bit0: Enable Z pulse calibration
Bit1: Enable encoder angle calibration
Bit2: Enable SVC speed measurement
Bit3: Select resolver speed measurement mode
Bit4: Z pulse capture mode
Bit5: Do not detect encoder initial angle in v/f

Control
control
parameters of
P20.07 Bit6: Enable CD signal calibration 0x0003 ○
synchronous
motor Bit7: Disable sin/cos sub-division speed
measurement
Bit8: Do not detect encoder fault during autotuning
Bit9: Enable Z pulse detection optimization
Bit10: Enable initial Z pulse calibration

optimization
Bit12: Clear Z pulse arrival signal after stop
0x00–0x11
Ones: Z pulse
Enable Z pulse 0: Do not detect

P20.08 0x10 ○
offline detection 1: Enable
Tens: UVW pulse (for synchronous motor)
0: Do not detect
- 315 -
Function Default
code value
1: Enable
Relative electric angle of encoder Z pulse and

Initial angle of Z
P20.09 motor pole position. 0.00 ○
pulse
Relative electric angle of encoder position and

Initial angle of the
pole
0–3
Autotuning of 1: Rotary autotuning (DC brake)

P20.11 initial angle of 2: Static autotuning (suitable for resolver-type 0 ◎
pole encoder, sin/cos with CD signal feedback)
3: Rotary autotuning (initial angle identification)
Speed 0: No optimization
measurement
P20.12 1: Optimization mode 1 1 ◎
optimization
selection 2: Optimization mode 2
CD signal zero
P20.13 0–65535 0 ○
offset gain
Ones: Incremental encoder
0: without UVW
Encoder type 1: with UVW

P20.14 0x00 ◎
selection Tens: Sin/Cos encoder
0: without CD signal
1: with CD signal
0: PG card speed measuring/HDI height

measuring
Speed measuring
P20.15 1: Local speed measuring, implemented through 0 ◎
mode
HDIA and HDIB; supporting only incremental 24V
encoders
- 316 -
Function Default
code value
Note: HDI height measuring is implemented

through the HDIA and HDIB and supports only
incremental 24V encoders.
0–255
Frequency
P20.16 When this parameter is set to 0 or 1, frequency 0 ○
division coefficient
division of 1:1 is implemented.
0x0000–0xffff
Bit0: Whether to enable encoder input filter
0: No filter
1: Filter
Bit1: Encoder signal filter mode (set Bit0 or Bit2 to

1)
0: Self-adaptive filter
1: Use P20.18 filter parameters
Bit2: Whether to enable encoder

frequency-division output filter
0: No filter
Pulse filer
P20.17 1: Filter 0x0033 ○
processing
Bit3: Reserved
Bit4: Whether to enable pulse reference filter
0: No filter
1: Filter
Bit5: Pulse reference filter mode (valid when Bit4

is set to 1)
Bit6: Frequency-divided output source setting
0: Encoder signals
1: Pulse reference signals
- 317 -
Function Default
code value
Bits7–15: Reserved
0–63
Encoder pulse
P20.18 The filtering time is P20.18×0.25 μs. The value 0 2 ○
filter width
or 1 indicates 0.25 μs.
0–63
Pulse reference
filter width
Pulse number of
P20.20 0–65535 1024 ◎
pulse reference
Enable angle
compensation of
P20.21 0–1 0 ○
synchronous
motor
Switch-over
frequency
0–630.00Hz
threshold of
P20.22 Note: This parameter is valid only when P20.12 is 1.00Hz ○
speed
set to 0.
measurement
mode
P20.23 Angle -200.0–200.0 100.0% ○

compensation
coefficient
P20.24 Motor pole pair 1–128 2 ◎

number in initial
pole angle
autotuning
- 318 -
7.2.21 P21 Position control
Function Default
code value
Ones: Control mode selection
0: Speed control
1: Position control
Tens: Position command source
0: Pulse string
1: Digital position
2: Positioning of photoelectric switch during stop
Hundreds: Position feedback source (reserved,

fixed to channel P)
0: PG1
1: PG2
Thousands: servo mode

P21.00 Positioning mode Bit0: Position deviation mode 0x0000 ○
0: No deviation
1: With deviation
Bit1: Whether to enable servo
0: Disable (The servo can be enabled by

terminals.)
1: Enable
Bit2–Bit7: (reserved)
Note: In the pulse string or spindle positioning

mode, the VFD enters the servo operation mode
when there is a valid servo enabling signal. If there
is no servo enabling signal, the VFD enter the
servo operation mode only after it receives a
forward running or reverse running command.
Ones: Pulse mode

Pulse command
P21.01 0: A/B quadrature pulse; A precedes B 0x0000 ◎
mode
1: A: PULSE; B: SIGN
- 319 -
Function Default
code value
If channel B is of low electric level, the edge

counts up; if channel B is of high electric level, the
edge counts down.
2: A: Positive pulse
Channel A is positive pulse; channel B needs no

wiring
3: A/B dual-channel pulse; channel A pulse edge

counts up, channel B pulse edge counts down
Tens: Pulse direction
Bit0: Set pulse direction
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Bit1: Set pulse direction by running direction
0: Disable, and BIT0 is valid;
1: Enable
Hundreds: Pulse/direction frequency-doubling

selection (reserved)
0: No frequency-doubling
1: Frequency-doubling
Thousands: Pulse control selection
Bit0: Pulse filter selection
0: Inertia filter
1: Average moving filter
Bit1: Overspeed control
0: No control
1: Control
P21.02 APR gain 1 The two automatic position regulator (APR) gains 20.0 ○
are switched based on the switching mode set in
P21.04. When the spindle orientation function is
P21.03 APR gain 2 30.0 ○
used, the gains are switched automatically,
regardless of the setting of P21.04. P21.03 is used
- 320 -
Function Default
code value
for dynamic running, and P21.02 is used for

maintaining the locked state.
This parameter is used to set the APR gain

switching mode. To use torque command-based
switching, you need to set P21.05; and to use
speed command-based switching, you need to set
Switching mode of P21.06.
P21.04 0 ○
position loop gain 0: No switching
2: Torque command
3: Speed command
3–5: Reserved
Torque command
level during
P21.05 0.0–100.0% (rated motor torque) 10.0% ○
position gain
switch-over
Speed command
level during
P21.06 0.0–100.0% (rated motor speed) 10.0% ○
position gain
switch-over
Smooth filter The smooth filter coefficient during position gain

P21.07 coefficient during switch-over. 5 ○
gain switch-over Setting range: 0–15
The output limit of position regulator, if the limit

value is 0, position regulator will be invalid, and no
Output limit of position control can be performed, however, speed
P21.08 20.0% ○
position controller control is available.
Setting range: 0.0–100.0% (Max. output frequency
P00.03)
Completion range When the position deviation is less than P21.09,

P21.09 10 ○
of positioning and the duration is larger than P21.10, positioning
- 321 -
Function Default
code value
completion signal will be outputted.
Detection time for

P21.10 positioning 0.0–1000.0ms 10.0ms ○
completion
Electronic gear ratio, used to adjust the

Numerator of
corresponding relation between position command
P21.11 position command 1000 ○
and actual running displacement.
ratio
Denominator of
P21.12 position command Setting range: 1–65535 1000 ○
ratio
Position 0.00–120.00%
P21.13 100.00 ○
feedforward gain For pulse string reference only (position control)
Position
0.0–3200.0ms
P21.14 feedforward filter 3.0ms ○
For pulse string reference only (position control)
time constant
Position The position feedforward filter time constant during

P21.15 command filter pulse string positioning. 0.0ms ◎
time constant 0.0–3200.0ms
Bit0: Positioning mode selection
0: Relative position
1: Absolute position (home) (reserved)
Bit1: Positioning cycle selection

Digital positioning
P21.16 0: Cyclic positioning by terminals 0 ○
mode
1: Automatic cyclic positioning
Bit2: Cycle mode
0: Continuous
1: Repetitive (supported by automatic cyclic
- 322 -
Function Default
code value
positioning only)
Bit3: P21.17 digital setting mode
0: Incremental
1: Position type (do not support continuous mode)
Bit4: Home searching mode
0: Search for the home just once
1: Search for the home during each run
Bit5: Home calibration mode
0: Calibrate in real time
1: Single calibration
Bit6: Positioning completion signal selection
0: Valid during the time set by P21.25 (Hold time of

positioning completion signal)
1: Always valid
Bit7: Initial positioning selection (for cyclic

positioning by terminals)
0: Invalid (do not rotate)
1: Valid
Bit8: Positioning enable signal selection (for cyclic

positioning by terminals only; positioning function
is always enabled for automatic cyclic positioning)
0: Pulse signal
1: Level signal
Bit9: Position source
0: P21.17 setting
1: PROFIBUS/CANopen setting
Bit10: indicates whether to save the encoder pulse

counting value at power outage
0: Not save
1: Save
- 323 -
Function Default
code value
Bit11: Reserved
Bit12: Positioning curve selection (reserved)
0: Straight line
1: S curve
Set digital positioning position;

Position digital
P21.17 Actual position=P21.17×P21.11/P21.12 0 ○
reference
0–65535
0: Set by P21.19
1: Set by AI1
Positioning speed 2: Set by AI2

P21.18 0 ○
setup selection 3: Set by AI3
4: Set by high speed pulse HDIA
5: Set by high speed pulse HDIB
Positioning speed
P21.19 0–100.0% max. frequency 20.0% ○
digits
Acceleration time Set the acceleration/deceleration time of

P21.20 3.00s ○
of positioning positioning process.
Acceleration time of positioning means the time

needed for the VFD to accelerate from 0Hz to
Max. output frequency (P00.03).
Deceleration time of positioning means the time

Deceleration time
P21.21 needed for the VFD to decelerate from Max. 3.00s ○
of positioning
output frequency (P00.03) to 0hz.
Set the hold time of waiting when target

Hold time of
P21.22 positioning position is reached. 0.100s ○
positioning arrival
- 324 -
Function Default
code value
Home search
P21.23 0.00–50.00Hz 2.00Hz ○
speed
Home position
P21.24 0–65535 0 ○
offset
The hold time of positioning completion signal, this

Hold time of
parameter is also valid for positioning completion
P21.25 positioning 0.200s ○
signal of spindle orientation.
completion signal
Pulse
P21.26 superposition 0–65535 0 ○
value
Pulse
P21.27 superposition 0–6553.5 8.0 ○
speed
Acceleration/dece
P21.28 leration time after 000.0–3000.0s 5.0s ○
disabling pulse
Speed
It is the filter time constant detected by pulse string
feedforward filter
when the speed reference source is set to pulse
P21.29 time constant 10.0ms ○
string (P0.06=12 or P0.07=12).
(pulse string
Setting range: 0–3200.0ms
speed mode)
Numerator of the
P21.30 1–65535 1000 ○
2nd command ratio
7.2.22 P22 Spindle positioning
Function Default
code value
Spindle Bit0: Enable spindle positioning

P22.00 0 ○
positioning mode 0: Disable
- 325 -
Function Default
code value
selection 1: Enable
Bit1: Select spindle positioning reference point
0: Z pulse input
1: S2/S3/S4 terminal input
Bit2: Search for reference point
0: Search the reference point only once
1: Search the reference point every time
Bit3: Enable reference point calibration
0: Disable
1: Enable
Bit4: Positioning mode selection 1
0: Set direction positioning
1: Near-by direction positioning
Bit5: Positioning mode selection 2
0: Forward positioning
1: Reverse positioning
Bit6: Zeroing command selection
0: Electric level mode
1: Pulse mode
Bit7: Reference point calibration mode
0: Calibrate at the first time
1: Calibrate in real time
Bit8: Action selection after zeroing signal

cancellation (electric level type)
0: Switch to speed mode
1: Position lock mode
Bit9: Positioning completion signal selection
0: Electric level signal
1: Pulse signal
- 326 -
Function Default
code value
Bit10: Z pulse signal source
0: Motor
1: Spindle
Bit11–15: Reserved
During spindle orientation, the speed of the

position point of orientation will be searched, and
Speed of spindle
P22.01 then it will switch over to position control 10.00Hz ○
orientation
orientation.
Deceleration time of spindle orientation.
Deceleration time Spindle orientation deceleration time means the

P22.02 of spindle time needed for the VFD to decelerate from Max. 3.0s ○
orientation output frequency (P00.03) to 0Hz.
You can select the zeroing positions of four

Spindle zeroing
P22.03 spindles by terminals (function code 46, 47). 0 ○
position 0
Spindle zeroing
P22.04 Setting range: 0–39999 0 ○
position 1
Spindle zeroing
P22.05 Setting range: 0–39999 0 ○
position 2
Spindle zeroing
P22.06 Setting range: 0–39999 0 ○
position 3
Spindle You can select seven spindle scale-division values

P22.07 scale-division by terminals (function code 48, 49 and 50). 15.00 ○
angle 1 Setting range: 0.00–359.99
Spindle
P22.08 scale-division Setting range: 0.00–359.99 30.00 ○
angle 2
- 327 -
Function Default
code value
Spindle
angle 3
Spindle
angle 4
Spindle
angle 5
Spindle
angle 6
Spindle
angle 7
This function code sets the reduction ratio of the

P22.14 Spindle drive ratio spindle and the mounting shaft of the encoder. 1.000 ○
P22.15 sets spindle zero-point offset, if the

Zero-point selected spindle zero point is P22.03, the final
P22.15 communication spindle zero point will be the sum of P22.03 and 0 ○
setup of spindle P22.15.
Reserved
P22.16 0–65535 0 ○
variables
Reserved
P22.17 0–65535 0 ○
variables
Ones: Whether to enable

Rigid tapping
P22.18 0: Disable 0x00 ◎
selection
1: Enable
- 328 -
Function Default
code value
Tens: Analog port selection
0: Invalid
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Analog filter time

P22.19 0.0ms–1000.0ms 1.0ms ○
of rigid tapping
Max. frequency of
P22.20 0.00–400.00Hz 50.00Hz ○
rigid tapping
Corresponding
frequency of
P22.21 0.00–10.00Hz 0.00Hz ○
analog zero drift
of rigid tapping
0–2
Pulse reference
0: Measured by the main control board
P22.22 speed measuring 0 ○
1: Measured by the PG card
method
2: Hybrid speed measuring
P22.23 Reserved 0–65535 0
Encoder counting
P22.24 0–65535 0 ○
clearing setting
7.2.23 P23 Vector control of motor 2
Function Default
code value
Speed loop
P23.00–P23.05 fit for vector control mode only.
P23.00 proportional gain 20.0 ○
Below switch-over frequency 1 (P23.02), the
1
speed loop PI parameters are P23.00 and P23.01.
Speed loop Above switch-over frequency 2 (P23.05), the
P23.01 0.200s ○
integral time 1 speed loop PI parameters are P23.03 and P23.04;
- 329 -
Function Default
code value
Switch over low in between them, the PI parameters are obtained

P23.02 5.00Hz ○
point frequency by linear variation between two groups of
parameters, as shown in the figure below.
Speed loop PI parameters
P23.03 proportional gain (P23.00,P23.01)

20.0 ○
2
Speed loop
P23.04 (P23.03,P23.04) 0.200s ○
integral time 2
P23.02 P23.05 Output frequency f
The speed loop dynamic response characteristics

of vector control can be adjusted by setting the
proportional coefficient and integral time of speed
regulator. Increase proportional gain or decrease
integral time can accelerate dynamic response of
speed loop, however, if the proportional gain is too
large or integral time is too small, system
oscillation and large overshoot may occur; if
proportional gain is too small, stable oscillation or
speed offset may occur.
Switch over high Speed loop PI parameter is closely related to the

P23.05 10.00Hz ○
point frequency system inertia, you should make adjustment
according to different load characteristics based
on the default PI parameter to fulfill different
needs.
Setting range of P23.05: P23.02–P00.03 (Max.

output frequency)
Speed loop output

P23.06 0–8 (corresponds to 0–2^8/10ms) 0 ○
filter
- 330 -
Function Default
code value
Slip compensation
coefficient of Slip compensation coefficient is used to adjust the
P23.07 100% ○
vector control slip frequency of vector control to improve system
(motoring) speed control precision. You can effectively
control the static error of speed by adjusting this
Slip compensation
parameter properly.
coefficient of
P23.08 100% ○
vector control Setting range: 50–200%
(generating)
Current loop Note:

P23.09 proportional 1. These two parameters are used to adjust PI 1000 ○
coefficient P parameters of current loop; it affects dynamic
response speed and control precision of the
system directly. The default value needs no
adjustment under common conditions;
Current loop 2. Fit for SVC mode 0 (P00.00=0) and VC mode

integral (P00.00=3);
P23.10 1000 ○
coefficient I 3. The value of this function code will be updated
automatically after parameter autotuning of
synchronous motor is done.
Speed loop
P23.11 0–10.00s 0.00s ○
differential gain
Proportional Under VC mode (P00.00=3), below current loop

coefficient of high-frequency switch-over threshold (P23.14),
P23.12 1000 ○
high-frequency current loop PI parameters are P23.09 and
current loop P23.10; above current loop high-frequency
switch-over threshold, current loop PI parameters
are P23.12 and P23.13.
P23.13 of high-frequency 1000 ○
current loop Setting range of P23.12: 0–65535

High-frequency
P23.14 Setting range of P23.14: 0.0–100.0% (relative to 100.0% ○
switch-over
max. frequency)
threshold of
- 331 -
Function Default
code value
current loop
7.2.24 P24 Encoder of motor 2
Function Default
code value
0: Incremental encoder
Encoder type 1: Resolver-type encoder

P24.00 0 ●
display 2: Sin/Cos encoder
3: Endat absolute encoder
Number of pulses generated when the encoder

Encoder pulse
P24.01 revolves for one circle. 1024 ◎
number
Ones: AB direction
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Tens: Z pulse direction (reserved)
P24.02 Encoder direction 0: Forward 0x000 ◎
1: Reverse
Hundreds: CD/UVW pole signal direction
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Detection time of
The detection time of encoder offline fault.
P24.03 encoder offline 2.0s ○
fault
Detection time of
Detection time of encoder reversal fault.
P24.04 encoder reversal 0.8s ○
fault
- 332 -
Function Default
code value
Setting range: 0x00–0x99
Ones: Low-speed filter times, corresponds to

Filter times of
P24.05 2^(0–9)×125us. 0x33 ○
encoder detection
Tens: High-speed filter times; corresponds to
2^(0–9)×125us.
Speed ratio You need to set this parameter when the encoder
between encoder is not installed on the motor shaft and the drive
P24.06 1.000 ○
mounting shaft ratio is not 1.
and motor Setting range: 0.001–65.535
Bit0: Enable Z pulse calibration
Bit1: Enable encoder angle calibration
Bit2: Enable SVC speed measurement
Bit3: Select resolver speed measurement mode
Bit4: Z pulse capture mode
Bit5: Do not detect encoder initial angle in v/f

Control
control
parameters of
P24.07 Bit6: Enable CD signal calibration 0x3 ○
synchronous
motor Bit7: Disable sin/cos sub-division speed
measurement
Bit8: Do not detect encoder fault during autotuning
Bit9: Enable Z pulse detection optimization
Bit10: Enable initial Z pulse calibration

optimization
Bit12: Clear Z pulse arrival signal after stop
0x00–0x11
Ones: Z pulse
Enable Z pulse
P24.08 Reserved 0x10 ○
offline detection
Tens: UVW pulse
0: Do not detect
- 333 -
Function Default
code value
1: Enable
Relative electric angle of encoder Z pulse and

Initial angle of Z
pulse
Relative electric angle of encoder position and

Initial angle of the
pole
0–3
Autotuning of 1: Rotary autotuning (DC brake)

P24.11 initial angle of 2: Static autotuning (suitable for resolver-type 0 ◎
pole encoder, sin/cos with CD signal feedback)
3: Rotary autotuning (initial angle identification)
Speed 0: No optimization
measurement
P24.12 1: Optimization mode 1 1 ◎
optimization
selection 2: Optimization mode 2
CD signal zero
P24.13 0–65535 0 ○
offset gain
Ones: Incremental encoder
0: without UVW
Encoder type 1: with UVW

P24.14 0x00 ◎
selection Tens: Sin/Cos encoder
0: without CD signal
1: with CD signal
0: PG card speed measuring/HDI height

measuring
Speed measuring
P24.15 1: Local measuring, implemented through HDIA 0 ◎
mode
and HDIB; supporting only incremental 24V
encoders
- 334 -
Function Default
code value
Note: HDI height measuring is implemented

through HDIA and HDIB and supports only
incremental 24V encoders.
0–255
Frequency-
P24.16 When this parameter is set to 0 or 1, frequency 0 ○
division coefficient
division of 1:1 is implemented.
0x0000–0xffff
Bit0: Whether to enable encoder input filter
0: No filter
1: Filter
Bit1: Encoder signal filter mode (set Bit0 or Bit2 to

1)
Bit2: Whether to enable encoder

frequency-division output filter
0: No filter
Pulse filer
P24.17 1: Filter 0x0033 ○
processing
Bit3: Reserved
Bit4: Whether to enable pulse reference filter
0: No filter
1: Filter
Bit5: Pulse reference filter mode (valid when Bit4

is set to 1)
Bit6: Frequency-divided output source setting
0: Encoder signals
1: Pulse reference signals
- 335 -
Function Default
code value
Bits7–15: Reserved
0–63
Encoder pulse
filter width
0–63
Pulse reference
filter width
Pulse number of
P24.20 0–65535 1024 ◎
pulse reference
Enable angle
compensation of
P24.21 0–1 0 ○
synchronous
motor
Switch-over
frequency
threshold of
P24.22 0–630.00Hz 1.00Hz ○
speed
measurement
mode
P24.23 Angle -200.0–200.0% 100.0% ○

compensation
coefficient
P24.24 Motor pole pair 0–128 2 ◎
number in initial
pole angle
autotuning
7.2.25 P25 Extension I/O card input functions
Function Default
code value
P25.01 S5 terminal Same as P05 group 0 ◎
- 336 -
Function Default
code value
function
S6 terminal
P25.02 0 ◎
function
S7 terminal
P25.03 0 ◎
function
S8 terminal
P25.04 0 ◎
function
S9 terminal
P25.05 0 ◎
function
S10 terminal
P25.06 0 ◎
function
S11 terminal
P25.07 0 ◎
function
S12 terminal
P25.08 0 ◎
function
0x000–0x1FF
Input terminal BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4
P25.10 polarity of S12 S11 S10 S9 0x000 ○

extension card
BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
S8 S7 S6 S5

Virtual terminal
P25.11 setup of extension 0x000 ◎
card
- 337 -
Function Default
code value
BIT8: HDI3 virtual terminal
S5 terminal
P25.14 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
S5 terminal
P25.15 0.000s ○
switch-off delay
S6 terminal
P25.16 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
S6 switch-off
P25.17 0.000s ○
delay
S7 terminal
P25.18 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
These function codes define corresponding delay
S7 switch-off of the programmable input terminals during level
P25.19 0.000s ○
delay variation from switch-on to switch-off .
S8 terminal Si electrical level

P25.20 0.000s ○
switch-on delay invalid invalid
Si valid valid
Switcn-on Switcn-off
S8 switch-off
P25.21 delay delay 0.000s ○
delay
S9 terminal
P25.22 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
S9 switch-off
P25.23 0.000s ○
delay
S10 terminal
P25.24 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
S10 switch-off
P25.25 0.000s ○
delay
S11 terminal
P25.26 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
- 338 -
Function Default
code value
S11 switch-off
P25.27 0.000s ○
delay
S12 terminal
P25.28 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
S12 switch-off
P25.29 0.000s ○
delay
Lower limit value These function codes define the relation between
P25.30 0.00V ○
of AI3 analog input voltage and corresponding set value
of analog input. When the analog input voltage
Corresponding
exceeds the range of max./min. input, the max.
P25.31 setting of lower 0.0% ○
input or min. input will be adopted during
limit of AI3
calculation.
Upper limit value When analog input is current input, 0–20mA

P25.32 10.00V ○
of AI3 current corresponds to 0–10V voltage.
In different application cases, 100% of the analog

Corresponding
setting corresponds to different nominal values.
P25.33 setting of upper 100.0% ○
limit of AI3 The figure below illustrates several settings.
Corresponding
setting
100%
0 AI
10V
20mA
AI3/AI4
-100%
Input filter time of

P25.34 Input filter time: Adjust the sensitivity of analog 0.030s ○
AI3
input, increase this value properly can enhance
the anti-interference capacity of analog variables;
however, it will also degrade the sensitivity of
analog input.
Note: AI3 can support 0–10V/0–20mA input, when

AI3 selects 0–20mA input, the corresponding
voltage of 20mA is 10V;
- 339 -
Function Default
code value
Setting range of P25.30: 0.00V–P25.32
Setting range of P25.32: P25.30–10.00V
Range: 0–1
AI3 input signal
P25.41 0: Voltage type 0 ○
type
1: Current type
S-terminal power 0–1

signal selection (S 0: DC (24–48VDC)
P25.42 0 ◎
terminal on I/O 1: AC (24–48VAC)
extension card 2)
7.2.26 P26 Output functions of extension I/O card
Function Default
code value
Y2 output
P26.02 0 ○
selection
Relay RO3 output

P26.04 Same as P06.01 0 ○
selection
Relay RO4 output

P26.05 0 ○
selection
Output terminal
0x0000–0x7FF
P26.12 polarity of 0x000 ○
RO10, RO9…RO3, HDO2,Y3, Y2 in sequence
extension card
Y2 switch-on
P26.15 0.000s ○
delay
The function codes define the corresponding delay
of the level variation from switch-on to switch-off.
Y2 switch-off
P26.16 0.000s ○
delay
- 340 -
Function Default
code value
Relay RO3 Y electric level

P26.19 invalid
0.000s ○
switch-on delay
Y valid Invalid Valid
Switch on Switch off
Relay RO3 delay delay
P26.20 0.000s ○
switch-off delay
Relay RO4
P26.21 0.000s ○
switch-on delay
Relay RO4
P26.22 0.000s ○
switch-off delay
AO2 output
P26.35 Same as P06.14 0 ○
selection
Lower limit of AO2 Above function codes define the relation between
P26.38 0.0% ○
output output value and analog output. When the output
value exceeds the set max./min. output range, the
Corresponding
upper/low limit of output will be adopted during
calculation.
lower limit
When analog output is current output, 1mA
Upper limit of AO2 corresponds to 0.5V voltage. In different
P26.40 100.0% ○
output applications, 100% of output value corresponds to
different analog outputs.
Corresponding
10V (20mA)
AO
upper limit
0.0% 100.0%
AO2 output filter Setting range of P26.38: -300.0%–P26.40

P26.42 0.000s ○
time Setting range of P26.39: 0.00V–10.00V
Setting range of P26.40: P26.38–300.0%
Setting range of P26.41: 0.00V–10.00V
- 341 -
7.2.27 P28 Master/slave control functions
Function Default
code value
0: The master/slave control is invalid

Master/slave
P28.00 mode selection 1: This machine is a master 0 ◎
2: This machine is a slave

Master/slave
communication 0: CAN
P28.01 0 ◎
data selection 1: Reserved
Ones: Master/slave running mode selection
(The master and slave adopt speed control and

maintains the power balance by droop control)
(The master and slave must be in the same type of

vector control mode. The master is speed control,
and the slave will be forced to be in the torque
control mode.
Start in the slave first speed mode (master/slave

mode 0) and then switch to torque mode at a
Master/slave certain frequency point (master/slave mode 1)
P28.02 control mode 0x001 ◎
3: Reserved
4: Closed-loop master/slave mode (master/slave

mode 4)
If the position synchronization mode is used, both

the master and slave must be installed with the
encoder. Both the master and slave adopt the
speed control and correct the speed by using the
position pulse deviation value.
Both the master and slave use closed-loop speed

control, and the slave use the speed loop output of
the master to perform power balancing.
Tens: Slave start command source selection
- 342 -
Function Default
code value
0: Follow the master to start
1: Determined by P00.01
Hundreds: Slave transmitting/master receiving

data enable
0: Enable
1: Disable
P28.03 Slave speed gain 0.0–500.0% 100.0% ○
P28.04 Slave torque gain 0.0–500.0% 100.0% ○
Speed/torque
mode switching
P28.05 frequency point of 0.00–10.00Hz 5.00Hz ○
master/slave
mode 2
P28.06 Number of slaves 0–15 1 ◎
Master/slave
P28.07 transmission unit 0.00–100.00 1.00 ○
pulse ratio
Position
0–50000
synchronization
P28.08 When the position difference is greater than 50 ○
deviation
P28.08, correction on the slave is valid.
deadzone setting
Position 0–50000
synchronization When the position difference is greater than
P28.09 1000 ○
deviation P28.09, the master/slave position fault (ELS) is
threshold reported.
Position 0.0–100.0%
synchronization
P28.10 5.0% ○
regulator output
limit
0–1
0: Automatic
Position
During stop, the position synchronization pulse
synchronization
P28.11 count is automatically reset. 0 ◎
pulse count reset
1: Terminal based
method
If the input terminal selects the position
synchronization pulse count reset function, the
- 343 -
Function Default
code value
pulse count is automatically reset when there is

signal input.
Position
synchronization
P28.12 0.000–10.000 0.005 ○
proportional
coefficient
Position 0.01–80.00 8.00s
P28.13 synchronization ○
integral time
Position 0.00–10.00 0.05s
P28.14 synchronization ○
filtering time
0–1
0: Disable
Enabling the slave
1: Enable
P28.15 speed deviation 0 ○
When the slave adopts the torque control mode,
window
the speed deviation monitoring function can be
enabled.
0.00–50.00Hz
Slave positive
When the actual speed is higher than the given
speed deviation
P28.16 speed, if the actual speed is higher than (given 5.00Hz ○
window upper
speed +P28.16) and exceeds this upper limit, the
limit
speed has to be adjusted.
0.00–50.00Hz
Slave negative When the actual speed is lower than the given
P28.17 speed deviation speed, if the actual speed is lower than (given 5.00Hz ○
window lower limit speed -P28.17) and exceeds this lower limit, the
speed has be adjusted.
P28.18 Slave rotation 100
0–50000 ○
speed regulation
Applicable only in master/slave mode 5.
coefficient Kb
P28.19 Rotation speed 100
○
difference 0–50000
compensation Applicable only in master/slave mode 5, in which
coefficient Kc there are only one master and one slave.
(Reserved)
- 344 -
Function Default
code value
P28.20 Rotation speed 0

0–2 ○
difference
0: Not compensate
compensation
1: Compensate both the master and slave
target setting
2: Compensate only the slave
(Reserved)
Function Default
code value
Rated power of
Model
depended
motor 3
Rated frequency
motor 3
Rated speed of
Model
P29.03 asynchronous 1–36000rpm ◎
depended
motor 3
Rated voltage of
Model
depended
motor 3
Rated current of
Model
depended
motor 3
Stator resistance
Model
depended
motor 3
Rotor resistance
Model
depended
motor 3
Leakage
Model
P29.08 inductance of 0.1–6553.5mH ○
depended
asynchronous
- 345 -
Function Default
code value
motor 3
Mutual inductance
Model
P29.09 of asynchronous 0.1–6553.5mH ○
depended
motor 3
No-load current of
Model
depended
motor 3
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient 1 of
P29.11 0.0–100.0% 80.0% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 3
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient 2 of
P29.12 0.0–100.0% 68.0% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 3
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient 3 of
P29.13 0.0–100.0% 57.0% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 3
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient 4 of
P29.14 0.0–100.0% 40.0% ○
iron core of
asynchronous
motor 3
- 346 -
Function Default
code value
Rated power of
Model
P29.15 synchronous 0.1–3000.0kW ◎
depended
motor 3
Rated frequency
motor 3
Number of pole
pairs of
P29.17 1–128 2 ◎
synchronous
motor 3
Rated voltage of
Model
depended
motor 3
Rated current of
Model
depended
motor 3
Stator resistance
Model
depended
motor 3
Direct-axis
inductance of Model
P29.21 0.01–655.35mH ○
motor 3
Quadrature-axis
inductance of Model
P29.22 0.01–655.35mH ○
motor 3
Counter-emf
constant of
P29.23 0–10000V 300 ○
synchronous
motor 3
Initial magnetic
pole position of
P29.24 synchronous 0–0xFFFF 0x0000 ●
motor 3
(Reserved)
- 347 -
Function Default
code value
Identification
current of
P29.25 synchronous 0%–50% (of the motor rated current) 10% ●
motor 3
(Reserved)
0: Disable protection
Overload
1: Enable protection for common motors (with
protection
P29.26 low-speed compensation) 2 ◎
selection of motor
2: Enable protection for variable-frequency motors
3
(without low-speed compensation)
Overload
protection
P29.27 20.0%–120.0% 100.0% ○
coefficient of
motor 3
Power display
correction
P29.28 0.00–3.00 1.00 ○
coefficient of
motor 3
Parameter display
0: Display by motor type
P29.29 selection of motor 0 ○
1: Display all
3
System inertia of
P29.30 0–30.000kgm2 0.000 ○
motor 3
7.2.29 P90 Hoisting functions
Function Default
code value
0–12
Hoisting function
P90.00 3: Horizontal moving mode (in space voltage 0 ◎
macro setting
vector control)
- 348 -
Function Default
code value

9: Lifting mode 3 (in space voltage vector control)
wells and winches)
12: Open-loop winching (for lifting in mineral wells
and winches)
0–12
The switched function macro is determined by
P90.03.
vector control)
Terminal-switched 4: Tower crane rotating mode
P90.01 function macro 5: Conical motor application mode 0 ◎
setting 6: User-defined function macro 1
9: Lifting mode 3 (in space voltage vector control)
wells and winches)
12: Open-loop winching (for lifting in mineral wells
and winches)
0–3
User-defined macro 1
P90.02 function macro 2: Enter the settings of user-defined function 0 ◎
setting macro 2
macro 3
Method for 0–4
P90.03 terminals to 0: No function macro switchover 0 ◎
switch function 1: Switch from motor 1 to motor 2
- 349 -
Function Default
code value
macros 2: Switch from motor 1 to motor 3

3: Switch from the master to the slave
4: Switch from the slave to the master
control mode 1)
Enabling 0–1
P90.04 brake-oriented 0: The brake is controlled by an external controller. 0 ◎
logic 1: The brake is controlled by the VFD.
0x00–0x11
Ones place: indicates whether to enable forward
torque for reverse-running start
0: Disable
(The reverse-running start direction complies with
the command.)
1: Enable
(The reverse-running start direction is always the
Disable for RVS start Enable

Enabling forward Run
torque for Run
RVS cmd RVS
P90.05 cmd 0x00 ◎
reverse-running Output
frequency
start/stop Output
frequency
Tens place: indicates whether to enable forward

torque for reverse-running stop
0: Disable
(The reverse-running stop direction complies with
the command.)
1: Enable
(The reverse-running stop direction is always the
- 350 -
Function Default
code value
Disable for RVS stop Enable for RVS stop

Run Run
RVS Stop RVS Stop
cmd cmd
Output
Output
frequency
frequency
When function is enabled, the VFD will first run in

forward direction and then run in reverse direction,
so as to ensure enough torque to drive the load.
Graded multi-step Multi-step speed setting is special for hoisting. The
P90.06 0.0% ○
speed reference 0 five multi-step speed setting terminals can be
Graded multi-step combined to form six speed settings
P90.07 0.0% ○
speed reference 1 Speed Function
Trml1 Trml 2 Trml 3 Trml 4 Trml 5
Graded multi-step setting code
P90.08 0.0% ○
speed reference 2 Multi-step
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF P90.06
Graded multi-step setting 0
P90.09 0.0% ○
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF P90.07
Graded multi-step setting 1
P90.10 0.0% ○
ON ON OFF OFF OFF P90.08
setting 2
Multi-step
ON ON ON OFF OFF P90.09
setting 3
Multi-step
ON ON ON ON OFF P90.10
setting 4
Multi-step
ON ON ON ON ON P90.11
setting 5
Set P00.06=15 or P00.07=15. The multi-step

Graded multi-step
P90.11 speed setting terminals are specified by P05 or 0.0% ○
speed reference 5
P25, which can select functions 77–8. The speeds
are specified by P90.06–P90.11 (P00.03
percentage of max. frequency)
P90.06, P90.07, P90.08, P90.09, P90.10, P90.11
setting range: 0.0–100.0%
Note: The multi-step settings of a higher grade
can be closed only after the multi-step settings of
all lower grades are closed.
Forward brake
P90.12 Brake timing sequence in V/F mode: 0.0% ○
release current
- 351 -
Function Default
code value
Reverse brake FWD/RVS

P90.13 run
command
Stop Start Stop
0.0% ○
release current
Forward brake FWD T1
T1 T2
T2
P90.14 output
frequency T9
T9 T3
T3 T4
T4 0.0% ○
release torque FWD brake Maintenance frequency
release during DEC
frequency FWD brake closing frequency
Reverse brake
P90.15 Torque 0.0% ○
release torque Brake
verification OK
closing Close Release Close

Forward brake command
P90.16 T5
T5 T6 T7
T7 T8
T8
3.00Hz ○
release frequency RVS brake
release
T6
RVS brake closing

frequency frequency
Reverse brake RVS output
frequency
P90.17 Torque T9
3.00Hz ○
release frequency verification OK Maintenance
frequency during
T9
DEC
Forward brake
P90.18 3.00Hz ○
closing frequency Brake
feedback
Close Release Close
signal
Reverse brake
P90.19 Close
Release Close
3.00Hz ○
closing frequency Brake action
Delay before T1:

T1: Delay
Delay before
before forward
forward brake
brake release
release P90.20
P90.20 T3:
T3: Delay
Delay before
before forward
forward brake
brake closing
closing P90.24
P90.24
T2:
T2: Delay
Delay after
after forward
forward brake
brake release
release P90.22
P90.22 T4:
T4: Delay
Delay after
after forward
forward brake
brake closing
closing P90.26
P90.26
P90.20 forward brake T5:

T5: Delay
T6:
Delay before
T6: Delay
before reverse
Delay after
reverse brake
after reverse
brake release
reverse brake
release P90.21
brake release
P90.21
release P90.23
P90.23
T7:
T7: Delay
T8:
Delay before
T8: Delay
before reverse
Delay after
reverse brake
after reverse
brake closing
reverse brake
closing P90.25
brake closing
P90.25
closing P90.27
P90.27 0.300s ○
T9:
T9: Maintenance
Maintenance frequency
frequency hold
hold time
time during
during DEC
DEC P90.29
P90.29
release
Delay before Use forward-running timing sequence as example:
P90.21 reverse brake Start: When the VFD is in standby state, the brake 0.000s ○
release output signal is closed. After receiving the running
Delay after command, the VFD accelerates with the target
P90.22 forward brake frequency P90.16. In addition, the VFD starts 0.300s ○
release torque verification, if the verification is OK
Delay after (condition: output current>= P90.12 (it is P90.13 in
P90.23 reverse brake reverse running) and output torque >= P90.14 (it is 0.000s ○
release P90.15 in reverse running), output frequency is at
Delay before least equal to P90.16 (it is P90.17 in reverse
P90.24 forward brake running), the delay before forward brake release 0.300s ○
closing starts, and the VFD outputs the brake release
Delay before signal when P90.20 (or P90.21 in reverse running)
P90.25 reverse brake is reached. Then the delay after forward brake 0.000s ○
closing release starts. The VFD normally accelerates to
the set frequency within the time specified by
Delay after
P90.22 (or P90.23 in reverse running).
P90.26 forward brake 0.300s ○
Stop: To prevent hook slip, sufficient output torque
closing
must be ensured before brake is closed. After
Delay after
P90.27 receiving the stop command, the VFD decelerates 0.000s ○
reverse brake
- 352 -
Function Default
code value
closing to P90.28 with a maintenance frequency within

Maintenance P90.29. When output frequency <= P90.18 (or
P90.28 5.00Hz ○
frequency for stop P90.19 in reverse running), the delay before brake
Maintenance release starts. When the delay reaches P90.24 (or
P90.29 frequency hold P90.25 in reverse running), the VFD outputs brake 0.000s ○
time for stop closing signal. The delay after brake release
starts. The VFD decelerates to zero and stops
within the time P90.26 (or P90.27 in reverse
running)
P90.12 , P90.13 setting range: 0.0–200.0% (of the
P90.14, P90.15 setting range: 0.0–200.0% (of the
motor rated torque)
Torque verification
P90.16, P90.17, P90.18, P90.19 setting range:
P90.30 fault detection 3.000s ○
0.00–20.00Hz
time
P90.20, P90.21, P90.22, P90.23, P90.24, P90.25,
P90.26, P90.27 setting range: 0.000–5.000s
Note: If reverse-running delay is 0, the
forward-running delay is used.
P90.28 setting range: 0.00–50.00Hz
P90.29 setting range: 0.000–5.000s
Enabling the P90.31 setting range: 0–1
P90.31 monitoring on 0: Disable 0 ◎
brake status 1: Enable
Brake feedback When the function is disabled, no brake feedback
exception delay fault is reported.
P90.32 1.000s ○
(brake feedback After it is enabled, brake status can be monitored.
detection time) In open-loop mode: If the actual brake status is
Brake monitoring different from the S-terminal given brake feedback
P90.33 100.0% ○
current threshold signal during running or stop, the brake feedback
Enabling speed fault (FAE) is reported after the brake feedback
P90.34 reference under exception delay P90.32. 0 ◎
brake status error In closed-loop mode: During the stop, if a brake
Speed reference feedback exception occurs, the brake feedback
P90.35 under brake fault (FAE) is reported after the brake feedback 5.00Hz ○
status error exception delay P90.32. During running, if a brake
- 353 -
Function Default
code value
feedback exception occurs, the current is

monitored after the brake feedback exception
delay P90.32. If the present current is less than the
monitored current, it is considered that the brake is
not closed, and the action specified by P90.34 is
performed. If P90.34=0, the VFD directly reports
the brake feedback fault (FAE). If P90.34=1, the
VFD opens the brake and runs at the speed
specified by P90.35, and reports the brake
feedback alarm (A-FA).
Frequency
reference
P90.35
0
Time
Output
current %
P90.33
Time
P90.32
Start/stop
command
Brake
feedback
signal
Brake
command Brake
feedback
Brake exception
exception Alarm
status
Enabling brake
status monitoring
In closed-loop mode: During running, if a brake

feedback exception occurs, the VFD starts
monitoring current after the brake feedback
exception delay P90.32. If the present current is
greater than the brake monitoring current, the
present actual frequency is checked. If the actual
frequency is lower than the forward brake
frequency during forward rotating or the actual
frequency is lower than the reverse brake
frequency during reverse rotating, it is considered
that the brake has been closed, the brake
feedback fault (FAE) is reported.
- 354 -
Function Default
code value
Frequency
reference
Fault
Not open the
brake
Output Time
current %
P90.33
Time
Start/stop P90.32
command
Brake
feedback
signal
Brake
Brake
action
feedback
Brake exception
exception Fault
status
Enabling brake
status monitoring

P90.33 setting range: 0.0%–200.0% (100.0%
corresponding to the motor rated current)
P90.34 setting range: 0–1
0: Disable (Report the brake feedback fault FAE
directly)
1: Enable brake status error speed giving (Report
the brake feedback alarm A-FA simultaneously)
0x00–0x11
Ones place: Brake release type selection
0: Same as hoisting-oriented brake release
frequency
1: Same as jogging frequency
Same as the hoisting-oriented brake release frequency Same as jogging frequency
Output Output
Jogging brake frequency frequency
P90.36 P08.06 0x00 ◎

type P90.16/P90.17
Brake status Close Release Brake status Close Release
Tens place: Brake closing type selection

0: Same as hoisting-oriented brake closing
frequency
- 355 -
Function Default
code value
1: Same as jogging frequency

Same as hoisting-oriented brake closing frequency Same as jogging frequency
Output
frequency Output
frequency
P08.06
P90.18/P90.19
Brake status Release Close Brake status Release Close
0–1
0: Perform switchover without braking
1: Perform switchover with braking
When P90.37=0, the switchover is performed
directly, and the brake does not act.
Output
frequency
Brake selection
for FWD/RVS FWD
P90.37 command 0 ◎
forward/reverse RVS
switchover
When P90.37=1, during the switchover, the VFD
decelerates with braking to stop, and then opens
the brake to run in reverse direction.
Output
frequency
P90.39
FWD/RVS FWD
command
RVS
Restart selection P90.38 setting range: 0–1

P90.38 0 ◎
during braking 0: No restart during braking
P 90.39
Output Wait time of
restart
frequency
Wait time of
P90.39 Running FWD REV
0.5s ◎
restart command
1: Restart allowed during braking
- 356 -
Function Default
code value
Output
frequency
Running FWD RVS

command
Though the brake closing command has been

output during stop, the VFD accepts a new start
command.
0–4
0: Common mode
1: Torque limit mode
Braking method in
2: Torque/speed switchover mode 1 (boost with
P90.40 open-loop vector 0 ◎
braking)
control
3: DC braking mode
4: Torque/speed switchover mode 2 (horizontal
moving)
Torque limit 1 in Setting range: 0.0–300.0% (of the motor rated
P90.41 open-loop vector current) 120.0% ○
control (P90.40=1 torque limit mode)
0.0–200.0%
Torque setting for The brake is released when the feedback value
P90.42 120.0% ○
brake release is >= 80% of the set value if P90.40=2
(Torque/speed switchover mode 1).
0.00–50.00s
Brake open delay If P90.40=3 (DC braking mode), after the startup
P90.43 after startup DC DC braking starts, the brake opens with a delay. 0.00s ○
braking starts The delay must be equal to or less than the startup
DC braking time.
0.00–50.00s
Brake closing If P90.40=3 (DC braking mode), after the stop DC
P90.44 delay after stop braking starts, the brake closes with a delay. The 0.00s ○
DC braking starts delay must be equal to or less than the stop DC
braking time.
Torque/speed 0.00–50.00Hz
P90.45 8.00Hz ◎
switchover If P90.40=4 (Torque/speed switchover mode 2,
- 357 -
Function Default
code value
frequency point horizontal moving), torque control is applied when

the frequency is lower than P90.45, while speed
control is applied when the frequency is higher
than P90.45.
7.2.30 P91 Extended functions for hoisting
Function Default
code value
Enabling conical The conical motor does not require external

P91.00 0 ◎
motor functions braking since it implements braking by using
Conical motor internal magnetic flux control. During start, the
ACC process starting frequency needs to be increased for brake
P91.01 120.0% ○
voltage coefficient release. During stop, quick demagnetizing needs
K1 to be implemented to prevent slip in case of
Conical motor overdue brake closing.
constant process P91.00 setting range: 0–1
P91.02 100.0% ○
voltage coefficient 0: Disable
K2 1: Enable
Conical motor P91.01 setting range: P91.02–150.0%
DEC process (100% corresponding to the motor rated voltage)
P91.03 80.0% ○
voltage coefficient P91.02 setting range: P91.03–P91.01
K3 P91.03 setting range: 0.0–P91.02
- 358 -
Function Default
code value
Output
frequency
Rated
frequency
Output Time t
voltage V
(%)
P91.01
P91.02
P91.03
Torque boost
voltage (%)
Time t
Start
command
Brake
action
It is used when the conical motor function is
different from the multi-dot V/F.
Output
frequency
Rated
frequency
P04.07
P04.05
P04.03
Time t
Output Output
voltage V voltage V
(%) (%)
P91.01
P91.01*P04.08 P91.02
P91.03
P91.01*P04.06 P91.03*P04.08
P91.03*P04.06
P91.01*P04.04 P91.03*P04.04
Torque boost
voltage (%)
Time t
Start
command
Brake
action
It is used when the conical motor function is the

same as the multi-dot V/F.
Note:
• The torque boost voltage is related to P04.01.
• I/F is invalid to conical motor application.
Contactor control 0–1
P91.04 0 ◎
selection 0: Controlled by an external controller
- 359 -
Function Default
code value
1: Controlled by the VFD

Contactor
P91.05 feedback 0.00–20.000s 1.000s ◎
detection time
0x00–0x11
Ones place
Enabling
0: Disable zero point position detection
operating lever
P91.06 1: Enable zero point position detection 0 ◎
zero point position
Tens place:
detection
0: Not detect AI2
1: Detect AI2
After the zero position detection signal is enabled,
the terminal zero position signal is given in stop
state, the zero position detection is completed
(valid) with a delay specified by P91.07, the zero
position signal is released, and the VFD runs only
after being given with the running command. After
the zero position signal detection takes effect, if
both the zero position signal and running
Operating lever command signal are detected, the operating lever
P91.07 zero point position zero position fault STC is reported. If the running 0.300s ○
delay command is given during zero position detection,
the VFD does not respond. If both the zero
position signal and running command signal still
exist after zero position detection, the operating
lever zero position fault STC is also reported. If the
zero position signal is removed suddenly during
zero position detection, the VFD does not respond
to the running command since zero position
detection is incomplete.
- 360 -
Function Default
code value
VFD
running Run Stop
status
Enabling zero Enable

position
detection
S terminal With zero position signal input

zero position
input signal
Zero Zero position is valid

position
detection
P91.07
FWD/RVS
command
Normal STC fault

VFD fault
status
After the VFD stops, the VFD starts zero position

detection. When the zero position detection delay
is reached, if the detection finds that AI2 is greater
than 1.00V, the analog speed reference deviation
fault AdE is reported.
VFD Stop
running
status
Enabling zero Enable

position
detection
S terminal With zero position signal input

zero position
input signal
Zero Zero position is valid

position
detection
P91.07
Analog AI2
1.00V
Normal AdE fault

VFD fault
status

0–5
0: Disable
Light load speed
1: Constant power speed boost
P91.08 boost function 0 ◎
2: Constant power speed limit
selection
3: Stepped speed limit
4: Light load speed boost 1
- 361 -
Function Default
code value
5: Speed boost through external terminal signal

Light-load P91.08=4: Light load speed boost mode 1
speed-boost (according to set current and frequency)
P91.09 Output
70.00Hz ○
target frequency frequency
after current verification
setting P91.09 success
Light-load P00.10
speed-boost P91.10
P91.10 Motor rated
90.0% ○
detection frequency P91.11
frequency
Light-load
Output Time
speed-boost current
P91.11 1.000s ○
current detection P91.12 or
P91.13
time Light load speed boost
after current verification
FWD light-load success
Time
speed-boost
P91.12 60.0% ○
current detection Light load speed boost after current verification
value success
Output
frequency
P00.10
No light load speed
P91.10 boost due to current
Motor rated verification failure
frequency P91.11
Output No light load speed Time

boost due to current
current verification failure
P91.12 or P91.13
RVS light-load
speed-boost Time
P91.13 40.0 % ○
current detection No light load speed boost due to current
value verification failure
If light load speed boost mode 1 is enabled,
processing for light load speed boost is performed
only when the set frequency is no less than P02.02
(Motor rated frequency). After running, if the ramp
frequency is equal to or greater than P91.10,
current is detected and count starts. When P91.11
is reached, if the current is less than P91.12 (or
P91.13 in reverse running), the current detection
- 362 -
Function Default
code value
passes, the VFD increases the frequency to

P91.09. If the current detection fails, the VFD
remains the original frequency.
Note: The light-load speed-boost target frequency
setting must be higher than the set frequency.
Otherwise, speed boost cannot be implemented
although the conditions are met. If the set
frequency is higher than P91.10, the original
frequency is remained.
P91.10 setting range: 50.0%–100.0%(100.0%
corresponding to the motor rated frequency)
P91.12, P91.13 setting range: 0.0–150.0%
Note: Light load speed boost mode 1 is applicable
to the open-loop mode.
Output
frequency
Set frequency
or speed limit
Heavy-load frequency
speed-limit
P91.14 40.00Hz ○
detection P91.14
frequency P91.15
Time
When the set frequency is greater than the heavy

load speed-limit detection frequency (P91.14), the
motor running frequency becomes stable after
reaching the detection frequency (P91.14), and
load detection is performed after the time specified
Heavy-load by P91.15. The load detection value is used for
P91.15 speed-limit heavy load speed limit calculation. The load 0.35s ○
detection delay detection value P94.01 can be viewed through the
keypad.
P91.14 setting range: 0.00Hz–P02.02
P94.01 setting range: 0.0%–150.0% (of the motor
rated torque)
- 363 -
Function Default
code value
Electric power Limited frequency f Max. output

frequency
upper limit of P00.03
P91.16 90.0% ○
constant-power
speed boost/limit Limited frequency
corresponding to the load
flim
P91.14
Load T
T1 Tn Tmax
Constant power speed limit frequency = Power upper limit

* Motor rated frequency/Load detection value
The constant power mode is used for speed

adjustment. The constant power speed limit
frequency under the present load is calculated by
using algorithms (using P91.16, P91.17, and
P19.11 for reference).
(1) When P91.08=1, in constant power speed

boost mode, if the constant power speed limit
Electricity frequency is lower than or equal to the frequency
generation power upper limit P00.04, the VFD runs at the constant
P91.17 upper limit of power speed limit frequency. At the same time, if 100.0% ○
constant-power the set frequency is higher than or equal to the
speed boost/limit constant power speed limit frequency, the speed
is limited at constant power; if the set frequency is
lower than the constant power speed limit
frequency, the speed boosts.
(2) When P91.08=2, in constant power speed limit

mode, if the constant power speed limit frequency
is lower than or equal to the frequency upper limit
P00.04: if the set frequency is higher than or equal
to the constant power speed limit frequency, the
speed is limited at constant power; if the set
frequency is lower than the constant power speed
limit frequency, the set frequency is used for
running.
For example, when P00.03=100Hz,
- 364 -
Function Default
code value
P91.16=90.0%, and motor rated

frequency=50.00Hz:
If the detected load value during motor upward

running is 30.0%, the limited
frequency=150Hz(90.0%*50.00Hz/30.0%), the
calculated limited frequency is higher than P00.03.
If P91.08=1, the set frequency P00.03 is used for
running. If P91.08=2, the constant power speed
limit frequency does not work, and the set
frequency is used for running.
If the detected load value during motor upward

running is 60.0%, the limited frequency
=75Hz(90.0%*50.00Hz/60.0%), the heavy load
speed limit function works. The upward max.
output frequency is limited to 75Hz. If P91.08=1,
the frequency 75Hz is used for running. If
P91.08=2, the max. running frequency is 75Hz,
and the set frequency is used for running.
The similar calculation method is applicable to

motor downward running, only replacing P91.16
with P91.17.
Note: During open/closed loop switchover (there is

difference in load detection value), adjust P91.16
and P91.17, and the heavy load speed limit
frequency cannot be lower than the heavy load
speed limit detection frequency P91.14.
P91.16, P91.17 setting range: 30.0%–120.0% (of

the motor rated power)
Limited frequency f Max. output
Stepped speed frequency
limit upward P00.03

P91.18 70.0% ○
running P91.23 (f3)
load limit T1 P91.21 (f2)

Stepped speed P91.19 (f1)
P91.19 limit upward Load T 50.00Hz ○
running P91.22 P91.20 P91.18 Tmax
(T3) (T2) (T1)
- 365 -
Function Default
code value
restricted When the stepped speed limit mode is used, the

frequency f1 limit parameters for upward running and for
Stepped speed downward running are set separately and can be
limit upward adjusted according to the actual situation. When
P91.20 45.0% ○
running the detected load (open-loop output current or
load limit T2 closed-loop output torque) exceeds the limited
Stepped speed value, the running frequency must be lower than
limit upward the set restricted frequency.
P91.21 running For example, during motor upward running, when 75.00Hz ○
restricted the detected load is greater than P91.18, the
frequency f2 frequency is restricted to P91.19 (or when the set
Stepped speed frequency is less than P91.19, the running
limit upward frequency is the set frequency). When the
P91.22 25.0% ○
running detected load is greater than P91.20 (but less than
load limit T3 P91.18), the frequency is restricted to P91.21.
Stepped speed The detected load values in open/closed loop state
limit upward have deviation. During the open/closed loop
P91.23 running switchover process, the load limit value can be 100.00Hz ○
restricted adjusted through P91.24. P91.24 is valid for
frequency f3 P91.18, P91.20, and P91.22.
Stepped speed For example, when the same load is carried
limit upward upward and tested, if P94.01=50.0% in
P91.24 running closed-loop state and P94.01=55.0% in open-loop 0.0% ○
load limit adjusted state, there is a difference of 5%. In the actual use,
gain after setting closed-loop parameters, if you need to
Stepped speed switch to the open-loop state, you only need to set
limit downward P91.24 to 5.0% (0 in closed-loop state), and you
P91.25 running do not need to modify P91.18, P91.20, and 0.0% ○
torque limit P91.22.
adjusted gain The situation of downward running is similar and
Stepped speed therefore you only need to set parameters related
limit downward to downward running.

P91.26 Note: The heavy load speed limit frequency cannot 55.0% ○
running
load limit T1 be lower than P91.14.
P91.18, P91.20, P91.22, P91.26, P91.28, P91.30
Stepped speed
setting range: 0.0%–150.0% (Open-loop output
P91.27 limit downward 50.00Hz ○
current is relative to the motor rated current, while
running
- 366 -
Function Default
code value
restricted closed-loop output torque is relative to the motor

frequency f1 rated torque.)
Stepped speed P91.19, P91.21, P91.23, P91.27, P91.29, P91.31
limit downward setting range: 0.00– P00.04
P91.28 48.0% ○
running P91.24, P91.25 setting range: -20.0%–20.0%
load limit T2 (Open-loop output current is relative to the motor
Stepped speed rated current, while closed-loop output torque is
limit downward relative to the motor rated torque.)
P91.29 running 75.00Hz ○
restricted
frequency f2
Stepped speed
limit downward
P91.30 25.0% ○
running
load limit T3
Stepped speed
limit downward
P91.31 running 100.00Hz ○
restricted
frequency f3
Enabling Frequency derating with voltage indicates that the
frequency VFD can automatically decrease the output
P91.32 1 ◎
derating with frequency to maintain torque output in case of low
voltage line or bus voltage.
Bus voltage
Vdc
Standard bus
voltage
(P91.33*537
+20)V
P91.33*537V
Time t
Starting voltage of
derating Output
P91.33 frequency
f
85.0% ○
frequency with
Target
voltage frequency
Time t
The following assumes that the target frequency is

set as the rated frequency.
- 367 -
Function Default
code value
When P91.32=1, if the bus voltage is less than the
starting frequency (Standard bus voltage*P91.33),
output frequency starts decrease, the regulated
target frequency is (Rated frequency*Present bus
voltage/Standard bus voltage); if the bus voltage
increases but it does not reach the restoration
voltage (Standard bus voltage*(P91.33+5%), the
output frequency remains unchanged; if the bus
voltage continuously decreases, the output
frequency continuously decreases; if the bus
voltage rises and becomes greater than the
restoration voltage, the output frequency increases
to the rated frequency.
P91.32 setting range:
0: Disable
1: Enable
P91.33 setting range: 70.0%–95.0% (Standard
bus voltage 537V)
0–1
0: Single direction limit
1: Bi-directional limit
Upward limit
position Upward slow
Upward DEC speed area
position
Load position
measuring
DEC position limit

P91.34 0 ◎
mode
Downward DEC
position Downward slow speed
Downward limit area
position
Single direction limit: When the upward DEC limit

position is reached, the upward slow speed area is
entered, the VFD runs at P91.35 and stops at
sudden if the upward limit position is reached; the
upward speed is restricted, but the downward
speed is not restricted. Downward DEC position
limit uses the similar rule.
(Terminal command mode)
- 368 -
Function Default
code value
DEC position limit

P91.35 restricted 0.00–20.00Hz 10.00Hz ○
frequency
0–3
0: Invalid
1: When Set frequency before brake release <
Brake release frequency, the VFD reports A-SSF
alarm. When Set frequency after brake release <
Brake closing frequency, the VFD reports A-rSF,
the brake closes and the VFD runs at the set
Function selection frequency.
P91.36 under set 2: Set frequency before brake release < Brake 2 ◎
frequency fault release frequency, the VFD reports A-SSF. When
Set frequency after brake release < Brake closing
frequency, the VFD reports A-rSF, the brake closes
and the VFD stops.
3: When Set frequency before brake release <
Brake release frequency, the VFD reports A-SSF.
When Set frequency after brake release < Brake
closing frequency, the VFD reports SFE fault.
0–1
0: HDO keeps the same function as specified by
P06.00
Enabling tower
1: HDO is used as PWM signal
crane rotating
P91.37 P91.37=1: Enable the tower crane rotating 0 ◎
turbulence control
turbulence control. HDO connects to the PWM
by HDO
input of the turbulence module. You can enable the
output voltage of the turbulence module to change
with the frequency by setting P91.38–P91.47.
Duty cycle
P91.38 f0 frequency point P91.39 50.00Hz ○

P91.41
Duty cycle
P91.43
P91.39 corresponding to P91.45 100.0% ○

f0 frequency point
P91.47
P91.46 P91.44 P91.42 P91.40 P91.38 Frequency
P91.40 f1 frequency point 40.00Hz ○

Duty cycle and multi-step frequency regulation are
P91.41 Duty cycle used. 80.0% ○
- 369 -
Function Default
code value
corresponding to P91.38 setting range: P91.40–P00.03 (Max.

f1 frequency point output frequency)
P91.40 setting range: P91.42– P91.38
P91.42 setting range: P91.44– P91.40
Duty cycle P91.44 setting range: P91.46– P91.42
P91.43 corresponding to P91.46 setting range: 0.00Hz–P91.44 40.0% ○
f2 frequency point P91.39, P91.41, P91.43, P91.47 setting range:
P91.44 f3 frequency point 0.0%–100.0% 10.00Hz ○

Note: The duty ratio and frequency segmenting
Duty cycle are used for regulation.
P91.45 corresponding to 20.0% ○
f3 frequency point
Duty cycle
P91.47 corresponding to 0.0% ○
f4 frequency point
HDO carrier
P91.48 0.5–10.0kHz 1.0kHz ○
frequency
HDO closing
P91.49 0–100.0s 5.0s ○
delay during stop
0–4
0: Invalid
Pre torque input 1: AI1
P91.50 0 ○
signal source 2: AI2
3: Modbus
4: Internally given
P91.51 Pre torque offset In closed-loop mode: 0.0% ○
P91.52 Drive-side gain Setting pre torque is to output the torque 1.000 ○
corresponding to load weight in advance so as to
reduce the start impact and prevent reserve
driving or slip during start.
Setting P91.51 is to eliminate the impact of
P91.53 Braking-side gain mechanical counterweight for lifting; pre torque 1.000 ○
compensation is directly performed if there is no
mechanical counterweight.
Pre torque compensation quantity =
K*(P91.50–P91.51), in which K= P91.52 when the
- 370 -
Function Default
code value
motor is in electromotive state and K= P91.53

when the motor is in power generation (braking)
state.
P91.51 setting range: -100.0–100.0%
P91.52, P91.53 setting range: 0.000–7.000
0–1
Pre torque
P91.54 0: Forward 0 ○
direction
1: Reverse
7.2.31 P92 Hoisting protection function group 3
Function Default
code value
Output
frequency
Enabling low
P92.00 0 ◎
voltage protection
Brake
frequency Time
Bus voltage
Normal bus voltage
P92.01*Motor rated
voltage+20V
P92.01*Motor rated
voltage
Time
Running
command
Low voltage
protection
output
VFD
status A-LvP
Low voltage
P92.01 1.05 ○
protection point When P92.00=1, if the bus voltage is less than
(P92.01*Motor rated voltage), low voltage
protection is started, the VFD decelerates to stop.
If the bus voltage restores to a value greater than
(P92.01*Motor rated voltage)+20V, low voltage
protection is automatically disabled.
P92.00 setting range:
0: Disable
1: Enable
P92.01 setting range: 1.00–1.30
- 371 -
Function Default
code value
Low-speed running protection is applied to devices
to which long-time low speed running is not
applicable, preventing overheating caused by late
dissipation.
Low-speed Output
frequency
P92.02 running protection (Hz)
0.000s ◎
time
P92.03
Time (s)
P92.02
Running
command
Low speed
protection
output
When P92.02 is a non-zero value, low-speed

Setting of running protection is enabled, if the running
P92.03 low-speed running frequency of the VFD is equal to or less than 5.00Hz ○
frequency P92.03, and the last time is equal to or greater
than P92.02, the VFD reports a low-speed running
protection fault (LSP).
Overload When P92.04>0, overload protection is enabled, if
P92.04 protection current the ramp frequency is equal to or greater than 0.0% ◎
detection value (P90.16+2.00Hz) during upward running, the VFD
starts checking the current (closed-loop torque
current or open-closed output current). If the
Overload current is equal to or greater than P92.04, the VFD
P92.05 0.5s ○
detection time reports the overload protection alarm after the
detection time reaches P92.05. This restriction is
not applicable to downward running.
- 372 -
Function Default
code value
Output
frequency
P90.16+2Hz
P90.16
P92.05
Torque
current %
P92.04
Relay
Normal Alarm A-OL
output
P92.04 setting range: 0.0–150.0% (relative to the

motor rated torque in closed-loop state; relative to
the motor rated current in open-loop state; 0
indicates disabling)
Brake detection When P92.06>0, the brake detection reminding
P92.06 0.0 ◎
reminding interval function is enabled, if the accumulative running
time of the VFD is equal to or greater than P92.06,
the signal indicator is controlled through relay
output signal or braking detection is reminded
Brake detection
through the buzzer. The reminding hold time is
P92.07 reminding hold 5 ○
specified by P92.07. After the time elapsed,
time
reminding is not performed until re-power on.
P92.06 setting range: 0.0–1000.0h
P92.07 setting range: 0–100min
Brake detection In open-loop control: Set a fixed torque and
P92.08 150.0% ○
torque setting frequency and run the VFD. Through visual
Brake detection inspection, if the brake is not opened within the
P92.09 5.00Hz ○
frequency setting detection time, braking is normal. Otherwise,
braking is abnormal.
Brake detection
P92.10 In closed-loop control: When the braking force 5.0s ○
time setting
detection terminal enabling signal is valid, the VFD
P92.11 Brake detection keeps the brake closed, if a running command is 500 ○
- 373 -
Function Default
code value
judging pulse input, the VFD runs with P92.08 at P92.09 and
threshold detects the encoder pulse count. If the detected
(closed-loop) encoder pulse count exceeds P92.11 within
P92.10, it is considered that braking force is
insufficient and slip risk may exist. Then the
multifunction output terminal outputs brake failure
signal and the brake slip fault and outputs the
brake failure fault (bE).
P92.08 setting range: 0.0%–180.0% (of the motor
rated torque)
P92.09 setting range: 0.00Hz–20.00Hz
P92.10 setting range: 0.0s–30.0s
0x00–0x11
Ones place: whether to enable PT100 temperature
detection
Enabling
0: Disable
PT100/PT1000
P92.12 1: Enable 0x00 ◎
temperature
Tens place: whether to enable PT1000
detection
temperature detection
0: Disable
1: Enable
PT100
P92.13 overtemperature 0.0–150.0°C 120.0°C ○
protection point
PT100
alarm point
PT100 calibration
Temperature
P92.15 temperature 120.0°C ○
P92.15
upper limit
PT100 calibration
P92.16 temperature lower 10.0°C ○
P92.16
limit
P92.18 P92.17 Temperature
Digital of PT100 sampling value
P92.17 calibration upper 2950 ○

limit To enable PT100 temperature detection, perform
- 374 -
Function Default
code value
calibration first:
Step 1. Select two temperature points as the
calibration temperature upper and lower limits.
Step 2. Test the sampling values of the resistance
values corresponding to the two calibration
temperature points and use the sampling values
as the calibration temperature upper and lower
limit digitals (after calibration temperature points
Digital of PT100 are set, digitals can be directly transferred after the
P92.18 calibration lower enabling is performed by setting P92.26). 1270 ○
limit PT1000 temperature calibration uses the same
rule.
P92.15 setting range: 50.0–150.0°C
P92.16 setting range: -20.0–50.0°C
P92.17, P92.18 setting range: 0–4096
Note: If the temperature measurement range is
from -20°C to 150.0°C, it is recommended that
10°C and 120°C be used as the calibration
temperature points.
PT1000
protection point
PT1000
alarm point
PT1000
calibration
P92.21 Temperature 120.0°C ○
temperature
P92.21
upper limit
PT1000
calibration
P92.22 10.0°C ○
temperature lower P92.22
P92.24 P92.23 Temperature

limit sampling value
Digital of PT1000
P92.23 calibration upper P92.21 setting range: 50.0–150.0°C 3100 ○
limit P92.22 setting range: -20.0–50.0°C
Digital of PT1000 P92.23, P92.24 setting range: 0–4096
P92.24 1100 ○
calibration lower
- 375 -
Function Default
code value
limit
0x00–0x11
Ones place: PT100 disconnection detection
Enabling
0: Disable
PT100/PT1000
P92.25 1: Enable 0x00 ○
disconnection
Tens place: PT1000 disconnection detection
detection
0: Disable
1: Enable
0–4
0: Invalid
1: Enable PT100 calibration lower limit digital
Enabling digital of
2: Enable PT100 calibration upper limit digital
PT100/PT1000
P92.26 3: Enable PT1000 calibration lower limit digital 0 ○
calibration
4: Enable PT1000 calibration upper limit digital
temperature
For example:
When P92.26=1, P94.09 is transferred to P92.18,
and P92.26=0.
Anti-snag Output P92.28
frequency
P92.27 protection braking 0.0% ○
torque
P92.29
Braking torque
P92.28 S-terminal
anti-snag
0.200s ○
ACC/DEC time protection
command
Output
torque
P92.27
Anti-snag indicates that the VFD outputs reserve

Braking torque torque so that the motor can stop at the fastest
P92.29 0.10Hz ○
end frequency speed. A smaller value of P92.28 indicates a faster
braking speed. When the motor decelerates to
P92.29, the VFD stops.
P92.27 setting range: 0.0–300.0% (of the motor
rated current)
P92.30 Enabling set 0–1 0 ◎
- 376 -
Function Default
code value
frequency 0: Disable
protection 1: Enable
After the function is enabled, if the brake is
opened, detection protection is performed. When
the set frequency is equal to or lower than the
value of P92.31, a fault is reported (the frequency
setting fault SFE is reported after the speed is
decreased if the speed is high); if the brake is
closed, no detection is performed.
Set frequency ◎
P92.31 fault protection 0.00–10.00Hz 2.00Hz
threshold
0.0–5.5
When the value is not zero, current imbalance
Current imbalance
P92.32 detection is enabled. When the 3PH current max. 0.0 ◎
multiple
value divided by the min. value is greater than this
multiple, the Cuu fault is reported.
0–1
0: The PTC function is valid through terminal
PTC
selection, the PTC overtemperature alarm A-Ptc is
overtemperature
P92.33 reported, but the machine still runs properly. 0 ◎
protection
1: The PTC function is valid through terminal
selection
selection, the PTC overtemperature fault PtcE is
reported, but the machine stops.
7.2.32 P93 Hoisting closed-loop functions
Function Default
code value
Brake slip speed

P93.00 1.00–5.00Hz 1.00Hz ○
threshold
0.000–5.000s
The value 0 indicates brake slip is not detected,
Brake slip fault
P93.01 while a non-zero value indicates brake slip is 0.500s ○
delay
detected. If the feedback frequency is greater than
the value of P93.00, which lasts the time specified
- 377 -
Function Default
code value
by P93.01, the brake failure fault (bE) is reported.

For details, see the torque verifying and brake slip
descriptions in the brake function commissioning
section.
The zero servo function is applied in the
closed-loop vector control mode. When P93.02=1,
the zero servo input slows down, the load is slowly
put on the ground in zero servo state. When
P93.02=2, the motor is locked to the stopped
state, which indicates that the VFD keeps the
motor in the position where the motor stops even if
external force is applied to the motor.
0–2
0: Disable zero servo
1: Zero servo input slows down
2: Zero servo input is always valid (keep running at
zero speed)
Stop
Stop
Zero servo Y Pulses

Pulses detected
detected N
P93.02 at
at stop
stop >> P93.05?
P93.05? 0 ○
protection mode
N Y
Fault
Fault occurred?
occurred?
Fault
Fault reset
reset
Stop
Stop
Zero-servo
Zero-servo
running
running
Note:
• When certain faults (that cannot be reset, such
as VFD internal hardware damage) occurred, the
zero servo state cannot be entered. When other
faults (that can be reset) occurred, the zero servo
state can be entered when the zero servo
condition is met.
• Every time the zero servo state is exited, torque
verification is not performed for the first given
running command, but it is performed for the later
given running commands.
P93.03 Brake failure (1) When P93.02=1: 4.00Hz ○
- 378 -
Function Default
code value
protection VFD brake

frequency failure output
Mechanical
Slow lowering brake failure
P93.04 Load 2.0s ○
hold time height h
Initial P93.04 P93.04

height P93.05
P93.05
1st action 2nd action Time t

Horizon
t1 t2 t3
Zero servo is used in closed-loop vector control to

check whether the pulse count at stop is greater
than the threshold P93.05. If the threshold is
exceeded, a brake failure alarm is reported. The
Zero servo output can be set through relay. After the time
P93.05 tolerance pulse P93.06 (if the pulse count is greater than triple of 20000 ○
threshold P93.05, the delay P93.06 is directly skipped), if the
option " Zero servo input slows down" is selected,
the VFD runs downward slowly at the frequency
P93.03 and coasts to stop within the time P93.04.
Then the VFD performs inspection again.
(2) When P93.02=2: Zero servo input is always
valid (keeping running at zero speed).
P93.03 setting range: P90.17 (Reverse brake
release frequency)–8.00Hz
P93.04 setting range: 0.0s–30.0s
Brake failure
P93.06 alarm protection 0–20.000s 1.000s ○
input delay
Brake failure 0–1
P93.07 alarm protection 0: Only for downward running 1 ◎
reset method 1: Both for upward and downward running
0–1
Enabling height 0: Disable
P93.08 0 ◎
measuring 1: Enable internal measuring (motor encoder)
- 379 -
Function Default
code value

to measure heights.
For internal measurement (motor encoder), the
encoder is mounted on the motor shaft, and
P93.09 is the reduction ratio between the motor
shaft and drum shaft.
For external measurement (HDI), P93.09 is the
reduction ratio between the encoder mounting
shaft and pulley shaft. If the encoder is mounted
on the pulley, set P93.09=1.
For example, for gear speed reduction,
Mechanical
P93.09 Mechanical transmission ratio = (Number of teeth 10.00 ○
transmission ratio
in gear 2)/( Number of teeth in gear 1)
Gear 2
Gear 1

1–4
1: 1:1
2: 1:2
P93.10 Suspension ratio 1 ◎
3: Reserved
4: 1:4
Example: Suspension ratio
- 380 -
Function Default
code value
1:1 1:2
1:4
Note: The suspension ratio is related to the pulley

through which the steel rope goes.
Rope length to compensate the distance from the

Rope length
P93.11 center of gravity of the weight to the hook. 0.00m ○
compensation
0.00m–50.00m
P93.12 Cable diameter (1) To measure heights correctly in closed-loop 10.0 ○
Per-layer turns of mode, the actual running distance of the motor is
P93.13 30 ○
drum winding calculated by using the encoder pulse count.
Initial turns of Before first running, the upward limit position must
P93.14 0 ○
drum winding be calibrated.
Do as follows:
Set the upward limit position terminal, for example,
P05.05=64. Then the HDI terminal functions as the
upward limit position input.
If internal measurement (motor encoder) is
enabled, set P93.08=1.
Start the tower crane to run upward and stop at the
Initial diameter of
upward limit position.
P93.15 drum/pulley 600.0 ◎
Record the values of P93.14 and P93.15.
diameter
(2) In open/closed loop mode, if external
measurement (HDI) is enabled, set P93.08=2.
Start the tower crane to run upward and stop at the
upward limit position.
P93.12 setting range: 0.1–100.0mm
P93.14 setting range: 0–P93.13 (Winding turns of
- 381 -
Function Default
code value
the outermost layer in upward limit)

P93.15 setting range: 100.0–2000.0mm
(Max. drum diameter in upward limit, including
cable thickness)
P94.05 setting range: 0.00–655.35m (hook
lowering distance)
P94.06, P94.07 setting range: 0–65535
0x00–0x11
Ones place:
0: The upward limit position is not reached.
1: The upward limit position is reached.
Tens place:
0: The downward limit position is not reached.
1: The downward limit position is reached.
For example, when the upward/downward limit
position needs to be set manually, you can enable
the check of whether the upward/downward limit
position is reached.
Enabling
P93.17 displays the height from the downward
upward/downward
P93.16 limit position to the upward limit position, P93.18 0x00 ○
limit position
displays the height using the downward limit
check
position as the reference point (the height is 0 at
the downward limit position, the height is positive
when it is above the downward limit position, the
height is negative when it is under the downward
limit position), and P94.05 displays the height
using the upward limit position as the reference
point (the height is 0 at the upward limit position,
and only downward running is allowed when the
upward limit position is reached, and P94.05
indicates the rope droop length when the upward
limit position is not reached).
0.00–655.35m (Total height measured from the ●
Total height
P93.17 upward limit position to the downward limit 0.00m
measured
position)
Measured height -50.00m–655.35m ●
P93.18 0.00m
1 (The downward limit position is used as the
- 382 -
Function Default
code value
reference point, during downward limit,

P93.18=0.00m)
0: Invalid
Loose rope
P93.19 1: Autotuning for upward 0 ◎
autotuning
2: Autotuning for downward
0–2
Enabling loose 0: Disable
P93.20 0 ◎
rope protection 1: Enable
2: Enable stable lifting protection
0–2
Loose rope 0: Set through torque
P93.21 0 ◎
detection method 1: Set through torque autotuning
2: Set through external signal detection (AI1)
Upward fixed
P93.22 value of external 0.0–10.0V 0.0V ○
loose rope signal
Downward fixed
P93.23 value of external 0.0–10.0V 0.0V ○
loose rope signal
Torque setting for After loose rope protection is enabled, loose rope
P93.24 upward loose detection is performed during hoist startup: 5.0% ○
rope protection When the hoist runs upward and reaches P93.26,
Torque setting for torque detection is performed after the delay
P93.25 downward loose P93.28. If the detected status is non loose rope 5.0% ○
rope protection (Torque value > Loose rope torque P93.24 or
Loose rope P93.25 for downward running), normal ACC/DEC
protection is performed.
P93.26 15.00Hz ○
maintenance If the detected status is loose rope (Torque value
frequency <= Loose rope torque P93.24), the output
Loose rope frequency is restricted to P93.26 within P93.27.
P93.27 protection If load holding, (Torque value) > (Loose rope 2.0s ○
maintenance time torque P93.24+2%), is detected within P93.27,
normal ACC/DEC is performed from this time.
If the time exceeds P93.27, normal ACC/DEC is
Loose rope
P93.28 performed from this time. 0.5s ○
detection delay
P93.24 can be set with the reference to the
autotuning result P93.33. Generally, the value of
- 383 -
Function Default
code value
P93.24 can be the value of P93.33 added by

1%–2%.
Load held
Output frequency during loose
f Loose
Non loose rope
rope
rope status protection
protection
Target timeout
frequency
P93.26
P93.28 P93.27
Time t
Output
torque
Non loose
P93.24 rope
status
Output
torque
P93.24+2% Load held during

P93.24 loose rope
protection
Output
torque
P93.24+2% Loose rope

P93.24 protection timeout
P93.24, P93.25 setting range: 0.0–50.0% (rated

torque)
P93.26 setting range: 10.00Hz–P02.02
Downward loose
P93.29 rope protection 0 ◎
mode P93_29 setting range: 0–1
REV running time During downward running, if the loose rope status
of downward occurs after the loose rope detection delay, the
P93.30 5.00s ○
loose rope mode preset processing way is used.
2 0: Mode 1. The VFD reports the loose rope
Frequency setting protection fault (SLE) and stops.
P93.31 of downward 5.00Hz ○
loose rope mode
- 384 -
Function Default
code value
2 Output
frequency
Time t
P93.26
P93.28
Output
torque
P93.26
Loose rope
protection
VFD Normal SLE

fault
status
1: Mode 2. The VFD outputs the loose rope

protection alarm (A-SL), changes the direction,
and runs upward at the frequency specified by
P93.31, and the VFD runs downward only when
the time specified by P93.30 is reached or the
loose rope status disappears.
Output
frequency
P93.31
Time t
P93.26
P93.30
Target P93.28
frequency
Output
torque
P93.26
Loose rope
protection
VFD Normal A-SL alarm

status
P93.30 setting range: 0–20.00s

P93.31 setting range: 1.00Hz–10.00Hz
- 385 -
Function Default
code value
Note: P93.30 must be greater than the sum of the

time taken to decelerate from P93.26 to 0Hz and
the time taken to accelerate from 0Hz to P93.31.
Torque of upward The autotuning procedure is as follows:
P93.32 loose rope Step 1 Put the hook on the ground and loosen the 0.0% ○
autotuning rope.
Step 2 Set P93.19=1 (or P93.19=2 for downward
running).
Step 3 Push the operating lever to step-2 speed
(higher than 10Hz), which is held at least 1s in the
Torque of loose rope state after the frequency is stable (to
P93.33 downward loose autotune stable frequency torque). 0.0% ○
rope autotuning Step 4 Stop the device and check the autotuning
result. If P93.32 (or P93.33 for downward running)
is not 0, autotuning is successful. Otherwise, you
have to perform autotuning again.
P93.32, P93.33 setting range: 0.0–50.0%
Stable lifting
P93.34 protection 30.0%/s ○
Output
frequency frequency
Set
Stable lifting frequency
torque change
P93.35 10.00HZ ○
ratio protection P93.35
point 1 (in ACC)

Time
Load P93.36
change
rate
P93.34
Stable lifting
torque change Time
ratio protection
P93.36 Start/stop 2.0s ○
point 2 (in command Start
constant speed
When P93.20=2, indicating stable lifting protection
running)
is enabled, and the VFD has started, the VFD runs
at the frequency specified by P93.35 if the lifting
load change rate is greater than P93.34; the VFD
runs at the set frequency if the lifting load change
- 386 -
Function Default
code value
rate is equal to or less than P93.34.

P93.34 setting range: 0.0–100.0%/s
Note: Stable lifting is valid only for upward
running.
Stable lifting
torque change
P93.37 ratio protection 10.0%/s
point 3 (exiting
stable lifting)
- 387 -
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
The chapter tells how to reset faults and check faults history. A complete list of alarms and fault
information as well as possible causes and corrective measures are presented in this chapter.
 Only well-trained and qualified professionals are allowed to carry out the
work described in this chapter. Operations should be carried out according to
the instructions presented in Safety precautions.
8.2 Indications of alarms and faults

The fault is indicated by indicators. When TRIP indicator is on, the alarm or fault code displayed in the
keypad indicates the VFD is in exception state. This chapter covers most of the alarms and faults, and
their possible causes and corrective measures, if you cannot figure out the alarm or fault causes,
contact local INVT office.
8.3 Fault reset
You can reset the VFD via STOP/RST key on the keypad, digital inputs, or by cutting off the VFD
power. After faults are removed, the motor can be start again.
8.4 Fault history
P07.27–P07.32 record the six latest fault types; P07.33–P07.40, P07.41–P07.48, and
P07.49–P07.56 record the running data of the VFD when the latest three faults occurred.
8.5 VFD faults and solutions
When fault occurred, process the fault as shown below.
1. When VFD fault occurred, confirm whether keypad display is improper? If yes, contact INVT;
2. If keypad works properly, check the function codes in P07 group to confirm the corresponding
fault record parameters, and determine the real state when current fault occurred through
parameters;
3. Check the table below to see whether corresponding exception states exist based on the
corresponding corrective measures;
4. Rule out the faults or ask for help from professionals;
5. After confirming faults are removed, reset the fault and start running.
8.5.1 Details of faults and solutions
Fault
Fault type Possible cause Corrective measure
code
Inverter unit
OUt1 Acceleration is too fast; Increase acceleration time;
Phase-U protection
- 388 -
Fault
code
Inverter unit IGBT module is damaged; Replace the power unit;

OUt2
Phase-V protection Misacts caused by Check drive wires;
interference; drive wires are Check whether there is strong
poorly connected; interference surrounds the
Inverter unit
OUt3
Phase-W protection To-ground short circuit peripheral equipment
occurs
Over-voltage during Check input power;

OV1
acceleration Exception occurred to input Check whether load
voltage; deceleration time is too short;
Over-voltage during
OV2 Large energy feedback; or the motor starts during
deceleration
Lack of braking units; rotating;
Over-voltage during Dynamic brake is not Install dynamic braking units;

OV3 constant speed enabled Check the setup of related
running function codes
Over-current during Increase acceleration

OC1
acceleration Acceleration is too fast; /deceleration time;
Check input power;
Over-current during Grid voltage is too low;
OC2 Select the VFD with larger
deceleration VFD power is too small; power;
Load transient or exception Check if the load is short
occurred; circuited (to-ground short circuit
To-ground short circuit or or line-to-line short circuit) or
output phase loss occur; the rotation is not smooth;
Over-current during
OC3 constant speed Strong external interference Check the output wiring;
running sources; Check if there is strong
Overvoltage stall protection interference;
is not enabled Check the setup of related
function codes.
Grid voltage is too low; Check grid input power;

Bus undervoltage
UV Overvoltage stall protection Check the setup of related
fault
is not enabled function codes
- 389 -
Fault
code
Grid voltage is too low;

Check grid voltage;
Rated motor current is set
Reset rated motor current;
OL1 Motor overload improperly;
Check the load and adjust
Motor stall or load jumps
torque boost
violently
Acceleration is too fast; Increase acceleration time;
The motor in rotating is Avoid restart after stop;

restarted; Check grid voltage;
OL2 VFD overload
Grid voltage is too low; Select the VFD with larger
Load is too large; power;
Power is too small; Select proper motor
Phase loss or violent

Phase loss on input Check the input power;
SPI fluctuation occurred to R, S
side Check installation wiring
and T input
Phase loss occurred to U, V,

Phase loss on W output (or the three Check the output wiring;
SPO
output side phases of motor is Check the motor and cable
asymmetrical)
Overheat of rectifier Air duct is blocked or fan is

OH1
module damaged; Ventilate the air duct or replace
Ambient temperature is too the fan;
Overheat of inverter high;
OH2 Lower the ambient temperature
module
Long-time overload running
SI external fault input

EF External fault Check external device input
terminal acts
Baud rate is set improperly; Set proper baud rate;
Communication line fault; Check the wiring of

485 communication
CE Communication address communication interfaces;
fault
error; Set proper communication
Communication suffers from address;
- 390 -
Fault
code
strong interference Replace or change the wiring to

enhance anti-interference
capacity
Poor contact of the

Check the connector and
connector of control board;
Current detection re-plug;
ItE Hall component is damaged;
fault Replace the hall component;
Exception occurred to
Replace the main control board
amplification circuit
Motor capacity does not

match with the VFD capacity, Change the VFD model, or
this fault may occur easily if adopt V/F mode for control;
the difference between them Set proper motor type and
is exceeds five power nameplate parameters;
classes;
Empty the motor load and carry
Motor autotuning
tE Motor parameter is set out autotuning again;
fault
improperly;
Check motor wiring and
The parameters gained from parameter setup;
autotuning deviate sharply
Check whether upper limit
from the standard
frequency is larger than 2/3 of
parameters;
the rated frequency
Autotuning timeout
R/W error occurred to the

Press STOP/RST to reset;
EEP EEPROM fault control parameters;
Replace the main control board
EEPROM is damaged
PID feedback offline; Check PID feedback signal

PID feedback offline
PIDE PID feedback source wires;
fault
disappears; Check PID feedback source
Brake circuit fault or brake

Check the braking unit, replace
tube is damaged;
bCE Braking unit fault with new brake tubes;
The resistance of external
Increase brake resistance
braking resistor is too small
- 391 -
Fault
code
The actual running time of

Ask help from the supplier,
END Running time is up the VFD is larger than the
adjust the set running time
set running time
The VFD releases overload

Electronic overload Check the load and overload
OL3 pre-alarm based on the set
fault pre-alarm threshold
value
The keypad wire is poorly

contacted or disconnected; Check the keypad wires to
The keypad wire is too long confirm whether fault exists;
Keypad and suffers strong Check the surroundings to rule

PCE
communication fault interference; out interference source;
Circuit fault occurred to the Replace the hardware and ask

keypad or communication for maintenance service
part of the main board

contacted or disconnected; Check the surroundings to rule
The keypad wire is too long out interference source;
Parameter upload and suffers strong Replace the hardware and ask
UPE
error interference; for maintenance service;
Circuit fault occurred to the Replace the hardware and ask

keypad or communication for maintenance service
part of the main board

contacted or disconnected; Check the surroundings to rule
The keypad wire is too long out interference source;

Parameter download
DNE and suffers strong Replace the hardware and ask
error
interference; for maintenance service;
Data storage error occurred Re-backup keypad data

to the keypad
VFD output is short

To-ground short Check whether motor wiring is
ETH1 connected to the ground;
circuit fault 1 proper;
Current detection circuit is
- 392 -
Fault
code
faulty; Replace the hall component;
Actual motor power setup Replace the main control

deviates sharply from the board;
VFD power Reset the motor parameters
properly
VFD output is short Check whether motor wiring is

connected to ground; proper;
Current detection circuit is Replace the hall component;

To-ground short
ETH2 faulty; Replace the main control
circuit fault 1
Actual motor power setup board;
deviates sharply from the Reset the motor parameters
VFD power properly
Check the load to ensure it is

proper, increase the detection
Speed deviation Load is too heavy, or stall
dEu time;
fault occurred
Check whether control
parameters are set properly
Control parameters of Check the load to ensure it is

synchronous motor is set proper,
improperly; Check whether load is proper;
STo Maladjustment fault The parameter gained from Check whether control
autotuning is inaccurate; parameters are set correctly;
The VFD is not connected to Increase maladjustment
motor detection time
The VFD performs

Electronic underload Check the load and overload
LL underload pre-alarm based
fault pre-alarm threshold
on the set value
Encoder line sequence is

ENC1O Encoder offline fault wrong, or signal wires are Check the encoder wiring
poorly connected
- 393 -
Fault
code
The encoder speed signal is

Encoder reversal
ENC1D contrary to the motor running Reset encoder direction
fault
direction
Encoder Z pulse Z signal wires are

ENC1Z Check the wiring of Z signal
offline fault disconnected
Motor over-temperature
Check the wiring of motor
input terminal is valid;
over-temperature input terminal
Exception occurred to t (terminal function 57);
Motor
temperature detection
OT over-temperature Check whether temperature
Exception occurred to
fault sensor is proper;
resistor;
Check the motor and perform
Long-time overload running
maintenance on the motor
or exception occurred
Safe torque off function is

STO Safe torque off /
enabled by external forces
The wiring of STO is Check whether terminal wiring

improper; of STO is proper and firm
Exception occurred enough;
Fault occurred to external
STL1 to safe circuit of
switch of STO; Check whether external switch
channel H1
Hardware fault occurred to of STO can work properly;
safety circuit of channel H1 Replace the control board
The wiring of STO is Check whether terminal wiring

improper; of STO is proper and firm
Exception occurred enough;
Fault occurred to external
STL2 to channel H2 safe
switch of STO; Check whether external switch
circuit
Hardware fault occurred to of STO can work properly;
safety circuit of channel H2 Replace the control board
Exception occurred
Hardware fault occurred to
STL3 to channel H1 and Replace the control board
STO circuit
channel H2
- 394 -
Fault
code
Safety code FLASH

CrCE Control board is faulty Replace the control board
CRC check fault
You should not insert two cards

with the same type; check the
Repetitive extension The two inserted extension
E-Err type of extension card, and
card type cards are of the same type
remove one card after power
down
Encoder UVW loss No electric level variation Check the wiring of UVW;
ENCUV
fault occurred to UVW signal Encoder is damaged
Confirm whether the extension

card inserted can be
supported;
Stabilize the extension card

There is data transmission in
Failed to identify the interfaces after power down,
interfaces of card slot 1,
F1-Er extension card in and confirm whether fault still
however, it cannot read the
card slot 1 occurs at next power-on;
card type
Check whether the insertion
port is damaged, if yes, replace
the insertion port after power
down

card inserted can be supported;

There is data transmission in interfaces after power down,
Failed to identify the
interfaces of card slot 2, and confirm whether fault still
F2-Er extension card in
however, it cannot read the occurs at next power-on;
card slot 2
card type Check whether the insertion
down
Failed to identify the There is data transmission in Confirm whether the extension
F3-Er
extension card in interfaces of card slot 3, card inserted can be supported;
- 395 -
Fault
code
card slot 3 however, it cannot read the Stabilize the extension card
card type interfaces after power down,
and confirm whether fault still
occurs at next power-on;

down


Communication interfaces after power down,
There is no data
timeout occurred to and confirm whether fault still
C1-Er transmission in interfaces of
the extension card in occurs at next power-on;
card slot 1
card slot 1 Check whether the insertion
down


Communication interfaces after power down,
There is no data
timeout occurred to and confirm whether fault still
C2-Er transmission in interfaces of
the extension card in occurs at next power-on;
card slot 2
card slot 2 Check whether the insertion
down

Communication
There is no data card inserted can be supported;
timeout occurred to
C3-Er transmission in interfaces of Stabilize the extension card
the extension card in
card slot 3 interfaces after power down,
card slot 3
and confirm whether fault still
- 396 -
Fault
code
occurs at next power-on;

down
There is no data
Profibus card Check whether the
transmission between the
E-DP communication communication card wiring is
communication card and the
timeout fault loose or dropped
host computer (or PLC)
There is no data Check whether the

Ethernet card
transmission between the communication card wiring is
E-NET communication
communication card and the loose or dropped
timeout fault
host computer

CANopen card
E-CAN communication
timeout fault

Profinet card
E-PN communication
timeout fault

EtherCat card
E-CAT communication
timeout fault

BACNet card
E-BAC communication
timeout fault
DeviceNET card There is no data Check whether the

E-DEV communication transmission between the communication card wiring is
timeout fault communication card and the loose or dropped
- 397 -
Fault
code
Can master/slave There is no data Check whether the

communication card transmission between the communication card wiring is
ESCAN
communication CAN master and slave loose or dropped
timeout fault communication cards
Master-slave Detect the CAN slave VFD and

Fault occurred to one of the
S-Err synchronous CAN analyze the corresponding fault
CAN slave VFDs
slave fault cause of the VFD
The input terminal selects

Failure to enable the Check the input terminal setting
dIS VFD enabling, but the
VFD and terminal signal.
terminal signal is invalid.
The contactor feedback
Check the contactor feedback
circuit is disconnected or in
Contactor feedback circuit.
tbE poor contact.
fault Increase the detection time
The contactor feedback
P91.05 to a proper value.
detection time is too short.
The brake feedback circuit is
Check the brake feedback
disconnected or in poor
circuit.
FAE Brake feedback fault contact.
Increase the detection time
The brake feedback
The torque verification
Set the torque verification
current, moment force
Torque verification current, moment force setting,
tPF setting, and torque
fault and torque verification fault
verification fault detection
detection time P90.30 properly.
time are set improperly.
The operating lever does not
Put the operating lever to the
return to the zero position.
Operating lever zero position.
StC The operating lever
zero-position fault Check out the operating lever
zero-position signal is
zero-position signal.
adhered.
Check whether the running
Low-speed running The running speed is too
LSP speed is continuously lower
protection fault low.
than P92.03.
tCE Terminal command The terminal gives both the Check the input terminal signal.
- 398 -
Fault
code
exception upward and downward

commands at the same time.
Check whether P01.18 is set to
Terminal command enable the VFD reports a fault
The terminal command is
POE exception at when a terminal command is
detected at power-on.
power-on valid at power-on.
Check the input terminal signal.
Check whether the hook rope is
The hook rope is abnormal.
normal.
Loose rope The downward loose rope
SLE Check whether the downward
protection fault parameter setting is
loose rope detection torque is
improper.
proper.
The brake force is
Check whether the brake is
insufficient.
normal.
bE Brake failure The brake detection
Check whether the brake slip
parameter setting is
parameter setting is proper.
improper.
The encoder pulse
Check the encoders for the
difference between the
Master/salve master and slave.
master and slave is too
ELS position Check whether the pulse
great.
synchronization fault threshold of the slave is too
The pulse threshold setting
small.
is improper.
If the speed is given by
Analog speed analog, the analog voltage is
Check the analog wiring and
AdE reference deviation greater than 1.0V after
current voltage value.
fault zero-position detection is
complete.
The current environment
Check the current environment
temperature is too high.
temperature.
PT100 PT100 detection circuit is
Check PT100 circuit.
OtE1 overtemperature abnormal.
Check whether PT100
fault PT100 overtemperature
overtemperature protection
protection setting is
point is too small.
improper.
PT1000 The current environment Check the current environment
OtE2
overtemperature temperature is too high. temperature.
- 399 -
Fault
code
fault PT1000 detection circuit is Check PT1000 circuit.

abnormal. Check whether PT1000
PT1000 overtemperature overtemperature protection
protection setting is point is too small.
improper.
Check whether the frequency
The set frequency is too
SFE Set frequency fault reference is smaller than the
small.
set frequency protection point.
PTC
The current environment Check the current environment
PtcE overtemperature
temperature is too high. temperature.
fault
8.5.2 VFD alarms and corrective measures
Alarm
Alarm type Possible cause Corrective measure
code
During stop, a loss of either
Input phase loss input phase R, S, or T Check the input power source
A-SPI
alarm occurs or fluctuation is and wiring.
great.
The input terminal has set Check whether the allowed
the upward limited position highest position point has
Upward position
A-LU reaching function, and been reached.
limit alarm
there is a signal reference Check the input terminal
to the terminal. signal.
The input terminal has set Check whether the allowed
the downward limited lowest position point has
Downward position
A-Ld position reaching function, been reached.
limit alarm
and there is a signal Check the input terminal
reference to the terminal. signal.
Check whether the voltage
protection point is too high.
A-LvP Low voltage alarm The bus voltage is too low. Check whether the grid
voltage or rectifier module is
abnormal.
The load is too heavy. Check whether the load is too
Overload protection The overload protection heavy.
A-OL
alarm parameter is set is Check whether the overload
improperly. protection point is too small.
- 400 -
Alarm
Alarm type Possible cause Corrective measure
code
Check whether the brake
The brake force is
works normally.
insufficient.
Check whether the encoder
The encoder is abnormal.
A-bS Brake failure alarm works normally.
The zero servo detection
Check whether the zero servo
parameter is set is
tolerance pulse threshold is
improperly.
too small.
The brake feedback circuit
Check the brake feedback
is disconnected or in poor
Brake feedback circuit.
A-FA contact.
alarm Increase the detection time
The brake feedback
Check whether the hook rope
The hook rope is abnormal.
is normal.
Loose rope The downward loose rope
A-SL Check whether the downward
protection alarm parameter setting is
loose rope detection torque is
improper.
proper.
The current environment Check the current
PT100 temperature is too high. environment temperature.
A-Ot1 overtemperature PT100 overtemperature Check whether PT100
alarm protection setting is overtemperature protection
improper. point is too small.
Check the current
The current environment
PT1000 environment temperature.
temperature is too high.
A-Ot2 overtemperature Check whether PT1000
PT1000 overtemperature
alarm overtemperature protection
alarm setting is improper.
point is too small.
PT100 PT100 connection circuit is Check PT100 connection
A-Pt1
disconnection alarm opened. circuit.
PT1000 PT1000 connection circuit Check PT1000 connection
A-Pt2
disconnection alarm is opened. circuit.
PTC
The current environment Check the current
A-Ptc overtemperature
temperature is too high. environment temperature.
alarm
Note: After fault recovery, the corresponding alarm is automatically reset.
- 401 -
8.5.3 Other status
Display code Status Possible cause Solution
System power The system is powered off or Check the grid

PoFF
failure the bus voltage is too low. conditions.
8.6 Analysis on common faults

8.6.1 Motor fails to work
Motor fails to work
Whether the POWER

No Whether the air switch No
indicator is on? Close the air
and EM contactor on the
Whether the keypad contactor
input side are closed?
displays information?
Yes Yes
Rectify the fault Yes Check the voltage Normal

Running Whether fault information
based on the of RST with a VFD fault
properly is displayed?
fault inforamtion multimeter
No
Normal Exception occurs
Communication
Whether it runs
No Terminal
properly after the Whether communication Identify the channel of Check the voltage Running
parameters are parameters are properly set? running commands of the grid properly
reset?
Exception occurs Yes
Normal
Keypad
normal
Normal No Whether it runs

Whether the Running Check whether the input terminal properly after the
Running Press RUN to run
communication wiring properly is in the correct state terminal is closed?
properly is performed properly?
Yes
Exception occurs Exception occurs
Exception occurs
Normal
Whether the speed No Whether it runs properly after Normal
command is set the speed command is properly
set? running
properly?
Yes
Exception occurs
Check the voltage of
VFD fault
UVW with a multimeter
Normal
Whether the motor is No Wire the motor

properly wired? properly
Yes
No Yes Reduce the load if

Whether the load is too
Motor fault the motor is locked
heavy?
due to heavy loads
- 402 -
8.6.2 Motor vibrates
Motor vibrates or emits

an unusual sound
Whether the motor No Set the motor type

parameters and motor type and parameters
are set correctly ? correctly
Yes
Whether autotuning is No
Perform autotuning
performed?
Yes
No Whether the V/F No Whether it is vector

vibration parameter is control?
set properly?
Yes
Yes
Whether the ASR and ACR No
Set the parameters Set the parameter
parameters are set
properly properly
properly?
Yes
Whether unusual Yes Check the set

fluctuations occurs when it
frequency
runs at the set frequency?
No
Whether unusual Yes

fluctuations occurs on the Check the load
load?
No
If it is a VFD fault, contact

our company
- 403 -
8.6.3 Overvoltage
Overvoltage fault
Whether the voltage of the No Ensure the power supply

power supply is within the
standard range? meets the requirement
Yes
Whether UVW on the output

side of the VFD is short to
Yes Rectify the short-circuit
ground?
fault and perform the
Whether the wiring on the
wiring properly
output side of the VFD is
performed properly?
Yes
Whether the ACC/DEC Yes Whether the ACC/DEC Yes Prolong the ACC/DEC
time is too short? time can be prolonged? time
No
No
Yes Whether the loaded motor Whether to use a Yes
Check the load and adjust Add brake accessories
is drived reversely? brake accessory?
No No
Adjust the brake
If it is a VFD fault, contact accessories and
our company resistance
8.6.4 Undervoltage
Undervoltage fault
Whether the voltage of the Yes

Ensure the power supply
power supply is within the
meet the requirement
standard range?
No
Whether the air switch and Yes Close the air switch and
contactor are opened or contactor; and rectify the
encounter exceptions? exceptions
No
Whether a large-power device Yes

Adjust the input of the
is running on the grid that pulls
grid
down the voltage of the grid?
No
Whether the VFD is Yes Identify the power-off

powered off during causes, and rectify the
running? exceptions
No

our company
- 404 -
8.6.5 Unusual heating of motor
Unusual heating of the

motor
Whether the motor No Set the motor

parameters are set parameters
correctly? correctly
Yes
Whether parameter No Parameter

autotuning is autotune
performed?
Yes
No Whether the VFD runs at a

low speed all the time?
Yes
Whether it is a variable- No Use a variable-

frequency motor? frequency motor
Yes
Whether the load is Yes Reduce the

too heavy? load
No
Whether the three No Replace the
phases of the motor are
motor
balanced?
Yes
Yes Set the carrier

Whether the carrier
frequency
frequency is too low?
properly
No
Whether the motor Yes Add an output

cable is too long? filter
No

our company
- 405 -
8.6.6 VFD overheating
VFD overheating
Whether the load is too Yes Reduce the load and

heavy or the capacity of increase the capacity
the VFD is too small? of the VFD
No
Whether the ambient Yes Add a cooling device

temperature is too
or derate the VFD
high?
No
Whether the fan of Yes If it is a VFD fault,

the VFD emits an
contact our company
unusual sound?
No
Yes Clean the heat sink to

Whether the heat sink
improve the cooling
is blocked?
conditions
No
Whether the carrier Yes Reduce the carrier

frequency is too high? frequency
No
If it is a VFD fault,
contact our company
- 406 -
8.6.7 Motor stalls during ACC
Motor stalls during

ACC
Yes
Whether the ACC Increase the ACC
time is too short? time
No
Check the voltage of the Yes Use larger cables, shorten the
terminals of the motor with a
wiring distance, adjust the voltage
multimeter. Whether the voltage
drop of the output reactor, etc.
is within the defined range?
No
Whether the load Yes Yes

Whether a special Contact our
or inertia is too
motor is used? company
large?
No No
Reduce the torque of Reduce the inertia of

Yes
the load and Whether the load the load and
过电流
increase the capacity torque is too large? increase the capacity
of the VFD of the VFD
No
If it is a VFD fault or No Whether the Yes

Whether it is V/F
interference, contact torque boost
control?
our company is too high?
Yes No
Whether parameter No
Modify the torque
autotuning is Overcurrent
boost
performed?
Yes
If it is a VFD fault or
interference, contact our
company
- 407 -
8.6.8 Overcurrent
Overcurrent
Whether UVW on the

output side of the VFD is Rectify the short-to-
short to ground? Remove Yes ground fault, and
the motor cable and configure the motor
checked whether it is cables properly
connected to earth.
No
Whether the motor is Yes

Replace the motor
short to ground?
No
Whether the motor type and No Set the motor type and
parameters are set correctly? parameters correctly
Yes
Whether parameter No Perform parameter

autotuning is
autotuning
performed?
Yes
Whether the Yes Adjust the ACC/DEC

ACC/DEC time is too
time
short?
No
Yes Reduce the load and

Whether the load is
increase the capacity of
too heavy?
the VFD
No
Whether there are Yes Remove the

interference sources? interference sources
No
Decrease the torque Yes Whether the torque Yes Whether it is V/F
boost boost is too high? control?
No No
No Whether the multi- No

Whether the ASR and ACR Set the ASR and ACR
Adjust the V/F curve dots V/F curve is set
parameters are set properly? parameters properly
properly?
Yes Yes
Set the Yes Whether unusual

V/F vibration control vibration occurs on
contact our company
parameters properly the motor?
No
contact our company
- 408 -
8.7 Countermeasures on common interference

8.7.1 Interference on meter switches and sensors
Interference phenomenon
Pressure, temperature, displacement, and other signals of a sensor are collected and displayed by a
human-machine interaction device. The values are incorrectly displayed as follows after the VFD is
started:
1. The upper or lower limit is wrongly displayed, for example, 999 or -999.
2. The display of values jumps (usually occurring on pressure transmitters).
3. The display of values is stable, but there is a large deviation, for example, the temperature is
dozens of degrees higher than the common temperature (usually occurring on thermocouples).
4. A signal collected by a sensor is not displayed but functions as a drive system running feedback
signal. For example, a VFD is expected to decelerate when the upper pressure limit of the
compressor is reached, but in actual running, it starts to decelerate before the upper pressure
limit is reached.
5. After a VFD is started, the display of all kinds of meters (such as frequency meter and current
meter) that are connected to the analog output (AO) terminal of the VFD is severely affected,
displaying the values incorrectly.
6. Proximity switches are used in the system. After a VFD is started, the indicator of a proximity
switch flickers, and the output level flips.
Solution
1. Check and ensure that the feedback cable of the sensor is 20 cm or farther away from the motor
cable.
2. Check and ensure that the ground wire of the motor is connected to the PE terminal of the VFD (if
the ground wire of the motor has been connected to the ground block, you need to use a
multimeter to measure and ensure that the resistance between the ground block and PE terminal
is lower than 1.5 Ω).
3. Try to add a safety capacitor of 0.1 μF to the signal end of the feedback signal terminal of the
sensor.
4. Try to add a safety capacitor of 0.1 μF to the power end of the sensor meter (pay attention to the
voltage of the power supply and the voltage endurance of the capacitor).
5. For interference on meters connected to the AO terminal of a VFD, if AO uses current signals of 0
to 20 mA, add a capacitor of 0.47 μF between the AO and GND terminals; and if AO uses voltage
signals of 0 to 10 V, add a capacitor of 0.1 μF between the AO and GND terminals.
Note:
1. When a decoupling capacitor is required, add it to the terminal of the device connected to the
- 409 -
sensor. For example, if a thermocouple is to transmit signals of 0 to 20 mA to a temperature meter,

the capacitor needs to be added on the terminal of the temperature meter.; if an electronic ruler is
to transmit signals of 0 to 30 V to a PLC signal terminal, the capacitor needs to be added on the
terminal of the PLC.
2. If a large number of meters or sensors are disturbed. It is recommended that you configure an
external C2 filter on the input power end of the VFD. For models of filters, see section D.8.
8.7.2 Interference on communication
The interference described in this section on 485 communication mainly includes communication
delay, out of sync, occasional power-off, or complete power-off that occurs after a VFD is started.
If the communication cannot be implemented properly, regardless of whether the VFD is running, the
exception is not necessarily caused by interference. You can find out the causes as follows:
1. Check whether the 485 communication bus is disconnected or in poor contact.
2. Check whether the two ends of line A or B are connected reversely.
3. Check whether the communication protocol (such as the baud rate, data bits, and check bit) of
the VFD is consistent with that of the upper computer.
If you are sure that communication exceptions are caused by interference, you can resolve the
problem through the following measures:
1. Simple inspection.
2. Arrange the communication cables and motor cables in different cable trays.
3. In multi-VFD application scenarios, adopt the chrysanthemum connection mode to connect the
communication cables between VFDs, which can improve the anti-interference capability.
4. In multi-VFD application scenarios, check and ensure that the driving capacity of the master is
sufficient.
5. In the connection of multiple VFDs, you need to configure one 120 Ω terminal resistor on each
end.
Solution
1. Check and ensure that the ground wire of the motor is connected to the PE terminal of the VFD (if
the ground wire of the motor has been connected to the ground block, you need to use a
multimeter to measure and ensure that the resistance between the ground block and PE terminal
is lower than 1.5 Ω).
2. Do not connect the VFD and motor to the same ground terminal as the upper computer. It is
recommended that you connect the VFD and motor to the power ground, and connect the upper
computer separately to a ground stud.
3. Try to short the signal reference ground terminal (GND) of the VFD with that of the upper
- 410 -
computer controller to ensure that ground potential of the communication chip on the control
board of the VFD is consistent with that of the communication chip of the upper computer.
4. Try to short GND of the VFD to its ground terminal (PE).
5. Try to add a safety capacitor of 0.1 μF on the power terminal of the upper computer (PLC, HMI,
and touch screen). During this process, pay attention to the voltage of the power supply and the
voltage endurance capability of the capacitor. Alternatively, you can use a magnet ring (Fe-based
nanocrystalline magnet rings are recommended). Put the power L/N line or +/- line of the upper
computer through the magnet ring in the same direction and wind 8 coils around the magnet ring.
8.7.3 Failure to stop and indicator shimmering due to motor cable coupling
1. Failure to stop
In a VFD system where an S terminal is used to control the start and stop, the motor cable and control
cable are arranged in the same cable tray. After the system is started properly, the S terminal cannot
be used to stop the VFD.
2. Indicator shimmering
After a VFD is started, the relay indicator, power distribution box indicator, PLC indicator, and
indication buzzer shimmers, blinks, or emits unusual sounds unexpectedly.
Solution
1. Check and ensure that the exception signal cable is arranged 20 cm or farther away from the
motor cable.
2. Add a safety capacitor of 0.1 μF between the digital input terminal (S) and the COM terminal.
3. Connect the digital input terminal (S) that controls the start and stop to other idle digital input
terminals in parallel. For example, if S1 is used to control the start and stop and S4 is idle, you
can try to connect S1 to S4 in parallel.
Note: If the controller (such as PLC) in the system controls more than 5 VFDs at the same time
through digital input terminals (S), this scheme is not available.
8.7.4 Leakage current and interference on RCD
VFDs output high-frequency PWM voltage to drive motors. In this process, the distributed
capacitance between the internal IGBT of a VFD and the heat sink and that between the stator and
rotor of a motor may inevitably cause the VFD to generate high-frequency leakage current to the
ground. A residual current operated protective device (RCD) is used to detect the power-frequency
leakage current when a grounding fault occurs on a circuit. The application of a VFD may cause
misoperation of a RCD.
1. Rules for selecting RCDs
(1) VFD systems are special. In these systems, it is required that the rated residual current of
- 411 -
common RCDs at all levels is larger than 200 mA, and the VFDs are grounded reliably.
(2) For RCDs, the time limit of an action needs to be longer than that of a next action, and the time
difference between two actions need to be longer than 20 ms. For example, 1s, 0.5s, and 0.2s.
(3) For circuits in VFD systems, electromagnetic RCDs are recommended. Electromagnetic RCDs
have strong anti-interference capability, and thus can prevent the impact of high-frequency
leakage current.
Electronic RCD Electromagnetic RCD
Requiring highly sensitive, accurate, and

stable zero-phase sequence current
Low cost, high sensitivity, small in volume, transformer, using permalloy
susceptible to voltage fluctuation of the grid high-permeability materials, complex process,
and ambient temperature, weak high cost, not susceptible to voltage
anti-interference capability fluctuation of the power supply and ambient
temperature, strong anti- interference
capability
2. Solution to RCD misoperation (handling the VFD)
1. Try to remove the jumper cap at "EMC/J10" on the middle casing of the VFD.
2. Try to reduce the carrier frequency to 1.5 kHz (P00.14=1.5).
3. Try to modify the modulation mode to "3PH modulation and 2PH modulation" (P8.40=0).
3. Solution to RCD misoperation (handling the system power distribution)
(1) Check and ensure that the power cable is not soaking in water.
(2) Check and ensure that the cables are not damaged or spliced.
(3) Check and ensure that no secondary grounding is performed on the neutral wire.
(4) Check and ensure that the main power cable terminal is in good contact with the air switch or
contactor (all screws are tightened).
(5) Check 1PH powered devices, and ensure that no earth lines are used as neutral wires by these
devices.
(6) Do not use shielded cables as VFD power cables and motor cables.
8.7.5 Live device chassis
Phenomenon
After a VFD is started, there is sensible voltage on the chassis, and you may feel an electric shock
when touching the chassis. The chassis, however, is not live (or the voltage is far lower than the
human safety voltage) when the VFD is powered on but not running.
Solution
- 412 -
1. If there is power distribution grounding or ground stud on the site, ground the cabinet chassis of
the drive system through the power ground or stud.
2. If there is no grounding on the site, you need to connect the motor chassis to the ground terminal
PE of the VFD, and ensure that the jumper at "EMC/J10" on the middle casing of the VFD is
shorted.
- 413 -
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Maintenance
9 Maintenance
This chapter describes how to carry out preventive maintenance on Goodrive350-19 series VFDs.
9.2 Periodical inspection
Little maintenance is required when VFDs are installed in environments that meet requirements. The
following table describes the routine maintenance periods recommended by INVT.
Subject Item Method Criterion
Check the temperature, and

humidity, and whether there is Visual inspection, The requirements
vibration, dust, gas, oil spray, and use instruments stated in this
and water droplets in the for measurement. manual are met.
environment.
Ambient environment
Check whether there are There are no tools

foreign matters, such as tools, or dangerous
Visual inspection
or dangerous substances substances placed
placed nearby. nearby.
Use multimeters or The requirements

Check the voltage of the main
Voltage other instruments for stated in this
circuit and control circuit.
measurement. manual are met.
Check the display of The characters are

Visual inspection
information. displayed properly.
Keypad
The requirements
Check whether characters are
Visual inspection stated in this
not completely displayed.
manual are met.
Check whether the bolts No exception

Screw them up.
loose or come off. occurs.
Check whether the machine

is deformed, cracked, or
Main No exception
Common damaged, or their color Visual inspection
circuit occurs.
changes due to overheating
and aging.
Check whether there are No exception

Visual inspection
stains and dust attached. occurs.
- 414 -
Note:
Discoloration of
copper bars does
not mean that they
cannot work
properly.
Check whether the

conductors are deformed or No exception
Visual inspection
their color change due to occurs.
Conductor and overheat.
wire
Check whether the wire
No exception
sheaths are cracked or their Visual inspection
occurs.
color changes.
Check whether there is No exception

Terminal block Visual inspection
damage. occurs.
Check whether there is

electrolyte leakage, No exception
Visual inspection
discoloration, cracks, and occurs.
chassis expansion.
Determine the
service life based on
the maintenance
Filter capacitor Check whether the safety No exception
information, or
valves are released. occurs.
measure them
through electrostatic
capacity.
Check whether the Use instruments to Electrostatic

electrostatic capacity is measure the capacity ≥ initial
measured as required. capacity. value × 0.85

Olfactory and visual No exception
displacement caused due to
Resistor inspection occurs.
overheat.
Check whether the resistors Visual inspection, or Resistance range:
- 415 -
are disconnected. remove one end of ±10% (of the

the connection cable standard
and use a resistance)
multimeter for
measurement.
Check whether there is Auditory, olfactory,

Transformer No exception
unusual vibration sounds or and visual
and reactor occurs.
smells. inspection
Check whether there are

No exception
vibration sounds in the Auditory inspection
Electromagnetic occurs.
workshop.
contactor and
relay
Check whether the contacts No exception
Visual inspection
are in good contact. occurs.
Check whether the screws No exception

Screw them up.
and connectors loose. occurs.

Olfactory and visual No exception
unusual smell or
inspection occurs.
discoloration.
Control Control PCB, Check whether there are

No exception
circuit connector cracks, damage, deformation, Visual inspection
occurs.
or rust.
Visual inspection,
Check whether there is and determine the
No exception
electrolyte leakage or service life based on
occurs.
deformation. the maintenance
information.
Auditory and visual

Check whether there are inspection, and turn The rotation is
unusual sounds or vibration. the fan blades with smooth.
Cooling
Cooling fan your hand.
system
Check whether the bolts No exception

Screw them up.
loose. occurs.
- 416 -
Visual inspection,
Check whether there is and determine the
No exception
discoloration caused due to service life based on
occurs.
overheat. the maintenance
information.
Check whether there are

foreign matters blocking or No exception
Ventilation duct Visual inspection
attached to the cooling fan, air occurs.
inlets, or air outlets.
For more details about maintenance, contact the local INVT office, or visit our website www.invt.com,
and choose Service and Support > Online Service.
9.3 Cooling fan
The service life of the cooling fan of the VFD is more than 25,000 hours. The actual service life of the
cooling fan is related to the use of the VFD and the temperature in the ambient environment.
You can view the running duration of the VFD through P07.14 (Accumulated running time).
The increase of the bearing noise indicates a fan fault. If the VFD is applied in a key position, replace
the fan once the fan starts to generate unusual noise. You can purchase spare parts of fans from
INVT.
Cooling fan replacement
 Read the safety precautions carefully and follow the instructions to perform
operations. Otherwise, physical injuries or damage to the device may be
caused.
1. Stop the device, disconnect the AC power supply, and wait for a time no shorter than the waiting
time designated on the VFD.
2. Open the cable clamp to loose the fan cable (for VFDs of 380 V, 1.5 to 30 kW, the middle casing
needs to be removed).
3. Remove the fan cable.
4. Remove the fan with a screwdriver.
5. Install a new fan in the VFD in the reverse steps. Assemble the VFD. Ensure that the air direction
of the fan is consistent with that of the VFD, as shown in the following figure.
- 417 -
Rotating direction Air direction
Air
direction
Figure 9.1 Fan maintenance for VFDs of 7.5 kW or higher
6. Power on the VFD.

9.4 Capacitor
9.4.1 Capacitor reforming
If the VFD has been left unused for a long time, you need to follow the instructions to reform the DC
bus capacitor before using it. The storage time is calculated from the date the VFD is delivered.
Storage time Operation principle
Less than 1 year No charging operation is required.
The VFD needs to be powered on for 1 hour before the first running
1 to 2 years
command.
Use a voltage controlled power supply to charge the VFD:
Charge the VFD at 25% of the rated voltage for 30 minutes, and then
2 to 3 years charge it at 50% of the rated voltage for 30 minutes, at 75% for another
30 minutes, and finally charge it at 100% of the rated voltage for 30
minutes.
Use a voltage controlled power supply to charge the VFD:
Charge the VFD at 25% of the rated voltage for 2 hours, and then charge
More than 3 years
it at 50% of the rated voltage for 2 hours, at 75% for another 2 hours, and
finally charge it at 100% of the rated voltage for 2 hours.
The method for using a voltage controlled power supply to charge the VFD is described as follows:
- 418 -
The selection of a voltage controlled power supply depends on the power supply of the VFD. For
VFDs with an incoming voltage of 1PH/3PH 230 V AC, you can use a 230 V AC/2 A voltage regulator.
Both 1PH and 3PH VFDs can be charged with a 1PH voltage controlled power supply (connect L+ to
R, and N to S or T). All the DC bus capacitors share one rectifier, and therefore they are all charged.
For VFDs of a high voltage class, ensure that the voltage requirement (for example, 380 V) is met
during charging. Capacitor changing requires little current, and therefore you can use a
small-capacity power supply (2 A is sufficient).
The method for using a resistor (incandescent lamp) to charge the drive is described as follows:
If you directly connect the drive device to a power supply to charge the DC bus capacitor, it needs to
be charged for a minimum of 60 minutes. The charging operation must be performed at a normal
indoor temperature without load, and you must connect a resistor in series mode in the 3PH circuit of
the power supply.
For a 380 V drive device, use a resistor of 1 kΩ/100W. If the voltage of the power supply is no higher
than 380 V, you can also use an incandescent lamp of 100W. If an incandescent lamp is used, it may
go off or the light may become very weak.
Resistor 1 KΩ/100 W R U
Power supply
380 V Resistor 1 KΩ/100 W S VFD V
Resistor 1 KΩ/100 W T W
Figure 9.2 Charging circuit example of driving devices of 380 V

9.4.2 Electrolytic capacitor replacement
operations. Otherwise, physical injuries or damage to the device may be
caused.
The electrolytic capacitor of a VFD must be replaced if it has been used for more than 35,000 hours.
For details about the replacement, contact the local INVT office.
9.5 Power cable
operations. Otherwise, physical injuries or device damage may be caused.
1. Stop the VFD, disconnect the power supply, and wait for a time no shorter than the waiting time
designated on the VFD.
2. Check the connection of the power cables. Ensure that they are firmly connected.
3. Power on the VFD.
- 419 -
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Communication protocols
10 Communication protocols
This chapter describes the communication protocols supported by GD350-19 series VFDs.
GD350-19 series VFDs provide RS485 communication interfaces and adopt the master/slave
communication based on the international standard Modbus communication protocol. You can
implement centralized control (setting commands for controlling VFDs, modifying the running
frequency and related function parameters, and monitoring the running status and fault information of
the VFDs) through PC/PLC, upper control computers, or other devices to meet specific application
requirements.
10.2 MODBUS protocol introduction
Modbus is a software protocol, a common language used in electronic controllers. By using this
protocol, a controller can communicate with other devices through transmission lines. It is a general
industrial standard. With this standard, control devices produced by different manufacturers can be
connected to form an industrial network and be monitored in a centralized way.
The Modbus protocol provides two transmission modes, namely American Standard Code for
Information Interchange (ASCII) and Remote Terminal Unit (RTU). On one Modbus network, all the
devices must be consistent in transmission modes, baud rates, data bits, check bits, end bits, and
other basic parameters.
A Modbus network is a control network with one master and multiple slaves, that is, on one Modbus
network, there is only one device serving as the master, and other devices are the slaves. The master
can communicate with one slave or all the slaves by sending broadcast messages. For separate
access commands, a slave needs to return a response. For broadcast messages, slaves do not need
to return responses.
10.3 Application of Modbus
GD350-19 series VFDs use the Modbus RTU mode and communicate through RS485 interfaces.
10.3.1 RS485
RS485 interfaces work in half-duplex mode and send data signals in the differential transmission way,
which is also referred to as balanced transmission. An RS485 interface uses a twisted pair, in which
one wire is defined as A (+), and the other B (-). Generally, if the positive electrical level between the
transmission drives A and B ranges from +2V to +6V, the logic is "1"; and if it ranges from -2V to -6V,
the logic is "0". On the VFD terminal block, the 485+ terminal corresponds to A, and 485- corresponds
to B.
The communication baud rate (P14.01) indicates the number of bits sent in a second, and the unit is
bit/s (bps). A higher baud rate indicates faster transmission and poorer anti-interference capability.
When a twisted pair of 0.56 mm (24 AWG) is used, the maximum transmission distance varies
according to the baud rate, as described in the following table.
- 420 -
Max. transmission Max. transmission

Baud rate (bps) Baud rate (bps)
distance (meter) distance (meter)
2400 1800 9600 800

4800 1200 19200 600
When RS485 interfaces are used for long-distance communication, it is recommended that you use
shielded cables, and use the shielding layer as the ground wires.
When there are fewer devices and the transmission distance is short, the whole network works well
without terminal load resistors. The performance, however, degrades as the distance increases.
Therefore, it is recommended that you use a 120 Ω terminal resistor when the transmission distance
is long.
10.3.1.1 When one VFD is used
Figure 10.1 is the Modbus wiring diagram for the network with one VFD and PC. Generally, PCs do
not provide RS485 interfaces, and therefore you need to convert an RS232 or USB interface of a PC
to an RS485 interface through a converter. Then, connect end A of the RS485 interface to the 485+
port on the terminal block of the VFD, and connect end B to the 485- port. It is recommended that you
use shielded twisted pairs. When an RS232-RS485 converter is used, the cable used to connect the
RS232 interface of the PC and the converter cannot be longer than 15 m. Use a short cable when
possible. It is recommended that you insert the converter directly into the PC. Similarly, when a
USB-RS485 converter is used, use a short cable when possible.
When the wiring is completed, select the correct port (for example, COM1 to connect to the
RS232-RS485 converter) for the upper computer of the PC, and keep the settings of basic
parameters such as communication baud rate and data check bit consistent with those of the VFD.
Shielded twisted pair B
A
RS485 line
A B Ground
Ground 485- 485+
RS232-RS485 converter
PC VFD
Figure 10.1 RS485 wiring diagram for the network with one VFD
10.3.1.2 When multiple VFDs are used
In the network with multiple VFDs, chrysanthemum connection and star connection are commonly
used.
- 421 -
According to the requirements of the RS485 industrial bus standards, all the devices need to be
connected in chrysanthemum mode with one 120 Ω terminal resistor on each end, as shown in Figure
10.2. Figure 10.3 simplified wiring diagram, and Figure 10.4 is the practical application diagram.
120Ω 120Ω
1# 2# 3# 4# 32 #
Figure 10.2 Onsite chrysanthemum connection diagram

A+
B-
A+ B-
Master 1# 2# 3# 31#
Figure 10.3 Simplified chrysanthemum connection diagram
Shielded twisted pair
485 + 485+ 485 + 120Ω

Terminal
resistor
485- 485 - 485-
Ground Ground Ground
Converter RS232- 485
INVT INVT INVT
GND RS cable max. VFD VFD VFD
length: 15m
PC Address 2 Address n
Address 1
Figure 10.4 Practical application diagram of chrysanthemum connection
Figure 10.5 shows the start connection diagram. When this connection mode is adopted, the two
devices that are farthest away from each other on the line must be connected with a terminal resistor
(in this figure, the two devices are devices 1# and 15#).
- 422 -
1#
6#ain l
M ntr e
co evic
d
o
32#
15#
Figure 10.5 Star connection
Use shielded cable, if possible, in multi-VFD connection. The baud rates, data bit check settings, and
other basic parameters of all the devices on the RS485 line must be set consistently, and addresses
cannot be repeated.
10.3.2 RTU
10.3.2.1 RTU communication frame structure
When a controller is set to use the RTU communication mode on a Modbus network, every byte (8
bits) in the message includes 2 hexadecimal characters (each includes 4 bits). Compared with the
ASCII mode, the RTU mode can send more data at the same baud rate.
Code system
· 1 start bit
· 7 or 8 data bits; the minimum valid bit is sent first. Each frame domain of 8 bits includes 2
hexadecimal characters (0–9, A–F).
· 1 odd/even check bit; this bit is not provided if no check is needed.
· 1 end bit (with check performed), 2 bits (without check)
Error detection domain
·Cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
The following tables provide the data formats.
11-bit character frame (Bits 1 to 8 are data bits)
Check
Start bit BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4 BIT5 BIT6 BIT7 BIT8 End bit
bit
10-bit character frame (Bits 1 to 7 are data bits)
Check
Start bit BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4 BIT5 BIT6 BIT7 End bit
bit
- 423 -
In a character frame, only the data bits carry information. The start bit, check bit, and end bit are used
to facilitate the transmission of the data bits to the destination device. In practical applications, you
must set the data bits, parity check bits, and end bits consistently.
In RTU mode, a new frame must be always preceded by a time gap with a minimum length of 3.5
bytes. On a network where the transmission rate is calculated based on the baud rate, the
transmission time of 3.5 bytes can be easily obtained. After the idle time ends, the data domains are
sent in the following sequence: slave address, operation command code, data, and CRC check
character. Each byte sent in each domain includes 2 hexadecimal characters (0–9, A–F). The
network devices always monitor the communication bus. After receiving the first domain (address
information), each network device identifies the byte. After the last byte is sent, a similar transmission
interval (with a minimum length of 3.5 bytes) is used to indicate that the frame transmission ends.
Then, the transmission of a new frame starts.
RTU data frame format

Modbus packet
Start with a time gap End with a time gap

Slave Function
(with a min. length of 3.5 Data Check (with a min. length of
address code
bytes) 3.5 bytes)
The information of a frame must be sent in a continuous data flow. If there is an interval greater than
the transmission time of 1.5 bytes before the transmission of the entire frame is complete, the
receiving device deletes the incomplete information, and mistakes the subsequent byte for the
address domain of a new frame. Similarly, if the transmission interval between two frames is shorter
than the transmission time of 3.5 bytes, the receiving device mistakes it for the data of the last frame.
The CRC check value is incorrect due to the disorder of the frames, and thus a communication fault
occurs.
The following table lists the standard structure of an RTU frame.
START (frame header) T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes)
Communication address: 0–247 (in decimal system) (0

ADDR (slave address domain)
indicates the broadcast address)
03H: read slave parameters

CMD (function domain)
06H: write slave parameters
DATA (N-1)
... Data of 2×N bytes, main content of the communication as well

DATA (0) as the core of data exchanging
(data domain)
- 424 -
CRC CHK (LSBs)

Detection value: CRC (16 bits)
CRC CHK high bit (MSBs)
END (frame tail) T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes)
10.3.2.2 RTU communication frame error check modes

During the transmission of data, errors may occur due to various factors. Without check, the data
receiving device cannot identify data errors and may make a wrong response. The wrong response
may cause severe problems. Therefore, the data must be checked.
The check is implemented as follows: The transmitter calculates the to-be-transmitted data based on
a specific algorithm to obtain a result, adds the result to the rear of the message, and transmits them
together. After receiving the message, the receiver calculates the data based on the same algorithm
to obtain a result, and compares the result with that transmitted by the transmitter. If the results are
the same, the message is correct. Otherwise, the message is considered wrong.
The error check of a frame includes two parts, namely, bit check on individual bytes (that is, odd/even
check using the check bit in the character frame), and whole data check (CRC check).
Bit check on individual bytes (odd/even check)
You can select the bit check mode as required, or you can choose not to perform the check, which will
affect the check bit setting of each byte.
Definition of even check: Before the data is transmitted, an even check bit is added to indicate
whether the number of "1" in the to-be-transmitted data is odd or even. If it is even, the check bit is set
to "0"; and if it is odd, the check bit is set to "1".
Definition of odd check: Before the data is transmitted, an odd check bit is added to indicate whether
the number of "1" in the to-be-transmitted data is odd or even. If it is odd, the check bit is set to "0";
and if it is even, the check bit is set to "1".
For example, the data bits to be transmitted are "11001110", including five "1". If the even check is
applied, the even check bit is set to "1"; and if the odd check is applied, the odd check bit is set to "0".
During the transmission of the data, the odd/even check bit is calculated and placed in the check bit of
the frame. The receiving device performs the odd/even check after receiving the data. If it finds that
the odd/even parity of the data is inconsistent with the preset information, it determines that a
communication error occurs.
CRC check mode
A frame in the RTU format includes an error detection domain based on the CRC calculation. The
CRC domain checks all the content of the frame. The CRC domain consists of two bytes, including 16
binary bits. It is calculated by the transmitter and added to the frame. The receiver calculates the CRC
of the received frame, and compares the result with the value in the received CRC domain. If the two
- 425 -
CRC values are not equal to each other, errors occur in the transmission.
During CRC, 0xFFFF is stored first, and then a process is invoked to process a minimum of 6
contiguous bytes in the frame based on the content in the current register. CRC is valid only for the
8-bit data in each character. It is invalid for the start, end, and check bits.
During the generation of the CRC values, the "exclusive or" (XOR) operation is performed on the
each 8-bit character and the content in the register. The result is placed in the bits from the least
significant bit (LSB) to the most significant bit (MSB), and 0 is placed in the MSB. Then, LSB is
detected. If LSB is 1, the XOR operation is performed on the current value in the register and the
preset value. If LSB is 0, no operation is performed. This process is repeated 8 times. After the last bit
(8th bit) is detected and processed, the XOR operation is performed on the next 8-bit byte and the
current content in the register. The final values in the register are the CRC values obtained after
operations are performed on all the bytes in the frame.
The calculation adopts the international standard CRC check rule. You can refer to the related
standard CRC algorithm to compile the CRC calculation program as required.
The following example is a simple CRC calculation function for your reference (using the C
programming language):
unsigned int crc_cal_value(unsigned char*data_value,unsigned char data_length)
int i;
unsigned int crc_value=0xffff;
while(data_length--)
crc_value^=*data_value++;
for(i=0;i<8;i++)
if(crc_value&0x0001)
crc_value=(crc_value>>1)^0xa001;
else
crc_value=crc_value>>1;
return(crc_value);
- 426 -
In the ladder logic, CKSM uses the table look-up method to calculate the CRC value according to the
content in the frame. The program of this method is simple, and the calculation is fast, but the ROM
space occupied is large. Use this program with caution in scenarios where there are space
occupation requirements on programs.
10.4 RTU command code and communication data
10.4.1 Command code 03H, reading N words (continuously up to 16 words)
The command code 03H is used by the master to read data from the VFD. The count of data to be
read depends on the "data count" in the command. A maximum of 16 pieces of data can be read. The
addresses of the read parameters must be contiguous. Each piece of data occupies 2 bytes, that is,
one word. The command format is presented using the hexadecimal system (a number followed by
"H" indicates a hexadecimal value). One hexadecimal value occupies one byte.
The 03H command is used to read information including the parameters and running status of the
VFD.
For example, starting from the data address of 0004H, to read two contiguous pieces of data (that is,
to read content from the data addresses 0004H and 0005H), the frame structures are described in the
following.
RTU master command (sent from the master to the VFD):
START T1-T2-T3-T4 (time gap with a min. length of 3.5 bytes)

ADDR (address) 01H
CMD (command code) 03H
Start address MSB 00H
Start address LSB 04H
Data count MSB 00H
Data count LSB 02H
CRC LSB 85H
CRC MSB CAH
END T1-T2-T3-T4 (time gap with a min. length of 3.5 bytes)
"START" and "END" are "T1-T2-T3-T4 (time gap with a min. length of 3.5 bytes)", indicating that a
time gap with a minimum length of 3.5 bytes must be kept before RS485 communication is executed.
The time gap is used to distinguish one message from another so that the two messages are not
regarded as one message.
"ADDR" is "01H", indicating that the command is sent to the VFD whose address is 01H. The ADDR
information occupies one byte.
"CMD" is "03H", indicating that the command is used to read data from the VFD. The CMD
"Start address" indicates that data reading is started from this address. It occupies two bytes, with the
- 427 -
MSB on the left and LSB on the right.
"Data count" indicates the count of data to be read (unit: word). "Start address" is "0004H" and "Data
count" is 0002H, indicating that data is to be read from the data addresses of 0004H and 0005H.
CRC check occupies two bytes, with the LSB on the left and MSB on the right.
RTU slave response (sent from the VFD to the master):
T1-T2-T3-T4 (time gap with a min. length of

START
3.5 bytes)
ADDR 01H
CMD 03H
Number of bytes 04H
MSB of data in 0004H 13H
LSB of data in 0004H 88H
CRC LSB 7EH
CRC MSB 9DH
T1-T2-T3-T4 (time gap with a min. length of 3.5
END
bytes)
The definition of the response information is described as follows:
"ADDR" is "01H", indicating that the message is sent from the VFD whose address is 01H. The ADDR
"CMD" is "03H", indicating that the message is a VFD response to the 03H command from the master
for reading data. The CMD information occupies one byte.
"Number of bytes" indicates the number of bytes between a byte (not included) and the CRC byte (not
included). The value "04" indicates that there are four bytes of data between "Number of bytes" and
"CRC LSB", that is, "MSB of data in 0004H", "LSB of data in 0004H", "MSB of data in 0005H", and
"LSB of data in 0005H".
A piece of data is two bytes, with the MSB on the left and LSB on the right. From the response, the
data in 0004H is 1388H, and that in 0005H is 0000H.
CRC check occupies two bytes, with the LSB on the left and MSB on the right.
10.4.2 Command word 06H, writing a word
This command is used by the master to write data to the VFD. One command can be used to write
only one piece of data. It is used to modify the parameters and running mode of the VFD.
- 428 -
For example, to write 5000 (1388H) to 0004H of the VFD whose address is 02H, the frame structures
are described in the following.
RTU master command (sent from the master to the VFD):

START
3.5 bytes)
ADDR 02H
CMD 06H
MSB of data writing address 00H
LSB of data writing address 04H
MSB of to-be-written data 13H
LSB of to-be-written data 88H
CRC LSB C5H
CRC MSB 6EH
END
3.5 bytes)
RTU slave response (sent from the VFD to the master):

START
3.5 bytes)
ADDR 02H
CMD 06H
MSB of to-be-written data 13H
LSB of to-be-written data 88H
CRC LSB C5H
CRC MSB 6EH
END
3.5 bytes)
Note: Sections 10.4.1 and 10.4.2 mainly describe the command formats. For the detailed application,
see the section 10.4.7.
10.4.3 Command code 08H, diagnosis
Sub-function code description:
Sub-function code Description
0000 Return data based on query requests
For example, to query about the circuit detection information about the VFD whose address is 01H,
- 429 -
the query and return strings are the same, and the formats are described in the following tables.
RTU master command:

START
3.5 bytes)
ADDR 01H
CMD 08H
Sub-function code MSB 00H
Sub-function code LSB 00H
Data MSB 12H
Data LSB ABH
CRC CHK LSB ADH
CRC CHK MSB 14H
END
3.5 bytes)
RTU slave response:

START
3.5 bytes)
ADDR 01H
CMD 08H
Sub-function code MSB 00H
Sub-function code LSB 00H
Data MSB 12H
Data LSB ABH
CRC CHK LSB ADH
CRC CHK MSB 14H
END
3.5 bytes)
10.4.4 Command code 10H, continuous writing
The command code 10H is used by the master to write data to the VFD. The quantity of data to be
written is determined by "Data count", and a maximum of 16 pieces of data can be written.
For example, to write 5000 (1388H) and 50 (0032H) respectively to 0004H and 0005H of the VFD
whose slave address is 02H, the frame structures are described in the following.
RTU master command (sent from the master to the VFD)

START
3.5 bytes)
ADDR 02H
CMD 10H
- 430 -

Data count MSB 00H
Data count LSB 02H
Number of bytes 04H
CRC LSB C5H
CRC MSB 6EH
END
3.5 bytes)
RTU slave response (sent from the VFD to the master)

START
3.5 bytes)
ADDR 02H
CMD 10H
Data count MSB 00H
Data count LSB 02H
CRC LSB C5H
CRC MSB 6EH
END
3.5 bytes)
10.4.5 Data address definition
This section describes the address definition of communication data. The addresses are used for
controlling the running, obtaining the status information, and setting function parameters of the VFD.
10.4.5.1 Function code address format rules
The address of a function code consists of two bytes, with the MSB on the left and LSB on the right.
The MSB ranges from 00 to ffH, and the LSB also ranges from 00 to ffH. The MSB is the hexadecimal
form of the group number before the dot mark, and LSB is that of the number behind the dot mark.
Take P05.06 as an example: The group number is 05, that is, the MSB of the parameter address is
the hexadecimal form of 05; and the number behind the dot mark is 06, that is, the LSB is the
hexadecimal form of 06. Therefore, the function code address is 0506H in the hexadecimal form. For
example, the parameter address of P10.01 is 0A01H.
- 431 -
Function Setting Default

Name Description Change
code range value
0: Stop after running once

Simple PLC 1: Keep running with the final
P10.00 0–2 0 ○
mode value after running once
2: Cyclic running
P10.01 0: Without memory after
Simple PLC
power down
memory 0–1 0 ○
selection 1: With memory after power
down
Note:
 The parameters in the P99 group are set by the manufacturer and cannot be read or modified.
Some parameters cannot be modified when the VFD is running; some cannot be modified
regardless of the VFD status. Pay attention to the setting range, unit, and description of a
parameter when modifying it.
 The service life of the Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EEPROM) may
be reduced if it is frequently used for storage. Some function codes do not need to be stored
during communication. The application requirements can be met by modifying the value of the
on-chip RAM, that is, modifying the MSB of the corresponding function code address from 0 to 1.
For example, if P00.07 is not to be stored in the EEPROM, you need only to modify the value in
the RAM, that is, set the address to 8007H. The address can be used only for writing data to the
on-chip RAM, and it is invalid when used for reading data.
10.4.5.2 Description of other function addresses
In addition to modifying the parameters of the VFD, the master can also control the VFD, such as
starting and stop it, and monitoring the operation status of the VFD. The following table describes
other function parameters.
Function Address Data description R/W
0001H: Forward running
0002H: Reverse running

Communication-based
2000H 0003H: Forward jogging R/W
control command
0004H: Reverse jogging
0005H: Stop
- 432 -
0006H: Coast to stop (emergency stop)
0007H: Fault reset
0008H: Jogging to stop
Communication-based frequency setting

2001H
(0–Fmax, unit: 0.01 Hz)
R/W
PID setting, range (0–1000, 1000 corresponding
2002H
to 100.0%)
PID feedback, range (0–1000, 1000
2003H R/W
corresponding to 100.0%)
Torque setting (-3000 – +3000, 1000
2004H corresponding to 100.0% of the motor rated R/W
current)
Setting of the upper limit of the forward running
2005H R/W
frequency (0–Fmax, unit: 0.01 Hz)
Setting of the upper limit of the reverse running
2006H R/W
frequency (0–Fmax, unit: 0.01 Hz)
Upper limit of the electromotion torque (0–3000,
2007H 1000 corresponding to 100.0% of the motor rated R/W
current)
Communication-based
Upper limit of the brake torque (0–3000, 1000
value setting
2008H corresponding to 100.0% of the motor rated R/W
current)
Special control command word:
Bit0–1: =00: Motor 1 =01: Motor 2
Bit2: =1 Enable speed/torque control switchover
=0: Disable speed/torque control switchover

2009H R/W
Bit3: =1 Clear electricity consumption
=0: Not clear electricity consumption
Bit4: =1 Pre-excitation; =0: Disable pre-excitation
Bit5: =1 DC brake =0: Disable DC brake

Virtual input terminal command, range:
0x000–0x3FF
200AH R/W
Corresponding to S8/S7/S6/S5/HDIB/HDIA/S4/
S3/ S2/S1
- 433 -
Virtual output terminal command, range:

200BH 0x00–0x0F R/W
Corresponding to local RO2/RO1/HDO/Y1
Voltage setting (used for V/F separation)
200CH (0–1000, 1000 corresponding to 100.0% of the R/W
motor rated voltage)
AO output setting 1 (-1000–+1000, 1000
200DH R/W
AO output setting 2 (-1000–+1000, 1000
200EH R/W
0003H: Stopped
VFD status word 1 2100H R
0004H: Faulty
0005H: POFF
0006H: Pre-excited
Bit0: =0: Not ready to run =1: Ready to run
Bi1–2: =00: Motor 1 =01: Motor 2
Bit3: =0: Asynchronous motor =1: Synchronous

motor
Bit4: =0: No overload alarm =1: Overload alarm
Bit5–Bit6: =00: Keypad-based control =01:

Terminal-based control
VFD status word 2 2101H R
=10: Communication-based control
Bit7: Reserved
Bit8: =0: Speed control =1: Torque control
Bit9: =0: Non position control
=1: Position control
Bit11–Bit10: =0: Vector 0 =1: Vector 1
=2: Closed-loop vector
=3: Space voltage vector
VFD fault code 2102H See the description of fault types. R
- 434 -
VFD identification
2103H GD350-----0x01A0 R
code
Running frequency 3000H 0–Fmax(Unit: 0.01Hz) R
Set frequency 3001H 0–Fmax(Unit: 0.01Hz) R
Bus voltage 3002H 0.0–2000.0V(Unit: 0.1V) R
Output voltage 3003H 0–1200V(Unit: 1V) R
Output current 3004H 0.0–3000.0A(Unit: 0.1A) R
Rotating speed 3005H 0–65535(Unit: 1RPM) R
Output power 3006H -300.0–300.0%(Unit: 0.1%) R
Output torque 3007H -250.0–250.0%(Unit: 0.1%) R
Closed-loop setting 3008H -100.0–100.0%(Unit: 0.1%) R
Closed-loop feedback 3009H -100.0–100.0%(Unit: 0.1%) Compatible R
000–3F with CHF100A

Input state
300AH Corresponding to the local HDIB/ and CHV100 R
HDIA/ S4/ S3/ S2/ S1 communication
000–0F addresses
Output state
300BH Corresponding to the local R
RO2/RO1/HDO/Y1
Analog input 1 300CH 0.00–10.00V(Unit: 0.01V) R
Analog input 2 300DH 0.00–10.00V(Unit: 0.01V) R
Analog input 3 300EH -10.00–10.00V(Unit: 0.01V) R
Analog input 4 300FH R
Read input of
3010H 0.00–50.00kHz(Unit: 0.01Hz) R
high-speed pulse 1
Read input of
3011H R
high-speed pulse 2
Read current step of 3012H 0–15 R
- 435 -
multi-step speed
External length 3013H 0–65535 R
External count value 3014H 0–65535 R
Torque setting 3015H -300.0–300.0%(Unit: 0.1%) R
Identification code 3016H R
Fault code 5000H R
The Read/Write (R/W) characteristics indicate whether a function can be read and written. For
example, "Communication-based control command" can be written, and therefore the command code
6H is used to control the VFD. The R characteristic indicates that a function can only be read, and W
indicates that a function can only be written.
Note: Some parameters in the preceding table are valid only after they are enabled. Take the running
and stop operations as examples, you need to set "Running command channel" (P00.01) to
"Communication", and set "Communication running command channel" (P00.02) to the Modbus
communication channel. For another example, when modifying "PID setting", you need to set "PID
reference source" (P09.00) to Modbus communication.
The following table describes the encoding rules of device codes (corresponding to the identification
code 2103H of the VFD).
8 MSBs Meaning 8 LSBs Meaning
0x08 GD35 vector VFD
0x09 GD35-H1 vector VFD

01 GD
0x0a GD300 vector VFD
0xa0 GD350 vector VFD
10.4.6 Fieldbus scale

In practical applications, communication data is represented in the hexadecimal form, but
hexadecimal values cannot represent decimals. For example, 50.12 Hz cannot be represented in the
hexadecimal form. In such cases, we can multiply 50.12 by 100 to obtain an integer 5012, and then
50.12 can be represented as 1394H (5012 in the decimal form) in the hexadecimal form.
- 436 -
In the process of multiplying a non-integer by a multiple to obtain an integer, the multiple is referred to
as a fieldbus scale.
The fieldbus scale depends on the number of decimals in the value specified in "Detailed parameter
description" or "Default value". If there are n decimals in the value, the fieldbus scale m is the
nth-power of 10. Take the following table as an example, m is 10.
Function Default
Name Description
code value
P01.20 Wake-up-from-sleep delay 0.0–3600.0s (valid when P01.19 is 2) 0.0s
0: Restart is disabled
P01.21 Restart after power cut 0
1: Restart is enabled
The value specified in "Detailed parameter description" or "Default value" contains one decimal, so
the fieldbus scale is 10. If the value received by the upper computer is 50, the value of
"Wake-up-from-sleep delay" of the VFD is 5.0 (5.0=50/10).
To set the "Wake-up-from-sleep delay" to 5.0s through Modbus communication, you need first to
multiply 5.0 by 10 according to the scale to obtain an integer 50, that is, 32H in the hexadecimal form,
and then transmit the following write command:
01 06 01 14 00 32 49 E7
VFD Write Parameter Parameter CRC
address command address data
After receiving the command, the VFD converts 50 into 5.0 based on the fieldbus scale, and then sets
"Wake-up-from-sleep delay" to 5.0s.
For another example, after the upper computer transmits the "Wake-up-from-sleep delay" parameter
read command, the master receives the following response from the VFD:
01 03 02 00 32 39 91
VFD Read 2-byte Parameter CRC
address command data data
The parameter data is 0032H, that is, 50, so 5.0 is obtained based on the fieldbus scale (50/10=5.0).
In this case, the master identifies that the "Wake-up-from-sleep delay" is 5.0s.
10.4.7 Error message response
Operation errors may occur in communication-based control. For example, some parameters can
only be read, but a write command is transmitted. In this case, the VFD returns an error message
response.
Error message responses are transmitted by the VFD to the master. The following table describes the
- 437 -
codes and definitions of the error message responses.
Code Name Definition
The command code received by the upper computer is not allowed

to be executed. The possible causes are as follows:
Invalid
01H • The function code is applicable only on new devices and is not
command
implemented on this device.
• The slave is in the faulty state when processing this request.
For the VFD, the data address in the request of the upper computer
Invalid data
02H is not allowed. In particular, the combination of the register address
address
and the number of the to-be-transmitted bytes is invalid.
The received data domain contains a value that is not allowed. The
value indicates the error of the remaining structure in the combined
03H Invalid data bit request.
Note: It does not mean that the data item submitted for storage in
the register includes a value unexpected by the program.
Operation The parameter is set to an invalid value in the write operation. For
04H
failure example, a function input terminal cannot be set repeatedly.
Password The password entered in the password verification address is

05H
error different from that set in P03.00.
The length of the data frame transmitted by the upper computer is

Data frame
06H incorrect, or in the RTU format, the value of the CRC check bit is
error
inconsistent with the CRC value calculated by the lower computer
Parameter The parameter to be modified in the write operation of the upper

07H
read-only computer is a read-only parameter.
Parameter
cannot be The parameter to be modified in the write operation of the upper
08H
modified in computer cannot be modified during the running of the VFD.
running
A user password is set, and the upper computer does not provide
Password
09H the password to unlock the system when performing a read or write
protection
operation. The error of "system locked" is reported.
When returning a response, the device uses a function code domain and fault address to indicate
- 438 -
whether it is a normal response (no error) or exception response (some errors occur). In a normal
response, the device returns the corresponding function code and data address or sub-function code.
In an exception response, the device returns a code that is equal to a normal code, but the first bit is
logic 1.
For example, if the master device transmits a request message to a slave device for reading a group
of function code address data, the code is generated as follows:
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 (03H in the hexadecimal form)
For a normal response, the same code is returned.
For an exception response, the following code is returned:
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 (83H in the hexadecimal form)
In addition to the modification of the code, the slave returns a byte of exception code that describes
the cause of the exception. After receiving the exception response, the typical processing of the
master device is to transmit the request message again or modify the command based on the fault
information.
For example, to set the "Running command channel" (P00.01, the parameter address is 0001H) of
the VFD whose address is 01H to 03, the command is as follows:
01 06 00 01 00 03 98 0B
VFD Write Parameter Parameter CRC
But the setting range of the "Running command channel" is 0 to 2. The value 3 exceeds the setting
range. In this case, the VFD returns an error message response as shown in the following:
01 86 04 43 A3
VFD Exception Error code CRC
address response code
The exception response code 86H (generated based on the MSB "1" of the write command 06H)
indicates that it is an exception response to the write command (06H). The error code is 04H. From
the preceding table, we can see that it indicates the error "Operation failure", which means "The
parameter is set to an invalid value in the write operation".
10.4.8 Read/Write operation example
For the formats of the read and write commands, see sections 10.4.1 and 10.4.2.
10.4.8.1 Read command 03H examples
Example 1: Read status word 1 of the VFD whose address is 01H. From the table of other function
parameters, we can see that the parameter address of status word 1 of the VFD is 2100H.
The read command transmitted to the VFD is as follows:
- 439 -
01 03 21 00 00 01 8E 36
VFD Read Parameter Data quantity CRC
address command address
Assume that the following response is returned:
01 03 02 00 03 F8 45
VFD Read Number Data content CRC
address command of bytes
The data content returned by the VFD is 0003H, which indicates that the VFD is in the stopped state.
Example 2: View information about the VFD whose address is 03H, including "Type of current fault"
(P07.27) to "Type of last but four fault" (P07.32) of which the parameter addresses are 071BH to
0720H (contiguous 6 parameter addresses starting from 071BH).
The command transmitted to the VFD is as follows:
03 03 07 1B 00 06 B5 59
VFD Read Start 6 parameters in total CRC
Assume that the following response is returned:
03 03 0C 00 23 00 23 00 23 00 23 00 23 00 23 5F D2
VFD Read Number of Type of Type of Type of last Type of last Type of last Type of last CRC
address command bytes current fault last fault but one fault but two fault but three fault but four fault
From the returned data, we can see that all the fault types are 0023H, that is, 35 in the decimal form,
which means the maladjustment fault (STo)
10.4.8.2 Write command 06H examples
Example 1: Set the VFD whose address is 03H to be forward running. Refer to the table of other
function parameters, the address of "Communication-based control command" is 2000H, and 0001H
indicates forward running, as shown in the following figure.
2000H 0001H: Forward running

Communication-based
R/W
control command
0003H: Forward jogging
- 440 -
0005H: Stop
0007H: Fault reset
The command transmitted by the master is as follows:
03 06 20 00 00 01 42 28
VFD Write Parameter Forward CRC
address command address running
If the operation is successful, the following response is returned (same as the command transmitted
by the master):
03 06 20 00 00 01 42 28
VFD Write Parameter Forward CRC
address command address running
Example 2: Set the "Max. output frequency" of the VFD whose address is 03H to 100 Hz.
Function Default Modi

Name Description
code value fy
Used to set the maximum output frequency of the

Max. output VFD. It is the basis of frequency setup and the
P00.03 50.00Hz ◎
frequency acceleration/deceleration.
Setting range: Max (P00.04, 10.00) –630.00Hz
From the number of decimals, we can see that the fieldbus scale of the "Max. output frequency"
(P00.03) is 100. Multiply 100 Hz by 100. The value 10000 is obtained, and it is 2710H in the
hexadecimal form.
03 06 00 03 27 10 62 14
VFD Write Parameter Parameter
CRC
If the operation is successful, the following response is returned (same as the command transmitted
by the master):
- 441 -
03 06 00 03 27 10 62 14
VFD Write Parameter Parameter
CRC
Note: In the preceding command description, spaces are added to a command just for explanatory
purposes. In practical applications, no space is required in the commands.
10.4.8.3 Continuously write command 10H examples
Example 1: Set the VFD whose address is 01H to be forward running at the frequency of 10 Hz. Refer
to the table of other function parameters, the address of "Communication-based control command" is
2000H, 0001H indicates forward running, and the address of "Communication-based value setting" is
2001H, as shown in the following figure. 10 Hz is 03E8H in the hexadecimal form.
0003H: Forward jogging

Communication-based
2000H R/W
control command
0005H: Stop
0007H: Fault reset
Communication-based frequency setting

2001H
(0–Fmax, unit: 0.01 Hz)
Communication-based
R/W
value setting
PID setting, range (0–1000, 1000 corresponding
2002H
to 100.0%)
In the actual operation, set P00.01 to 2 and P00.06 to 8.
01 10 20 00 00 02 04 00 01 03 E8 3B 10
VFD Continuous Parameter Parameter Number of Froward 10 Hz CRC
address write address quantity bytes running
command
If the operation is successful, the following response is returned:
- 442 -
01 10 20 00 00 02 4A 08
VFD Continuous Parameter Parameter CRC
address write address quantity
command
Example 2: Set "Acceleration time" of the VFD whose address is 01H to 10s, and "Deceleration time"
to 20s.
Function Default
code value
Acceleration Acceleration time is the time needed for Model

P00.11 ○
time 1 accelerating from 0Hz to Max. output frequency depended
(P00.03).
Deceleration time is the time needed from

decelerating from Max. output frequency (P00.03)
to 0Hz.

P00.12 ○
time 1 acceleration and deceleration time, which can be depended
selected via multi-function digital input terminals
(P05 group). The acceleration/deceleration time of
the VFD is the first group by default.
Setting range of P00.11 and P00.12: 0.0–3600.0s
The address of P00.11 is 000B, 10s is 0064H in the hexadecimal form, and 20s is 00C8H in the
hexadecimal form.
01 10 00 0B 00 02 04 00 64 00 C8 F2 55
VFD Continuous Parameter Parameter Number of 10s 20s CRC
address write address quantity bytes
command
If the operation is successful, the following response is returned:
01 10 00 0B 00 02 30 0A
VFD Continuous Parameter Parameter CRC
address write address quantity
command
Note: In the preceding command description, spaces are added to a command just for explanatory
purposes. In practical applications, no space is required in the commands.
- 443 -
10.4.8.4 Modbus communication commissioning example
A PC is used as the host, an RS232-RS485 converter is used for signal conversion, and the PC serial
port used by the converter is COM1 (an RS232 port). The upper computer commissioning software is
the serial port commissioning assistant Commix, which can be downloaded from the Internet.
Download a version that can automatically execute the CRC check function. The following figure
shows the interface of Commix.
First, set the serial port to COM1. Then, set the baud rate consistently with P14.01. The data bits,
check bits, and end bits must be set consistently with P14.02. If the RTU mode is selected, you need
to select the hexadecimal form Input HEX. To set the software to automatically execute the CRC
function, you need to select ModbusRTU, select CRC16 (MODBU SRTU), and set the start byte to 1.
After the auto CRC check function is enabled, do not enter CRC information in commands. Otherwise,
command errors may occur due to repeated CRC check.
The commissioning command to set the VFD whose address is 03H to be forward running is as
follows:
03 06 20 00 00 01 42 28
VFD Write Parameter CRC
Forward running
Note:
1. Set the address (P14.00) of the VFD to 03.
2. Set "Channel of running commands" (P00.01) to "Communication", and set "Communication

channel of running commands" (P00.02) to the Modbus communication channel.
3. Click Send. If the line configuration and settings are correct, a response transmitted by the VFD
is received as follows:
- 444 -
03 06 20 00 00 01 42 28
VFD Write Parameter CRC
Forward running
10.5 Common communication faults
Common communication faults include the following:
• No response is returned.
• The VFD returns an exception response.
Possible causes of no response include the following:
• The serial port is set incorrectly. For example, the converter uses the serial port COM1, but
COM2 is selected for the communication.
• The settings of the baud rates, data bits, end bits, and check bits are inconsistent with those set
on the VFD.
• The positive pole (+) and negative pole (-) of the RS485 bus are connected reversely.
• The resistor connected to 485 terminals on the terminal block of the VFD is set incorrectly.
- 445 -
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Extension cards
Appendix A Extension cards

A.1 Model description
EC-PG 5 01-05
① ② ③④ ⑤
Field Description Example
① Product category EC: Extension card
② Card category PG: PG card
Indicates the generation of a technical version by

using odd numbers, for example, 1, 3, and 5
③ Technical version
indicate the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd generations of the
technical version.
01: Incremental PG card + Frequency-division

output
02: Sine/Cosine PG card + Pulse direction setting +

Frequency-division output
03: UVW PG interface + Pulse direction setting +

④ Distinguishing code 04: Resolver PG interface + Pulse direction setting

+ Frequency-division output
05: Incremental PG card + Pulse direction setting +

06: Absolute PG interface + Pulse direction setting

+ Frequency-division output
07: Simplified incremental PG card
00: Passive
05: 5V
⑤ Working power
12: 12–15 V
24: 24 V
-446-
EC-TX 5 01
① ② ③④
Field Description Example
② Card category TX: Communication extension card

technical version.
01: Bluetooth communication card
02: WIFI communication card
03: PROFIBUS communication card
05: Canopen communication card
06: DeviceNet communication card

④ Distinguishing code
07: BACnet communication card
08: EtherCat communication card
09: PROFINET communication card
10: Ethernet/IP communication card
11: CAN master/slave control communication card
-447-
EC-IO 5 01-00
① ② ③ ④ ⑤
Field identifier Field description Naming example
② Card category IO: I/O extension card

technical version.
01: Multifunction I/O extension card (4 digital inputs,

1 digital output, 1 analog input, 1 analog output, and
2 relay outputs)
02: Digital I/O extension card (4 digital inputs, 2

④ Distinguishing code relay outputs, 1 PT100, and 1 PT1000)
03: Analog I/O card
04: Reserved 1
05: Reserved 2
⑤ Special requirement
The following table lists extension cards that Goodrive350-19 series VFDs support. The extension
cards are optional and need to be purchased separately.
Name Model Specification
• 4 digital inputs
• 1 digital output
I/O extension card 1 EC-IO501-00 • 1 analog input
• 1 analog output
• 2 relay outputs: 1 double-contact output, and 1
-448-
single-contact output
• 4 digital inputs
• 1 PT100
• 1 PT1000
• 2 relay outputs: single-contact NO output
I/O extension card 2 EC-IO502-00
Note: The extension card has been built into the 7.5kW
and higher VFD models but it is optional for the VFD
models of lower than 7.5kW. For details, see section
4.4.3.
• Supporting Bluetooth 4.0
• With INVT mobile app, you can set the parameters
and monitor the states of the VFD through Bluetooth
• The maximum communication distance in open
Bluetooth EC-TX501-1
environments is 30 m.
communication card EC-TX501-2
• EC-TX501-1 is equipped with a built-in antenna and
applicable to molded case machines.
• EC-TX501-2 is configured with an external sucker
antenna and applicable to sheet metal machines.
• Meeting IEEE802.11b/g/n
• With INVT mobile app, you can monitor the VFD
locally or remotely through WIFI communication
• The maximum communication distance in open
WIFI communication EC-TX502-1
environments is 30 m.
card EC-TX502-2
• EC-TX501-1 is equipped with a built-in antenna and
applicable to molded case machines.
• EC-TX502-2 is configured with an external sucker
antenna and applicable to sheet metal machines.
PROFIBUS-DP
EC-TX503 • Supporting the PROFIBUS-DP protocol
communication card
• Supporting Ethernet communication with INVT

Ethernet internal protocol
EC-TX504
communication card • Can be used in combination with INVT upper
computer monitoring software INVT Studio
CANopen EC-TX505 • Based on the CAN2.0A physical layer
-449-
communication card • Supporting the CANopen protocol
CAN master/slave • Based on the CAN2.0B physical layer

control EC-TX511 • Adopting INVT proprietary master/slave control
communication card protocol
PROFINET
EC-TX509 • Supporting the PROFINET protocol
communication card
• Applicable to Sin/Cos encoders with or without CD

signals
Sin/Cos PG card EC-PG502
• Supporting A, B, Z frequency-divided output
• Supporting pulse string reference input
• Applicable to differential encoders of 5 V
• Supporting the orthogonal input of A, B, and Z

UVW incremental
EC-PG503-05 • Supporting pulse input of phases U, V, and W
PG card
• Supporting frequency-divided output of A, B, and Z
• Supporting the input of pulse string reference
• Applicable to resolver encoders

Resolver PG card EC-PG504-00 • Supporting frequency-divided output of
resolver-simulated A, B, Z
• Applicable to OC encoders of 5 V or 12 V
• Applicable to push-pull encoders of 5 V or 12 V
• Applicable to differential encoders of 5 V

Multifunction
EC-PG505-12 • Supporting the orthogonal input of A, B, and Z
incremental PG card
• Supporting the frequency-divided output of A, B, and
Z
• Supporting pulse string setting
• Applicable to 5V or 24V OC encoders

Simplified
EC-PG507-12 • Applicable to 5V or 12V push-pull encoders
incremental PG card
• Applicable to 5 V differential encoders
-450-
• Applicable to 24V OC encoders

24V incremental PG
EC-PG507-24 • Applicable to 24V push-pull encoders
card
• Applicable to 24V differential encoders
I/O extension card 1 I/O extension card 2 Bluetooth/WIFI PROFIBUS-DP

EC-IO501-00 EC-IO502-00 communication card communication card
EC-TX501/502 EC-TX503
Ethernet CANopen/CAN PROFINET Sin/Cos PG card

communication card master/slave control communication card EC-PG502
EC-TX504 communication card EC-TX509
EC-TX505/511
-451-
UVW incremental Resolver PG card Multifunction Simplified incremental

PG card EC-PG504-00 incremental PG card PG card
EC-PG503-05 EC-PG505-12 EC-PG507-12
24V simplified
incremental PG card
EC-PG507-24
A.2 Dimensions and installation
All of the extension cards are the same in dimensions (108 mm × 39 mm) and can be installed in the
same way.
Conform to the following rule when installing or removing an extension card:
1. Ensure that no power is applied before installing the extension card.
2. The extension card can be installed into any of the card slots SLOT1, SLOT2, and SLOT3.
3. The 5.5 kW and lower VFD models can be configured with two extension cards at the same time,
-452-
and the 7.5 kW and higher VFD models can be configured with three extension cards.
4. If interference occurs on the external wires after extension cards are installed, change their
installation card slots flexibly to facilitate the wiring. For example, the connector of the connection
cable of the DP card is large, so you are recommended to install the card in the SLOT1 card slot.
5. To ensure high anti-interference capability in closed-loop control, you need to use a shielded
cable as the encoder cable and ground the two ends of the shielded cable, that is, connect the
shield layer on the motor side to the housing of the motor, and connect the shield layer on the PG
card side to the PE terminal.
The following shows the diagrams of installing extension cards into different VFD models.
EC 1
EC 1
EC 2
EC 2
EC 3 EC 3
EC installation diagram Diagram of ECs installed
Figure A.1 7.5 kW and higher VFD models with extension cards installed
EC 1
EC 1
EC 2 EC 2
ECs installing ECs installed
Figure A.2 5.5 kW and lower VFD models with extension cards installed
-453-
Extension card installation procedure:

Re m ove th e scr ew s an d the l ow er co ver . STEP2
STEP1
EC
STEP4 STEP3
Ta ke o ut the ke yp ad , a nd
rem o ve the up pe r cove r.
STEP6
A fte r th e cu tti ng
STEP5
Cut o ff the o utlet fram e

co rrespon din g to the E C
positio n.
STEP7
In stal lati on w iri ng
Wi re b in din g p osi tion
Figure A.3 Extension card installation procedure
A.3 Wiring
1. Ground a shielded cable as follows:
-454-
Grounding position of the
shielded cable
Grounding position of
the shielded cable
Figure A.4 Extension card grounding diagram

A.4 Function description of I/O extension card 1 (EC-IO501-00)
The terminals are arranged as follows:
CME and COM are short connected through J3 before delivery, and J5 is the jumper for selecting the
output type (voltage or current) of AO2.
AI3 AO2 GND
COM CME Y2 S5 RO3A RO3B RO3C

PW +24V S6 S7 S8 RO4A RO4C
Indicators are described as follows:
Indicator No. Name Function

This indicator is on when the extension card is establishing a
connection with the control board; it blinks periodically after the
Status
LED1 extension card is properly connected to the control board (the
indicator
period is 1s, on for 0.5s, and off for the other 0.5s); and it is off
when the extension card is disconnected from the control board.
Power This indicator is on after the I/O extension card is powered on by
LED4
indicator the control board.
-455-
The EC-IO501-00 extension card can be used in scenarios where the I/O interfaces of
Goodrive350-19 VFD cannot meet the application requirements. It can provide 4 digital inputs, 1
digital output, 1 analog input, 1 analog output, and two relay outputs. It is user-friendly, providing relay
outputs through European-type screw terminals and other inputs and outputs through spring
terminals.
EC-IO501-00 terminal function description
Category Symbol Name Function
The working power of digital input is

provided by an external power supply.
External power
Power PW Voltage range: 12–24 V
supply
The terminals PW and +24V are shorted
before delivery.
1. Input range: 0–10 V, 0–20 mA
2. Input impedance: 20 kΩ for voltage input;

250 Ω for current input
3. Set it to be voltage or current input

AI3—GND Analog input 1 through the corresponding function code.
4. Resolution: When 10 V corresponds to

50 Hz, the minimum resolution is 5 mV.
Analog
input/output 5. Deviation: ±0.5%; input of 5 V or 10 mA
or higher at the temperature of 25°C
1. Output range: 0–10 V, 0–20 mA
2. Whether it is voltage or current output

AO2—GND Analog output 1 can be set through J5.
3. Deviation: ±0.5%; input of 5 V or 10 mA

or higher at the temperature of 25°C
S5—COM Digital input 1

1. Internal impedance: 6.6 kΩ
S6—COM Digital input 2 2. Power input range: 12–30 V
Digital
S7—COM Digital input 3 3. Bidirectional input terminal
input/output
4. Max. input frequency: 1 kHz
S8—COM Digital input 4
Y2—CME Digital output 1. Switch capacity: 200 mA/30 V
-456-
Category Symbol Name Function
2. Output frequency range: 0–1 kHz
3. The terminals CME and COM are short

connected through J3 before delivery.
NO contact of
R03A
relay 3
NC contact of
R03B
relay 3
1. Contact capacity: 3A/AC 250 V, 1 A/DC
Relay Common contact 30 V
RO3C
output of relay 3 2. Do not use them as high-frequency
digital outputs.
NO contact of
RO4A
relay 4
Common contact
RO4C
of relay 4
A.5 Function description of communication cards

A.5.1 Bluetooth communication card (EC-TX501) and WIFI communication card (EC-TX502)
The indicators and function buttons are described as follows:
Indicator/Button Name Function

No.
This indicator is on when the extension card is

establishing a connection with the control
Bluetooth/WIFI status
LED1/LED3 board; it blinks periodically after the extension
indicator
card is properly connected to the control board
(the period is 1s, on for 0.5s, and off for the
-457-
Indicator/Button Name Function

No.
other 0.5s); and it is off when the extension card

is disconnected from the control board.
This indicator is on when Bluetooth

Bluetooth communication is online and data exchange
LED2 communication status can be performed.
indicator It is off when Bluetooth communication is not in
the online state.
This indicator is on after the control board feeds

LED5 Power indicator
power to the Bluetooth card.
WIFI factory restoration It is restored to default values and returned to

SW1
button the local monitoring mode.
WIFI hardware reset

SW2 It is used to reboot the extension card.
button
The wireless communication card is especially useful for scenarios where you cannot directly use the
keypad to operate the VFD due to the restriction of the installation space. With a mobile app, you can
operate the VFD in a maximum distance of 30 m. You can choose a PCB antenna or an external
sucker antenna. If the VFD is located in an open space and is a molded case machine, you can use a
built-in PCB antenna; and if it is a sheet metal machine and located in a metal cabinet, you need to
use an external sucker antenna.
When installing a sucker antenna, install a wireless communication card on the VFD first, and then
lead the SMA connector of the sucker antenna into the VFD and screw it to CN2, as shown in the
following figure. Place the antenna base on the chassis and expose the upper part. Try to keep it
unblocked.
-458-
The wireless communication card must be used with the INVT VFD app. Scan the QR code of the
VFD nameplate to download it. For details, see the wireless communication card manual provided
with the extension card. The main interface is shown as follows.
-459-
A.5.2 PROFIBUS-DP communication card (EC-TX503)
CN1 is a 9-pin D-type connector, as shown in the following figure.
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Connector pin Description
1 - Unused
2 - Unused
3 B-Line Data+ (twisted pair 1)
4 RTS Request sending
5 GND_BUS Isolation ground
6 +5V BUS Isolated power supply of 5 V DC
7 - Unused
8 A-Line Data- (twisted pair 2)
9 - Unused
Housing SHLD PROFIBUS cable shield layer
+5V and GND_BUS are bus terminators. Some devices, such as the optical transceiver (RS485),
may need to obtain power through these pins.
On some devices, the transmission and receiving directions are determined by RTS. In normal
applications, only A-Line, B-Line, and the shield layer need to be used.
-460-
The indicators are described as follows:
Indicator No. Definition Function

establishing a connection with the control board;
it blinks periodically after the extension card is
LED1 State indicator properly connected to the control board (the
period is 1s, on for 0.5s, and off for the other
0.5s); and it is off when the extension card is
disconnected from the control board.
This indicator is on when the communication

card is online and data exchange can be
LED2 Online indicator performed.
It is off when the communication card is not in

the online state.

card is offline and data exchange cannot be
performed.
It blinks when the communication card is not in

the offline state.
It blinks at the frequency of 1 Hz when a

configuration error occurs: The length of the user
parameter data set during the initialization of the
communication card is different from that during
the network configuration.
LED3 Offline/Fault indicator
It blinks at the frequency of 2 Hz when user
parameter data is incorrect: The length or
content of the user parameter data set during the
initialization of the communication card is
different from that during the network
configuration.
It blinks at the frequency of 4 Hz when an error

occurs in the ASIC initialization of PROFIBUS
communication.
It is off when the diagnosis function is disabled.
LED4 Power indicator This indicator is on after the control board feeds
-461-
Indicator No. Definition Function
power to the communication card.
For details about the operation, see the Goodrive350 Series VFD Communication Extension Card
Operation Manual.
A.5.3 Ethernet communication card (EC- X504)
The EC-TX504 communication card adopts standard RJ45 terminals.

LED1 Status indicator properly connected to the control board (the
This indicator is on when the physical connection

between the extension card network interface
and upper computer network interface is
Network connection
LED2 successful.
status indicator
It is off when the physical connection between
the extension card network interface and upper
computer network interface fails.
This indicator is on when the physical connection

between the extension card network interface
Network
and upper computer network interface is
LED3 communication status
successful, and there is interaction between the
indicator
extension card and upper computer.
It is off when the physical connection between
-462-

the extension card network interface and upper
computer network interface is successful, but
there is no interaction between the extension
card and upper computer.
A.5.4 CANopen communication card (EC-TX505) and CAN master/slave control
communication card (EC-TX511)
EC-TX505/511 communication cards are user-friendly, adopting spring terminals.
3-pin spring terminal Pin Function Description

1 2 3 1 CANH CANopen bus high level signal
2 CANG CANopen bus shielding
3 CANL CANopen bus low level signal
The terminal resistor switch is described as follows:
Terminal resistor switch Position Function Description
CAN_H and CAN_L are not

Left OFF
connected to a terminal resistor.
CAN_H and CAN_L are connected to
Right ON
a terminal resistor of 120 Ω.

LED1 Status indicator
-463-

properly connected to the control board (the


card is in the working state.
It is off when a fault occurs. Check whether the

reset pin of the communication card and the
LED5 Running indicator power supply are properly connected.
It blinks when the communication card is in the

pre-operation state.
It blinks once when the communication card is in

the stopped state.
This indicator is on when the CAN controller bus

is off or a fault occurs on the VFD.
It is off when the communication card is in the

LED6 Error indicator working state.
It blinks when the address setting is incorrect.
It blinks once when a received frame is missed

or an error occurs during frame receiving.
For details, see the Goodrive350 Series VFD Communication Extension Card Operation Manual.
A.5.5 PROFINET communication card (EC-TX509)
The terminal CN2 adopts a standard RJ45 interface, where CN2 is the dual RJ45 interface, and these
-464-
two RJ45 interfaces are not distinguished from each other and are interchangeably swappable. They
are arranged as follows:
Pin Name Description

1 TX+ Transmit Data+
2 TX- Transmit Data-
3 RX+ Receive Data+
4 n/c Not connected
5 n/c Not connected
6 RX- Receive Data-
7 n/c Not connected
8 n/c Not connected
The PROFINET communication card has 9 indicators, of which LED1 is the power indicator, LED2–5
are the communication status indicators of the communication card, and LED6–9 are the status
indicators of the network port.
LED Color State Description
LED1 Green 3.3V power indicator
On No network connection
The connection to the network cable

between the Profinet controller is OK,
LED2 Blinking
Red but the communication is not
(Bus status indicator)
established.
Communication with the Profinet

Off
controller has been established
LED3 On Profinet diagnosis exists

Green
(System fault indicator) Off No Profinet diagnosis
On TPS-1 protocol stack has started

LED4
Green Blinking TPS-1 waits for MCU initialization
(Slave ready indicator)
Off TPS-1 protocol stack does not start
LED5 Manufacturer-specific - depending on

Green
(Maintenance status the characteristics of the device
-465-
LED Color State Description
indicator)
PROFINET communication card and

LED6/7 On PC/PLC have been connected via a
network cable
(Network port status Green
indicator) PROFINET communication card and
Off
PC/PLC have not been connected yet
LED8/9 PROFINET communication card and

Blinking
PC/PLC are communicating
(Network port
Green
communication PROFINET communication card and
Off
indicator) PC/PLC are not yet communicating
The electrical connection is described as follows:
The Profinet communication card adopts a standard RJ45 interface, which can be used in a linear
network topology and a star network topology. The linear network topology electrical connection
diagram is shown as follows.
Slave device 1 Slave device 2 Slave device n

Master
device
RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45
Linear network topology electrical connection diagram

Note: For the star network topology, you need to prepare Profinet switches.
The star network topology electrical connection diagram is shown as follows:
Slave device 1 Slave device 2 Slave device n

Master
device
RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45
Switch
-466-
A.6 Function description of PG extension cards

A.6.1 Sin/Cos PG card (EC-PG502)
The terminals are arrange as follows:
C1+ C1- D1+ D1-
PE AO+ BO+ ZO+ A1+ B1+ R1+ A2+ B2+ Z2+ PWR
GND AO- BO- ZO- A1- B1- R1- A2- B2- Z2- GND
Indicator
Name Function
No.

connection with the control board; it blinks periodically after
State the extension card is properly connected to the control board
LED1
indicator (the period is 1s, on for 0.5s, and off for the other 0.5s); and it
is off when the extension card is disconnected from the control
board.
Power This indicator is on after the control board feeds power to the
LED2
indicator PG card.
This indicator is off when A1 and B1 of the encoder are

Disconnection
LED3 disconnected; it blinks when C1 and D1 of the encoder are
indicator
disconnected; and it is on the encoder signals are normal.
-467-
EC-PG502 terminals are described as follows:
Signal Port Terminal function
Protective earth Connected to the ground to enhance

PE
terminal anti-interference performance.
PWR Voltage: 5 V ± 5%
Encoder power
GND Max. output current: 150 mA
A1+
A1-
B1+
B1- 1. Supporting Sin/Cos encoders
2. SINA/SINB/SINC/SIND 0.6–1.2Vpp; SINR

R1+
Encoder interface 0.2–0.85Vpp
R1-
3. Max. frequency response of A/B signals: 200 kHz
C1+ Max. frequency response of C/D signals: 1 kHz
C1-
D1+
D1-
A2+
A2-
B2+ 1. Differential input of 5 V

Pulse reference
B2- 2. Frequency response: 200 kHz
Z2+
Z2-
AO+
1. Differential output of 5 V
Frequency-divided
AO- 2. Supporting frequency division of 2N, which can be
output
set through P20.16 or P24.16; Max. output
BO+
-468-

PE
BO- frequency: 200 kHz
ZO+
ZO-
The following figure shows the external wiring of the PG card when it is used in combination with an
encoder without CD signals.
U
R U
V
S V M3~
W
T W
S1
FWD running
PWR
REV running S2 GND
S3 A1+
Fault reset
A1-
S4 B1+
HDIA B1-
R1+
HDIB PG
R1-
C1
COM
+
PW
C1-
+24V D1
+
PE D1-
AO+
AO-
pulse A A2+
BO+
A2-
BO- CNC
B2+
pulse B ZO+ PLC
B2-
ZO- Upper computer
Z2+
Z2-
encoder with CD signals.
-469-
U
R U
V
S V M3~
W
T W
S1
FWD running
PWR
S2
REV running GND
S3 A1+
Fault reset
A1-
S4 B1+
HDIA B1-
R1+
HDIB PG
R1-
C1
COM
+
PW
C1-
+24V D1
+
PE D1-
AO+
AO-
pulse A A2+
BO+
A2-
BO- CNC
B2+
pulse B ZO+ PLC
B2-
ZO- Upper computer
Z2+
Z2-
A.6.2 UVW incremental PG card (EC-PG503-05)
The terminals are arrange as follows:
A2+ A2- B2+ B2- Z2+ Z2-

PE AO+ BO+ ZO+ A1+ B1+ Z1+ U+ V+ W+ PWR
GND AO- BO- ZO- A1- B1- Z1- U- V- W- PGND
-470-

establishing a connection with the control board; it
blinks periodically after the extension card is
LED1 State indicator properly connected to the control board (the
This indicator is off when A1 and B1 of the

LED2 Disconnection indicator encoder is disconnected; and it is on when the
pulses are normal.

power to the PG card.
The EC-PG503-05 extension card supports the input of absolute position signals and integrates the
advantages of absolute and incremental encoders. It is user-friendly, adopting spring terminals.
EC-PG503-05 terminals are described as follows:

PE
GND Ground Ground of the PCB internal power.
PWR Voltage: 5 V±5%
Encoder power Max. current: 200 mA
PGND
(PGND is the isolation power ground.)
A1+
A1-
B1+ 1. Differential incremental PG interface of 5 V
Encoder interface
B1- 2. Response frequency: 400 kHz
Z1+
Z1-
A2+
1. Differential input of 5 V
A2- Pulse reference
B2+ 2. Response frequency: 200 kHz
-471-

B2-
Z2+
Z2-
AO+
AO-
BO+ Frequency-divided
BO- output 2. Supporting frequency division of 1–255, which
ZO+ can be set through P20.16 or P24.16
ZO-
U+
U-
1. Absolute position (UVW information) of the
V+ UVWEncoder
hybrid encoder, differential input of 5 V
V- interface
W+ 2. Response frequency: 40 kHz
W-
The following figure shows the external wiring of the EC-PG503-05 extension card.
U
R U
V
S V M3~
W
T W
S1
FWD running
PWR
S2
REV running PGND
S3 A1+
Fault reset
A1-
S4 B1+
HDIA B1-
Z1+
HDIB PG
Z1-
COM U+
PW
U-
+24V V+
PE V-
W+
W-
AO+
AO-
A2+
BO+
pulse A A2-
BO- CNC
B2+
ZO+ PLC
pulse B B2-
ZO- Upper computer
Z2+
Z2-
-472-
A.6.3 Resolver PG card (EC-PG504-00)
PE AO+ BO+ ZO+ EX+ SI+ CO+ A2+ B2+ Z2+ PWR
GND AO- BO- ZO- EX- SI- CO- A2- B2- Z2- GND

This indicator is off when the encoder is

disconnected; it is on when the encoder signals
LED2 Disconnection indicator
are normal; and it blinks when the encoder signals
are not stable.

The EC-PG504-00 extension card can be used in combination with a resolver of excitation voltage 7
Vrms. It is user-friendly, adopting spring terminals.

PE
PWR Output power Voltage: 5V±5%
-473-

GND
SI+
SI-
Encoder signal input Recommended resolver transformation ratio: 0.5
CO+
CO-
EX+ 1. Factory setting of excitation: 10 kHz
Encoder excitation
EX- signal 2. Supporting resolvers with an excitation voltage
of 7 Vrms
A2+
A2-
B2+ 1. Differential input of 5 V
Pulse reference
B2- 2. Response frequency: 200 kHz
Z2+
Z2-
AO+ 1. Differential output of 5 V
AO-
2. Frequency-divided output of resolver simulated
BO+
Frequency-divided A1, B1, and Z1, equal to an incremental PG card
BO-
output of 1024 PPR, supporting frequency division of 2N,
ZO+
which can be set through P20.16 or P24.16; Max.
ZO- output frequency: 200 kHz
The following figure shows the external wiring of the EC-PG504-00 extension card.
-474-
U
R U
V
S V M3~
W
T W
S1
FWD running
S2
REV running
S3
Fault reset
SI+
S4
SI-
HDIA
CO+
HDIB PG
CO-
COM EX+
PW
EX-
+24V
PE
AO+
AO-
pulse A A2+
BO+
A2-
BO- CNC
B2+
pulse B ZO+ PLC
B2-
ZO- Upper computer
Z2+
Z2-
A.6.4 Multifunction incremental PG card (EC-PG505-12)
The dual in-line package (DIP) switch SW1 is used to set the voltage class (5 V or 12 V) of the power
supply of the encoder. The DIP switch can be operated with an auxiliary tool.
PE AO+ BO+ ZO+ A1+ B1+ Z1+ A2+ B2+ Z2+ PWR
GND AO- BO- ZO- A1- B1- Z1- A2- B2- Z2- PGND
-475-

period is 1s, on for 0.5s, and off for the other 0.5s);
and it is off when the extension card is
This indicator is off when A1 and B1 of the

Disconnection
LED2 encoder is disconnected; and it is on when the
indicator
pulses are normal.

The EC-PG505-12 extension card can be used in combination with multiple types of incremental
encoders through different modes of wiring. It is user-friendly, adopting spring terminals.
EC-PG505-12 terminal function description

Protective earth Connected to the ground to enhance anti-interference
PE
terminal performance.
PWR Voltage: 5V/12V ± 5%
Max. current: 150 mA

Encoder power The voltage class can be selected through SW1,
PGND
depending on the encoder voltage class.
A1+
A1- 1. Supporting push-pull interfaces of 5 V/12 V
B1+ 2. Supporting open collector interfaces of 5 V/12 V

Encoder interface
B1- 3. Supporting differential interfaces of 5 V
Z1+
4. Response frequency: 200 kHz
Z1-
-476-

A2+
A2-
1. Supporting the same signal types as the encoder
B2+
Pulse reference signal types
B2-
Z2+ 2. Response frequency: 200 kHz
Z2-
AO+
AO-
BO+ Frequency-divided
BO- output 2. Supporting frequency division of 1–255, which can
ZO+ be set through P20.16 or P24.16
ZO-
The following figure shows the external wiring of the extension card used in combination with an open
collector encoder. A pull-up resistor is configured inside the PG card.
U
R U
V
S V M3~
W
T W
S1
FWD running SW1
PWR
S2 5V 12V
REV running
PGND
S3
Fault reset A
A1+
S4
A1-
HDIA B PG
B1+
HDIB
B1-
Z
COM Z1+
PW
Z1-
+24V
PE
AO+
AO-
pulse A A2+
BO+
A2-
BO- CNC
B2+
pulse B ZO+ PLC
B2-
ZO- Upper computer
Z2+
Z2-
-477-
VCC PWR
0V PGND
PWR
A A+
A-
PW
0V R
B B+
B-
PW
R
0V
Z Z+
Z-
0V
PE
The following figure shows the external wiring of the extension card used in combination with a
push-pull encoder.
U
R U
V
S V M3~
W
T W
S1
FWD running SW1
PWR
S2 5V 12V
REV running
PGND
S3
Fault reset
A1+
S4 A
A1-
HDIA PG
B1+
HDIB B
B1-
COM Z1+
PW
Z
Z1-
+24V
PE
AO+
AO-
pulse A A2+
BO+
A2-
BO- CNC
B2+
pulse B ZO+ PLC
B2-
ZO- Upper computer
Z2+
Z2-
-478-
VCC PWR
0V PGND
PWR
A+
VCC
A A-
PWR
0V
B+
VCC
B B-
PWR
0V Z+
VCC
Z Z-
0V
PE
The following figure shows the external wiring of the extension card used in combination with a
differential encoder.
U
R U
V M3~
S V
W
T W
S1
FWD running SW1
PWR
S2 5V 12V
REV running
PGND
S3
Fault reset
A1+
S4
A1-
HDIA PG
B1+
HDIB
B1-
COM Z1+
PW
Z1-
+24V
PE
AO+
AO-
pulse A A2+
BO+
A2-
BO- CNC
B2+
pulse B ZO+ PLC
B2-
ZO- Upper computer
Z2+
Z2-
-479-
Use the shielded
cable
Differential PG
output VCC PWR card
0V PGND
PWR
A+ A+
A- A-
PWR
Differential
encoder B+ B+
B- B-
PWR
Z+ Z+
Z- Z-
PE
A.6.5 Simplified incremental PG card (EC-PG507-12)
The DIP switch SW1 is used to set the voltage class (5 V or 12 V) of the power supply of the encoder.
The DIP switch can be operated with an auxiliary tool.
PE A1+ B1+ Z1+ PWR

PGND A1- B1- Z1- PGND
Indicator
Name Function
No.

Status the extension card is properly connected to the control board
LED1
board.
Disconnection This indicator is off when A1 and B1 of the encoder are

LED2
indicator disconnected; it is on when the encoder pulses are normal.
-480-
Indicator
Name Function
No.
LED3
indicator PG card.
EC-PG507-12 can work in combination with multiple types of incremental encoders through various
external wiring modes, which are similar to the wiring modes of EC-PG505-12.

Protective earth Connected to the ground to enhance anti-interference
PE
terminal performance.
PWR Voltage: 5V/12V ± 5%
Max. current: 150 mA

Encoder power The voltage class can be selected through SW1,
PGND
depending on the encoder voltage class.
A1+ 1. Supporting push-pull interfaces of 5 V/12 V
A1-
2. Supporting open collector interfaces of 5 V/12 V
B1+ Encoder
B1- interface 3. Supporting differential interfaces of 5 V
Z1+ 4. Response frequency: 400 kHz

Z1- 5. Support the encoder cable length of up to 50 m
A.6.6 24V simplified incremental PG card (EC-PG507-24)
PE A1+ B1+ Z1+ PWR

PGND A1- B1- Z1- PGND
-481-
Indicator
Name Function
No.

Status the extension card is properly connected to the control board
LED1
board.
Disconnection This indicator is off when A1 and B1 of the encoder are

LED2
indicator disconnected; it is on when the encoder pulses are normal
LED3
indicator PG card.
EC-PG505-24 can work in combination with multiple types of incremental encoders through various
external wiring modes. It is user-friendly, adopting spring terminals.

PE
PWR Voltage: 24V ± 5%
Encoder power Max. current: 150 mA
PGND
A1+
A1- 1. Supporting push-pull interfaces of 24V
B1+ 2. Supporting open collector interfaces of 24V
B1- Encoder interface
3. Supporting differential interfaces of 24V
Z1+
4. Response frequency: 200 kHz
Z1-
5. Support the encoder cable length of up to 50m
Z2-
open-drain collector encoder. A pull-up resistor is configured in the PG card.
-482-
U
R U
V
S V M3~
W
T W
S1
FWD running
PWR
S2
REV running
PGND
S3
Fault reset A
A1+
S4
A1-
HDIA B PG
B1+
HDIB
B1-
Z
COM Z1+
PW
Z1-
+24V
PE
AO
pulse A A2+
BO
A2-
CNC
B2+
pulse B ZO PLC
B2-
Upper computer
Z2+
Z2-
Use the shielded cable
Open collector
PG card
output VCC PWR
0V PGND
PWR
A A+
A-
PWR
0V
B B+
Open collector
encoder
B-
PWR
0V
Z Z+
Z-
0V
PE
The following figure shows the external wiring of the PG card when it is used in combination with a
push-pull encoder.
-483-
U
R U
V
S V M3~
W
T W
S1
FWD running
PWR
S2
REV running
PGND
S3
Fault reset
A1+
S4 A
A1-
HDIA PG
B1+
HDIB B
B1-
COM Z1+
PW
Z
Z1-
+24V
PE
AO
pulse A A2+
BO
A2-
CNC
B2+
pulse B ZO PLC
B2-
Upper computer
Z2+
Z2-
Push-pull
PG card
output VCC PWR
0V PGND
PWR
A+
VCC
A A-
PWR
0V
B+
VCC
Push-pull
encoder B B-
PWR
0V Z+
VCC
Z Z-
0V
PE
The following figure shows the external wiring of the PG card when it is used in combination with a
differential encoder.
-484-
U
R U
V M3~
S V
W
T W
S1
FWD running
PWR
S2
REV running
PGND
S3
Fault reset
A1+
S4
A1-
HDIA PG
B1+
HDIB
B1-
COM Z1+
PW
Z1-
+24V
PE
AO+
AO-
pulse A A2+
BO+
A2-
BO- CNC
B2+
pulse B ZO+ PLC
B2-
ZO- Upper computer
Z2+
Z2-
Differential
VCC PG card
output
0V
PWR
A+ A+
Differential A- A-
encoder
PWR
B+ B+
B- B-
PWR
Z+ Z+
Z- Z-
PE
-485-
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Technical data
Appendix B Technical data

B.1 What this chapter contains
This chapter describes the technical data of the VFD and its compliance to CE and other quality
certification systems.
B.2 Derated application
B.2.1 Capacity
Choose a VFD model based on the rated current and power of the motor. To ensure the rated power
of the motor, the rated output current of the VFD must be greater or equal to the rated current of the
motor. The rated power of the VFD must be higher or equal to that of the motor.
Note:
 The maximum allowable shaft power of the motor is limited to 1.5 times the rated power of the
motor. If the limit is exceeded, the VFD automatically restricts the torque and current of the motor.
This function effectively protect the input shaft against overload.
 The rated capacity is the capacity at the ambient temperature of 40°C.
 You need to check and ensure that the power flowing through the common DC connection in the
common DC system does not exceed the rated power of the motor.
B.2.2 Derating
If the ambient temperature on the site where the VFD is installed exceeds 40°C, the altitude exceeds
1000 m, or the switching frequency is changed from 4 kHz to 8, 12, or 15 kHz, the VFD needs to be
derated.
B.2.2.1 Derating due to temperature
When the temperature ranges from +40°C to +50°C, the rated output current is derated by 1% for
each increased 1°C. For the actual derating, see the following figure.
Derating coefficient (%)
100
90
80
60
40
20
Temperature (℃)
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Note: It is not recommended to use the VFD at a temperature higher than 50°C. If you do, you shall
be held accountable for the consequences caused.
B.2.2.2 Derating due to altitude
When the altitude of the site where the VFD is installed is lower than 1000 m, the VFD can run at the
-486-
rated power. When the altitude exceeds 1000m, derate by 1% for every increase of 100m. When the
altitude exceeds 3000m, consult the local INVT dealer or local INVT office for details.
B.2.2.3 Derating due to carrier frequency

The power of Goodrive350-19 series VFDs varies according to carrier frequencies. The VFD rated
power is defined based on the carrier frequency set in factory. If the carrier frequency exceeds the
factory setting, the power of the VFD is derated by 10% for each increased 1 kHz.
B.3 Grid specifications
AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%)
Grid voltage
AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%)
According to the definition in IEC 60439-1, the maximum allowable short-circuit
Short-circuit current at the incoming end is 100 kA. Therefore, the VFD is applicable to
capacity scenarios where the transmitted current in the circuit is no larger than 100 kA
when the VFD runs at the maximum rated voltage.
Frequency 50/60 Hz ± 5%, with a maximum change rate of 20%/s
B.4 Motor connection data
Asynchronous induction motor or permanent magnetic

Motor type
synchronous motor
0–U1 (rated voltage of the motor), 3PH symmetrical, Umax (rated

Voltage
voltage of the VFD) at the field-weakening point
The short-circuit protection for the motor output meets the

Short-circuit protection
requirements of IEC 61800-5-1.
Frequency 0–400 Hz
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz
Current See the rated current.
Power limit 1.5 times of the rated power of the motor
Field-weakening point 10–400 Hz
Carrier frequency 4, 8, 12, or 15 kHz
B.4.1 EMC compatibility and motor cable length

The following table describes the maximum motor cable lengths that meet the requirements of the EU
EMC directive (2004/108/EC) when the carrier frequency is 4 kHz.
-487-
All models (with external EMC filters) Maximum motor cable length (m)
Environment category II (C3) 30
Environment category I (C2) 30
You can learn the maximum length of the motor cable through the running parameters of the VFD. To
understand the accurate maximum cable length for using an external EMC filter, contact the local
INVT office.
For description about the environments categories I (C2) and II (C3), see section "EMC regulations".
B.5 Application standards
The following table describes the standards that the VFDs comply with.
Safety of machinery––Safety-related parts of control systems––Part

EN/ISO 13849-1:2008
1: General principles for design
Safety of machinery––Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1:

IEC/EN 60204-1:2006
General requirements
Safety of machinery––Safety-related functional safety of electrical,

IEC/EN 62061:2005
electronic, and programmable electronic control systems
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems––Part 3:EMC

IEC/EN 61800-3:2004
requirements and specific test methods
IEC/EN Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems––Part 5-1: Safety

61800-5-1:2007 requirements—Electrical, thermal and energy
IEC/EN Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems––Part 5-2: Safety

61800-5-2:2007 requirements––Function
General-purpose variable-frequency adjustable-speed equipment of

GB/T 30844.1-2014
1 kV and lower—Part 1: Technical conditions
GB/T 30844.2-2014
1 kV and lower—Part 2: Test methods
GB/T 30844.3-2017
1 kV and lower—Part 3: Safety regulations
B.5.1 CE marking
The CE marking on the VFD nameplate indicates that the VFD is CE-compliant, meeting the
regulations of the European low-voltage directive (2006/95/EC) and EMC directive (2004/108/EC).
-488-
B.5.2 EMC compliance declaration
European union (EU) stipulates that the electric and electrical devices sold in Europe cannot generate
electromagnetic disturbance that exceeds the limits stipulated in related standards, and can work
properly in environments with certain electromagnetic interference. The EMC product standard (EN
61800-3:2004) describes the EMC standards and specific test methods for adjustable speed
electrical power drive systems. Products must strictly follow these EMC regulations.
B.6 EMC regulations
The EMC product standard (EN 61800-3:2004) describes the EMC requirements on VFDs.
Application environment categories
Category I: Civilian environments, including application scenarios where VFDs are directly connected
to the civil power supply low-voltage grids without intermediate transformers
Category II: All environments except those in Category I.
VFD categories
C1: Rated voltage lower than 1000 V, applied to environments of Category I.
C2: Rated voltage lower than 1000 V, non-plug, socket, or mobile devices; power drive systems that
must be installed and operated by specialized personnel when applied to environments of Category I
Note: The EMC standard IEC/EN 61800-3 no longer restricts the power distribution of VFDs, but it
specifies their use, installation, and commissioning. Specialized personnel or organizations must
have the necessary skills (including the EMC-related knowledge) for installing and/or performing
commissioning on the electrical drive systems.
C3: Rated voltage lower than 1000 V, applied to environments of Category II. They cannot be applied
to environments of Category I.
C4: Rated voltage higher than 1000 V, or rated current higher or equal to 400 A, applied to complex
systems in environments of Category II.
B.6.1 VFD category of C2
The induction disturbance limit meets the following stipulations:
1. Select an optional EMC filter according to Appendix D and install it following the description in the
EMC filter manual.
2. Select the motor and control cables according to the description in the manual.
3. Install the VFD according to the description in the manual.
4. For the maximum length of the motor cable when the switching frequency is 4 kHz, see section
"EMC compatibility and motor cable length".
 Currently in environments in China, the VFD may generate radio

interference, you need to take measures to reduce the interference.
-489-
B.6.2 VFD category of C3

The anti-interference performance of the VFD meets the requirements of environments Category II in
the IEC/EN 61800-3 standard.
The induction disturbance limit meets the following stipulations:
1. Select an optional EMC filter according to Appendix D and install it following the description in the
EMC filter manual.
2. Select the motor and control cables according to the description in the manual.
3. Install the VFD according to the description in the manual.
4. For the maximum length of the motor cable when the switching frequency is 4 kHz, see section
"EMC compatibility and motor cable length".
 VFDs of C3 category cannot be applied to civilian low-voltage common grids.

When applied to such grids, the VFD may generate radio frequency
electromagnetic interference.
-490-
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Dimensional drawings
Appendix C Dimensional drawings

C.1 What this chapter contains
This chapter describes the dimension drawings of Goodrive350-19 series VFD. The dimension unit
used in the drawings is mm.
C.2 LED keypad
C.2.1 Structural diagram
Keypad outline Panel Keypad
2-M3x10 Assembly screw
Opening sizes for installing the keypad without a braket
C.2.2 Keypad installation bracket
Note: You can directly use M3 threaded screws or an installation bracket to externally connect the
keypad to the VFD. The installation bracket is optional for 380V 1.5–30 kW VFD models and 500V
4–18.5 kW VFD models. The installation bracket is a standard part for 380V 37–500 kW VFD models,
500V 22–500 kW VFD models, and all 660V VFD models.
Keypad installation bracket Installation dimensions
Figure C.1 (Optional) Installation bracket for 380V 1.5–315kW and 660V 22–630kW models
-491-
Keypad installation bracket Installation dimensions
Figure C.2 (Standard) Installation bracket for 380V 37–315kW and 660V 22–630kW models
C.3 LCD keypad
C.3.1 Structural diagram
2-M3*8 Tapping
Keypad outline Panel Keypad
screw
28.5
71.3 2.5
16.8
2- ø4
109.3
109.3
19
56
19 20.4
34.4
6.7
58
71.3
Opening sizes for installing the keypad without a bracket
Figure C.3 Keypad structure

C.3.2 Keypad installation bracket
Note: You can directly use M3 threaded screws or an installation bracket to externally connect the
keypad to the VFD. The installation bracket is optional for 380V 1.5–30 75 VFD models. The
installation bracket is also optional for 380V 90–500 kW VFD models and 660V 22–630kW VFD
models but the keypads for these models can be externally mounted.
-492-
140 103 98
115
4-R12
Keypad installation bracket
Installation dimensions
Figure C.4 (Optional) Installation bracket for 380V 1.5–500kW and 660V 22–630kW models
C.4 VFD structure
Figure C.5 VFD structure
-493-
C.5 AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%) VFD dimensions

C.5.1 Wall-mounting dimensions
W1 D1 W2
H1 H2
Figure C.6 380V 1.5–37kW VFD wall mounting diagram
Outline dimensions Hole distance Hole Net Gross

VFD model (mm) (mm) diameter Screw weight weight
W1 H1 D1 W2 H2 (mm) (kg) (kg)
1.5kW–2.2kW 126 186 185 115 175 5 M4 2 3
4kW–5.5kW 126 186 201 115 175 5 M4 2.5 3.5
7.5kW 146 256 192 131 243.5 6 M5 3 4
11kW–15kW 170 320 220 151 303.5 6 M5 6 7
18.5kW–22kW 200 340.6 208 185 328.6 6 M5 8.5 10.5
30kW–37kW 250 400 223 230 380 6 M5 16 17
-494-
W1 D1
W2
H1 H2
W3
Figure C.7 380V 45–75kW VFD wall mounting diagram
Outline dimensions Hole Net Gross

Hole distance (mm)
VFD model (mm) diameter Screw weight weight
W1 H1 D1 W2 W3 H2 (mm) (kg) (kg)
45kW–75kW 282 560 258 160 226 542 9 M8 25 29
W1 D1
W2
H1 H2

W1 H1 D1 W2 H2 (mm) (kg) (kg)
90kW–110kW 338 554 330 200 535 10 M8 41 52
-495-
W1 D1 W2 W2
6- ø11.0
H1
H2

W1 H1 D1 W2 H2 (mm) (kg) (kg)
132kW–200kW 500 870 360 180 850 11 M10 85 110
W1 D1 W2 W2
6- ø13.0
H1 H2

W1 H1 D1 W2 H2 (mm) (kg) (kg)
220kW–315kW 680 960 380 230 926 13 M12 135 165
-496-
C.5.2 Flange installation dimensions
W1 D1
W2 D2 W3
W2 H4
W4
H1 H2
H3 H2
Figure C.11 380V 1.5–75kW VFD flange installation diagram
Outline Mount Screw

Hole distance Hole Net Gross
dimensions dimensions
VFD model (mm) diameter weight weight
(mm) (mm)
(mm) (kg) (kg)
W1 H1 D1 W2 H2 D2 W3 H3 W4 H4
1.5kW–2.2kW 150.2 234 185 115 220 65.5 130 190 7.5 13.5 5 M4 2 3
4kW–5.5kW 150.2 234 201 115 220 83 130 190 7.5 13.5 5 M4 2.5 3.5
7.5kW 170.2 292 192 131 276 84.5 150 260 9.5 6 6 M5 3 4
11kW–15kW 191.2 370 220 151 351 113 174 324 11.5 12 6 M5 6 7
18.5kW–22kW 266 371 208 250 250 104 224 350.6 13 20.3 6 M5 8.5 10.5
30kW–37kW 316 430 223 300 300 118.3 274 410 13 55 6 M5 16 17
45kW–75kW 352 580 258 332 400 133.8 306 570 12 80 9 M8 25 29
-497-
W1 D1 W2
W2 D2 W4 W3
98.0 H4
H1 H2 H2
H3
Figure C.12 380V 90–110kW VFD flange installation diagram
Outline Mount
VFD dimensions dimensions
(mm) diameter Screw weight weight
model (mm) (mm)
(mm) (kg) (kg)
W1 H1 D1 W2 H2 D2 H3 W4 H4
90kW–
418.5 600 330 389.5 370 149.5 559 14.2 108.5 10 M8 41 52
110kW
W3
W1 D1 W4 W2 W2
W2 W2 D2
H4
H1 H2 H2 H3
Outline Mount
(mm) (mm)
(mm) (kg) (kg)
W1 H1 D1 W2 H2 D2 W3 H3 W4 H4
132kW–200kW 500 870 360 180 850 178.5 480 796 60 37 11 M10 85 110
-498-
C.5.3 Floor installation dimensions
W4 D1
W2 W2 3- ø13.0
W1
W3
D2
D2
H1 H2
6- ø12.0
Figure C.14 380V 220–315kW VFD floor installation diagram
Outline Mount dimensions Hole Net Gross

VFD model dimensions (mm) (mm) diameter Screw weight weight
W1 H1 D1 W4 W2 W3 H2 D2 (mm) (kg) (kg)
M12/
220kW–315kW 750 1410 380 680 230 714 1390 150 13/12 135 165
M10
-499-
W1 D1
W2 W2
3- ø22.0
W3
D2
H1 H2
6- ø12.0
D2
Outline
Mount dimensions Hole Net Gross
dimensions
(mm)
(mm) (kg) (kg)
W1 H1 D1 W2 W3 H2 D2
M20/
355kW–500kW 620 1700 560 230 572 1678 240 22/12 350 407
M10
-500-
C.6 AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%) VFD dimensions

C.6.1 Wall-mounting dimensions
W1 D1
W2
H1 H2
Figure C.16 660V 22–132kW VFD wall-mounting diagram

Mount
dimensions
(mm)
(mm) (kg) (kg)
W1 H1 D1 W2 H2
22kW–45kW 270 555 325 130 540 7 M6 30 32
55kW–132kW 325 680 365 200 661 9.5 M8 47 67
W1 D1 W2 W2
6- ø11.0
H1
H2
Mount
dimensions
(mm)
(mm) (kg) (kg)
W1 H1 D1 W2 H2
160kW–220kW 500 870 360 180 850 11 M10 85 110
-501-
W1 D1 W2 W2
6- ø13.0
H1 H2
Mount
dimensions
(mm)
(mm) (kg) (kg)
W1 H1 D1 W2 H2
250kW–355kW 680 960 380 230 926 13 M12 135 165
C.6.2 Flange installation dimensions
W1 D1 W2
W2 D2 W4 W3
98.0 H4
H1 H2 H2
H3
Outline Mount
(mm) (mm)
(mm) (kg) (kg)
W1 H1 D1 W2 H2 D2 W3 H3 W4 H4
22kW–45kW 270 555 325 130 540 167 261 516 65.5 17 7 M6 30 32
55kW–132kW 325 680 363 200 661 182 317 626 58.5 23 9.5 M8 47 67
-502-
W3
W1 D1 W4 W2 W2
W2 W2 D2
H4
H1 H2 H2 H3
Outline Mount
(mm) (mm)
(mm) (kg) (kg)
W1 H1 D1 W2 H2 D2 W3 H3 W4 H4
160kW–220kW 500 870 358 180 850 178.5 480 796 60 37 11 M10 85 110
C.6.3 Floor installation dimensions

W4 D1
W2 W2 3- ø13.0
W1
W3
D2
D2
H1 H2
6- ø12.0
Outline dimensions Mount dimensions Hole Screw Net Gross

VFD model (mm) (mm) diameter weight weight
W1 H1 D1 W4 W2 W3 H2 D2 (mm) (kg) (kg)
250kW–355kW 750 1410 380 680 230 714 1390 150 13/12 M12/M10 135 165
-503-
W1 D1
W2 W2
3- ø22.0
W3
D2
H1 H2
6- ø12.0
D2
Outline
Mount dimensions Hole Net Gross
dimensions
(mm)
(mm) (kg) (kg)
W1 H1 D1 W2 W3 H2 D2
400kW–630kW 620 1700 560 230 572 1678 240 22/12 M20/M10 350 407
-504-
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Optional peripheral accessories
Appendix D Optional peripheral accessories

D.1 What this chapter contains
This chapter describes how to select optional accessories of Goodrive350-19 series VFDs.
D.2 Wiring of peripheral accessories
The following figure shows the external wiring of Goodrive350-19 series VFD.
LCD keypad LED keypad Upper computer

software
485+ RS485
– RS232
Optional Standard 485- adapter
Computer
Power
supply
- +
BP +
Breaker P1
+
DC reactor
Input reactor
Braking Regeneration
Braking unit Buffering unit unit
resistor
Ground
Input filter
Output filter
Output reactor
Motor
Ground
Note:
 The 380V 110kW and lower VFD models are equipped with built-in braking units.
 The 380V 18.5–110kW VFD models are equipped with built-in DC reactors.
 P1 terminals are equipped for the 380V 132 kW and higher VFD models and therefore these VFD
models can be directly connected to external DC reactors.
 P1 terminals are equipped for 660V VFD models and therefore these VFD models can be directly
connected to external DC reactors.
 The braking units are INVT DBU series standard braking units. For details, see the DBU
-505-
operation manual.
Image Name Description
Cable Accessory for signal transmission
Device for electric shock prevention and protection

against short-to-ground that may cause current
leakage and fire. Select residual-current circuit
Breaker breakers (RCCBs) that are applicable to VFDs and
can restrict high-order harmonics, and of which the
rated sensitive current for one VFD is larger than 30
mA.
Accessories used to improve the current adjustment

Input reactor
coefficient on the input side of the VFD, and thus
restrict high-order harmonic currents.
Reactors have been built in the 380V 18.5–110kW

VFD models as standard configuration.
DC reactor
The 380V, 132kW or higher VFD models and 660V
models can be directly connected to external DC
reactors.
Accessory that restricts the electromagnetic

interference generated by the VFD and transmitted to
Input filter
the public grid through the power cable. Try to install
the input filter near the input terminal side of the VFD.
Accessories used to consume the regenerative

energy of the motor to reduce the deceleration time.
The 380V 37kW and lower VFD models need only to

Braking unit or be configured with braking resistors, in addition to
braking resistor which the 380V 132kW and higher VFD models and
or
660V models also need to be configured with braking
units, and the 380V 45–110kW VFD models can be
configured with optional built-in braking units.
Accessory used to restrict interference generated in

the wiring area on the output side of the VFD. Try to
Output filter
install the output filter near the output terminal side of
the VFD.
-506-
Image Name Description
Accessory used to lengthen the valid transmission

distance of the VFD, which effectively restrict the
Output reactor
transient high voltage generated during the switch-on
and switch-off of the IGBT module of the VFD.
D.3 LCD keypad

You can configure the LCD keypad and LCD keypad installation bracket (which are optional parts) for
the VFD.
Item Model Oder No.

LCD keypad KEY-LCD01-ZY-350 11022-00118
Bracket GD350 compatible keypad bracket 19005-00149
3 m keypad cable Keypad cable; L=3M(CHV-SE) 37005-00022
D.4 Power supply
See "Installing".
 Ensure that the voltage class of the VFD is consistent with that of the grid.
D.5 Cables
D.5.1 Power cables
The sizes of the input power cables and motor cables must meet the local regulation.
• The input power cables and motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding load currents.
• The maximum temperature margin of the motor cables in continuous operation cannot be lower
than 70°C.
• The conductivity of the PE grounding conductor is the same as that of the phase conductor, that
is, the cross-sectional areas are the same. For VFD models of higher than 30kW, the cross
sectional area of the PE grounding conductor can be slightly less than the recommended area.
• For details about the EMC requirements, see Appendix B "Technical data."
To meet the EMC requirements stipulated in the CE standards, you must use symmetrical shielded
cables as motor cables (as shown in the following figure).
Four-core cables can be used as input cables, but symmetrical shielded cables are recommended.
Compared with four-core cables, symmetrical shielded cables can reduce electromagnetic radiation
as well as the current and loss of the motor cables.
-507-
Symmetrical shielded cable -

Four-core cable
PE conductor and
shield layer Shield layer
Conductor
Conductor
Conductor Jacket
Jacket Jacket PE
PE Insulator
Insulator Insulator
Note: If the conductivity of the shield layer of the motor cables cannot meet the requirements,
separate PE conductors must be used.
To protect the conductors, the cross-sectional area of the shielded cables must be the same as that of
the phase conductors if the cable and conductor are made of materials of the same type. This
reduces grounding resistance, and thus improves impedance continuity.
To effectively restrict the emission and conduction of radio frequency (RF) interference, the
conductivity of the shielded cable must at least be 1/10 of the conductivity of the phase conductor.
This requirement can be well met by a copper or aluminum shield layer. The following figure shows
the minimum requirement on motor cables of a VFD. The cable must consist of a layer of
spiral-shaped copper strips. The denser the shield layer is, the more effectively the electromagnetic
interference is restricted.
Insulating layer Shield layer
Cross-section of the cable
D.5.2 Control cables

All analog control cables and cables used for frequency input must be shielded cables. Analog signal
cables need to be double-shielded twisted-pair cables (as shown in figure a). Use one separate
shielded twisted pair for each signal. Do not use the same ground wire for different analog signals.
Multiple double-shielded twisted-pair cables Multiple single-shielded twisted-pair cables
Power cable arrangement
For low-voltage digital signals, double-shielded cables are recommended, but shielded or unshielded
twisted pairs (as shown in figure b) also can be used. For frequency signals, however, only shielded
cables can be used.
-508-
Relay cables need to be those with metal braided shield layers.
Keypads need to be connected by using network cables. In complicated electromagnetic

environments, shielded network cables are recommended.
Note: Analog signals and digital signals cannot use the same cables, and their cables must be
arranged separately.
Do not perform any voltage endurance or insulation resistance tests, such as high-voltage insulation
tests or using a megameter to measure the insulation resistance, on the VFD or its components.
Insulation and voltage endurance tests have been performed between the main circuit and chassis of
each VFD before delivery. In addition, voltage limiting circuits that can automatically cut off the test
voltage are configured inside the VFDs.
Note: Check the insulation conditions of the VFD input power cable according to the local regulations
before connecting it.
D.5.3 Recommended cable sizes
Table D.1 AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%)
Recommended
cable size Connectable cable size (mm2) Terminal Tightening
2
VFD model (mm ) screw torque
RST RST P1 PB specs. (Nm)
PE PE
UVW UVW (+) (+), (-)
GD350-19-1R5G-4-B 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5
GD350-19-2R2G-4-B 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5
GD350-19-004G-4-B 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5
GD350-19-5R5G-4-B 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5
GD350-19-7R5G-4-B 4 4 2.5~6 4~6 4~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5
GD350-19-011G-4-B 6 6 4~10 4~10 4~10 4~10 M5 2.3
GD350-19-015G-4-B 6 6 4~10 4~10 4~10 4~10 M5 2.3
GD350-19-018G-4-B 10 10 10~16 10~16 10~16 10~16 M5 2.3
GD350-19-022G-4-B 16 16 10~16 10~16 10~16 10~16 M5 2.3
GD350-19-030G-4-B 25 16 25~50 25~50 25~50 16~25 M6 2.5
GD350-19-037G-4-B 25 16 25~50 25~50 25~50 16~25 M6 2.5
GD350-19-045G-4-B 35 16 35~70 35~70 35~70 16~35 M8 10
GD350-19-055G-4-B 50 25 35~70 35~70 35~70 16~35 M8 10
GD350-19-075G-4-B 70 35 35~70 35~70 35~70 16~35 M8 10
GD350-19-090G-4-B 95 50 70~120 70~120 70~120 50~70 M12 35
-509-
Recommended
cable size Connectable cable size (mm2) Terminal Tightening
2
VFD model (mm ) screw torque
RST RST P1 PB specs. (Nm)
PE PE
UVW UVW (+) (+), (-)
GD350-19-110G-4-B 120 70 70~120 70~120 70~120 50~70 M12 35
GD350-19-132G-4 185 95 95~300 95~300 95~300 95~240
GD350-19-160G-4 240 120 95~300 95~300 95~300 120~240
GD350-19-185G-4 95*2P 95 95~150 70~150 70~150 35~95
95*2P 95*2P 95*2P
GD350-19-200G-4 95*2P 120 120~240
~150*2P ~150*2P ~150*2P
95*2P 95*2P 95*2P
GD350-19-220G-4 150*2P 150 150~240
~150*2P ~150*2P ~150*2P
95*4P 95*4P 95*4P 95*2P
GD350-19-250G-4 95*4P 95*2P
~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*2P Terminals use nuts,
95*4P 95*4P 95*4P 95*2P and therefore you are
GD350-19-280G-4 95*4P 95*2P
~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*2P recommended to use a
95*4P 95*4P 95*4P 95*2P wrench or sleeve.
GD350-19-315G-4 95*4P 95*4P
~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*2P
95*4P 95*4P 95*4P 95*2P
GD350-19-355G-4 95*4P 95*4P
~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*2P
95*4P 95*4P 95*4P 95*2P
GD350-19-400G-4 150*4P 150*2P
~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*2P
95*4P 95*4P 95*4P 95*2P
GD350-19-450G-4 150*4P 150*2P
~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*2P
95*4P 95*4P 95*4P 95*2P
GD350-19-500G-4 150*4P 150*2P
~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*2P
Note:
 Cables of the sizes recommended for the main circuit can be used in scenarios where the
ambient temperature is lower than 40°C, the wiring distance is shorter than 100 m, and the
current is the rated current.
 The terminals P1, (+), PB, and (-) are used to connect to DC reactors and braking accessories.
-510-
Table D.2 AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%)
Recommended
Connectable cable size (mm2) Terminal Tightening
cable size (mm2)
VFD model screw torque
RST RST P1 PB
PE PE specs. (Nm)
UVW UVW (+) (+), (-)
GD350-19-022G-6 10 10 10~16 6~16 6~10 10~16 M8 9~11
GD350-19-030G-6 10 10 10~16 6~16 6~10 10~16 M8 9~11
GD350-19-037G-6 16 16 16~25 16~25 6~10 16~25 M8 9~11
GD350-19-045G-6 16 16 16~25 16~35 16~25 16~25 M8 9~11
GD350-19-055G-6 25 16 16~25 16~35 16~25 16~25 M10 18~23
GD350-19-075G-6 35 16 35~50 25~50 25~50 16~50 M10 18~23
GD350-19-090G-6 35 16 35~50 25~50 25~50 16~50 M10 18~23
GD350-19-110G-6 50 25 50~95 50~95 25~95 25~95 M10 18~23
GD350-19-132G-6 70 35 70~95 70~95 25~95 35~95 M10 18~23
GD350-19-160G-6 95 50 95~150 95~150 25~150 50~150
GD350-19-185G-6 95 50 95~150 95~150 25~150 50~150
GD350-19-200G-6 120 70 120~300 120~300 35~300 70~240
GD350-19-220G-6 185 95 120~300 120~300 35~300 95~240
GD350-19-250G-6 185 95 185~300 185~300 35~300 95~240
GD350-19-280G-6 240 120 240~300 240~300 70~300 120~240
95*2P 95*2P 95*2P
GD350-19-315G-6 95*2P 120 120~300 Terminals use nuts,
~150*2P ~150*2P ~150*2P
and therefore you
95*2P 95*2P 95*2P
GD350-19-355G-6 95*2P 150 150~300 are recommended to
~150*2P ~150*2P ~150*2P
use a wrench or
150*2P 95*2P 95*2P
GD350-19-400G-6 150*2P 150 150~300 sleeve.
~300*2P ~150*2P ~150*2P
95*4P 95*4P 95*4P 95*2P
GD350-19-450G-6 95*4P 95*2P
~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*2P
95*4P 95*4P 95*4P 95*2P
GD350-19-500G-6 95*4P 95*2P
~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*2P
95*4P 95*4P 95*4P 95*4P
GD350-19-560G-6 95*4P 95*4P
~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P ~150*4P
-511-
Recommended
Connectable cable size (mm2) Terminal Tightening
cable size (mm2)
VFD model screw torque
RST RST P1 PB
PE PE specs. (Nm)
UVW UVW (+) (+), (-)
150*4P 150*4P 150*4P 150*4P
GD350-19-630G-6 150*4P 150*2P
~300*4P ~300*4P ~300*4P ~240*4P
Note:
 Cables of the sizes recommended for the main circuit can be used in scenarios where the
ambient temperature is lower than 40°C, the wiring distance is shorter than 100 m, and the
current is the rated current.
 The terminals P1, (+), PB, and (-) are used to connect to DC reactors and braking accessories.
D.5.4 Cable arrangement
Motor cables must be arranged away from other cables. The motor cables of several VFDs can be
arranged in parallel. It is recommended that you arrange the motor cables, input power cables, and
control cables separately in different trays. The output dU/dt of the VFDs may increase
electromagnetic interference on other cables. Do not arrange other cables and the motor cables in
parallel.
If a control cable and power cable must cross each other, ensure that the angle between them is 90
degrees.
The cable trays must be connected properly and well grounded. Aluminum trays can implement local
equipotential.
The following figure shows the cable arrangement distance requirements.
Motor cable
Min. distance:
Power cable 300 mm
Input power cable Motor cable

Min. distance:
200 mm Min. distance: 500 mm
Control cable Control cable
Cable arrangement distances
D.5.5 Insulation inspection

Check the motor and the motor cable insulation conditions before running the motor.
1. Ensure that the motor cable is connected to the motor, and then remove the motor cable from the
U, V, and W output terminals of the VFD.
-512-
2. Use a megameter of 500 V DC to measure the insulation resistance between each phase
conductor and the protection grounding conductor. For details about the insulation resistance of
the motor, see the description provided by the manufacturer.
Note: The insulation resistance is reduced if it is damp inside the motor. If it may be damp, you
need to dry the motor and then measure the insulation resistance again.
D.6 Breakers and electromagnetic contactors
You need to add a fuse to prevent overload.
You need to configure a manually manipulated molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) between the AC
power supply and VFD. The breaker must be locked in the open state to facilitate installation and
inspection. The capacity of the breaker needs to be 1.5 to 2 times the rated current of the VFD.
 According to the working principle and structure of breakers, if the

manufacturer's regulation is not followed, hot ionized gases may escape
from the breaker enclosure when a short-circuit occurs. To ensure safe use,
exercise extra caution when installing and placing the breaker. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
To ensure safety, you can configure an electromagnetic contactor on the input side to control the
switch-on and switch-off of the main circuit power, so that the input power supply of the VFD can be
effectively cut off when a system fault occurs.
Table D.3 AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%)
Breaker Contactor rated current

VFD model Fuse (A)
(A) (A)
GD350-19-1R5G-4-B 15 16 10
GD350-19-2R2G-4-B 17.4 16 10
GD350-19-004G-4-B 30 25 16
GD350-19-5R5G-4-B 45 25 16
GD350-19-7R5G-4-B 60 40 25
GD350-19-011G-4-B 78 63 32
GD350-19-015G-4-B 105 63 50
GD350-19-018G-4-B 114 100 63
GD350-19-022G-4-B 138 100 80
GD350-19-030G-4-B 186 125 95
GD350-19-037G-4-B 228 160 120
GD350-19-045G-4-B 270 200 135
GD350-19-055G-4-B 315 200 170
GD350-19-075G-4-B 420 250 230
GD350-19-090G-4-B 480 315 280
-513-

VFD model Fuse (A)
(A) (A)
GD350-19-110G-4-B 630 400 315
GD350-19-132G-4 720 400 380
GD350-19-160G-4 870 630 450
GD350-19-185G-4 1110 630 580
GD350-19-200G-4 1110 630 580
GD350-19-220G-4 1230 800 630
GD350-19-250G-4 1380 800 700
GD350-19-280G-4 1500 1000 780
GD350-19-315G-4 1740 1200 900
GD350-19-355G-4 1860 1280 960
GD350-19-400G-4 2010 1380 1035
GD350-19-450G-4 2445 1630 1222
GD350-19-500G-4 2505 1720 1290
Note: The accessory specifications described in the preceding table are ideal values. You can select
accessories based on the actual market conditions, but try not to use those with lower values.
Table D.4 AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%)

VFD model Fuse (A)
(A) (A)
GD350-19-022G-6 105 63 50
GD350-19-030G-6 105 63 50
GD350-19-037G-6 114 100 63
GD350-19-045G-6 138 100 80
GD350-19-055G-6 186 125 95
GD350-19-075G-6 270 200 135
GD350-19-090G-6 270 200 135
GD350-19-110G-6 315 200 170
GD350-19-132G-6 420 250 230
GD350-19-160G-6 480 315 280
GD350-19-185G-6 480 315 280
GD350-19-200G-6 630 400 315
GD350-19-220G-6 720 400 380
GD350-19-250G-6 720 400 380
GD350-19-280G-6 870 630 450
-514-

VFD model Fuse (A)
(A) (A)
GD350-19-315G-6 1110 630 580
GD350-19-355G-6 1110 630 580
GD350-19-400G-6 1230 800 630
GD350-19-450G-6 1470 960 735
GD350-19-500G-6 1500 1000 780
GD350-19-560G-6 1740 1200 900
GD350-19-630G-6 2010 1380 1035
Note: The accessory specifications described in the preceding table are ideal values. You can select
accessories based on the actual market conditions, but try not to use those with lower values.
D.7 Reactors
When the grid voltage is high, the transient large current that flows into the input power circuit may
damage rectifier components. You need to configure an AC reactor on the input side, which can also
improve the current adjustment coefficient on the input side.
When the distance between the VFD and motor is longer than 50 m, the parasitic capacitance
between the long cable and ground may cause large leakage current, and overcurrent protection of
the VFD may be frequently triggered. To prevent this from happening and avoid damage to the motor
insulator, compensation must be made by adding an output reactor. When a VFD is used to drive
multiple motors, take the total length of the motor cables (that is, sum of the lengths of the motor
cables) into account. When the total length is longer than 50 m, an output reactor must be added on
the output side of the VFD. If the distance between the VFD and motor is 50 m to 100 m, select the
reactor according to the following table. If the distance is longer than 100 m, contact INVT technical
support.
External DC reactors can be connected to VFDs of 380 V 132 kW or higher, and of 660V series. DC
reactors can improve the power factor, avoid damage to bridge rectifiers caused due to large input
current of the VFD when large-capacity transformers are connected, and also avoid damage to the
rectification circuit caused due to harmonics generated by grid voltage transients or phase-control
loads.
-515-
Input reactor DC reactor Output reactor
Table D.5 Reactor model selection for AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%) VFD models
VFD model Input reactor DC reactor Output reactor
GD350-19-1R5G-4-B ACL2-1R5-4 / OCL2-1R5-4

GD350-19-2R2G-4-B ACL2-2R2-4 / OCL2-2R2-4
GD350-19-004G-4-B ACL2-004-4 / OCL2-004-4
GD350-19-5R5G-4-B ACL2-5R5-4 / OCL2-5R5-4
GD350-19-7R5G-4-B ACL2-7R5-4 / OCL2-7R5-4
GD350-19-011G-4-B ACL2-011-4 / OCL2-011-4
GD350-19-015G-4-B ACL2-015-4 / OCL2-015-4
GD350-19-018G-4-B ACL2-018-4 / OCL2-018-4
GD350-19-022G-4-B ACL2-022-4 / OCL2-022-4
GD350-19-030G-4-B ACL2-037-4 / OCL2-037-4
GD350-19-037G-4-B ACL2-037-4 / OCL2-037-4
GD350-19-045G-4-B ACL2-045-4 / OCL2-045-4
GD350-19-055G-4-B ACL2-055-4 / OCL2-055-4
GD350-19-075G-4-B ACL2-075-4 / OCL2-075-4
GD350-19-090G-4-B ACL2-110-4 / OCL2-110-4
GD350-19-110G-4-B ACL2-110-4 / OCL2-110-4
GD350-19-132G-4 ACL2-160-4 DCL2-132-4 OCL2-200-4
GD350-19-160G-4 ACL2-160-4 DCL2-160-4 OCL2-200-4
GD350-19-185G-4 ACL2-200-4 DCL2-200-4 OCL2-200-4
GD350-19-200G-4 ACL2-200-4 DCL2-220-4 OCL2-200-4
GD350-19-220G-4 ACL2-280-4 DCL2-280-4 OCL2-280-4
GD350-19-250G-4 ACL2-280-4 DCL2-280-4 OCL2-280-4
GD350-19-280G-4 ACL2-280-4 DCL2-280-4 OCL2-280-4
GD350-19-315G-4 ACL2-350-4 DCL2-315-4 OCL2-350-4
-516-
GD350-19-355G-4 Standard part DCL2-400-4 OCL2-350-4

Note:
 The rated input voltage drop of input reactors is 2%±15%.
 The current adjustment coefficient on the input side of the VFD is higher than 90% after a DC
reactor is configured.
 The rated output voltage drop of output reactors is 1%±15%.
 The preceding table lists external accessories. You need to specify the ones you choose when
purchasing accessories.
Table D.6 Reactor model selection for AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%) VFD models
GD350-19-022G-6 ACL2-030-6 DCL2-030-6 OCL2-030-6

GD350-19-030G-6 ACL2-030-6 DCL2-030-6 OCL2-030-6
GD350-19-037G-6 ACL2-055-6 DCL2-055-6 OCL2-055-6
GD350-19-045G-6 ACL2-055-6 DCL2-055-6 OCL2-055-6
GD350-19-055G-6 ACL2-055-6 DCL2-055-6 OCL2-055-6
GD350-19-075G-6 ACL2-110-6 DCL2-110-6 OCL2-110-6
GD350-19-090G-6 ACL2-110-6 DCL2-110-6 OCL2-110-6
GD350-19-110G-6 ACL2-110-6 DCL2-110-6 OCL2-110-6
GD350-19-132G-6 ACL2-185-6 DCL2-185-6 OCL2-185-6
GD350-19-160G-6 ACL2-185-6 DCL2-185-6 OCL2-185-6
GD350-19-185G-6 ACL2-185-6 DCL2-185-6 OCL2-185-6
GD350-19-200G-6 ACL2-250-6 DCL2-250-6 OCL2-250-6
GD350-19-220G-6 ACL2-250-6 DCL2-250-6 OCL2-250-6
GD350-19-250G-6 ACL2-250-6 DCL2-250-6 OCL2-250-6
GD350-19-280G-6 ACL2-350-6 DCL2-350-6 OCL2-350-6
GD350-19-315G-6 ACL2-350-6 DCL2-350-6 OCL2-350-6
GD350-19-355G-6 ACL2-350-6 DCL2-350-6 OCL2-350-6
-517-
Note:
 The rated input voltage drop of input reactors is 2%±15%.
 The current adjustment coefficient on the input side of the VFD is higher than 90% after a DC
reactor is configured.
 The rated output voltage drop of output reactors is 1%±15%.
D.8 Filters
J10 is not connected in factory for the 380V 110kW and lower VFD models. Connect the J10
packaged with the manual if the requirements of level C3 need to be met.
J10 is connected in factory for the 380V 132kW and higher VFD models, all of which meet the
requirements of level C3.
Note:
Disconnect J10 in the following situations:
 The EMC filter is applicable to the neutral-grounded grid system. If it is used for the IT grid
system (that is, non-neutral grounded grid system), disconnect J10.
 If leakage protection occurs during configuration of a residual-current circuit breaker, disconnect

J10.
J10
Note: Do not connect C3 filters in IT power systems.
Interference filters on the input side can reduce the interference of VFDs (when used) on the
surrounding devices.
Noise filters on the output side can decrease the radio noise caused by the cables between VFDs and
motors and the leakage current of conducting wires.
-518-
INVT provides filters for you to choose.

D.8.1 Filter model description
FLT - P 04 045 L - B
A B C D E F
Field Description
A FLT: Name of the VFD filter series
Filter type
B P: Power input filter
L: Output filter
Voltage class
C 04: AC 3PH 380V (-15%)–440V (+10%)
06: AC 3PH 520V (-15%)–690V (+10%)
3-digit code indicating the rated current. For example, 015 indicates
D
15 A.
Filter performance
E L: General
H: High-performance
Filter application environment
A: Environment Category I, C1 (EN 61800-3:2004)

F
B: Environment Category I, C2 (EN 61800-3:2004)
C: Environment Category II, C3 (EN 61800-3:2004)
D.8.2 Filter models
Table D.7 AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%)
VFD model Input filter Output filter
GD350-19-1R5G-4-B
FLT-P04006L-B FLT-L04006L-B
GD350-19-2R2G-4-B
GD350-19-004G-4-B
GD350-19-5R5G-4-B
GD350-19-7R5G-4-B FLT-P04032L-B FLT-L04032L-B
-519-
GD350-19-011G-4-B
GD350-19-015G-4-B
GD350-19-018G-4-B
GD350-19-022G-4-B
GD350-19-030G-4-B
GD350-19-037G-4-B
GD350-19-045G-4-B
GD350-19-055G-4-B
GD350-19-075G-4-B
GD350-19-090G-4-B
GD350-19-110G-4-B FLT-P04240L-B FLT-L04240L-B
GD350-19-132G-4
GD350-19-160G-4
GD350-19-185G-4 FLT-P04400L-B FLT-L04400L-B
GD350-19-200G-4
GD350-19-220G-4
GD350-19-280G-4
GD350-19-315G-4
GD350-19-400G-4
GD350-19-450G-4
GD350-19-500G-4
Note:
 The input EMI meets the C2 requirements after an input filter is configured.
Table D.8 AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%)
GD350-19-022G-6
GD350-19-030G-6 FLT-P06050H-B FLT-L06050H-B
GD350-19-037G-6
GD350-19-045G-6
FLT-P06100H-B FLT-L06100H-B
GD350-19-055G-6
-520-
GD350-19-075G-6
GD350-19-090G-6
GD350-19-110G-6
GD350-19-132G-6
GD350-19-160G-6
GD350-19-185G-6
GD350-19-200G-6
GD350-19-220G-6
GD350-19-250G-6
GD350-19-280G-6
GD350-19-315G-6
GD350-19-355G-6
GD350-19-400G-6
GD350-19-450G-6
GD350-19-500G-6 FLT-P061000H-B FLT-L061000H-B
GD350-19-560G-6
GD350-19-630G-6
Note:
 The input EMI meets the C2 requirements after an input filter is configured.
D.9 Braking system
D.9.1 Braking component selection
When the VFD driving a high-inertia load decelerates or needs to decelerate abruptly, the motor runs
in the power generation state and transmits the load-carrying energy to the DC circuit of the VFD,
causing the bus voltage of the VFD to rise. If the bus voltage exceeds a specific value, the VFD
reports an overvoltage fault. To prevent this from happening, you need to configure braking
components.
 The design, installation, commissioning, and operation of the device must

be performed by trained and qualified professionals.
 Follow all the "Warning" instructions during the operation. Otherwise, major
physical injuries or property loss may be caused.
-521-
 Only qualified electricians are allowed to perform the wiring. Otherwise,

damage to the VFD or brake components may be caused.
 Read the braking resistor or unit instructions carefully before connecting

them to the VFD.
 Connect braking resistors only to the terminals PB and (+), and braking
units only to the terminals (+) and (-). Do not connect them to other terminals.
Otherwise, damage to the brake circuit and VFD and fire may be caused.
 Connect the brake components to the VFD according to the wiring diagram.
If the wiring is not properly performed, damage to the VFD or other devices
may be caused.
The 380V 110kW and lower VFD models are equipped with built-in braking units, and the 380V
132kW and higher VFD models need to be configured with external braking units. Select braking
resistors according to the actual situation.
Table D.9 Braking unit models for AC 3PH 380V(-15%)–440V(+10%) VFD models
Braking unit Braking resistor
Recommended
Rated Resistance Recommended Min.
VFD model Max. peak min. power in
continuous applicable to min. power in allowable
Model braking horizontal
braking 100% braking lifting resistance
current (A) moving
current (A) torque (Ω) (kW) (Ω)
(kW)
GD350-19-1R5G-4-B 4 4.8 326 ≥0.75 ≥0.4 170
GD350-19-2R2G-4-B 5.4 6.5 222 ≥1.1 ≥0.5 130
GD350-19-004G-4-B 8.8 10.5 122 ≥2 ≥1 80
GD350-19-5R5G-4-B 11.6 14 89 ≥2.8 ≥1.4 60
GD350-19-7R5G-4-B 14.9 17.8 65 ≥3.8 ≥1.9 47
GD350-19-011G-4-B 22.6 27 44 ≥5.5 ≥2.8 31
GD350-19-015G-4-B 30.4 36.5 32 ≥7.5 ≥3.8 23

Built-in
GD350-19-018G-4-B braking 36.8 44.2 27 ≥9 ≥4.5 19
unit
GD350-19-022G-4-B 41 49.4 22 ≥11 ≥5.5 17
GD350-19-030G-4-B 54 65 17 ≥15 ≥7.5 13
GD350-19-037G-4-B 63.6 76.4 13 ≥18.5 ≥9 11
GD350-19-045G-4-B 80 96 10 ≥22.5 ≥11 8.8
GD350-19-055G-4-B 100 120 8 ≥27.5 ≥13 7
GD350-19-075G-4-B 110 132 6.5 ≥37 ≥18 6.4
GD350-19-090G-4-B 160 190 5.4 ≥45 ≥22 4.4
-522-
Braking unit Braking resistor
Recommended
Rated Resistance Recommended Min.
VFD model Max. peak min. power in
continuous applicable to min. power in allowable
Model braking horizontal
braking 100% braking lifting resistance
current (A) moving
current (A) torque (Ω) (kW) (Ω)
(kW)
GD350-19-110G-4-B 220 260 4.5 ≥55 ≥27 3.2
GD350-19-132G-4 DBU100H-220-4 3.7 ≥66 ≥33 3.2
GD350-19-160G-4 3.1 ≥80 ≥40
GD350-19-185G-4 DBU100H-320-4 2.8 ≥92 ≥46 2.2
GD350-19-200G-4 2.5 ≥100 ≥50
GD350-19-220G-4 2.2 ≥110 ≥55

DBU100H-400-4 1.8
GD350-19-250G-4 2 ≥125 ≥62
GD350-19-280G-4 3.6*2 ≥70*2 ≥35*2
GD350-19-315G-4 3.2*2 ≥80*2 ≥40*2

Two DBU100H-320-4 2.2*2
GD350-19-355G-4 2.8*2 ≥90*2 ≥45*2
GD350-19-400G-4 2.4*2 ≥100*2 ≥50*2
GD350-19-450G-4
Two DBU100H-400-4 2.0*2 ≥125*2 ≥62*2 1.8*2
GD350-19-500G-4
Note:
 Select braking resistors according to the resistance and power data provided by our company,
but the resistance cannot be less than the min. allowable resistance in the table. Otherwise,
braking units may be damaged. In addition to the motor electricity generation power, braking
resistors are related to inertia, DEC time, and potential energy, that is, greater inertia, shorter
DEC time, and more frequent braking require braking resistors with higher power and smaller
resistance.
 When grid voltages are different, you can adjust energy consumption braking threshold voltage.
For example, if the threshold voltage needs to be increased, you need to increase the braking
resistance.
 The recommended min. power of a braking resistor indicates the rated power of the resistor that
can run in a long period of time in nature cooling condition. If air cooling fans are used, the
braking resistance can be decreased slightly.
 When using an external braking unit, set the brake voltage class of the braking unit properly by
referring to the manual of the dynamic braking unit. If the voltage class is set incorrectly, the VFD
may not run properly.
 In hoisting applications, the resistor resistance needs to be less than the braking resistance
applicant to 100% torque but greater than the min. allowable resistance.
-523-
 Do not use braking resistors whose resistance is lower than the specified
minimum resistance for specific VFDs. VFDs do not provide protection
against overcurrent caused by resistors with low resistance.
The 660V VFD models need to be configured with external braking units. Select braking resistors
Table D.10 Braking unit models for AC 3PH 520V(-15%)–690V(+10%) VFD models
Resistance Recommended
Max. peak
Braking unit Rated continuous applicable to min. power in
VFD model braking current
model braking current (A) 100% braking lifting
(A)
torque (Ω) (kW)
GD350-19-022G-6 55 11 5.5
GD350-19-030G-6 40.3 15 7.5
GD350-19-037G-6 32.7 18.5 9
GD350-19-045G-6 26.9 23 11.5

DBU100H-110-6 10
GD350-19-055G-6 22 27.5 13.5
GD350-19-075G-6 16.1 37.5 19
GD350-19-090G-6 13.4 45 22
GD350-19-110G-6 11 55 27.5
GD350-19-132G-6 9.2 66 33
DBU100H-160-6 6.9
GD350-19-160G-6 7.6 80 40
GD350-19-185G-6 6.5 93 46
GD350-19-200G-6 DBU100H-220-6 6.1 100 50 5
GD350-19-220G-6 5.5 110 55
GD350-19-250G-6 4.8 125 62
GD350-19-280G-6 DBU100H-320-6 4.3 140 70 3.4
GD350-19-315G-6 3.8 158 78
GD350-19-355G-6 3.5 178 89

DBU100H-400-6 2.8
GD350-19-400G-6 3 200 100
GD350-19-450G-6
4.8*2 125*2 63*2
GD350-19-500G-6 两台
3.4*2
GD350-19-560G-6 DBU100H-320-6 4.3*2 140*2 70*2
GD350-19-630G-6 3.8*2 315*2 158*2
Note:
 Select braking resistors according to the resistance and power data provided by our company,
but the resistance cannot be less than the min. allowable resistance in the table. Otherwise,
braking units may be damaged. In addition to the motor electricity generation power, braking
resistors are related to inertia, DEC time, and potential energy, that is, greater inertia, shorter
-524-
DEC time, and more frequent braking require braking resistors with higher power and smaller
resistance.
 When grid voltages are different, you can adjust energy consumption braking threshold voltage.
For example, if the threshold voltage needs to be increased, you need to increase the braking
resistance.
 The recommended min. power of a braking resistor indicates the rated power of the resistor that
can run in a long period of time in nature cooling condition. If air cooling fans are used, the
braking resistance can be decreased slightly.
 When using an external braking unit, set the brake voltage class of the braking unit properly by
referring to the manual of the dynamic braking unit. If the voltage class is set incorrectly, the VFD
may not run properly.
 In hoisting applications, the resistor resistance needs to be less than the braking resistance
applicant to 100% torque but greater than the min. allowable resistance.
 Do not use braking resistors whose resistance is lower than the specified
minimum resistance for specific VFDs. VFDs do not provide protection
against overcurrent caused by resistors with low resistance.
D.9.2 Braking resistor cable selection

Braking resistor cables need to be shielded cables.
D.9.3 Braking resistor installation
All resistors need to be installed in places with good cooling conditions.
 The materials near the braking resistor or braking unit must be

non-flammable. The surface temperature of the resistor is high. Air flowing
from the resistor is of hundreds of degrees Celsius. Prevent any materials
from coming into contact with the resistor.
Installation of braking resistors
 The 380V 110 kW and lower VFD models need only external braking resistors.
 PB and (+) are the terminals for connecting braking resistors.
-525-
Goodrive350-19 External
braking
resistor
PB
Installation of braking units
 All the 660V VFD models need external braking units.
 (+) and (-) are the terminals for connecting braking units.
 The connection cables between the (+) and (-) terminals of a VFD and those
of a brake unit must be shorter than 5 m, and the connection cables between
the BR1 and BR2 terminals of a brake unit and the terminals of a brake
resistor must be shorter than 10 m.
The following figure shows the connection of one VFD to a dynamic braking unit.
Goodrive350-19 DBU braking

unit
(+) (-)
DC+ DC- BR1 BR2 (+) (-) PE
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
External braking resistor RB
-526-
D.10 Regenerative feedback unit

D.10.1 Installation wiring for regenerative feedback unit
R U
Input Input VFD
filter reactor
S
T
V
W
M
（+）（-）
Breaker recommended
IN+ IN-
RLY-1
BUB
RLY
Buffering unit
GND
OUT+ OUT-
T S R
（+）（-）
r
s
t RBU100H
Feedbac Regenerative
k reactor feedback unit
Note: For how to select input filter, input reactor, and feedback reactor models, see the RBU100H
regenerative feedback unit operation manual.
D.10.2 Regenerative feedback unit model selection
The following lists the mapping between the 380V VFD models, buffering unit models, and
regenerative feedback unit models.
VFD model Buffering unit Regenerative feedback unit

GD350-19-022G-4-B RBU100H-022-4
GD350-19-030G-4-B RBU100H-030-4
GD350-19-037G-4-B RBU100H-045-4
GD350-19-045G-4-B BUB-110-4 RBU100H-045-4
GD350-19-055G-4-B RBU100H-055-4
GD350-19-075G-4-B RBU100H-090-4
GD350-19-090G-4-B RBU100H-090-4
GD350-19-110G-4-B RBU100H-110-4
GD350-19-132G-4 RBU100H-132-4
BUB-250-4
GD350-19-160G-4 RBU100H-160-4
GD350-19-185G-4 RBU100H-200-4
GD350-19-200G-4 RBU100H-200-4
Two BUB-250-4
GD350-19-220G-4 RBU100H-250-4
-527-

GD350-19-250G-4 RBU100H-250-4
GD350-19-280G-4 Two RBU100H-160-4
GD350-19-315G-4 Two RBU100H-160-4
GD350-19-355G-4 Two RBU100H-200-4
GD350-19-400G-4 Two RBU100H-200-4
GD350-19-450G-4 Three BUB-250-4 Two RBU100H-250-4
GD350-19-500G-4 Two RBU100H-250-4
The following lists the mapping between the 660V VFD models, buffering unit models, and
regenerative feedback unit models.

GD350-19-022G-6 RBU100H-055-6
GD350-19-030G-6 RBU100H-055-6
GD350-19-037G-6 RBU100H-055-6
GD350-19-045G-6 RBU100H-055-6
GD350-19-055G-6 RBU100H-055-6
BUB-160-6
GD350-19-075G-6 RBU100H-090-6
GD350-19-090G-6 RBU100H-090-6
GD350-19-110G-6 RBU100H-160-6
GD350-19-132G-6 RBU100H-160-6
GD350-19-160G-6 RBU100H-160-6
GD350-19-185G-6 RBU100H-200-6
GD350-19-200G-6 RBU100H-200-6
GD350-19-220G-6 RBU100H-315-6
GD350-19-250G-6 BUB-400-6 RBU100H-315-6
GD350-19-280G-6 RBU100H-315-6
GD350-19-315G-6 RBU100H-315-6
GD350-19-355G-6 RBU100H-400-6
GD350-19-400G-6 RBU100H-400-6
GD350-19-450G-6 Two RBU100H-315-6
GD350-19-500G-6 Two BUB-400-6 Two RBU100H-315-6
GD350-19-560G-6 Two RBU100H-315-6
GD350-19-630G-6 Two RBU100H-315-6
Note: For details about how to use buffering units and regenerative feedback units, see the BUB
series buffering unit operation manual and RBU100H regenerative feedback unit operation manual.
-528-
Goodrive350-19 series VFD STO function description
Appendix E STO function description

Reference standards: IEC 61508-1, IEC 61508-2, IEC 61508-3, IEC 61508-4, IEC 62061, ISO
13849-1, and IEC 61800-5-2
You can enable the safe torque off (STO) function to prevent unexpected startup when the main
power supply of the drive is not switched off. The STO function switches off the drive output by turning
off the drive signals to prevent unexpected motor startup (see the following figure). After the STO
function is enabled, you can perform short-time operations (such as non-electrical cleaning in the
lathe industry) and maintain the non-electrical components of the device without powering off the
drive.
Switch, relay, etc.

+24V
H1
H2
COM
UDC+
Control
circuit PWM+
U/V/W
Drive
circuit
Note:
The contacts of the safety switch must be opened
PWM-
or closed within 250 ms; and the cable that
connects the VFD to the safety switch cannot be
longer than 25 m.
UDC-
E.1 STO function logic table

The following table describes the input states and corresponding faults of the STO function.
STO input state Corresponding fault

The STO function is triggered, and the drive stops running.
H1 and H2 opened
Fault code:
simultaneously
H1 and H2 closed The STO function is not triggered, and the drive runs
simultaneously properly.
The STL1, STL2, or STL3 fault occurs.
Fault code:
One of H1 and H2 opened, and
41: Channel H1 exception (STL1)
the other closed
42: Channel H2 exception (STL2)
43: Channel H1 and H2 exceptions (STL3)
E.2 STO channel delay description

The following table lists the trigger and instruction delay of the STO channels.
-529-
STO mode STO trigger delay and instruction delay 2

1
Trigger delay < 10 ms

STO fault: STL1
Instruction delay < 280 ms
STO fault: STL2
STO fault: STL3
STO fault: STO
1. STO trigger delay: Time interval between triggering the STO function and switching off the drive
output
2. STO instruction delay: Time interval between triggering the STO function and instructing STO
output status
E.3 STO function installation checklist
Before installing the STO function, check the items listed in the following table to ensure that the STO
function can be properly used.
Item
□ Ensure that the drive can be run or stopped randomly during commissioning.
Stop the drive (if it is running), disconnect the input power supply, and isolate the drive
□
from the power cable through the switch.
□ Check the STO circuit connection according to the circuit diagram.
Check whether the shield layer of the STO input cable is connected to the +24 V
□
reference ground COM.
□ Connect the power supply.
Test the STO function as follows after the motor stops running:
• If the drive is running, send a stop command to it and wait until the shaft of the
motor stops rotating.
□
• Activate the STO circuit and send a start command to the drive. Ensure that the
motor does not start.
• Deactivate the STO circuit.
□ Restart the drive, and check whether the motor is running properly.
□ Test the STO function as follows when the motor is running:
-530-
• Start the drive. Ensure that the motor is running properly.
• Activate the STO circuit.
• The drive reports an STO fault. Ensure that the motor coasts to stop rotating.
• Deactivate the STO circuit.
□ Restart the drive, and check whether the motor is running properly.
-531-
Goodrive350-19 series VFD Further information
Appendix F Further information

F.1 Product and service queries
If you have any queries about the product, contact the local INVT office. Provide the model and serial
number of the product you query about. You can visit www.invt.com to find a list of INVT offices.
F.2 Feedback on INVT VFD manuals
Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Visit www.invt.com, directly contact online service
personnel or choose Contact Us to obtain contact information.
F.3 Documents on the Internet
You can find manuals in the PDF format and other product documents on the Internet. Visit
www.invt.com and choose Service and Support > Data Download.
-532-
66001- 00663
202003 (V1.0)

GD350-19 Series VFD Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GD350-19 Series VFD Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GD350-19 Series VFD Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Goodrive350-19 series VFD Change history

No. Change description Version Release date

1. First release V1.0 March 2020

A.6 Function description of PG extension cards .................................................................... 467

Note: Actions taken to ensure proper running.

Symbol Name Description Abbreviation

Read manual Read the manual before operating.

Note Note Actions to ensure proper running. Note

1.4 Safety guidelines

VFD model Minimum waiting time

 Whether the packing box is damaged or dampened.

2.4 Environment checking

Figure 3.4 Main circuit diagram for 660V VFD models

 DC reactors have been built in the 18.5kW–110kW VFD models.

Settings can be implemented through digital, analog, pulse

Peripheral Four regular inputs; max. frequency: 1kHz; internal impedance:

One high-speed pulse output; max. frequency: 50kHz

Two programmable relay outputs

RO3A NO, RO3C common terminal

Contact capacity: 3A/250VAC, 1A/30VDC

Four regular inputs, supporting PTC input during DC power

Internal impedance: 6.6kΩ;

Supporting the voltage input of external power

Independent PT100 and PT1000 input:

Table 3.2 Dedicated functions

Function Control method

Function Control method

Model: GD350-19-037G-4-B IP20

S/N: Made in China

Figure 3.5 Product nameplate

No. Description Example

Table 3.4 AC 3PH 520V (-15%) – 690V (+10%)

Figure 3.7 Structural diagram

No. Part Description

The installation site must be:

 Away from electromagnetic radiation sources.

 Away from oil mist, corrosive gases and combustible gases.

 Away from radioactive substances and combustible objects.

 Away from harmful gases and liquids.

 With a low salt content density.

 Lower than 1000m.

 When the altitude exceeds 1000m, derate by 1% for every increase of

The VFD can be installed on the wall or in a cabinet.

a. Vertical installation b. Horizontal installation c. Lateral installation

Figure 4.1 VFD installation direction

Wall mounting Flange mounting

Figure 4.2 Installation methods

Step 2 Mount the screws or bolts onto the marked positions.

Step 3 Place the VFD against the wall.

Step 4 Fasten the screws on the wall.

Figure 4.3 Installing one VFD

Note: For clearances B and C, each must be 100mm at least.

Figure 4.4 Installing multiple VFDs side by side

 For clearances B, D, and C, each must be 100mm at least.

Figure 4.5 Vertical installation

Figure 4.6 Tilted installation

4.3 Main circuit standard wiring

 Braking resistor, braking unit and DC reactor are optional parts.

 "Not available" means this terminal is not for external connection.

4.3.3 Wiring procedure of the main circuit terminals